Remote Language Compatibility Measurement

Keysight X-Series
Signal Analyzer
This manual provides documentation for the following X-Series
Instruments:
PXA Signal Analyzer N9030A
MXA Signal Analyzer N9020A
EXA Signal Analyzer N9010A
EMI Receiver N9038A
N9061A Remote
Language
Compatibility
Measurement
Application
User's &
Programmer's
Reference
Notices
Copyright Notice
© Keysight Technologies 2017
No part of this manual may be reproduced in
any form or by any means (including
electronic storage and retrieval or
translation into a foreign language) without
prior agreement and written consent from
Keysight Technologies, Inc. as governed by
United States and international copyright
laws.
Trademarks
WiMAX and Mobile WiMAX are US
trademarks of the WiMAX Forum.
Manual Part Number
N9020-90119
Edition
Edition: 20, March 2017
Published in USA
Published by:
Keysight Technologies, Inc.
1400 Fountaingrove Parkway
Santa Rosa, CA 95403
Technology Licenses
The hardware and/or software described in
this document are furnished under a license
and may be used or copied only in
accordance with the terms of such license.
2
U.S. Government Rights
Warranty
The Software is “commercial computer
software,” as defined by Federal Acquisition
Regulation (“FAR”) 2.101. Pursuant to FAR
12.212 and 27.405-3 and Department of
Defense FAR Supplement (“DFARS”)
227.7202, the US government acquires
commercial computer software under the
same terms by which the software is
customarily provided to the public.
Accordingly, Keysight provides the Software
to US government customers under its
standard commercial license, which is
embodied in its End User License Agreement
(EULA), a copy of which can be found at
http://www.keysight.com/find/sweula. The
license set forth in the EULA represents the
exclusive authority by which the US
government may use, modify, distribute, or
disclose the Software. The EULA and the
license set forth therein, does not require or
permit, among other things, that Keysight:
(1) Furnish technical information related to
commercial computer software or
commercial computer software
documentation that is not customarily
provided to the public; or (2) Relinquish to,
or otherwise provide, the government rights
in excess of these rights customarily
provided to the public to use, modify,
reproduce, release, perform, display, or
disclose commercial computer software or
commercial computer software
documentation. No additional government
requirements beyond those set forth in the
EULA shall apply, except to the extent that
those terms, rights, or licenses are explicitly
required from all providers of commercial
computer software pursuant to the FAR and
the DFARS and are set forth specifically in
writing elsewhere in the EULA. Keysight shall
be under no obligation to update, revise or
otherwise modify the Software. With respect
to any technical data as defined by FAR
2.101, pursuant to FAR 12.211 and
27.404.2 and DFARS 227.7102, the US
government acquires no greater than
Limited Rights as defined in FAR 27.401 or
DFAR 227.7103-5 (c), as applicable in any
technical data.
THE MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS
DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED “AS IS,” AND IS
SUBJECT TO BEING CHANGED, WITHOUT
NOTICE, IN FUTURE EDITIONS. FURTHER,
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, KEYSIGHT DISCLAIMS
ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL
AND ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED
HEREIN, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. KEYSIGHT SHALL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS OR FOR
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE
FURNISHING, USE, OR PERFORMANCE OF
THIS DOCUMENT OR OF ANY
INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN.
SHOULD KEYSIGHT AND THE USER HAVE A
SEPARATE WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH
WARRANTY TERMS COVERING THE
MATERIAL IN THIS DOCUMENT THAT
CONFLICT WITH THESE TERMS, THE
WARRANTY TERMS IN THE SEPARATE
AGREEMENT SHALL CONTROL.
Safety Information
A CAUTION notice denotes a hazard. It calls
attention to an operating procedure,
practice, or the like that, if not correctly
performed or adhered to, could result in
damage to the product or loss of
important data. Do not proceed beyond a
CAUTION notice until the indicated
conditions are fully understood and met.
A WARNING notice denotes a hazard. It
calls attention to an operating procedure,
practice, or the like that, if not correctly
performed or adhered to, could result in
personal injury or death. Do not proceed
beyond a WARNING notice until the
indicated conditions are fully understood
and met.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Table Of Contents
N9061A Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application
User's & Programmer's Reference
1
Table Of Contents
3
1 About the Instrument
Installing Application Software
Viewing a License Key
Obtaining and Installing a License Key
Updating Measurement Application Software
X-Series Options and Accessories
Front & Rear Panel Features
Display Annotations
Window Control Keys
Multi-Window
Zoom
Next Window
Mouse and Keyboard Control
Right-Click
PC Keyboard
Instrument Security & Memory Volatility
2 About the N9061A Measurement Application
N9061A Application Description
Documentation for the N9061A application
Scope of this Document
Where to Obtain this Document
Instrument Updates
General Rules and Limitations
AC/DC Coupling
Couplings
Markers
Numeric Ranges
Parsing
Predefined Functions
Remote Control
Returning Data
Units
User-defined Functions
Supported Commands
EP Parameter
OA Parameter
Handling of Unsupported Commands and Queries
3
50
51
51
51
52
53
54
55
56
56
56
57
59
59
61
64
65
66
67
67
67
67
68
68
68
69
69
69
69
70
70
70
70
70
70
71
71
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Hardware and Firmware Requirements for N9061A
Installing the N9061A Application
Installation
Licensing
Verify the Installation
Setting up N9061A
Hints and Tips
Compatibility (Speed and Consistency)
Compatibility and Sweep Times
Timeout
Synchronization (1)
Synchronization (2)
Changing Modes
AC and DC Coupling
Service and Calibration
3 Programming the Instrument
What Programming Information is Available?
List of Supported SCPI Commands
*
I
S
IEEE 488.2 Common Commands
Identification Query
*RST (Remote Command Only)
Trigger
Wait-to-Continue
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Key to Table Columns "8566", "8568", and "8560 Series"
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
Command Syntax
Command Description Notes
A1 [one] (Clear Write for Trace A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
A2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
A3 [three] (View Mode for Trace A)
Syntax
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
72
74
74
74
74
76
77
77
77
77
77
77
77
78
79
80
81
82
82
82
82
84
84
84
85
85
86
87
88
122
123
125
126
126
126
126
127
127
127
127
128
128
4
Table Of Contents
Legacy Products
Description
A4 [four] (Blank Trace A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPALPHA (Adjacent Channel Power Alpha Weighting)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPALTCH (Adjacent Channel Power Alternate Channels)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPBRPER (Adjacent Channel Power Burst Period)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPBRWID (Adjacent Channel Power Burst Width)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPBW (Adjacent Channel Power Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPCOMPUTE (Adjacent Channel Power Compute)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPFRQWT (Adjacent Channel Power Frequency Weighting)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPLOWER (Lower Adjacent Channel Power)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPMAX (Maximum Adjacent Channel Power)
Syntax
Description
ACPMEAS (Measure Adjacent Channel Power)
Syntax
Legacy Products
5
128
128
129
129
129
129
130
130
130
130
131
131
131
131
132
132
132
132
133
133
133
133
134
134
134
134
135
135
135
135
136
136
136
136
137
137
137
137
138
138
138
139
139
139
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Description
ACPMSTATE (Adjacent Channel Power Measurement State)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPPWRTX (Adjacent Channel Power Total Power Transmitted)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPRSLTS (Adjacent Channel Power Measurement Results)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
Query Data Type Details
ACPSP (Adjacent Channel Power Channel Spacing)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPT (Adjacent Channel Power T Weighting)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPUPPER (Upper Adjacent Channel Power)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ADJALL (LO and IF Adjustments)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
AMB (A minus B into A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
AMBPL (A minus B plus Display Line into A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
AMPCOR
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
AMPCORCFGCNT
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
139
140
140
140
140
142
142
142
142
143
143
143
143
144
145
145
145
145
146
146
146
146
147
147
147
147
148
148
148
148
149
149
149
149
150
150
150
150
151
151
151
151
152
6
Table Of Contents
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
AMPCORCLEAR
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
AMPCORDATA
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
AMPCORRCL
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
AMPCORRESET
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
AMPCORSAVE
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
AMPCORSIZE
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ANNOT (Annotation)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
APB (Trace A Plus Trace B to A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
AT (Input Attenuation)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude Units)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
AUTOCPL (Auto Coupled)
7
152
152
152
153
153
153
153
154
154
154
154
155
155
155
155
156
156
156
156
157
157
157
157
158
158
158
158
159
159
159
159
160
160
160
160
161
161
161
161
163
163
163
163
165
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
AXB (Exchange Trace A and Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
B1 [one] (Clear Write for Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
B2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
B3 [three] (View Mode for Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
B4 [four] (Blank Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
BL (Trace B minus Display Line to Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
BLANK (Blank Trace)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
BML (Trace B Minus Display Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
BTC (Transfer Trace B to Trace C)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
BXC (Exchange Trace B and Trace C)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
165
165
165
166
166
166
166
167
167
167
167
168
168
168
168
169
169
169
169
170
170
170
170
171
171
171
171
172
172
172
172
173
173
173
173
174
174
174
174
175
175
175
175
8
Table Of Contents
C1 [one] (Set A Minus B Mode Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
C2 [two] (A Minus B Into A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
CA (Couple Attenuation)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
CARROFF (Carrier Off Power)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
CARRON (Carrier On Power)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
CF (Center Frequency)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
CHANNEL (Channel Selection)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
CHANPWR (Channel Power)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
CHPWRBW (Channel Power Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
CLRAVG (Clear Average)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
CLRW (Clear Write)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
9
176
176
176
176
177
177
177
177
178
178
178
178
179
179
179
179
180
180
180
180
181
181
181
181
183
183
183
183
184
184
184
184
185
185
185
185
186
186
186
186
187
187
187
187
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
CONTS (Continuous Sweep)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
COUPLE (Input Coupling)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
CR (Couple Resolution Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
CS (Couple Frequency Step Size)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
CT (Couple Sweep Time)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
CV (Couple Video Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
DA (Display Address)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
DELMKBW (Occupied Power Bandwidth Within Delta Marker)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
DET (Detection Mode)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
DL (Display Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
DLE (Display Line Enable)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
189
189
189
189
190
190
190
190
191
191
191
191
192
192
192
192
193
193
193
193
194
194
194
194
195
195
195
195
196
196
196
196
197
197
197
197
198
198
198
198
200
200
200
10
Table Of Contents
Description
DLYSWP (Delay Sweep)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
DONE (Done)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
DR (Display Read)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
E1[one] (Peak Marker)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
E2 [two] (Marker to Center Frequency)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
E3 [three] (Delta Marker Step Size)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
E4 [four] (Marker to Reference Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
EDITDONE (Edit Done)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
EDITLIML (Edit Limit Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ERR (Error)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ET (Elapsed Time)
Syntax
Legacy Products
11
200
201
201
201
201
202
202
202
202
203
203
203
203
204
204
204
204
205
205
205
205
206
206
206
206
207
207
207
207
208
208
208
208
209
209
209
209
210
210
210
210
214
214
214
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Description
EX (Exchange Trace A and Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
FA (Start Frequency)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
FB (Stop Frequency)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
FDSP (Frequency Display Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
FOFFSET (Frequency Offset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
FPKA (Fast Preselector Peak)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
FREF (Frequency Reference)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
FS (Full Span)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
GATE (Gate)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
GATECTL (Gate Control)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
GD (Gate Delay)
Syntax
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
214
215
215
215
215
216
216
216
216
218
218
218
218
220
220
220
220
221
221
221
221
223
223
223
223
224
224
224
224
225
225
225
225
228
228
228
228
229
229
229
229
230
230
12
Table Of Contents
Legacy Products
Description
GL (Gate Length)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
GP (Gate Polarity)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
GRAT (Graticule)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
HD (Hold Data Entry)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
I1 [one] (Set RF Coupling to DC)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
I2 [two] (Set RF Coupling to AC)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ID (Identify)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
IP (Instrument Preset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KS, (Mixer Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KS= (8566A/B: Automatic Preselector Tracking, 8568A/B: Marker Counter
Resolution)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KS( (Lock Registers)
13
230
230
231
231
231
231
232
232
232
232
233
233
233
233
234
234
234
234
235
235
235
235
237
237
237
237
239
239
239
239
240
240
240
240
241
241
241
241
242
242
242
242
243
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KS) (Unlock Registers)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSA (Amplitude in dBm)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSa (Normal Detection)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSB (Amplitude in dBmV)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSb (Positive Peak Detection)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSC (Amplitude in dBμV)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSc (A Plus B to A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSD (Amplitude in Volts)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSd (Negative Peak Detection)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSE (Title Mode)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
243
243
243
244
244
244
244
245
245
245
245
246
246
246
246
247
247
247
247
248
248
248
248
249
249
249
249
250
250
250
250
251
251
251
251
252
252
252
252
253
253
253
253
14
Table Of Contents
KSe (Sample Detection)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSG (Video Averaging On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSg (Display Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSH (Video Averaging Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSh (Display On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSI (Extend Reference Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSi (Exchange Trace B and Trace C)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSj (View Trace C)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSK (Marker to Next Peak)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSk (Blank Trace C)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSL (Marker Noise Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
15
254
254
254
254
255
255
255
255
256
256
256
256
257
257
257
257
258
258
258
258
259
259
259
259
260
260
260
260
261
261
261
261
262
262
262
262
263
263
263
263
264
264
264
264
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
KSl (Transfer Trace B to Trace C)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSM (Marker Noise On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSm (Graticule Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSN (Marker Minimum)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSn (Graticule On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSO (Marker Span)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSo (Annotation Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSP (GPIB Address)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSp (Annotation On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KST (Fast Preset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSV (Frequency Offset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
265
265
265
265
266
266
266
266
267
267
267
267
268
268
268
268
269
269
269
269
270
270
270
270
271
271
271
271
272
272
272
272
273
273
273
273
274
274
274
274
275
275
275
16
Table Of Contents
Description
KSx (External Trigger)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSy (Video Trigger)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSZ (Reference Level Offset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
L0 [zero] (Display Line Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
LF (Low Frequency Preset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
LG (Logarithmic Scale)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
LIMF (Limit Line Frequency Value)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
LIMIFAIL (Limits Failed)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
Query Data Type Codes
LIMIPURGE (Delete Current Limit Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
LIMIRCL (Recall Limit Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
LIMIREL (Relative Limit Lines)
Syntax
17
275
276
276
276
276
277
277
277
277
278
278
278
278
279
279
279
279
280
280
280
280
281
281
281
281
282
282
282
282
283
283
283
283
284
285
285
285
285
286
286
286
286
287
287
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Legacy Products
Description
LIMISAV (Save Limit Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
LIML (Lower-Limit Amplitude)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
LIMTFL (Flat Limit Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
LIMITST (Activate Limit Line Test Function)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
LIMTSL (Slope Limit Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
LIMU (Upper-Limit Amplitude)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
LN (Linear Scale)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
M1 [one] (Marker Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
M2 [two] (Marker Normal)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
M3 [three] (Delta Marker)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
M4 [four] (Marker Zoom)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
287
287
288
288
288
288
289
289
289
289
290
290
290
290
291
291
291
291
292
292
292
292
293
293
293
293
294
294
294
294
295
295
295
295
296
296
296
296
298
298
298
298
300
18
Table Of Contents
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MA (Marker Amplitude Output)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MC0 [zero] (Marker Frequency Counter Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MC1 [one] (Marker Frequency Counter On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MDS (Measurement Data Size)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MDU (Measurement Data Units)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MEAN (Trace Mean)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MEANPWR (Mean Power measurement)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MEAS (Meas)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MF (Marker Frequency Output)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MINH (Minimum Hold)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MINPOS (Minimum X Position)
19
300
300
300
301
301
301
301
302
302
302
302
303
303
303
303
304
304
304
304
305
305
305
305
306
306
306
306
307
307
307
307
308
308
308
308
309
309
309
309
310
310
310
310
311
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKA (Marker Amplitude)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKACT (Activate Marker)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKBW (Marker Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKCF (Marker to Center Frequency)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKD (Marker Delta)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKF (Marker Frequency)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKFC (Marker Counter)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKFCR (Marker Counter Resolution)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKMIN (Marker Minimum)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKN (Marker Normal)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
311
311
311
312
312
312
312
313
313
313
313
314
314
314
314
315
315
315
315
316
316
316
316
318
318
318
318
320
320
320
320
321
321
322
322
323
323
323
323
324
324
324
324
20
Table Of Contents
MKNOISE (Marker Noise)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKOFF (Marker Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKP (Marker Position)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKPK (Marker Peak)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKPT (Marker Threshold)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKPX (Marker Peak Excursion)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKREAD (Marker Readout)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKRL (Marker to Reference Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKSP (Marker Span)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKSS (Marker to Step Size)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKT (Marker Time)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
21
326
326
326
326
327
327
327
327
328
328
328
328
329
329
329
329
330
330
330
330
331
331
331
331
332
332
332
332
334
334
334
334
335
335
335
335
336
336
336
336
337
337
337
337
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
MKTRACE (Marker Trace)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKTRACK (Marker Track)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKTYPE (Marker Type)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ML (Mixer Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MT0 [zero] (Marker Track Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MT1 [one] (Marker Track On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MXMH (Maximum Hold)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
NORMLIZE (Normalize Trace Data)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
NRL (Normalized Reference Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
NRPOS (Normalized Reference Position)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
O1 [one] (Format - Display Units)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
338
338
338
338
339
339
339
339
340
340
340
340
341
341
341
341
343
343
343
343
344
344
344
344
345
345
345
345
346
346
346
346
348
348
348
348
349
349
349
349
350
350
350
22
Table Of Contents
Description
O2 [two] (Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
O3 [three] (Format - Real Amplitude Units)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
O4 [four] (Format - One 8-Bit Byte)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
OA or ? (Query Active Function)
Legacy Products
Description
OCCUP (Percent Occupied Power Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
OL (Output Learn String)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
OT (Output Trace Annotations)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
PEAKS (Peaks)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
PKPOS (Peak Position)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
PLOT (Plot)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
PP (Preselector Peak)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
23
350
351
351
351
351
352
352
352
352
353
353
353
353
354
354
354
355
355
355
355
356
356
356
356
359
359
359
359
361
361
361
361
362
362
362
362
363
363
363
363
364
364
364
364
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
PRINT (Print)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
PWRBW (Power Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
Q0 [zero] (Set Detector to EMI Peak Detection)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
Q1 [one] (Set Detector to Quasi Peak Detection)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
R1 [one] (Illegal Command SRQ)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
R2 [two] (End-of-Sweep SRQ)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
R3 [three] (Hardware Broken SRQ)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
R4 [four] (Units-Key-Pressed SRQ)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
RB (Resolution Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
RBR (Resolution Bandwidth to Span Ratio)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
RC (Recall State)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
365
365
365
365
366
366
366
366
367
367
367
367
368
368
368
368
369
369
369
369
370
370
370
370
371
371
371
371
372
372
372
372
373
373
373
373
375
375
375
375
376
376
376
24
Table Of Contents
Description
RCLS (Recall State)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
REV (Revision)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
RL (Reference Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
RMS (Root Mean Square Value)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ROFFSET (Reference Level Offset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
RQS (Request Service Conditions)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
S1[one] (Continuous Sweep)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
S2 [two] (Single Sweep)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SADD (Add Limit Line Segment)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SAVES (Save State)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SDEL (Delete Limit Line Segment)
Syntax
Legacy Products
25
376
378
378
378
378
379
379
379
379
380
380
380
380
382
382
382
382
383
383
383
383
385
385
385
385
387
387
387
387
388
388
388
388
389
389
389
389
390
390
390
390
391
391
391
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Description
SDON (Terminate SEDI Command)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SEDI (Edit Limit Line Segment)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SER (Serial Number)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SETDATE (Set Date)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SETTIME (Set Time)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SMOOTH (Smooth Trace)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SNGLS (Single Sweep)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SP (Frequency Span)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SRQ (Service Request)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SS (Center Frequency Step Size)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ST (Sweep Time)
Syntax
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
391
392
392
392
392
393
393
393
393
394
394
394
394
395
395
395
395
396
396
396
396
397
397
397
397
398
398
398
398
399
399
400
400
401
401
401
401
402
402
402
402
404
404
26
Table Of Contents
Legacy Products
Description
STB (Status Byte Query)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
STDEV (Standard Deviation of Trace Amplitudes)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SUM (Sum)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SV (Save State)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SWPCPL (Sweep Couple)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
T0 [zero] (Turn Off Threshold Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
T1 [one] (Free Run Trigger)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
T2 [two] (Line Trigger)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
T3 [three] (External Trigger)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
T4 [four] (Video Trigger)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TA (Trace A)
Syntax
27
404
404
406
406
406
406
407
407
407
407
408
408
408
408
409
409
409
409
410
410
410
410
411
411
411
411
412
412
412
412
413
413
413
413
414
414
414
414
415
415
415
415
416
416
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Legacy Products
Description
TB (Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TDF (Trace Data Format)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TH (Threshold)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
THE (Threshold Enable)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TIMEDATE (Time Date)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TITLE (Title)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TM (Trigger Mode)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TRA (Trace Data Input and Output)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TRB (Trace Data Input and Output)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TRC (Trace Data Input and Output)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TRDSP (Trace Display)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
416
416
417
417
417
417
418
418
418
418
419
419
419
419
421
421
421
421
422
422
422
422
423
423
423
423
424
424
424
424
426
426
426
426
427
427
427
427
428
428
428
428
429
28
Table Of Contents
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TRIGPOL (Trigger Polarity)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TRSTAT (Trace State)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TS (Take Sweep)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
USERREV
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
VAVG (Video Average)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
VB (Video Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
VBO (Video Bandwidth Coupling Offset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
VBR (Video Bandwidth to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
VIEW (View Trace)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
VTL (Video Trigger Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
XCH (Exchange)
29
429
429
429
430
430
430
430
431
431
431
431
432
432
432
432
433
433
433
433
434
434
434
434
436
436
436
436
438
438
438
438
439
439
439
439
440
440
440
440
442
442
442
442
443
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Reference Level
Amplitude Representations
Attenuation
Dual Attenuator Configurations
Single Attenuator Configuration
Determining Attenuator Configuration
(Mech) Atten
Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man
Enable Elec Atten
More Information
Mechanical Attenuator Transition Rules
When the Electronic Attenuation is enabled from a disabled state:
Examples in the dual attenuator configuration:
When the Electronic Attenuation is disabled from an enabled state:
Using the Electronic Attenuator: Pros and Cons
Elec Atten
Adjust Atten for Min Clip
Pre-Adjust for Min Clip
Off
Elec Atten Only
Mech + Elec Atten
(Mech) Atten Step
Max Mixer Level
Max Mixer Lvl Rule
Scale / Div
Scale Type
Presel Center
Proper Preselector Operation
Preselector Adjust
Y Axis Unit
dBm
dBmV
dBmA
W
V
A
dBµV
dBµA
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
443
443
443
444
447
447
448
448
449
449
449
450
451
452
453
453
453
453
453
454
454
455
455
456
456
456
456
457
457
458
459
459
460
461
461
463
463
463
464
464
464
465
465
30
Table Of Contents
dBpW
Antenna Unit
None
dBµV/m
dBµA/m
dBpT
dBG
dBµA
Reference Level Offset
More Information
µW Path Control
Standard Path
µW Preselector Bypass
Internal Preamp
Off
Low Band
Full Range
Auto Couple
More Information
Auto/Man Active Function keys
Auto/Man 1-of-N keys
BW
Res BW
More Information
Video BW
Annotation Examples
VBW:3dB RBW
Auto Rules
Span:3dB RBW
RBW Control
Filter Type
More Information
Gaussian
Flattop
Filter BW
More Information
–3 dB (Normal)
–6 dB
Noise
Impulse
Wide Bandwidths
Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep)
File
File Explorer
31
465
466
466
466
467
467
467
467
468
468
469
470
471
471
472
472
472
473
473
473
473
475
475
476
477
478
478
479
480
480
481
481
482
482
482
483
484
485
485
485
485
488
490
490
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Page Setup
Print
Restore Down
Minimize
Exit
FREQ Channel
Zone Center
Zoom Center
Auto Tune
Center Freq
Center Frequency Presets
Start Freq
Stop Freq
CF Step
Freq Offset
More Information
Input/Output
Input/Output variables - Preset behavior
RF Input
Input Z Correction
RF Coupling
I/Q
Baseband I/Q (Option BBA)
Baseband I/Q Remote Language Compatibility
I/Q Path
I+jQ
I Only
Q Only
I Setup
I Differential Input
I Input Z
I Skew
I Probe
Q Setup
Q Same as I
Q Differential Input
Q Input Z
Q Skew
Q Probe
Reference Z
I/Q Cable Calibrate…
Next
Exit
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
491
492
492
492
492
494
494
495
495
496
497
499
500
502
503
504
505
506
506
506
507
508
508
510
512
512
513
513
513
514
514
515
515
517
517
517
518
519
519
521
521
522
522
32
Table Of Contents
Exit Confirmation
I/Q Probe Setup
Attenuation
Offset
Coupling
Calibrate
Clear Calibration
RF Calibrator
50 MHz
4.8 GHz
Off
External Gain
Ext Preamp
MS
BTS
I Ext Gain
Q Ext Gain
Restore Input/Output Defaults
Corrections
Select Correction
Correction On/Off
Properties
Select Correction
Antenna Unit
Frequency Interpolation
Description
Comment
Edit
Delete Correction
Apply Corrections
Delete All Corrections
Freq Ref In
Sense
Internal
External
Ext Ref Freq
External Reference Lock BW
External Ref Coupling
External Ref Coupling
External Ref Coupling
Output Config
Trig Out (1 and 2)
Polarity
Off
33
522
523
523
524
524
525
526
526
527
527
527
527
528
529
529
530
530
530
531
532
532
532
533
533
535
537
537
537
538
539
539
539
540
540
540
541
541
542
543
545
547
547
548
548
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Sweeping (HSWP)
Measuring
Main Trigger
Gate Trigger
Gate
Odd/Even Trace Point
Trig Out (1 and 2)
Polarity
Off
Sweeping (HSWP)
Measuring
Main Trigger
Gate Trigger
Gate
Odd/Even Trace Point
Analog Out
More Information
Auto
Off
Screen Video
Log Video (RF Envelope, Ref=Mixer Level)
Linear Video (RF Envelope, Ref=Ref Level)
Demod Audio
Digital Bus
Bus Out On/Off
I/Q Cal Out
1 kHz Square Wave
250 kHz Square Wave
Off
Aux IF Out
Off
Second IF
Arbitrary IF
Fast Log Video
I/Q Guided Calibration
I/Q Isolation Calibration
Marker
Marker Control Mode
Marker Backwards Compatibility
Select Marker
Normal
Delta
Fixed
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
548
548
549
549
549
549
550
550
550
551
551
551
551
552
552
552
552
553
553
553
555
555
556
557
557
557
558
558
558
558
559
559
560
560
561
561
562
562
563
563
564
564
565
34
Table Of Contents
Fixed Marker X Axis Value
Fixed Marker Y Axis Value
Fixed Marker Z Axis Value
Off
Properties
Select Marker
Relative To
X Axis Scale
More Information
Auto
Frequency
Period
Time
Inverse Time
Marker Trace
Auto Init On
Auto Init Rules Flowchart
Lines
Marker Table
Marker Count
Counter
Understanding the Marker Counter
Counting Off-screen Markers
Delta Marker
Fixed Markers
More Information on "Counter"
Gate Time
Couple Markers
All Markers Off
Marker Function
More Information
Fixed marker functions
Interval Markers
Band Function Backwards Compatibility
Band changes with analyzer settings
Offscreen Markers
Select Marker
Marker Noise
More Information
Off-trace Markers
Band/Interval Power
Band/Interval Density
More Information
What is band/interval density?
35
565
565
566
566
567
567
567
568
568
569
569
569
570
570
571
571
572
572
573
573
573
574
575
575
575
575
576
576
577
578
578
579
579
579
582
582
582
582
583
583
583
584
585
585
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Marker Function Off
Band Adjust
Band/Interval Span
Band/Interval Left
Band/Interval Right
Band Span Auto/Man
Measure at Marker
Measure at Marker
Meas at Marker Window
Window
Position
Detectors
Detector 1
Detector 2
Detector 3
Detector 1 Dwell Time
Detector 2 Dwell Time
Detector 3 Dwell Time
BW & Avg Type
Center Presel On/Off
Marker To
Mkr->CF
Mkr->CF Step
Mkr->Start
Mkr->Stop
Mkr->Ref Lvl
Mkr -> Zoom Center
Mkr -> Zone Center
MkrΔ->CF
MkrΔ->Span
Meas
Meas Setup
Average/Hold Number
More Information
Average Type
More Information
Auto
Log-Pwr Avg (Video)
Pwr Avg (RMS)
Voltage Avg
Limits
Select Limit
Limit
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
585
586
586
587
587
588
589
589
592
592
593
593
593
594
594
594
595
595
596
597
598
598
598
599
599
599
600
600
600
601
602
603
603
603
604
604
605
605
606
606
607
607
608
36
Table Of Contents
Properties
Select Limit
Test Trace
Type
Interpolation
Fixed / Relative
Description
Comment
Margin
Edit
Navigate
Frequency
Amplitude
Insert Point Below
Delete Point
Copy from Limit
Build from Trace
Offset
Scale X Axis
Delete Limit
Test Limits
X-Axis Unit
Delete All Limits
N dB Points
More Information
PhNoise Opt
More Information
Auto
Best Close-in Φ Noise
Balance Noise and Spurs
Best Spurs
Best Wide-offset Φ Noise
Fast Tuning
Phase Noise Optimization Auto Rules
Models with Option EP1
Models with Option EP2
Models with Option EP4
All other Models
ADC Dither
Auto
High (Best Log Accy)
Medium (Log Accy)
Off (Best Noise)
Swept IF Gain
37
609
609
609
609
610
611
613
613
613
614
614
615
615
615
615
616
616
616
617
618
618
619
620
620
620
623
625
625
625
625
626
626
626
627
627
627
628
628
629
629
630
630
630
631
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Auto
Low Gain (Best for Large Signals)
High Gain (Best Noise Level)
FFT IF Gain
Auto
Autorange (Slower – Follows Signals)
Low Gain (Best for Large Signals)
High Gain (Best Noise Level)
Analog Demod Tune & Listen
AM
Channel BW (AM Demod)
FM
Channel BW (FM Demod)
De-emphasis (FM Demod only)
ΦM
Channel BW (ΦM Demod)
Off
Demod Time
Noise Source
More Information
Noise Source
More Information
State
Meas Preset
Mode
More Information
Spectrum Analyzer
EMI Receiver
IQ Analyzer (Basic)
W-CDMA with HSPA+
GSM/EDGE/EDGE Evo
802.16 OFDMA (WiMAX/WiBro)
Vector Signal Analyzer (VXA)
Phase Noise
Noise Figure
Analog Demod
TD-SCDMA with HSPA/8PSK
cdma2000
1xEV-DO
LTE
LTE TDD
DVB-T/H with T2
DTMB (CTTB)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
631
631
632
632
633
633
633
633
634
634
634
635
635
636
636
636
637
637
638
638
639
639
640
640
641
642
643
644
644
644
645
645
645
646
646
647
647
647
648
648
648
649
649
38
Table Of Contents
ISDB-T
CMMB
Combined WLAN
Combined Fixed WiMAX
802.16 OFDM (Fixed WiMAX)
iDEN/WiDEN/MOTOTalk
Remote Language Compatibility
89601 VSA
Bluetooth
SCPI Language Compatibility
Digital Cable TV
MSR
WLAN
Application Mode Number Selection (Remote Command Only)
Detailed List of Modes
Mode Preset
How-To Preset
Mode Setup
HP8560 series, HP8566/68
Cmd Error
Logging
Previous Page/Next Page
Cmd Error Log
Refresh
Clear Log
Preferences
Limit RBW/VBW
Swp Type Rule
Atten Offset
AC/DC Preset Default
Limit Swp Time
KSK Tolerance
Restore Mode Defaults
Global Settings
Global Center Freq
Restore Defaults
Peak Search
More Information
Next Peak
Next Pk Right
Next Pk Left
Marker Delta
Mkr->CF
Mkr->Ref Lvl
39
649
650
650
650
651
651
651
652
653
653
653
654
654
654
656
658
659
661
661
662
663
663
663
664
664
664
664
666
666
666
667
667
667
668
668
668
669
669
669
670
670
670
671
671
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Peak Criteria
“Peak Search” Criteria
Highest Peak
Same as “Next Peak” Criteria
“Next Peak” Criteria
Pk Excursion
Pk Threshold
Pk Threshold Line
Peak Table
Peak Table On/Off
Peak Sort
Peak Readout
More Information
All
Above Display Line
Below Display Line
Continuous Peak Search
More Information
Pk-Pk Search
Min Search
Peak Search All Traces
Quick Save
Recall
State
More Information
From File…
Open
File/Folder List
Look In
Sort
Files of Type
Up One Level
Cancel
Register 1 thru Register 16
Trace (+State)
To Trace
Register 1 thru Register 16
From File…
Open
File/Folder List
Look In
Sort
Files of Type
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
671
672
672
673
673
673
674
675
676
677
677
677
678
679
679
679
680
680
681
682
682
683
685
685
687
687
688
688
688
689
689
689
689
689
690
691
691
692
693
693
693
694
694
40
Table Of Contents
Up One Level
Cancel
Data (Import)
Amplitude Correction
Amplitude Correction
Trace
Select Trace
Limit
Limit Selection
Open…
Restart
More Information
Save
State
To File . . .
Save
File/Folder List
Save In
File Name
Save As Type
Up One Level
Create New Folder
Cancel
Register 1 thru Register 16
Edit Register Names
More Information
Trace (+State)
Data (Export)
Amplitude Correction
Correction Data File
Amplitude Correction
Trace
Trace File Contents
Metadata: Trace Specific
Metadata: Display Specific
Select Trace
Limit
Limits File Contents
.csv file format
.lim file format
Limit Selection
Measurement Results
Meas Results File Contents
Marker Table
41
694
694
694
695
696
696
697
697
698
698
699
699
701
701
702
703
703
703
704
704
704
704
704
705
705
706
706
707
708
708
711
711
712
712
712
716
716
717
717
718
718
719
719
719
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Peak Table
Spectrogram
Save As . . .
Screen Image
Themes
3D Color
3D Monochrome
Flat Color
Flat Monochrome
Save As…
Single (Single Measurement/Sweep)
More Information
Source
RF Output
Amplitude
Amplitude
Power Sweep
Amptd Offset
Amptd Step Auto/Man
Frequency
Multiplier Numerator
Multiplier Denominator
Source Sweep Reverse
Freq Offset
Source Mode
Select Source
Point Trigger
Select Highlighted Source
Source Preset
SPAN X Scale
Span
Span Presets
Zone Span
Zoom Span
Full Span
Zero Span
Last Span
Signal Track (Span Zoom)
More Information
Sweep/Control
Sweep Time
Sweep Setup
Sweep Time Rules
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
723
726
730
731
732
732
732
733
733
733
734
734
735
735
735
736
736
737
738
738
739
739
740
741
741
742
744
744
746
748
748
749
750
751
752
752
754
754
755
757
757
759
759
42
Table Of Contents
More Information
Auto
SA - Normal
SA - Accuracy
Stimulus/Response
Sweep Type
Auto
Swept
FFT
Sweep Type Rules
Auto
Best Dynamic Range
Best Speed
FFT Width
More Information
Gate
Gate On/Off
Gate View On/Off
Gate View Setup
Gate View Sweep Time
Gate View Start Time
Gate Delay
Gate Length
Method
LO
Video
FFT
Gate Source
Line
External 1
External 2
RF Burst
Periodic Timer (Frame Trigger)
TV
Control Edge/Level
Gate Holdoff
Points
Zoom Points
Pause/Resume
System
Show
Errors
Previous Page
Next Page
43
759
760
760
760
761
762
762
763
763
764
764
764
765
765
766
767
768
769
772
772
773
773
773
774
774
775
775
776
776
777
778
779
782
791
796
797
798
800
800
801
801
801
802
802
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
History
History
Verbose SCPI On/Off
Refresh
Clear Error Queue
System
Hardware
LXI
Power On
Mode and Input/Output Defaults
User Preset
Last State
Power On Application
Configure Applications
Preloading Applications
Access to Configure Applications utility
Virtual memory usage
Select All
Deselect All
Move Up
Move Down
Select/Deselect
Save Changes and Exit
Exit Without Saving
FPGA Configuration
Time Domain Scan
Enhanced Sweep Speed
Prompt at Startup
Selected FPGA
Load FPGA
Restore Power On Defaults
Alignments
Auto Align
Normal
Partial
Off
All but RF
Alert
Align Now
All
All but RF
RF
External Mixer
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
803
803
803
804
804
804
805
806
807
807
807
808
808
809
809
810
810
811
811
811
811
811
812
812
812
813
813
814
814
815
816
816
816
817
818
818
819
820
822
823
824
825
826
44
Table Of Contents
Show Alignment Statistics
Restore Align Defaults
Backup or Restore Align Data…
Alignment Data Wizard
Advanced
Characterize Preselector
Timebase DAC
Calibrated
User
I/O Config
GPIB
GPIB Address
GPIB Controller
SCPI LAN
SCPI Telnet
SCPI Socket
SICL Server
HiSLIP Server
Reset Web Password
LXI
LAN Reset
System IDN Response
Factory
User
Restore Defaults
Restore Input/Output Defaults
Restore Power On Defaults
Restore Align Defaults
Restore Misc Defaults
Restore Mode Defaults (All Modes)
All
Control Panel…
Licensing…
Security
USB
Read-Write
Read only
Diagnostics
Show Hardware Statistics
Service
Internet Explorer…
System Remote Commands (Remote Commands Only)
List installed Options (Remote Command Only)
Trace/Detector
45
826
827
828
828
834
834
835
835
836
836
836
836
837
838
838
838
838
839
840
840
840
841
841
841
842
842
842
843
844
845
845
846
847
847
847
848
848
848
848
849
850
850
850
851
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Trace Mode Backwards Compatibility
Trace Update Indicator
Trace Annunciator Panel
Trace Annotation
Select Trace
Clear Write
Trace Average
Trace Averaging: More Information
Max Hold
Min Hold
View/Blank
Trace Update State On/Off
Trace Display State On/Off
More Information
Detector
More Information
Multiple Detectors
Auto
Normal
Average (Log/RMS/V)
Peak
Sample
Negative Peak
Quasi Peak
More Information
EMI Average
RMS Average
Preset Detectors
All Traces Auto
Peak / Average / NPeak
Peak / Sample / NPeak
Clear Trace
Clear All Traces
Preset All Traces
Math
Math: More Information
Select Trace
Power Diff (Op1-Op2)
Power Sum (Op1+Op2)
Log Offset (Op1 + Offset)
Log Diff (Op1-Op2+Ref)
More Information
Off
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
852
852
852
853
854
854
855
855
856
857
858
860
860
860
861
862
863
863
864
864
865
866
866
867
867
868
869
869
870
870
870
871
871
871
871
872
874
874
875
875
876
877
877
46
Table Of Contents
Trace Operands
Operand 1
Operand 2
Copy/Exchange
From Trace
To Trace
Copy Now
Exchange Now
Normalize
Normalize On/Off
More Information
Measurement Details
Normalize Block Diagram
Store Ref (1->3)
Show Ref Trace (Trace 3)
Norm Ref Lvl
Open/Short Cal
Open/Short Guided Cal
Norm Ref Posn
Trigger
Trigger Source Presets
RF Trigger Source
I/Q Trigger Source
More Information
Free Run
Video (IF Envelope)
Trigger Level
Trig Slope
Trig Delay
Line
Trig Slope
Trig Delay
External 1
Trigger Level
Trig Slope
Trig Delay
External 2
Trigger Level
Trig Slope
Trig Delay
RF Burst
Absolute Trigger Level
Relative Trigger Level
Trigger Slope
47
877
878
878
878
879
879
879
879
880
880
880
881
882
882
882
883
883
883
884
886
887
890
891
891
893
893
894
895
895
895
896
896
897
897
897
898
898
899
899
899
900
900
901
902
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Trig Delay
Periodic Timer (Frame Trigger)
Period
Offset
Reset Offset Display
Sync Source
Off
External 1
External 2
RF Burst
Trig Delay
TV
TV Line
Field
Entire Frame
Field One
Field Two
Standard
NTSC-M
NTSC-Japan
NTSC–4.43
PAL-M
PAL-N
PAL-N-Combin
PAL-B,D,G,H,I
PAL–60
SECAM-L
Auto/Holdoff
Auto Trig
Trig Holdoff
User Preset
User Preset
User Preset All Modes
Save User Preset
View/Display
View
Display
Annotation
Meas Bar On/Off
Screen
Trace
Active Function Values On/Off
Title
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
902
903
904
905
906
906
907
907
908
909
911
912
913
913
914
914
914
915
915
915
916
916
916
916
916
917
917
917
918
918
919
919
920
921
922
922
923
923
924
925
925
925
926
48
Table Of Contents
Change Title
Clear Title
Graticule
Display Line
System Display Settings
Annotation Local Settings
Theme
Backlight
Backlight Intensity
Normal
Spectrogram
More Information
Representation of Time
Markers
Trace Zoom
Transition Rules
Zone Span
More Information
Transition Rules
Display Trace
Full Screen
49
926
927
928
928
928
929
929
930
931
931
932
932
935
936
936
937
938
938
939
939
940
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 About the Instrument
The X-Series instrument measures and monitors complex RF and microwave signals.
Analog baseband analysis is available on MXA. The instrument integrates traditional
spectrum measurements with advanced vector signal analysis to optimize speed,
accuracy, and dynamic range. The instrument has Microsoft Windows 7 built-in as an
operating system, which expands its usability.
With a broad set of applications and demodulation capabilities, an intuitive user
interface, outstanding connectivity and powerful one-button measurements, the
instrument is ideal for both R&D and manufacturing engineers working on cellular,
emerging wireless communications, general purpose, aerospace and defense
applications.
This chapter includes the following topics:
– "Installing Application Software" on page 51
– "X-Series Options and Accessories" on page 53
– "Front & Rear Panel Features" on page 54
– "Display Annotations" on page 55
– "Window Control Keys" on page 56
– "Mouse and Keyboard Control" on page 59
– "Instrument Security & Memory Volatility" on page 64
50
1 About the Instrument
Installing Application Software
Installing Application Software
If you want to install a measurement application after your initial hardware
purchase, you need only to license it. All of the available applications are loaded in
your instrument at the time of purchase.
Thus, when you purchase a new application, you will receive an entitlement
certificate that you can use to obtain a license key for that application. To activate
the new measurement application, enter the license key that you obtain into the
instrument.
For the latest information on Keysight measurement applications and upgrade kits,
visit the following web site:
http://www.keysight.com/find/sa_upgrades
This section includes the following topics:
– "Viewing a License Key" on page 51
– "Obtaining and Installing a License Key " on page 51
– "Updating Measurement Application Software" on page 52
Viewing a License Key
Measurement applications that you purchased with your instrument have been
installed and activated at the factory before shipment. The instrument requires a
unique License Key for every measurement application purchased. The license key is
a hexadecimal string that is specific to your measurement application, instrument
model number and serial number. It enables you to install, or reactivate, that
particular application.
Press System, Show, System to display the measurement applications that are
currently licensed in your instrument.
Go to the following location to view the license keys for the installed measurement
applications:
C:\Program Files\Agilent\Licensing
You may want to keep a copy of your license key in a secure location. To do this, you
can print out a copy of the display showing the license numbers. If you should lose
your license key, call your nearest Keysight Technologies service or sales office for
assistance.
Obtaining and Installing a License Key
If you purchase an additional application that requires installation, you will receive
an "Entitlement Certificate", which may be redeemed for a license key for one
instrument. To obtain your license key, follow the instructions that accompany the
certificate.
51
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 About the Instrument
Installing Application Software
Installing a license key for the selected application can be done automatically using
a USB memory device. To do this, you copy the license file to the USB memory
device, at the root level. Follow the instructions that come with your software
installation kit.
Installing a license key can also be done manually using the built-in license
management application, which may be found via the instrument front panel keys at
System, Licensing. . . , or on-disk at:
C:\Programming Files\Agilent\Licensing
You can also use these procedures to reinstall a license key that has been
accidentally deleted, or lost due to a memory failure.
Updating Measurement Application Software
All the software applications were loaded at the time of original instrument
manufacture. It is a good idea to regularly update your software with the latest
available version. This helps to ensure that you receive any improvements and
expanded functionality.
Because the software was loaded at the initial purchase, further additional
measurement applications may now be available. If the application you are
interested in licensing is not available, you will need to do a software update. (To
display a list of installed applications, press System, Show, System.)
Check the appropriate page of the Keysight web site for the latest available
software versions, according to the name of your instrument, as follows:
– http://www.keysight.com/find/pxa_software
– http://www.keysight.com/find/mxa_software
– http://www.keysight.com/find/exa_software
– http://www.keysight.com/find/cxa_software
– http://www.keysight.com/find/mxe_software
You can load the updated software package into the instrument from a USB drive, or
directly from the internet. An automatic loading program is included with the files.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
52
1 About the Instrument
X-Series Options and Accessories
X-Series Options and Accessories
You can view an online list of available Options and Accessories for your instrument
as follows:
1. Browse to one of the following URLs, according to the product name of your
instrument:
– www.keysight.com/find/mxe
– www.keysight.com/find/cxa
– www.keysight.com/find/exa
– www.keysight.com/find/mxa
– www.keysight.com/find/pxa
2. The home page for your instrument appears (in some cases, you may see an
initial splash screen containing a button named View the Webpage, which you
should click to display the home page).
3. Locate the Options & Accessories tab, as highlighted in the example below,
which shows the home page for the MXA.
4. Click the Options & Accessories tab, to display a list of available options and
accessories for your instrument.
53
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 About the Instrument
Front & Rear Panel Features
Front & Rear Panel Features
The instrument's front and rear panel features are fully detailed in the chapter "Front
and Rear Panel Features" of the document:
Getting Started Guide
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
54
1 About the Instrument
Display Annotations
Display Annotations
Display Annotations are fully detailed under the chapter "Front and Rear Panel
Features" of the document:
Getting Started Guide
55
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 About the Instrument
Window Control Keys
Window Control Keys
The instrument provides three front-panel keys for controlling windows. These are:
– "Multi-Window" on page 56
– "Zoom" on page 56
– "Next Window" on page 57
These are all “immediate action” keys.
Multi-Window
The Multi-Window key can be found on the instrument's front panel, below the
display screen.
Pressing the key toggles back and forth between the Normal View and the last
Multi-Window View (Zone Span, Trace Zoom or Spectrogram) that you selected
when using the Swept SA measurement of the Spectrum Analyzer Mode. The
selected view is retained through a Preset. On a Restore Mode Defaults, the
“previous view” is set to Zone Span.
Key Path
Front-panel key
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Zoom
The Zoom key can be found on the instrument's front panel, below the display
screen.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
56
1 About the Instrument
Window Control Keys
Zoom is a toggle function. Pressing this key once increases the size of the selected
window; pressing the key again returns the window to the original size.
When Zoom is on for a window, that window occupies the entire primary display
area. The zoomed window, since it is the selected window, is outlined in green.
Zoom is local to each Measurement. Each Measurement remembers its Zoom state.
The Zoom state of each Measurement is part of the Mode’s state.
Data acquisition and processing for the other windows continues while a window is
zoomed, as does all SCPI communication with the other windows.
Preset
TILE
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Next Window
The Next Window key can be found on the instrument's front panel, below the
display screen.
Pressing the key selects the next window of the current view. When the Next
Window key is pressed, the next window in the order of precedence becomes
selected. If the selected window was zoomed, the next window will also be zoomed.
The window numbers are as shown in the diagrams below. Note that these numbers
also determine the order of precedence (that is, Next Window goes from 1 to 2, then
2 to 3, etc.):
57
Preset
1
Min
1
Max
If <number> is greater than the number of windows, limit to <number of windows>
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 About the Instrument
Window Control Keys
One and only one window is always selected. The selected window has the focus;
this means that all window-specific key presses apply only to that window. You can
tell which window is selected by the thick green border around it. If a window is not
selected, its boundary is gray.
If a window in a multi-window display is zoomed, it is still outlined in green. If there is
only one window, the green outline is not used. This allows the user to distinguish
between a zoomed window and a display with only one window.
The selected window is local to each Measurement. Each Measurement remembers
which window is selected. The selected window for each Measurement is
remembered in the Mode state.
When this key is pressed with Help open, it toggles focus between the table of
contents window and the topic pane window.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
58
1 About the Instrument
Mouse and Keyboard Control
Mouse and Keyboard Control
If you do not have access to the instrument front-panel, there are several ways that
a mouse and PC Keyboard can give you access to functions normally accessed using
the front-panel keys.
– "Right-Click" on page 59
– "PC Keyboard" on page 61
Right-Click
If you plug in a mouse, then right-click on the instrument screen, a menu appears as
below:
Placing the mouse on one of the rows marked with a right arrow symbol causes that
row to expand, as in the example below, where the mouse is hovered over the
“Utility” row:
59
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 About the Instrument
Mouse and Keyboard Control
This method can be used to access any of the front-panel keys by using a mouse; as
for example if you are accessing the instrument via Remote Desktop.
The array of keys thus available is shown below:
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
60
1 About the Instrument
Mouse and Keyboard Control
PC Keyboard
If you have a PC keyboard plugged into the instrument (or via Remote Desktop),
certain key codes on the PC keyboard map to front-panel keys on the instrument.
These key codes are listed below:
61
Front-panel key
Key code
Frequency
CTRL+SHIFT+F
Span
CTRL+SHIFT+S
Amplitude
CTRL+SHIFT+A
Input/Output
CTRL+SHIFT+O
View/Display
CTRL+SHIFT+V
Trace/Detector
CTRL+ALT+T
Auto Couple
CTRL+SHIFT+C
Bandwidth
CTRL+ALT+B
Source
CTRL+ALT-U
Marker
CTRL+ALT+K
Peak Search
CTRL+ALT+P
Marker To
CTRL+ALT+N
Marker Function
CTRL+ALT+F
System
CTRL+SHIFT+Y
Quick Save
CTRL+Q
Save
CTRL+S
Recall
CTRL+R
Mode Preset
CTRL+M
User Preset
CTRL+U
Print
CTRL+P
File
CTRL+SHIFT+L
Mode
CTRL+SHIFT+M
Measure
CTRL+ALT+M
Mode Setup
CTRL+SHIFT+E
Meas Setup
CTRL+ALT+E
Trigger
CTRL+SHIFT+T
Sweep/Control
CTRL+SHIFT+W
Restart
CTRL+ALT+R
Single
CTRL+ALT+S
Cont
CTRL+ALT+C
Zoom
CTRL+SHIFT+Z
Next Window
CTRL+SHIFT+N
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 About the Instrument
Mouse and Keyboard Control
Front-panel key
Key code
Split Screen
CTRL+L
Full Screen
CTRL+SHIFT+B
Return
CTRL+SHIFT+R
Mute
Mute
Inc Audio
Volume Up
Dec Audio
Volume Down
Help
F1
Control
CTRL
Alt
ALT
Enter
Return
Cancel
Esc
Del
Delete
Backspace
Backspace
Select
Space
Up Arrow
Up
Down Arrow
Down
Left Arrow
Left
Right Arrow
Right
Menu key 1
CTRL+SHIFT+F1
Menu key 2
CTRL+SHIFT+F2
Menu key 3
CTRL+SHIFT+F3
Menu key 4
CTRL+SHIFT+F4
Menu key 5
CTRL+SHIFT+F5
Menu key 6
CTRL+SHIFT+F6
Menu key 7
CTRL+SHIFT+F7
Backspace
BACKSPACE
Enter
ENTER
Tab
Tab 1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
62
1 About the Instrument
Mouse and Keyboard Control
Front-panel key
Key code
9
9
0
0
This is a pictorial view of the table:
63
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 About the Instrument
Instrument Security & Memory Volatility
Instrument Security & Memory Volatility
If you are using the instrument in a secure environment, you may need details of how
to clear or sanitize its memory, in compliance with published security standards of
the United States Department of Defense, or other similar authorities.
For X-Series instruments, this information is contained in the document "Security
Features and Document of Volatility". This document is not included in the
Documentation DVD, or the instrument's on-disk library, but it may be downloaded
from Keysight's web site.
To obtain a copy of the document, click on or browse to the following URL:
http://www.keysight.com/find/security
To locate and download the document, select Model Number "N9020A", then click
Submit". Then, follow the on-screen instructions to download the file.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
64
Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
2 About the N9061A Measurement Application
This chapter provides general information about the N9061A application. It includes the
following topics:
– "N9061A Application Description" on page 66
– "Documentation for the N9061A application" on page 67
– "General Rules and Limitations" on page 68
– "Hardware and Firmware Requirements for N9061A" on page 72
– "Installing the N9061A Application" on page 74
– "Setting up N9061A" on page 76
– "Hints and Tips" on page 77
– "Service and Calibration" on page 79
65
2 About the N9061A Measurement Application
N9061A Application Description
N9061A Application Description
N9061A is a Remote Language Compatibility application for Keysight Technologies
X-Series instruments. It allows X-Series instruments to be controlled using many
non-SCPI remote programming commands originally intended for the following
analyzers:
– 8560 E/EC Series Portable Spectrum Analyzers, comprising:
– 8560E, 8560EC, 8561E, 8561EC, 8562E, 8562EC, 8563E, 8563EC, 8564E,
8564EC, 8565E, 8565EC
– 8566A/B
– 8568A/B
(The 8566A/B and the 8568A/B are not considered part of the 8560 series of
analyzers.)
An X-Series instrument with N9061A installed can replace these analyzers in many
automated systems with minimal or no modification to the existing measurement
software.
There are two options for N9061A:
66
Option
Description
N9061A-1FP
8566A/B and 8568A/B remote language compatibility
N9061A-2FP
8560 Series remote language compatibility.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
2 About the N9061A Measurement Application
Documentation for the N9061A application
Documentation for the N9061A application
Scope of this Document
This manual does not provide a comprehensive guide to all legacy commands. It
provides brief descriptions of legacy commands that are supported by N9061A, and
highlights important functional or behavioral differences that you should be aware of
when using existing legacy code to control your X-Series instrument. For a complete
description of all legacy commands, refer to the manuals supplied with your original
analyzer.
Where to Obtain this Document
When you purchase an X-Series instrument with the Remote Language
Compatibility Application (N9061A), this manual (N9061A Remote Language
Compatibility Measurement Application User’s & Programmer’s Reference, part
number N9020-90119) is included on the documentation DVD. It may also be
downloaded from the Keysight web site at:
http://literature.cdn.keysight.com/litweb/pdf/N9020-90119.pdf
This document contains exactly the same content as the instrument’s online Help
file (CHM) for N9061A.
Instrument Updates
For the latest information about your X-Series instrument, including software
upgrades, application information, and product information, please visit the URL
below that corresponds to your instrument’s product name:
– http://www.keysight.com/find/pxa/
– http://www.keysight.com/find/mxa/
– http://www.keysight.com/find/exa/
– http://www.keysight.com/find/cxa/
– http://www.keysight.com/find/mxe/
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
67
2 About the N9061A Measurement Application
General Rules and Limitations
General Rules and Limitations
The N9061A application has been designed to emulate as closely as possible the
operation of the specified spectrum analyzers. It is not, however, intended as a fullycompatible, direct replacement for these analyzers. This section highlights the
following specific emulation differences and limitations:
– "AC/DC Coupling" on page 68
– "Couplings" on page 68
– "Markers" on page 69
– "Numeric Ranges" on page 69
– "Parsing" on page 69
– "Predefined Functions" on page 69
– "Remote Control" on page 70
– "Returning Data" on page 70
– "Units" on page 70
– "User-defined Functions" on page 70
– "Supported Commands" on page 70
– "EP Parameter" on page 70
– "OA Parameter" on page 71
– "Handling of Unsupported Commands and Queries" on page 71
AC/DC Coupling
The 44 GHz and 50 GHz X-Series instruments only have DC coupling. The X-Series
instruments with a 26.5 GHz frequency range, and lower, default to AC coupling on
preset. When the selected legacy instrument is HP8566A, HP8566B, HP8563,
HP8564, or HP8565, N9061A defaults to DC coupling.
When AC coupled, the 8560E/61E/62E have a 100 kHz low frequency limit, whereas
X-Series instruments have a 10 MHz limit.
For HP8568A/B compatibility and consistency, N9061A supports the I1 and I2
commands. These select AC or DC coupling at the RF input. Note that the
HP8568A/B has two RF input ports, whereas X-Series instruments have only one.
Couplings
For optimal use of the X-Series instrument, N9061A uses the auto coupling features
of the X-Series, and does not attempt to mimic the exact coupling behavior of the
68
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
2 About the N9061A Measurement Application
General Rules and Limitations
legacy analyzers. To eliminate the possibility of "Meas Uncal" errors between auto
and manual values, values generally default to the X-Series auto settings where
applicable (for example, Resolution Bandwidth). However, there are several
exceptions, as follows:
To prevent timeout errors in the legacy code, the Resolution Bandwidth minimum
matches the minimum in the legacy analyzer. Resolution Bandwidth steps and
resolution, however, conform to X-Series values.
The Video Bandwidth couples to the Resolution Bandwidth according to the Video
Bandwidth coupling offset value, specified by the VBO or VBR command. X-Series
instruments set the Video Bandwidth according to the VBO or VBR setting, but use
the X-Series instruments’ available bandwidths, to prevent 'Meas Uncal' errors.
Markers
N9061A emulates the behavior of legacy products. If any program uses a marker
state that is not available in the legacy instrument, further marker behavior is
undefined, until a subsequent instrument preset occurs.
On systems that support MKACT, there are 4 completely different marker pairs, each
with its own information. N9061A stores the currently active value of MKACT. For
example, if MKACT is 2, then it uses Markers 3 and 4 instead of 1 and 2.
Numeric Ranges
Numeric ranges are limited to that of X-Series unless otherwise stated, although
commands such as FS or IP that go to a default range use the range of the legacy
instrument.
Parsing
For 8566B and 8568B emulation, N9061A remembers the active function and
supports UP, DN, and OA, all of which change the active function. It also supports ?,
which does not change the active function.
Note that 8566/68 parses a command (for example CF 10.3GZ) immediately when it
recognizes a complete command (in this example, following GZ), whereas N9061A
parses at the end of a line, when it sees the line termination sequence.
Predefined Functions
In the 8566/8568/8560 Series analyzers, a “Predefined Function” is a command that
returns a number that can be operated on by other commands. “Predefined
Variables” follow the same concept, except that the value to be passed as a
parameter to the next command is stored in a variable.
N9061A does not support this type of behavior, so any commands that originally
acted as Predefined Functions or Variables, or that accepted Predefined Functions
or Variables as arguments in the 8566/8568/8560 Series, no longer do so.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
69
2 About the N9061A Measurement Application
General Rules and Limitations
Remote Control
N9061A supports remote operation via the GPIB interface. It does not support
operation via LAN, USB or Telnet.
Returning Data
X-Series and legacy instruments adopt differing approaches when returning data to
the controller.
X-Series and 8560-series analyzers operate a FIFO buffer for command return
values. If a command returns a value that the controller does not read, the returned
data is stored until such a time that the controller requires the value. In N9061A's
8560-series emulation mode, for example, if CF?MA?FA? is sent, the first query
returns the result of CF?, the second query returns the result of MA? and the third
query returns the result of FA?.
The 8566, 8568, and 8590-series legacy analyzers store only one value at a time.
Any value stored is overwritten each time a command returns a value. N9061A
handles this difference appropriately only within a single command string. In
N9061A's 8566 and 8568 emulation mode, for example, if CF?MA?FA? is sent, only
the result of FA? is returned.
Units
N9061A supports all units used in legacy products. The accepted units are HZ, KHZ,
MHZ, GHZ, KZ, MZ, GZ, DBM, DBMV, DBUV, MV, UV, V, MW, UW, W, DB, DM, MS,
US, SC, and S (case insensitive in 8566/68). A command terminator, such as ";", also
acts as a unit terminator.
User-defined Functions
User-defined functions, traces, or variables (FUNCDEF, TRDEF or VARDEF) cannot be
used as arguments or commands in programs for N9061A. In addition, the behavior
of certain commands that rely on the “active functions” (UP, DN, etc.) may be slightly
different.
Supported Commands
N9061A supports only a subset of 8566/8568/8560 Series commands. The list of
supported commands was determined by feedback from customers, combined with
technical considerations and constraints.
Device Clear is supported by N9061A, and causes a mode preset of the instrument.
EP Parameter
The EP (Enable Parameter) is supported by N9061A for the same active functions as
the 8560 series. When used as a secondary keyword after a command, EP transfers
control to the analyzer’s front-panel.
70
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
2 About the N9061A Measurement Application
General Rules and Limitations
EP is not displayed in any of the format diagrams for individual commands listed in
"Legacy Command Descriptions" on page 122.
OA Parameter
N9061A supports the OA parameter, which is used in conjunction with several legacy
commands, such as AT and CF. OA is equivalent to a query; for example, CF OA is
equivalent to CF?.
Handling of Unsupported Commands and Queries
If a command is valid for legacy products but not supported by N9061A, no error
message is generated, although a "Command Not Supported" comment is
appended to the Command Log file. Note that this logging behavior can be
controlled via the Logging menu, as described in "Logging" on page 663.
If N9061A receives a query that is valid for legacy products, but is not supported by
N9061A, it returns a "0", to avoid the situation where a program would otherwise
halt indefinitely waiting for a return value.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
71
2 About the N9061A Measurement Application
Hardware and Firmware Requirements for N9061A
Hardware and Firmware Requirements for N9061A
For maximum compatibility, you should select an X-Series instrument that equals or
exceeds the frequency range of the legacy analyzer you are replacing. The frequency
limits of the legacy analyzers are listed below.
Frequency Ranges of Legacy Analyzers
Remote Language
Start Frequency
Stop Frequency
8560E/EC
30 Hz
2.9 GHz
8561E/EC
30 Hz
6.5 GHz
8562E/EC
30 Hz
13.2 GHz
8563E/EC
9 kHz
26.5 GHz
8564E/EC
9 kHz
40.0 GHz
8565E/EC
9 kHz
50.0 GHz
HP8566A
2 GHz
22 GHz
HP8566B
2 GHz
22 GHz
HP8568A
0 Hz
1.5 GHz
HP8568B
0 Hz
1.5 GHz
The following table lists the Upper Frequency Limits and minimum firmware revisions
for Keysight X-Series instruments that support N9061A.
Compatible Keysight X-Series Instruments
Product Name
Instrument Model Number
Upper Frequency
Limit
Firmware Revision
PXA
N9030A-503
3.6 GHz
Rev A.04.00 or later
N9030A-508
8.4 GHz
N9030A-513
13.6 GHz
N9030A-526
26.5 GHz
N9030A-543
43 GHz
N9030A-544
44 GHz
N9030A-550
50 GHz
N9020A-503
3.6 GHz
N9020A-508
8.4 GHz
N9020A-513
13.6 GHz
N9020A-526
26.5 GHz
MXA
72
Rev A.01.64 or later
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
2 About the N9061A Measurement Application
Hardware and Firmware Requirements for N9061A
Product Name
Instrument Model Number
Upper Frequency
Limit
Firmware Revision
EXA
N9010A-503
3.6 GHz
Rev A.01.64 or later
N9010A-507
7 GHz
N9010A-513
13.6 GHz
N9010A-526
26.5 GHz
N9010A-532
32 GHz
N9010A-544
44 GHz
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
73
2 About the N9061A Measurement Application
Installing the N9061A Application
Installing the N9061A Application
N9061A is a licensed application for X-Series instruments. The option for 8560 Series
emulation is N9061A-2FP, and the option for 8566/8568 emulation is N9061A-1FP.
The application must be installed and licensed on a suitable X-Series instrument for
it to work correctly.
Installation
The license is installed on the X-Series instrument in one of the following ways:
If you purchased a new X-Series instrument with N9061A, then the product is
already installed and licensed, and is ready to use.
If you have an X-Series instrument and have subsequently purchased N9061A, then
you can download N9061A from the Keysight website. N9061A is installed as part of
a software upgrade. See the links below for instrument software upgrades. After
upgrading your software you should then use your entitlement certificate to license
the product (see "Licensing" on page 74 below).
The latest revision of the software may be downloaded from:
– http://www.keysight.com/find/pxa_software
– http://www.keysight.com/find/mxa_software
– http://www.keysight.com/find/exa_software
– http://www.keysight.com/find/cxa_software
– http://www.keysight.com/find/mxe_software
No calibration is required after N9061A is installed.
Licensing
For details of how to install and activate an N9061A license, see the section
"Keysight X-Series Analyzer Licensing Options" in the chapter "Instrument Operating
System" of the "Getting Started and Troubleshooting Guide", which may be
downloaded in PDF format from the Keysight web site. For details, see the Getting
Started Guide.
Verify the Installation
– Press System > Show > System, to display the list of installed applications.
– Verify that N9061A appears in the Option list.
If you require further assistance, please contact the Keysight support team.
– Online assistance: http://www.keysight.com/find/assist
– If you do not have access to the Internet, contact your local Keysight
74
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
2 About the N9061A Measurement Application
Installing the N9061A Application
Technologies Sales and Service Office, or if in the United States, call 1-800-8294444.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
75
2 About the N9061A Measurement Application
Setting up N9061A
Setting up N9061A
To set up your X-Series instrument for emulation of one of the supported legacy
analyzers, do the following:
Step
Action
Notes
1
Select the N9061A Measurement Application
(Mode)
Press the Mode hardkey on the front panel,
then press the sofkey for Remote Language
Compatibility mode.
If there are more than six modes on the
instrument, you may need to use the More
softkey to display the Remote Language
Compatibility selection.
For details of the menu, see "Mode" on
page 641.
2
Select the legacy analyzer you wish to
emulate
Press the Mode Setup hardkey on the front
panel, then select the specific analyzer
type from the keys in the submenu.
For details of this menu, see "Mode Setup"
on page 661.
76
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
2 About the N9061A Measurement Application
Hints and Tips
Hints and Tips
This section provides hints and tips that will help you get the most from the X-Series
N9061A application.
Compatibility (Speed and Consistency)
To maximize compatibility with your legacy analyzer, the N9061A application should
be used on the instrument whose frequency range most closely matches the
frequency range of your legacy analyzer. For example, the best match for the 8563E,
which has a 26.5 GHz upper frequency limit, is an X-Series instrument that also has
an upper frequency limit of 26.5 GHz.
Compatibility and Sweep Times
To maximize compatibility between X-Series instruments and legacy analyzers, use
the Manual Swept mode for 8566A/B, 8568A/B analyzers. Manual Swept mode is
the default setting on X-Series instruments with N9061A installed.
When analyzing stationary signals, you can change to the Best Speed setting, which
is accessed from the Mode Setup > Preferences > Swp Type Rule menu. This results
in faster sweep times on an X-Series instrument than on the legacy analyzers, due
to the X-Series instrument’s better performance. In the majority of applications, this
faster speed would be desirable, but that is not always the case.
Timeout
Keysight recommends increasing the timeout on a serial poll (SPOLL) due to
differences in Sweep Times on some settings. Note, however, that this may not be
necessary when using the Best Speed setting on the Preferences > Swp Type Rule
menu (accessed from the Mode Setup hardkey).
Synchronization (1)
To synchronize after an IP command, Keysight recommends that you use the DONE
command. We also suggest that the DONE command be used in conjunction with a
timeout of about 5 seconds, in case the instrument starts to Auto Align.
Alternatively, you can switch off auto alignment. To set auto alignment to Off, press
System, Alignments, Auto Align on the front panel.
Synchronization (2)
Keysight recommends that synchronization (using the DONE command) be used with
marker functions when signal tracking is turned on.
Changing Modes
After changing into or out of N9061A mode, allow at least a 1 second delay before
sending subsequent commands.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
77
2 About the N9061A Measurement Application
Hints and Tips
AC and DC Coupling
The 8560 Series of legacy analyzers have one RF input port, and support AC and DC
coupling through the command "COUPLE (Input Coupling)" on page 190.
The 8568A/B has two RF input ports:
– DC Coupled (with a BNC connector) to handle a frequency range of 100 Hz to 1.5
GHz
– AC Coupled (with an N Type connector) to handle a frequency range of 100 kHz
to 1.5 GHz
If the input signal to the X-series instrument has a DC component, ensure that when
you select legacy instrument emulation that involves a possible coupling change to
DC, the input signal does not exceed the input specifications of the X-series
instrument.
X-series instruments also have one RF input port. When using X-Series instruments,
you must use DC coupling to see calibrated frequencies of less than 20 MHz. Signals
of less than 20 MHz are not calibrated when using AC coupling on these
instruments.
78
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
2 About the N9061A Measurement Application
Service and Calibration
Service and Calibration
Since the Performance Verification and Adjustment Software uses the SCPI
command language, you must exit the N9061A application and change to N9060A
Spectrum Analyzer Mode, prior to calibration or service of your instrument.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
79
Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
3 Programming the Instrument
This section provides introductory information about the programming documentation
included with your product.
– "What Programming Information is Available?" on page 81
– "List of Supported SCPI Commands" on page 82
– "IEEE 488.2 Common Commands" on page 84
80
3 Programming the Instrument
What Programming Information is Available?
What Programming Information is Available?
The X-Series Documentation can be accessed through the Additional
Documentation page in the instrument Help system and is included on the
Documentation DVD shipped with the instrument. It can also be found online at:
http://www.keysight.com/find/mxa_manuals.
The following resources are available to help you create programs for automating XSeries measurements:
Resource
Description
X-Series
Programmer's
Guide
Provides general SCPI programming information on the following topics:
– Programming the X-Series Applications
– Programming fundamentals
– Programming examples
Note that SCPI command descriptions for measurement applications are not in this
book, but are in the User's and Programmer's Reference.
User's and
Programmer's
Reference
manuals
Describes all front-panel keys and softkeys, including SCPI commands for a
measurement application. Note that:
– Each measurement application has its own User's and Programmer's Reference.
– The content in this manual is duplicated in the instrument's Help (the Help that
you see for a key is identical to what you see in this manual).
Embedded
Help in your
instrument
Describes all front-panel keys and softkeys, including SCPI commands, for a
measurement application. Note that the content that you see in Help when you press
a key is identical to what you see in the User's and Programmer's Reference.
X-Series
Getting
Started Guide
Provides valuable sections related to programming including:
– Licensing New Measurement Application Software - After Initial Purchase
– Configuring instrument LAN Hostname, IP Address, and Gateway Address
– Using the Windows XP Remote Desktop to connect to the instrument remotely
– Using the Embedded Web Server Telnet connection to communicate SCPI
This printed document is shipped with the instrument.
81
Keysight
Application
Notes
Printable PDF versions of pertinent application notes.
Keysight VISA
User's Guide
Describes the Keysight Virtual Instrument Software Architecture (VISA) library and
shows how to use it to develop I/O applications and instrument drivers on Windows
PCs.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
3 Programming the Instrument
List of Supported SCPI Commands
List of Supported SCPI Commands
When the N9061A application has been selected, the X-Series instrument supports
only a small subset of SCPI commands.
The SCPI commands available while using the N9061A application are listed below.
(Non-SCPI commands for legacy analyzers are not listed here; see instead "List of
Legacy Analyzer Commands" on page 86.)
SCPI commands other than these may be mentioned in descriptions of front-panel
keys in this guide. Those commands are supported in other modes, but N9061A
supports only the commands listed in this section.
To find a command in the list, search according to its first alphanumeric character,
ignoring any leading ":" or "[" characters. The sole exception to this is the asterisk [*]
prefix, identifying IEEE 488.2 Common commands and queries; all these appear at
the start of the list.
*
*IDN?
"Identification Query " on page 84
*RST
"*RST (Remote Command Only)" on page 84
*TRG
"Trigger " on page 85
*WAI
"Wait-to-Continue " on page 85
I
:ID?
Also a legacy command. See "ID (Identify)" on page
239.
:INPut:COUPling
"RF Coupling" on page 507
:INPut:COUPling?
:INSTrument:DEFault
"Restore Mode Defaults" on page 667
:INSTrument:NSELect
"Application Mode Number Selection (Remote
Command Only)" on page 654
:INSTrument:NSELect?
Specify parameter 266 to select N9061A
:INSTrument[:SELect]
"Mode" on page 641
:INSTrument[:SELect]?
Specify parameter RLC to select N9061A
S
[:SENSe]:RLC:ATTenuation:STATe
"Atten Offset" on page 666
[:SENSe]:RLC:ATTenuation:STATe?
[:SENSe]:RLC:BANDwidth:LIMit
"Limit RBW/VBW" on page 664
[:SENSe]:RLC:BANDwidth:LIMit?
[:SENSe]:RLC:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
"Swp Type Rule" on page 666
82
3 Programming the Instrument
List of Supported SCPI Commands
[:SENSe]:RLC:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes?
[:SENSe]:RLC:SWEep:TIME:LIMit ON|OFF
"Limit Swp Time" on page 667
[:SENSe]:RLC:SWEep:TIME:LIMit?
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE FFT|SWEep
"Sweep Type" on page 762
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE AUTO
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE SWP
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE?
83
:SYSTem:LANGuage
"Mode Setup" on page 661
:SYSTem LANGuage?
This command is only available if N9061A is
installed
:SYSTem:OPTions?
"List installed Options (Remote Command
Only)" on page 850
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
3 Programming the Instrument
IEEE 488.2 Common Commands
IEEE 488.2 Common Commands
N9061A supports only the following subset of IEEE 488.2 Common Commands, as
defined in Chapter 10 of IEEE Standard 488.2–1992. As indicated in the detailed
description of each command, some of these commands correspond directly to
instrument front-panel key functionality, while others are available only as remote
commands.
Commands
Description
*IDN?
"Identification Query " on page 84
*RST
"*RST (Remote Command Only)" on page 84
*TRG
"Trigger " on page 85
*WAI
"Wait-to-Continue " on page 85
Identification Query
Returns a string of instrument identification information. The string will contain the
model number, serial number, and firmware revision.
The response is organized into four fields separated by commas. The field definitions
are as follows:
– Manufacturer
– Model
– Serial number
– Firmware version
Key Path
No equivalent key. See related key System, Show System.
Remote Command
*IDN?
Example
*IDN? Returns instrument identification information, such as:
Keysight Technologies, N9020A, US01020004, A.01.02
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
*RST (Remote Command Only)
*RST is equivalent to :SYST:PRES;:INIT:CONT OFF, which is a Mode Preset in the
Single measurement state. This remote command is preferred over Mode Preset
remote command - :SYST:PRES, as optimal remote programming occurs with the
instrument in the single measurement state.
Remote Command
*RST
Example
*RST
Notes
Sequential
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
84
3 Programming the Instrument
IEEE 488.2 Common Commands
Clears all pending OPC bits and the Status Byte is set to 0.
Couplings
*RST causes the currently running measurement to be aborted and causes the default
measurement to be active. *RST gets the mode to a consistent state with all of the default
couplings set.
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
In legacy analyzers *RST did not set the analyzer to Single, but in the X-Series it does, for
compliance with the IEEE 488.2 specification.
In the X-Series, *RST does not do a *CLS (clear the status bits and the error queue). In legacy
analyzers, *RST used to do the equivalent of SYSTem:PRESet, *CLS and INITiate:CONTinuous
OFF. But to be 488.2 compliant, *RST in the X-Series does not do a *CLS.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Trigger This command triggers the instrument. Use the :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce
command to select the trigger source.
Key Path
No equivalent key. See related keys Single and Restart.
Remote Command
*TRG
Example
*TRG Triggers the instrument to take a sweep or start a measurement, depending on the current
instrument settings.
Notes
See related command :INITiate:IMMediate.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Wait-to-Continue
This command causes the instrument to wait until all overlapped commands are
completed before executing any additional commands. There is no query form for the
command.
85
Remote Command
*WAI
Example
INIT:CONT OFF; INIT;*WAI Sets the instrument to single sweep. Starts a sweep and waits for its
completion.
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Not global to all remote ports or front panel. *OPC only considers operation that was initiated on
the same port as the *OPC command was issued from.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
The following table ("Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands" on page 88) lists all
legacy analyzer programming commands (that is, commands for 8566A/B, 8568A/B,
and the 8560 Series), and indicates which are supported by N9061A.
For more detailed information about each supported command, click on the link in the
"More Information" column of the table to go to the relevant section in the "Legacy
Command Descriptions" on page 122
(SCPI commands supported by N9061A are not listed here; see instead "List of
Supported SCPI Commands" on page 82.)
86
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Key to Table Columns "8566", "8568", and "8560 Series"
Key to Table Columns "8566", "8568", and "8560 Series"
The entries in these columns have the following significance:
87
Entry
Significance
N/A
This command is not available in this legacy instrument.
No
This command is available in this legacy instrument, but is not supported by N9061A.
This situation may occur due to architectural differences between legacy and X-Series
instruments, which make support of the command either unnecessary or technically
unfeasible.
Yes
This command is available in this legacy instrument, and is supported by N9061A.
Ext
This is an "extension" command. It is supported by N9061A when emulating this legacy
instrument, but does not appear in the native command set of the legacy instrument.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
A1
Clear-writes trace
A
Yes
Yes
Yes
"A1 [one] (Clear Write for
Trace A)" on page 126
A2
Max Holds trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
"A2 [two] (Maximum Hold for
Trace A)" on page 127
A3
View trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
"A3 [three] (View Mode for
Trace A)" on page 128
A4
Blanks trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
"A4 [four] (Blank Trace A)" on
page 129
ABORT
Interrupt operation
of all user-defined
functions
N/A
N/A
No
ABS
Absolute
No
No
No
ACP
Performs the
adjacent channel
power
measurement
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACPACCL
Accelerate
adjacent channel
power
measurement
N/A
N/A
No
Not required in N9061A,
because ACP measurement is
faster than in legacy
analyzers
ACPALPHA
Adjacent channel
power alpha
weighting
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPALPHA (Adjacent
Channel Power Alpha
Weighting)" on page 130
ACPALTCH
Adjacent channel
power alternate
channels
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPALTCH (Adjacent
Channel Power Alternate
Channels)" on page 131
ACPBRPER
Adjacent channel
power burst period
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPBRPER (Adjacent
Channel Power Burst Period)"
on page 132
ACPBRWID
Adjacent channel
power burst width
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPBRWID (Adjacent
Channel Power Burst Width)"
on page 133
ACPBW
Specifies channel
bandwidth for ACP
measurement
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPBW (Adjacent Channel
Power Bandwidth)" on page
134
ACPCOMPUTE
Compute adjacent
channel power
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPCOMPUTE (Adjacent
Channel Power Compute)" on
page 135
ACPCONTM
Performs ACP
measurement in
N/A
N/A
N/A
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
88
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
continuous sweep
89
ACPE
Adjacent channel
power extended
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACPERR
ACP measurement
error query
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACPFRQWT
Adjacent channel
power frequency
weighting
N/A
N/A
Yes
ACPGR
Adjacent channel
power graph on or
off
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACPGRAPH
Compute adjacent
channel power
graph
N/A
N/A
No
ACPLOWER
Lower adjacent
channel power
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPLOWER (Lower Adjacent
Channel Power)" on page 137
ACPMAX
Maximum adjacent
channel power
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPMAX (Maximum
Adjacent Channel Power)" on
page 138
ACPMEAS
Measure adjacent
channel power
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPMEAS (Measure
Adjacent Channel Power)" on
page 139
ACPMETHOD
Adjacent channel
power
measurement
method
N/A
N/A
No
ACPMK
Adjacent channel
power marker on or
off
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACPMSTATE
Adjacent channel
power
measurement state
N/A
N/A
Yes
ACPPAR
ACP manual or
auto
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACPPWRTX
Total power
transmitted
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPPWRTX (Adjacent
Channel Power Total Power
Transmitted)" on page 142
ACPRSLTS
Adjacent channel
power
measurement
results
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPRSLTS (Adjacent
Channel Power Measurement
Results)" on page 143
ACPSNGLM
Performs ACP
N/A
N/A
N/A
"ACPFRQWT (Adjacent
Channel Power Frequency
Weighting)" on page 136
"ACPMSTATE (Adjacent
Channel Power Measurement
State)" on page 140
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
measurement in
single sweep
ACPSP
Channel spacing
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPSP (Adjacent Channel
Power Channel Spacing)" on
page 145
ACPT
Adjacent channel
power T weighting
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPT (Adjacent Channel
Power T Weighting)" on page
146
ACPUPPER
Upper adjacent
channel power
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPUPPER (Upper Adjacent
Channel Power)" on page 147
ACTDEF
Give user-defined
function active
status
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACTVF
Active function
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACTVFUNC
Creates a user
defined active
function
N/A
N/A
No
ADD
Add
No
No
No
ADJALL
LO & IF adjustment
N/A
N/A
Yes
ADJCRT
Adjust CRT
alignment
N/A
N/A
No
ADJIF
Adjust IF
N/A
N/A
No
AMB
Trace A - trace B > trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
"AMB (A minus B into A)" on
page 149
AMBPL
Trace A - trace B +
Display Line ->
trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
"AMBPL (A minus B plus
Display Line into A)" on page
150
AMPCOR
Applies amplitude
correction at
specified
frequencies
N/A
N/A
Yes
"AMPCOR" on page 151
AMPCORCFGCNT
Retrieves count of
AMPCOR settings
N/A
N/A
Ext
"AMPCORCFGCNT" on page
152
AMPCORCLEAR
Clears current
AMPCOR setting
N/A
N/A
Ext
"AMPCORCLEAR" on page
153
AMPCORDATA
Amplitude
correction data
N/A
N/A
Yes
"AMPCORDATA" on page 154
AMPCORRCL
Amplitude
correction recall
N/A
N/A
Yes
"AMPCORRCL" on page 155
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
"ADJALL (LO and IF
Adjustments)" on page 148
90
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
91
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
AMPCORRESET
Deletes all
AMPCOR settings
N/A
N/A
Ext
"AMPCORRESET" on page
156
AMPCORSAVE
Save amplitude
correction data
N/A
N/A
Yes
"AMPCORSAVE" on page 157
AMPCORSIZE
Amplitude
correction data
array size
N/A
N/A
Yes
"AMPCORSIZE" on page 158
AMPLEN
Amplitude
correction length
N/A
N/A
N/A
ANLGPLUS
Turns on or off the
Analog+ display
mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
ANNOT
Display Annotation
Yes
Yes
Yes
"ANNOT (Annotation)" on
page 159
APB
Trace A + trace B > trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
"APB (Trace A Plus Trace B
to A)" on page 160
ARRAYDEF
Defines an array
N/A
N/A
No
AT
Input Attenuation
Yes
Yes
Yes
"AT (Input Attenuation)" on
page 161
AUNITS
Amplitude Units
Yes
Yes
Yes
"AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude
Units)" on page 163
AUTO
Auto couple
N/A
N/A
N/A
AUTOCPL
Auto couple
N/A
N/A
Yes
AUTOEXEC
Turns on or off the
function defined
with AUTOFUNC
N/A
N/A
No
AUTOFUNC
Defines a function
for automatic
execution
N/A
N/A
No
AUTOSAVE
Automatically
saves trace
N/A
N/A
No
AVG
Average
No
No
No
AXB
Exchange Traces A
&B
Yes
Yes
Yes
"AXB (Exchange Trace A and
Trace B)" on page 166
B1
Clear-writes trace
B
Yes
Yes
Yes
"B1 [one] (Clear Write for
Trace B)" on page 167
B2
Max Holds trace B
Yes
Yes
Yes
"B2 [two] (Maximum Hold for
Trace B)" on page 168
B3
View trace B
Yes
Yes
Yes
"B3 [three] (View Mode for
"AUTOCPL (Auto Coupled)"
on page 165
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
Trace B)" on page 169
B4
Blanks trace B
Yes
Yes
Yes
BAUDRATE
Baud rate of
spectrum analyzer
N/A
N/A
N/A
BIT
Return or receive
state of bit
N/A
N/A
N/A
BITF
Bit flag
N/A
N/A
N/A
BL
Trace B - Display
line -> trace B
Yes
Yes
N/A
"BL (Trace B minus Display
Line to Trace B)" on page 171
BLANK
Blanks specified
trace
Yes
Yes
Yes
"BLANK (Blank Trace)" on
page 172
BML
Trace B - Display
line -> trace B
Yes
Yes
Yes
"BML (Trace B Minus Display
Line)" on page 173
BRD
Bus Read
No
No
N/A
BTC
Transfer trace B to
C
Yes
Yes
N/A
BWR
Bus Write
No
No
N/A
BXC
Exchange Traces B
&C
Yes
Yes
N/A
"BXC (Exchange Trace B and
Trace C)" on page 175
C1
Turns off A - B
Yes
Yes
Yes
"C1 [one] (Set A Minus B
Mode Off)" on page 176
C2
A - B -> A
Yes
Yes
Yes
"C2 [two] (A Minus B Into A)"
on page 177
CA
Couples
Attenuation
Yes
Yes
Yes
"CA (Couple Attenuation)" on
page 178
CAL
Calibrate
N/A
N/A
N/A
CARDLOAD
Copies data from
memory card to
module memory
N/A
N/A
No
CARDSTORE
Copies data to
memory card
N/A
N/A
No
CARROFF
Carrier off power
N/A
N/A
Yes
"CARROFF (Carrier Off
Power)" on page 179
CARRON
Carrier on power
N/A
N/A
Yes
"CARRON (Carrier On Power)"
on page 180
CAT
Catalog
N/A
N/A
N/A
CATALOG
Catalog
N/A
N/A
No
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
"B4 [four] (Blank Trace B)" on
page 170
"BTC (Transfer Trace B to
Trace C)" on page 174
92
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
93
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
CF
Center Frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
"CF (Center Frequency)" on
page 181
CHANNEL
Channel selection
N/A
N/A
Yes
"CHANNEL (Channel
Selection)" on page 183
CHANPWR
Channel power
N/A
N/A
Yes
"CHANPWR (Channel Power)"
on page 184
CHP
Performs the
channel power
measurement
N/A
N/A
N/A
CHPGR
Channel power
graph on or off
N/A
N/A
N/A
CHPWRBW
Channel power
bandwidth
N/A
N/A
Yes
"CHPWRBW (Channel Power
Bandwidth)" on page 185
CLRAVG
Reset avg. counter
to 1
Yes
Yes
N/A
"CLRAVG (Clear Average)" on
page 186
CLRBOX
Clears a
rectangular area
on the analyzer
display
N/A
N/A
N/A
CLRDSP
Clear display
N/A
N/A
No
CLRSCHED
Clears autosave &
autoexec schedule
buffer
N/A
N/A
No
CLRW
Clear-writes
specified trace
Yes
Yes
Yes
CLS
Clear status byte
N/A
N/A
N/A
CMDERRQ
Command error
query
N/A
N/A
N/A
CNF
Confidence test
N/A
N/A
N/A
CNTLA
Auxiliary interface
control line A
N/A
N/A
No
CNTLB
Auxiliary interface
control line B
N/A
N/A
No
CNTLC
Auxiliary interface
control line C
N/A
N/A
No
CNTLD
Auxiliary interface
control line D
N/A
N/A
No
CNTLI
Auxiliary interface
control line input
N/A
N/A
No
CNVLOSS
Selects ref level
N/A
N/A
Yes
"CLRW (Clear Write)" on
page 187
CNVLOSS
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
offset to calibrate
amplitude display
COMB
Turns the comb
generator on or off
N/A
N/A
N/A
COMPRESS
Compress
No
No
N/A
CONCAT
Concat
No
No
N/A
CONTS
Continuous sweep
mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
CORREK
Correction factors
on
N/A
N/A
N/A
COUPLE
Selects AC or DC
coupling
N/A
N/A
Yes
"COUPLE (Input Coupling)" on
page 190
CR
Couples Resolution
BW
Yes
Yes
Yes
"CR (Couple Resolution
Bandwidth)" on page 191
CRTHPOS
Horizontal position
of CRT display
N/A
N/A
N/A
CRTVPOS
Vertical position of
CRT display
N/A
N/A
N/A
CS
Couples Step Size
Yes
Yes
N/A
"CS (Couple Frequency Step
Size)" on page 192
CT
Couples Sweep
Time
Yes
Yes
N/A
"CT (Couple Sweep Time)" on
page 193
CTA
Converts display
units to dBm
No
No
N/A
CTM
Converts dBm to
display units
No
No
N/A
CTRLHPIB
Allows SA to
control HP-IB
N/A
N/A
No
CV
Couples Video
Bandwidth
Yes
Yes
N/A
D1
Sets display to
normal size
No
No
N/A
D2
Sets display to full
CRT size
No
No
N/A
D3
Sets display to
expanded size
No
No
N/A
DA
Display Memory
Address
Yes
Yes
N/A
DATEMODE
Set the date
N/A
N/A
No
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
"CONTS (Continuous Sweep)"
on page 189
"CV (Couple Video
Bandwidth)" on page 194
"DA (Display Address)" on
page 195
94
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
display format
95
DD
Display write
binary
No
No
N/A
DELMKBW
Occupied power
bandwidth within
delta marker
N/A
N/A
Yes
DEMOD
Turns the
demodulator on or
off
N/A
N/A
No
DEMODAGC
Demodulation
automatic gain
control
N/A
N/A
No
DEMODT
Demodulation time
N/A
N/A
No
DET
Detection Mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
DISPOSE
Frees Memory
No
No
No
DIV
Divide
No
No
No
DL
Display Line Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
"DL (Display Line)" on page
198
DLE
Turns the display
line on/off
Yes
Yes
N/A
"DLE (Display Line Enable)"
on page 200
DLYSWP
Delay sweep
N/A
N/A
Yes
"DLYSWP (Delay Sweep)" on
page 201
DN
Reduces the active
function by
applicable step
size
N/A
N/A
N/A
DONE
Synchronizing
function
Yes
Yes
Yes
DOTDENS
Sets the dot
density value in
Analog+ display
mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
DR
Display Memory
Address Read
Yes
Yes
N/A
DRAWBOX
Draws a
rectangular box on
analyzer display
N/A
N/A
N/A
DSPLY
Display
No
No
No
DT
Define Terminator
No
No
N/A
"DELMKBW (Occupied Power
Bandwidth Within Delta
Marker)" on page 196
"DET (Detection Mode)" on
page 197
"DONE (Done)" on page 202
"DR (Display Read)" on page
203
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
DW
Display Memory
Address Write
No
No
N/A
E1
Active marker to
maximum signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
"E1[one] (Peak Marker)" on
page 204
E2
Active marker to
center frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
"E2 [two] (Marker to Center
Frequency)" on page 205
E3
Active marker
frequency to CF
step size
Yes
Yes
Yes
"E3 [three] (Delta Marker
Step Size)" on page 206
E4
Active marker to
reference level
Yes
Yes
Yes
"E4 [four] (Marker to
Reference Level)" on page
207
EDITDONE
Indicates limit line
editing is complete
N/A
N/A
Yes
"EDITDONE (Edit Done)" on
page 208
EDITLIML
Allows current limit
line to be edited
N/A
N/A
No
"EDITLIML (Edit Limit Line)"
on page 209
EE
Enable entry
No
No
N/A
EK
Enable knob
No
No
N/A
ELSE
Conditional
Programming
(If…then…else…end
if)
No
No
No
EM
Erase trace C
memory
No
No
No
ENDIF
Conditional
Programming
(If…then…else…end
if)
No
No
N/A
ENTER
Enter from HP-IB
No
No
No
EP
Enter parameter
function
N/A
N/A
N/A
ERASE
User memory &
registers erased
N/A
No
N/A
ERR
Queries the error
queue
Yes
Yes
Yes
"ERR (Error)" on page 210
ET
Elapsed time
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ET (Elapsed Time)" on page
214
EX
Exchanges trace A
&B
Yes
Yes
Yes
"EX (Exchange Trace A and
Trace B)" on page 215
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
More Information
96
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
97
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
EXP
Exponential
No
No
No
EXTMXR
Presets external
mixing mode
No
N/A
No
FA
Start frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
"FA (Start Frequency)" on
page 216
FB
Stop frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
"FB (Stop Frequency)" on
page 218
FDIAG
Frequency
diagnostics
N/A
N/A
No
FDSP
Frequency display
off
N/A
N/A
Yes
FFT
Fast fourier
transform
No
No
No
FFTAUTO
Marker to Auto FFT
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTCLIP
FFT signal clipped
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTCONTS
FFT continuous
sweep
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTKNL
Fast fourier
transform kernel
No
No
N/A
FFTMKR
FFT markers
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTMM
FFT marker to
midscreen
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTMS
FFT marker to FFT
stop frequency
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTOFF
FFT off
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTPCTAM
FFT percent
amplitude
modulation
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTPCTAMR
FFT percent
amplitude
modulation readout
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTSNGLS
FFT single sweep
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTSTAT
FFT status
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTSTOP
FFT stop frequency
N/A
N/A
N/A
FMGAIN
FM gain
N/A
N/A
N/A
FOFFSET
Frequency offset
Yes
Yes
Yes
FORMAT
Erase & format the
selected memory
N/A
N/A
No
"FDSP (Frequency Display
Off)" on page 220
"FOFFSET (Frequency Offset)"
on page 221
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
device
FPKA
Fast preselector
peak
Yes
N/A
N/A
"FPKA (Fast Preselector
Peak)" on page 223
FREF
Frequency
reference
N/A
N/A
Yes
"FREF (Frequency Reference)"
on page 224
FS
Full frequency span
Yes
Yes
Yes
"FS (Full Span)" on page 225
FULBAND
Set start/stop freq
for ext mixing
bands
N/A
N/A
Yes
FULBAND
FUNCDEF
Function definition
No
No
No
GATE
Turn time-gating
on or off
N/A
N/A
Yes
"GATE (Gate)" on page 228
GATECTL
Gate control
N/A
N/A
Yes
"GATECTL (Gate Control)" on
page 229
GC
Gate preset
N/A
N/A
N/A
GD
Gate delay
N/A
N/A
Yes
GDRVCLPAR
Clear pulse
parameters
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVGDEL
Gate Delay for the
frequency window
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVGLEN
Gate length for
frequency & time
windows
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVGT
Turns gate in
frequency window
on or off
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVGTIM
Gate trigger to
marker position for
time window
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVPRI
Pulse repetition
interval
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVPWID
Pulse width
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVRBW
Couple resolution
bandwidth to pulse
width
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVREFE
Enter reference
edge
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVST
Couple sweep time
N/A
N/A
N/A
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
"GD (Gate Delay)" on page
230
98
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
to pulse repetition
interval
99
GDRVSWAP
Update the time or
frequency window
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVSWDE
Delay sweep for
time window
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVSWP
Sweep time for the
time window
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVUTIL
Turns the gate
utility on or off
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVVBW
Couple video
bandwidth to the
gate length
N/A
N/A
N/A
GETPLOT
Get plot
N/A
N/A
N/A
GETPRNT
Get print
N/A
N/A
N/A
GL
Gate length
N/A
N/A
Yes
"GL (Gate Length)" on page
231
GP
Sets the polarity
(positive/negative)
of the gate trigger
N/A
N/A
Yes
"GP (Gate Polarity)" on page
232
GR
Plot GPIB input as
Graphs
No
No
N/A
GRAT
Graticule on/off
Yes
Yes
Yes
HAVE
Checks for options
installed
N/A
N/A
N/A
HD
Holds data entry
Yes
Yes
Yes
HN
Harmonic number
N/A
N/A
N/A
HNLOCK
Harmonic lock
N/A
N/A
Yes
HNUNLK
Harmonic band
unlock
No
N/A
No
I1
Sets the RF
coupling to AC
N/A
Yes
N/A
"I1 [one] (Set RF Coupling to
DC)" on page 235
I2
Sets the RF
coupling to DC
N/A
Yes
N/A
"I2 [two] (Set RF Coupling to
AC)" on page 237
IB
Input to trace B
memory
No
No
N/A
ID
Instrument
identification
Yes
Yes
Yes
"GRAT (Graticule)" on page
233
"HD (Hold Data Entry)" on
page 234
HNLOCK
"ID (Identify)" on page 239
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
IDCF
Identified signal to
center frequency
N/A
N/A
No
IDFREQ
Identified signal
frequency
N/A
N/A
No
IDSTAT
Signal identifier
status
No
N/A
N/A
IF
Conditional
Programming
(If…then…else…end
if)
No
No
No
IFTKNL
16 bit discrete
fourier transform
No
No
N/A
INT
Integer
No
No
No
INZ
Input impedance
N/A
N/A
N/A
IP
Instrument preset
Yes
Yes
Yes
KEYCLR
Clear user defined
keys
N/A
N/A
No
KEYCMD
Define function &
label of softkey
N/A
N/A
N/A
KEYDEF
Assign function to
soft key
No
No
No
KEYENH
Key enhance
N/A
N/A
N/A
KEYEXC
Executes specified
soft key
No
No
N/A
KEYLBL
Relabels softkey
without changing
its function
N/A
N/A
N/A
KS,
Mixer level
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KS, (Mixer Level)" on page
241
KS=
HP8566: Selects
factory preselector
setting
HP8568: Marker
counter frequency
resolution
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KS= (8566A/B: Automatic
Preselector Tracking,
8568A/B: Marker Counter
Resolution)" on page 242
KS(
Locks the save
registers
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KS( (Lock Registers)" on
page 243
KS)
Unlocks the save
registers
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KS) (Unlock Registers)" on
page 244
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
More Information
"IP (Instrument Preset)" on
page 240
100
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
101
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
KS>
Specifies preamp
gain for signal
input 2
N/A
No
N/A
KS<
Specifies preamp
gain for signal
input 1
N/A
No
N/A
KS|
Display memory
address write
No
No
N/A
KS#
Turns off YTX selfheating correction
No
N/A
N/A
KS/
Allows preselector
to be peaked
manually
No
N/A
N/A
KS39
Writes display
memory address in
fast binary
No
No
N/A
KS43
Sets SRQ 102
when frequency
limit exceeded
No
No
N/A
KS91
Returns the
amplitude error
No
No
N/A
KS92
Specifies value DL,
TH, active mkr in
display units
No
No
N/A
KS94
Returns code for
harmonic number
in binary
No
No
N/A
KS123
Returns up to 1001
words display
memory
No
No
N/A
KS125
Writes up to 1001
display memory
words
No
No
N/A
KS126
Returns every Nth
value of a trace
No
No
N/A
KS127
Sets analyzer to
accept binary
display write
No
No
N/A
KSA
Sets amplitude
units to dBm
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSA (Amplitude in dBm)" on
page 245
KSa
Selects normal
detection
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSa (Normal Detection)" on
page 246
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
KSB
Sets amplitude
units to dBmV
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSB (Amplitude in dBmV)"
on page 247
KSb
Selects positive
peak detection
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSb (Positive Peak
Detection)" on page 248
KSC
Sets amplitude
units to dBuV
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSC (Amplitude in dBμV)" on
page 249
KSc
Trace A + trace B > trace A
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSc (A Plus B to A)" on page
250
KSD
Sets amplitude
units to V
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSD (Amplitude in Volts)" on
page 251
KSd
Selects negative
peak detection
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSd (Negative Peak
Detection)" on page 252
KSE
Sets the analyzer
title mode
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSE (Title Mode)" on page
253
KSe
Selects sample
detection
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSe (Sample Detection)" on
page 254
KSF
HP8566: Shifts the
YTO
HP8568: Measures
the Sweep Time
No
No
N/A
KSf
Recover last
instrument state at
power on
No
No
N/A
KSG
Turns on video
averaging
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSG (Video Averaging On)"
on page 255
KSg
Turns off the
display
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSg (Display Off)" on page
256
KSH
Turns off video
averaging
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSH (Video Averaging Off)"
on page 257
KSh
Turns on the
display
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSh (Display On)" on page
258
KSI
Allows the
reference level to
be extended
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSI (Extend Reference
Level)" on page 259
KSi
Exchanges traces B
&C
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSi (Exchange Trace B and
Trace C)" on page 260
KSJ
Manual control of
DACs
No
No
N/A
KSj
Views trace C
Yes
Yes
N/A
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
"KSj (View Trace C)" on page
261
102
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
103
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
KSK
HP8566: Active
Mkr to next highest
peak
HP8568: Counts
pilot IF at marker
Yes
No
N/A
"KSK (Marker to Next Peak)"
on page 262
KSk
Blanks trace C
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSk (Blank Trace C)" on
page 263
KSL
Turns off marker
noise function
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSL (Marker Noise Off)" on
page 264
KSl
Moves trace B into
trace C
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSl (Transfer Trace B to
Trace C)" on page 265
KSM
Turns on marker
noise function
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSM (Marker Noise On)" on
page 266
KSm
Turns off the
graticule
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSm (Graticule Off)" on page
267
KSN
Marker minimum
value detected
Yes
No
N/A
"KSN (Marker Minimum)" on
page 268
KSn
Turns on the
graticule
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSn (Graticule On)" on page
269
KSO
Marker span
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSO (Marker Span)" on page
270
KSo
Turns off the
annotation
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSo (Annotation Off)" on
page 271
KSP
GPIB address
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSP (GPIB Address)" on
page 272
KSp
Turns on the
annotation
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSp (Annotation On)" on
page 273
KSQ
Unlocks frequency
band
No
No
N/A
KSq
Decouples IF gain
and input
attenuation
No
No
N/A
KSR
Turns on service
diagnostics
No
No
N/A
KSr
Sets service
request 102
No
No
N/A
KSS
HP8566: Fast GPIB
operation
HP8568:
Determine second
LO frequency
No
No
N/A
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
KST
HP8566: Fast
preset
HP8568: Shifts
second LO down
Yes
No
N/A
"KST (Fast Preset)" on page
274
KSt
HP8566: Locks
frequency band
HP8568: Continues
sweep from marker
No
No
N/A
KSU
HP8566: External
mixer preset
HP8568: Shift
second LO up
No
No
N/A
KSu
Stops the sweep at
the active marker
No
No
N/A
KSV
Frequency offset
Yes
Yes
N/A
KSv
HP8566: External
mixer frequency
identifier
HP8568: Inhibits
phase lock
No
No
N/A
KSW
Amplitude error
correction routine
No
No
N/A
KSw
Displays amplitude
error correction
routine
No
No
N/A
KSX
Amplitude
correction factors
on
No
No
N/A
KSx
Sets trigger mode
to external
Yes
Yes
N/A
KSY
Amplitude
correction factors
off
No
No
N/A
KSy
Sets trigger mode
to video
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSy (Video Trigger)" on page
277
KSZ
Reference level
offset
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSZ (Reference Level
Offset)" on page 278
KSz
Sets the display
storage address
No
No
N/A
L0
Turns off the
Yes
Yes
Yes
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
"KSV (Frequency Offset)" on
page 275
"KSx (External Trigger)" on
page 276
"L0 [zero] (Display Line Off)"
104
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
display line
105
More Information
on page 279
LB
Writes text label
No
No
No
LCLVAR
Defines a local
variable for use
N/A
N/A
No
LF
Preset 0-2.5GHz
Yes
N/A
N/A
"LF (Low Frequency Preset)"
on page 280
LG
Selects log scale
Yes
Yes
Yes
"LG (Logarithmic Scale)" on
page 281
LIMD
Delta amplitude
value for limit line
segment
N/A
N/A
Yes
LIMF
Frequency value for
limit-line segment
N/A
N/A
Yes
LIMIDEL
Erase contents of
limit line table
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMIDISP
Controls when the
limit line(s) are
displayed
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMIFAIL
Limit line fail
N/A
N/A
Yes
LIMIFT
Select frequency or
time limit line
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMIHI
Upper limit
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMILINE
Limit line
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMILO
Lower limit
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMIMIRROR
Mirror limit line
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMIMODE
Limit line entry
mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMIPURGE
Disposes of current
limit line, not limit
line table
N/A
N/A
Yes
"LIMIPURGE (Delete Current
Limit Line)" on page 285
LIMIRCL
Load stored limit
line into limit line
table
N/A
N/A
Yes
"LIMIRCL (Recall Limit Line)"
on page 286
LIMIREL
Determine whether
limit line values
absolute/relative
N/A
N/A
Yes
"LIMIREL (Relative Limit
Lines)" on page 287
LIMISAV
Save contents of
limit line table for
recall
N/A
N/A
Yes
"LIMISAV (Save Limit Line)"
on page 288
"LIMF (Limit Line Frequency
Value)" on page 282
"LIMIFAIL (Limits Failed)" on
page 283
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
LIMISEG
Define slope &
offset of limit line
segments
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMISEGT
Enter limit line
segment for sweep
time
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMITST
Compare active
trace data to limit
line parameters
N/A
N/A
Yes
"LIMITST (Activate Limit Line
Test Function)" on page 291
LIML
Amplitude value for
limit line segment
in lower limit line
N/A
N/A
Yes
"LIML (Lower-Limit
Amplitude)" on page 289
LIMM
Middle amplitude
value for limit-line
segment
N/A
N/A
Yes
LIMTFL
Specifies a flat
limit-line segment
N/A
N/A
Yes
"LIMTFL (Flat Limit Line)" on
page 290
LIMTSL
Specifies a sloped
limit-line segment
N/A
N/A
Yes
"LIMTSL (Slope Limit Line)"
on page 292
LIMU
Amplitude value for
limit line segment
in upper limit line
N/A
N/A
Yes
"LIMU (Upper-Limit
Amplitude)" on page 293
LINFILL
Line fill
N/A
N/A
N/A
LL
Provides lower left
recorder output
voltage at rear
No
No
N/A
LN
Selects linear
scale
Yes
Yes
Yes
LOAD
Load article/file
into internal
memory
N/A
N/A
N/A
LOG
Log
No
No
No
LOLIMOFF
LO Limit Off
No
No
N/A
LSPAN
Last span
N/A
N/A
N/A
M1
Turns off all
markers
Yes
Yes
N/A
"M1 [one] (Marker Off)" on
page 295
M2
Marker Normal
Yes
Yes
N/A
"M2 [two] (Marker Normal)"
on page 296
M3
Marker Delta
Yes
Yes
N/A
"M3 [three] (Delta Marker)"
on page 298
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
More Information
"LN (Linear Scale)" on page
294
106
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
107
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
M4
Marker zoom
Yes
Yes
N/A
"M4 [four] (Marker Zoom)" on
page 300
MA
Returns the
amplitude of active
marker
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MA (Marker Amplitude
Output)" on page 301
MBIAS
Mixer bias
No
No
N/A
MBRD
Processor memory
block read
No
No
N/A
MBWR
Processor memory
block write
No
No
N/A
MC0
Turns off the
marker frequency
counter
N/A
Yes
N/A
"MC0 [zero]
(Marker Frequency Counter O
ff)" on page 302
MC1
Turns on the
marker frequency
counter
N/A
Yes
N/A
"MC1 [one]
(Marker Frequency Counter O
n)" on page 303
MDS
Measurement data
size
Yes
Yes
N/A
"MDS (Measurement Data
Size)" on page 304
MDU
Measurement data
units
Yes
Yes
N/A
"MDU (Measurement Data
Units)" on page 305
MEAN
Returns mean
value of trace in
display units
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MEAN (Trace Mean)" on
page 306
MEANPWR
Mean power
measurement
N/A
N/A
Yes
"MEANPWR (Mean Power
measurement)" on page 307
MEANTH
Trace mean above
threshold
N/A
N/A
N/A
MEAS
Measurement
status
Yes
Yes
Yes
MEASOFF
Measurement off
No
No
N/A
MEASURE
Measure mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
MEM
Returns amount of
memory available
No
No
No
MENU
Menu
N/A
N/A
No
MERGE
Merge two traces
No
No
N/A
MF
Returns frequency
of the active
marker
Yes
Yes
Yes
MIN
Minimum
No
No
No
MINH
Min Hold
N/A
N/A
Yes
"MEAS (Meas)" on page 308
"MF (Marker Frequency
Output)" on page 309
"MINH (Minimum Hold)" on
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
page 310
MINPOS
Returns the
minimum position
in the trace
Yes
Yes
N/A
MIRROR
Mirror image of the
trace
No
No
N/A
MKA
Amplitude of the
active marker
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MKA (Marker Amplitude)" on
page 312
MKACT
Specifies the
active marker
Yes
Yes
N/A
"MKACT (Activate Marker)"
on page 313
MKACTV
Marker as the
active function
N/A
N/A
N/A
MKBW
Marker bandwidth
N/A
N/A
Yes
"MKBW (Marker Bandwidth)"
on page 314
MKCF
Moves the active
marker to center
frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MKCF (Marker to Center
Frequency)" on page 315
MKCHEDGE
Marker to channel
edge
N/A
N/A
No
MKCONT
Continues
sweeping from the
marker after stop
No
No
N/A
MKD
Delta marker
Yes
Yes
Yes
MKDELCHBW
Delta markers to
channel power
bandwidth
N/A
N/A
No
MKDLMODE
Marker delta
display line mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
MKDR
Reciprocal of
marker delta
N/A
N/A
No
MKF
Specifies the
frequency of the
active marker
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MKF (Marker Frequency)" on
page 318
MKFC
Turns the marker
frequency counter
on or off
N/A
Yes
Yes
"MKFC (Marker Counter)" on
page 320
MKFCR
Specifies the
marker frequency
counter resolution
N/A
Yes
Yes
"MKFCR (Marker Counter
Resolution)" on page 321
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
"MINPOS (Minimum X
Position)" on page 311
"MKD (Marker Delta)" on
page 316
108
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
109
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
MKMCF
Marker mean to
center frequency
N/A
N/A
No
MKMIN
Moves active
marker to minimum
signal detected
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MKMIN (Marker Minimum)"
on page 323
MKN
Normal marker
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MKN (Marker Normal)" on
page 324
MKNOISE
Marker noise
function
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MKNOISE (Marker Noise)"
on page 326
MKOFF
Turns all markers
or the active
marker off
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MKOFF (Marker Off)" on
page 327
MKP
Specifies the
horizontal position
of the marker
Yes
Yes
N/A
"MKP (Marker Position)" on
page 328
MKPAUSE
Pauses the sweep
at the active
marker
No
No
N/A
MKPK
Marker peak
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MKPK (Marker Peak)" on
page 329
MKPT
Marker peak
threshold
N/A
N/A
Yes
"MKPT (Marker Threshold)"
on page 330
MKPX
Marker peak
excursion
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MKPX (Marker Peak
Excursion)" on page 331
MKREAD
Specifies marker
readout mode
Yes
Yes
N/A
"MKREAD (Marker Readout)"
on page 332
MKRL
Moves the active
marker to
reference level
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MKRL (Marker to Reference
Level)" on page 334
MKSP
Marker span
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MKSP (Marker Span)" on
page 335
MKSS
Marker step size
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MKSS (Marker to Step
Size)" on page 336
MKSTOP
Stops the sweep at
the active marker
No
No
N/A
MKT
Position marker in
units of time
N/A
N/A
Yes
MKTBL
Marker table
N/A
N/A
N/A
MKTRACE
Marker trace
Yes
Yes
N/A
"MKT (Marker Time)" on page
337
"MKTRACE (Marker Trace)"
on page 338
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
MKTRACK
Turns the marker
signal track on or
off
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MKTRACK (Marker Track)"
on page 339
MKTYPE
Specifies the type
of active marker to
be used
Yes
Yes
N/A
"MKTYPE (Marker Type)" on
page 340
ML
Mixer Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
"ML (Mixer Level)" on page
341
MOD
Modulo
No
No
No
MODRCLT
Recalls trace from
module memory
N/A
N/A
No
MODSAVT
Saves trace in
module memory
N/A
N/A
No
MOV
Move
No
No
No
MPY
Multiply
No
No
No
MRD
Memory Read
No
No
N/A
MRDB
Memory read byte
No
No
N/A
MSDEV
Specifies mass
storage device
N/A
N/A
No
MSI
Mass storage
interface
N/A
N/A
N/A
MT0
Turns off marker
signal track
Yes
Yes
N/A
"MT0 [zero] (Marker Track
Off)" on page 343
MT1
Turns on marker
signal track
Yes
Yes
N/A
"MT1 [one] (Marker Track
On)" on page 344
MWR
Memory Write
No
No
N/A
MWRB
Memory write byte
No
No
N/A
MXM
Maximum
No
No
No
MXMH
Max Hold
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MXMH (Maximum Hold)" on
page 345
MXRMODE
Mixer mode
N/A
N/A
Yes
MXRMODE
NDB
Number of dB
N/A
N/A
N/A
NDBPNT
Turns the N dB
points function on
or off
N/A
N/A
N/A
NDBPNTR
N dB points
bandwidth
N/A
N/A
N/A
NORMLIZE
Normalize trace
N/A
N/A
Yes
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
"NORMLIZE (Normalize Trace
110
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
data
111
More Information
Data)" on page 346
NRL
Normalized
reference level
N/A
N/A
Yes
"NRL (Normalized Reference
Level)" on page 348
NRPOS
Normalized
reference position
N/A
N/A
Yes
"NRPOS (Normalized
Reference Position)" on page
349
NSTART
Start harmonic
No
N/A
N/A
NSTOP
Stop harmonic
No
N/A
N/A
O1
Output format
Yes
Yes
N/A
"O1 [one] (Format - Display
Units)" on page 350
O2
Output format
Yes
Yes
N/A
"O2 [two] (Format - Two 8-Bit
Bytes)" on page 351
O3
Output format
Yes
Yes
N/A
"O3 [three] (Format - Real
Amplitude Units)" on page
352
O4
Output format
Yes
Yes
N/A
"O4 [four] (Format - One 8-Bit
Byte)" on page 353
OA
Returns the active
function value
Yes
Yes
N/A
"OA or ? (Query Active
Function)" on page 354
OBW
Occupied
bandwidth
N/A
N/A
N/A
OBWBW
Bandwidth
measured by
occupied
bandwidth
N/A
N/A
N/A
OBWFERR
Occupied
bandwidth transmit
frequency error
N/A
N/A
N/A
OBWLOWER
Relative lower
frequency limit of
occupied
bandwidth
N/A
N/A
N/A
OBWPCT
Occupied
bandwidth percent
N/A
N/A
N/A
OBWPWR
Total power in the
occupied
bandwidth
N/A
N/A
N/A
OBWUPPER
Relative upper
frequency limit of
occupied
bandwidth
N/A
N/A
N/A
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
OCCUP
Percent occupied
power bandwidth
N/A
N/A
Yes
"OCCUP (Percent Occupied
Power Bandwidth)" on page
355
OL
Output learn string
Yes
Yes
N/A
"OL (Output Learn String)" on
page 356
ONCYCLE
On cycle
N/A
N/A
N/A
ONDELAY
On delay
N/A
N/A
N/A
ONEOS
On end of sweep
No
No
No
ONMKR
On marker pause
N/A
N/A
N/A
ONMKRU
On marker update
N/A
N/A
N/A
ONPWRUP
On power up
N/A
N/A
N/A
ONSRQ
On service request
N/A
N/A
N/A
ONSWP
On sweep
No
No
N/A
ONTIME
On time
N/A
N/A
N/A
OP
Output parameters
No
No
No
OR
Set position of
origin
N/A
N/A
No
OT
Output trace
annotations
Yes
Yes
N/A
OUTPUT
Output - sending
data to the GPIB
from function
No
No
No
PA
Plot absolute
No
No
No
PARSTAT
Parallel status
N/A
N/A
N/A
PCTAM
Turns the percent
AM measurement
on or off
N/A
N/A
N/A
PCTAMR
Percent AM
response
N/A
N/A
N/A
PD
Pen down
No
No
No
PDA
Probability
distribution
amplitude
No
No
No
PDF
Probability
distribution
frequency
No
No
No
PEAKS
Sorts the signal
peaks by
Yes
Yes
Yes
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
"OT (Output Trace
Annotations)" on page 359
"PEAKS (Peaks)" on page 361
112
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
amplitude/frequen
cy
113
PKDLMODE
Peak table delta
display line mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
PKPOS
Peak position
N/A
Yes
N/A
PKRES
Peak result
N/A
N/A
N/A
PKSORT
Selects how to sort
signal peaks listed
in peak table
N/A
N/A
N/A
PKTBL
Turns the peak
table on or off
N/A
N/A
N/A
PKZMOK
Peak zoom okay
N/A
N/A
N/A
PKZOOM
Peak zoom
N/A
N/A
N/A
PLOT
Prints the screen
Yes
Yes
Yes
PLOTORG
Display origins
N/A
N/A
No
PLOTSRC
Plot source
N/A
N/A
No
PLTPRT
Plot port
N/A
N/A
N/A
POWERON
Power on state
N/A
N/A
N/A
PP
Peaks the
preselector
Yes
N/A
Yes
PR
Plot relative
No
No
No
PREAMPG
External
preamplifier gain
N/A
N/A
N/A
PREFX
Change user
memory entries file
prefix
N/A
N/A
N/A
PRINT
Print
N/A
N/A
Yes
PRNPRT
Print port
N/A
N/A
N/A
PRNTADRS
Print address
N/A
N/A
N/A
PS
Skip page
No
No
N/A
PSDAC
Preselector DAC
number
N/A
N/A
No
PSTATE
Protect state
N/A
N/A
No
PU
Pen up
No
No
No
PURGE
Purge file
N/A
N/A
N/A
PWRBW
Power bandwidth
Yes
Yes
Yes
"PKPOS (Peak Position)" on
page 362
"PLOT (Plot)" on page 363
"PP (Preselector Peak)" on
page 364
"PRINT (Print)" on page 365
"PWRBW (Power Bandwidth)"
on page 366
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
PWRUPTIME
Power up time
N/A
N/A
N/A
Q0
Sets detector to
EMI Peak
detection
N/A
Yes
N/A
"Q0 [zero] (Set Detector to
EMI Peak Detection)" on
page 367
Q1
Sets detector to
Quasi Peak
detection
N/A
Yes
N/A
"Q1 [one] (Set Detector to
Quasi Peak Detection)" on
page 368
R1
Resets service
request 140
Yes
Yes
N/A
"R1 [one] (Illegal Command
SRQ)" on page 369
R2
Allows service
request 140 & 104
Yes
Yes
N/A
"R2 [two] (End-of-Sweep
SRQ)" on page 370
R3
Allows service
request 140 & 110
Yes
Yes
N/A
"R3 [three] (Hardware Broken
SRQ)" on page 371
R4
Allows service
request 140 & 102
Yes
Yes
N/A
"R4 [four] (Units-Key-Pressed
SRQ)" on page 372
RB
Resolution
bandwidth
Yes
Yes
Yes
"RB (Resolution Bandwidth)"
on page 373
RBR
Resolution
bandwidth/Span
ratio
N/A
N/A
Yes
"RBR (Resolution Bandwidth
to Span Ratio)" on page 375
RC
Recalls state
register
Yes
Yes
Yes
"RC (Recall State)" on page
376
RCLOSCAL
Recall open/short
average
N/A
N/A
No
RCLS
Recall state
Yes
Yes
Yes
RCLT
Recall trace
N/A
N/A
No
RCLTHRU
Recall internal
thru-reference
trace into trace B
N/A
N/A
No
RELHPIB
Release control of
GPIB
N/A
N/A
No
REPEAT
Conditional
Programming
(Repeat ... Until …)
No
No
No
RESETRL
Reset reference
level
N/A
N/A
N/A
RETURN
Return to user
defined function
origination point
N/A
N/A
No
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
More Information
"RCLS (Recall State)" on
page 378
114
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
115
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
REV
Returns the
revision string to
the controller
Yes
Yes
Yes
"REV (Revision)" on page 379
RL
Reference level
Yes
Yes
Yes
"RL (Reference Level)" on
page 380
RLCAL
Reference level
calibration
N/A
N/A
No
RLPOS
Reference level
position
N/A
N/A
N/A
RMS
Root mean square
Yes
Yes
N/A
"RMS (Root Mean Square
Value)" on page 382
ROFFSET
Reference level
offset
Yes
Yes
Yes
"ROFFSET (Reference Level
Offset)" on page 383
RQS
SRQ mask
Yes
Yes
Yes
"RQS (Request Service
Conditions)" on page 385
S1
Continuous sweep
mode
Yes
Yes
N/A
"S1[one] (Continuous Sweep)"
on page 387
S2
Single sweep mode
Yes
Yes
N/A
"S2 [two] (Single Sweep)" on
page 388
SADD
Adds a limit line
segment
N/A
N/A
Yes
"SADD (Add Limit Line
Segment)" on page 389
SAVEMENU
Save menu
N/A
N/A
N/A
SAVES
Saves analyzer
state to specified
register
Yes
Yes
Yes
SAVET
Save trace
N/A
N/A
No
SAVRCLF
Save or recall flag
N/A
N/A
N/A
SAVRCLN
Save or recall
number
N/A
N/A
N/A
SAVRCLW
Save or recall data
N/A
N/A
N/A
SDEL
Deletes a limit line
segment
N/A
N/A
Yes
"SDEL (Delete Limit Line
Segment)" on page 391
SDON
Indicates limit line
segment is done
N/A
N/A
Yes
"SDON (Terminate
SEDI Command)" on page 392
SEDI
Edits limit line
segment
N/A
N/A
Yes
"SEDI (Edit Limit Line
Segment)" on page 393
SEGDEL
Delete specified
segment from limit
line tables
N/A
N/A
N/A
SENTER
Segment entry for
N/A
N/A
No
"SAVES (Save State)" on
page 390
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
frequency limit
lines
SENTERT
Segment entry for
sweep time limit
lines
N/A
N/A
N/A
SER
Serial number
N/A
N/A
Yes
"SER (Serial Number)" on
page 394
SETDATE
Set the date of
spectrum analyzer
N/A
N/A
Yes
"SETDATE (Set Date)" on
page 395
SETTIME
Set the time of
spectrum analyzer
N/A
N/A
Yes
"SETTIME (Set Time)" on
page 396
SHOWMENU
Shows menu
N/A
N/A
No
SIGDEL
Signal amplitude
delta
No
N/A
N/A
SIGID
External mixing
frequency bands
signal identifier
No
N/A
No
SKYCLR
Clears user softkey
N/A
N/A
No
SKYDEF
Defines user
softkey
N/A
N/A
No
SMOOTH
Smooths given
trace over
specified number
points
Yes
Yes
N/A
"SMOOTH (Smooth Trace)"
on page 397
SNGLS
Single sweep mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
"SNGLS (Single Sweep)" on
page 398
SP
Frequency Span
Yes
Yes
Yes
"SP (Frequency Span)" on
page 399
SPEAKER
Turns the internal
speaker on or off
N/A
N/A
N/A
SPZOOM
Span Zoom
N/A
N/A
N/A
SQLCH
Sets the squelch
threshold
N/A
N/A
N/A
SQR
Square root
No
No
No
SQUELCH
Adjusts squelch
level
N/A
N/A
No
SRCALC
Selects internal or
external level
control
N/A
N/A
No
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
116
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
117
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
SRCAT
Attenuate source
output level
N/A
N/A
N/A
SRCCRSTK
Coarse tracking
adjust
N/A
N/A
No
SRCFINTK
Fine tracking
adjust
N/A
N/A
No
SRCNORM
Source
normalization
N/A
N/A
N/A
SRCPOFS
Offset source
power level
N/A
N/A
No
SRCPSTP
Select source
power step size
N/A
N/A
No
SRCPSWP
Select sweep
range of source
output
N/A
N/A
No
SRCPWR
Select source
power level
N/A
N/A
No
SRCTK
Adjust tracking of
source output with
SA sweep
N/A
N/A
N/A
SRCTKPK
Auto adjust
tracking of source
output with SA
sweep
N/A
N/A
No
SRQ
Service request
Yes
Yes
Yes
"SRQ (Service Request)" on
page 401
SS
Frequency Step
Size
Yes
Yes
Yes
"SS (Center Frequency Step
Size)" on page 402
ST
Sweep Time
Yes
Yes
Yes
"ST (Sweep Time)" on page
404
STB
Status byte query
N/A
N/A
Yes
"STB (Status Byte Query)" on
page 406
STDEV
Standard deviation
of trace amplitude
Yes
Yes
N/A
"STDEV (Standard Deviation
of Trace Amplitudes)" on
page 407
STOR
Store file
N/A
N/A
N/A
STOREOPEN
Save current
instrument state
N/A
N/A
No
STORESHORT
Store short
N/A
N/A
No
STORETHRU
Store thrucalibration trace in
N/A
N/A
No
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
trace B
SUB
Subtract
No
No
No
SUM
Sum of trace
element
amplitudes in
display units
No
No
Yes
SUMSQR
Squares trace
element
amplitudes &
returns sum
No
No
No
SV
Saves state
Yes
Yes
N/A
SW
Skip to next
control instruction
No
No
N/A
SWPCPL
Sweep couple
N/A
N/A
Yes
SWPOUT
Sweep output
N/A
N/A
No
SYNCMODE
Synchronize mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
T0
Turns the threshold
level off
Yes
Yes
N/A
"T0 [zero] (Turn Off Threshold
Level)" on page 411
T1
Sets the trigger
mode to free run
Yes
Yes
N/A
"T1 [one] (Free Run Trigger)"
on page 412
T2
Sets the trigger
mode to line
Yes
Yes
N/A
"T2 [two] (Line Trigger)" on
page 413
T3
Sets the trigger
mode to external
Yes
Yes
N/A
"T3 [three] (External Trigger)"
on page 414
T4
Sets the trigger
mode to video
Yes
Yes
N/A
"T4 [four] (Video Trigger)" on
page 415
T7
Sets the trigger
mode to level
N/A
N/A
N/A
T8
Sets the trigger
mode to edge
N/A
N/A
N/A
TA
Returns trace A
amplitude values to
controller
Yes
Yes
N/A
"TA (Trace A)" on page 416
TB
Returns trace B
amplitude values to
controller
Yes
Yes
N/A
"TB (Trace B)" on page 417
TDF
Trace data format
Yes
Yes
Yes
"TDF (Trace Data Format)" on
page 418
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
"SUM (Sum)" on page 408
"SV (Save State)" on page
409
"SWPCPL (Sweep Couple)"
on page 410
118
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
119
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
TEXT
Writes text on the
analyzer screen
No
No
No
TH
Threshold
Yes
Yes
Yes
"TH (Threshold)" on page 419
THE
Turns the threshold
on or off
Yes
Yes
N/A
"THE (Threshold Enable)" on
page 421
THEN
Conditional
Programming
(If…then…else…end
if)
No
No
No
TIMEDATE
Allows setting of
time & date for
analyzer
N/A
N/A
Yes
TIMEDSP
Enables display of
time & data on
analyzer display
N/A
N/A
N/A
TITLE
Title entry
N/A
N/A
Yes
"TITLE (Title)" on page 423
TM
Trigger Mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
"TM (Trigger Mode)" on page
424
TOI
Third order
intermodulation
measurement
N/A
N/A
N/A
TOIR
Third order
intermodulation
response
N/A
N/A
N/A
TRA
Returns trace A
amplitude values to
controller
Yes
Yes
Yes
"TRA (Trace Data Input and
Output)" on page 426
TRB
Returns trace B
amplitude values to
controller
Yes
Yes
Yes
"TRB (Trace Data Input and
Output)" on page 427
TRC
Returns trace C
amplitude values to
controller
Yes
Yes
N/A
"TRC (Trace Data Input and
Output)" on page 428
TRCMEM
Trace C memory
N/A
N/A
N/A
TRDEF
Trace define
No
No
No
TRDSP
Trace display
Yes
Yes
N/A
TRGRPH
Trace graph display
No
No
N/A
TRIGPOL
Trigger polarity
N/A
N/A
Yes
"TIMEDATE (Time Date)" on
page 422
"TRDSP (Trace Display)" on
page 429
"TRIGPOL (Trigger Polarity)"
on page 430
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
TRMATH
Executes specified
trace math at end
of sweep
No
No
N/A
TRPRST
Sets trace
operations to their
preset values
No
No
N/A
TRSTAT
Returns current
trace states to
controller
Yes
Yes
N/A
"TRSTAT (Trace State)" on
page 431
TS
Takes a sweep
Yes
Yes
Yes
"TS (Take Sweep)" on page
432
TVLINE
Selects which
horizontal line of
video to trigger on
N/A
N/A
N/A
TVLSFRM
Selects the type of
video frame to
trigger on
N/A
N/A
N/A
TVSTND
TV standard
N/A
N/A
N/A
TVSYNC
Selects polarity of
video modulation
to trigger on
N/A
N/A
N/A
TWNDOW
Formats trace
information for FFT.
N/A
N/A
No
UNTIL
Conditional
Programming
(Repeat…Until…)
No
No
No
UP
Increases active
function value by
applicable step
N/A
N/A
N/A
UR
Upper right x-y
recorder output
voltage at rear
No
No
N/A
USERREV
Modifies response
to query "REV
(Revision)" on page
379
Ext
Ext
Ext
USTATE
Configures user
defined states
No
No
N/A
VARDEF
Variable definition
No
No
No
VARIANCE
Returns the
No
No
No
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
More Information
"USERREV" on page 433
120
4 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of Legacy Commands
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
amplitude variance
of specified trace
121
VAVG
Turns video
averaging on or off
Yes
Yes
Yes
"VAVG (Video Average)" on
page 434
VB
Video Bandwidth
Yes
Yes
Yes
"VB (Video Bandwidth)" on
page 436
VBO
Video Bandwidth
Coupling Offset
Yes
Yes
N/A
"VBO (Video Bandwidth
Coupling Offset)" on page 438
VBR
Video Bandwidth
Ratio
N/A
N/A
Yes
"VBR (Video Bandwidth to
Resolution Bandwidth Ratio)"
on page 439
VIEW
Stores and views
the specified trace
Yes
Yes
Yes
"VIEW (View Trace)" on page
440
VTL
Video trigger level
N/A
N/A
Yes
"VTL (Video Trigger Level)" on
page 442
WAIT
Suspend program
operation for
specified time
N/A
N/A
N/A
WINNEXT
Next window
N/A
N/A
N/A
WINOFF
Turns off the
window display
mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
WINON
Turns on the
window display
mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
WINZOOM
Window zoom
N/A
N/A
N/A
XCH
Exchanges the two
specified traces.
Yes
Yes
N/A
ZMKCNTR
Zone marker at
center frequency
N/A
N/A
N/A
ZMKPKNL
Zone marker for
next peak left
N/A
N/A
N/A
ZMKPKNR
Zone marker for
next peak right
N/A
N/A
N/A
ZMKSPAN
Zone marker span
N/A
N/A
N/A
"XCH (Exchange)" on page
443
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
This chapter describes all the supported 8560 Series, 8566A/B and 8568A/B
commands, and gives brief details of their syntax and operation. The commands are
sorted alphabetically. For more detailed information about these commands, see the
User’s Guides for the 8566A/B, 8568A/B, and 8560 Series.
For a summary of all commands, see "List of Legacy Analyzer Commands" on page 86.
For explanations of the entries in this chapter, see:
– "Command Syntax" on page 123
– "Command Description Notes" on page 125
122
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
Command Syntax
Command Syntax
Command syntax is represented pictorially.
– Ovals enclose command mnemonics. The command mnemonic must be entered
as shown, with the exception that the case can be upper or lower.
– Uppercase is recommended for entering all commands unless otherwise noted.
– Circles and ovals surround secondary keywords or special numbers and
characters. The characters in circles and ovals are considered reserved words
and must be entered as shown with the exception that the case can be upper or
lower.
– Rectangles contain the description of a syntax element defined in the table
below.
– A loop above a syntax element indicates that the syntax element can be
repeated.
– Solid lines represent the recommended path.
– Dotted lines indicate an optional path for bypassing secondary keywords or using
alternate units.
– Arrows and curved intersections indicate command path direction.
– Semicolons are the recommended command terminators. Using semicolons
makes programs easier to read, prevents command misinterpretation, and is
recommended by IEEE-728-1982 (Recommended Practice for code and Format
Conventions for IEEE Standard 488).
– Syntax Elements are shown in the syntax diagrams as elements within
rectangles. In the syntax diagrams, characters and secondary keywords are
shown within circles or ovals.
123
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
Command Syntax
Syntax Elements
Syntax
Component
Definition/Range
Analyzer
command
Any command in this chapter, with required parameters and terminators.
Character
SP a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z databyte.
Character
& EOI
8-bit byte containing only character data and followed by end-or-identify (EOI)
condition, where the EOI control line on GPIB is asserted to indicate the end of the
transmission. END signifies the EOI condition.
Character
string
A list of characters.
Data byte
8-bit byte containing numeric or character data.
Data byte &
EOI
8-bit byte containing numeric or character data followed by end-or-identify (EOI)
condition, where the EOI control line on GPIB is asserted to indicate the end of the
transmission. END signifies the EOI condition.
Delimiter
| \ @ ˆ $ % ; ! Matching characters that mark the beginning and end of a character
string, or a list of commands. Choose delimiting characters that are not used within the
string they delimit.
Digit
0123456789
lsb length
Represents the least significant byte of a two-byte word that describes the number of
bytes returned or transmitted. See msb length.
msb length
Represents the most significant byte of a two-byte word that describes the number of
bytes returned or transmitted. See lsb length.
Number
Expressed as integer, decimal, or in exponential (E) form.
Integer Number Range: –32,768 through +32,767
General formatting restrictions:
– Real Number Range: ± 1.797693134862315 x 10308, including 0
– Up to 15 significant figures allowed
– Numbers may be as small as ± 2.225073858507202 x 10–308
Output
termination
Line feed (LF) and end-or-identify (EOI) condition. ASCII code 10 (line feed) is sent via
GPIB and the end-or-identify control line on GPIB sets to indicate the end of the
transmission.
Units
Represent standard scientific units:
Frequency Units: GZ, GHZ, MZ, MHZ, KZ, KHZ, HZ
Amplitude Units: DB, DBMV, DM, DBM, DBUV, V, MV, UV, W, MW, UW
Time Units: SC, S, MS, US
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
124
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
Command Description Notes
Command Description Notes
All supported commands are listed here, with descriptions and cross-references to
similar commands.
The information here does not provide a comprehensive guide to all 8566A/B,
8568A/B, 8560 Series commands. It gives brief descriptions of the supported
commands, and highlights important functional or behavioral differences that you
should be aware of when transferring existing 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8560 Series code
to your X-Series instrument. For a complete description of the commands, refer to
the 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8560 Series Operating and Programming Manual.
To avoid confusion between numbers and letters, all commands that incorporate
numbers have the number spelled out and placed in square brackets after the
command. For example, the command I1 is shown as ‘I1 [one]’ - that is, the capital
letter ‘I’ followed by the number ‘1’, and then the word ‘one’ in square brackets. The
word in brackets does not form part of the command.
125
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
A1 [one] (Clear Write for Trace A)
A1 [one] (Clear Write for Trace A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets Trace A to clear write, which means that it continuously displays any signal
present at the instrument input. This command initially clears Trace A, setting all
elements to zero.
Format
A1
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of command A1 are identical to the command "CLRW
(Clear Write)" on page 187.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
126
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
A2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace A)
A2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Updates each trace element with the maximum level detected during the period that
the trace has been active.
127
Format
A2
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of the command A2 are identical to the MXMH TRA
command. See "MXMH (Maximum Hold)" on page 345.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
A3 [three] (View Mode for Trace A)
A3 [three] (View Mode for Trace A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Displays Trace A and then stops the sweep if no other traces are active. Trace A
does not get updated with new data.
Format
A3
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of the command A3 are identical to the VIEW TRA
command. See "VIEW (View Trace)" on page 440.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
128
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
A4 [four] (Blank Trace A)
A4 [four] (Blank Trace A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Blanks Trace A and stops the sweep if no other traces are active. Trace A is not
updated.
129
Format
A4
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent
Commands
None
Notes
The functions of the command A4 are identical to the BLANK TRA command.
See "BLANK (Blank Trace)" on page 172.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPALPHA (Adjacent Channel Power Alpha Weighting)
ACPALPHA (Adjacent Channel Power Alpha Weighting)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the alpha weighting for ACP measurements.
Format
ACPALPHA <real> (Valid Range from 0 to 1)
ACPALPHA?
Query Data Type
<real> (Valid Range from 0 to 1)
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Default – 0.35
Not affected by preset or Power Cycle
Couplings
Errors
Notes
The functions of the command A2 are identical to the MXMH TRA
command. See "MXMH (Maximum Hold)" on page 345.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
130
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPALTCH (Adjacent Channel Power Alternate Channels)
ACPALTCH (Adjacent Channel Power Alternate Channels)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the number of alternate channels to be measured by an adjacent channel
power measurement to either 0, 1, or 2. The number of alternate channels is used
with the command "ACPRSLTS (Adjacent Channel Power Measurement Results)" on
page 143.
Specifying parameter value 0 makes the measurement with the adjacent channel
pair, but no alternate channels. Specifying 1 selects the first alternate channel pair,
which is centered at ±2 times the channel spacing away from the center frequency of
the main channel. Specifying 2 selects the second alternate pair, which is at ±3 times
the channel spacing.
Format
ACPALTCH <integer> (Valid Range: 0, 1, 2)
ACPALTCH?
131
Query Data Type
<integer> (Valid Range: 0, 1, 2)
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Default: 0. Not affected by preset or Power Cycle.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPBRPER (Adjacent Channel Power Burst Period)
ACPBRPER (Adjacent Channel Power Burst Period)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the cycle time (period) of the burst RF signal. The cycle time is needed to set the
sweep times when using the peak, two bandwidth, burst power, and gated methods
for adjacent channel power measurements.
Format
ACPBRPER <real> (in time unit)
ACPBRPER?
Query Data Type
<real>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Default: 0. Not affected by preset or Power Cycle.
Notes
N9061A supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only and therefore, although you can set ACPBRPER, it has
no effect.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
132
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPBRWID (Adjacent Channel Power Burst Width)
ACPBRWID (Adjacent Channel Power Burst Width)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the on-time (pulse width) of the burst RF signal. The pulse width is needed to
set the gating times when using the gated method for adjacent channel power
measurements.
133
Format
Range: 5 μs to 9.5 seconds.
Query Data Type
<real> (in time units)
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Default: 0. Not affected by preset or Power Cycle.
Notes
N9061A supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method
only and therefore, although you can set ACPBRWID, it has no
effect.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPBW (Adjacent Channel Power Bandwidth)
ACPBW (Adjacent Channel Power Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the bandwidth of the channels as an active function for the commands
"ACPMEAS (Measure Adjacent Channel Power)" on page 139 and "ACPCOMPUTE
(Adjacent Channel Power Compute)" on page 135.
Format
ACPBW <frequency> with frequency unit
ACPBW?
Range:
<frequency>: 200 Hz to the double of max frequency range.
UP: original value x 1.1.
DN: original value x 0.9.
Query Data Type
Frequency in Hz
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Default: 8.5 kHz. Not affected by preset or Power Cycle.
Couplings
Channel spacing does not couple with channel bandwidth.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
134
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPCOMPUTE (Adjacent Channel Power Compute)
ACPCOMPUTE (Adjacent Channel Power Compute)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Calculates the ACP of a transmitter based on data on the display. This function does
not make a new measurement before computing. The measurement must have been
made with ANALOG or PEAK method selected so the appropriate data is available for
the calculation.
This function is useful for recalculating ACP results on the same trace with different
parameter settings.
135
Format
ACPCOMPUTE
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the
ANALOG method only.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPFRQWT (Adjacent Channel Power Frequency Weighting)
ACPFRQWT (Adjacent Channel Power Frequency Weighting)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
This command is used to control the frequency weighting when making an Adjacent
Channel Power measurement. Weighting is not used in the measurement if OFF has
been selected. Root-raised-cosine weighting is selected with the RRCOS
parameter.
Format
ACPFRQWT RRCOS|OFF
ACPFRQWT?
Query Data Type
RRCOS|OFF
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Default: OFF.
Not affected by preset or Power Cycle.
Notes
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the
ANALOG method only.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
136
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPLOWER (Lower Adjacent Channel Power)
ACPLOWER (Lower Adjacent Channel Power)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Returns the power ratio result of the Adjacent Channel Power measurement for the
lower frequency channel.
137
Format
ACPLOWER?
Query Data Type
The power ratio result in dB.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the
ANALOG method only.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPMAX (Maximum Adjacent Channel Power)
ACPMAX (Maximum Adjacent Channel Power)
Syntax
Description
Returns the maximum adjacent channel power of the adjacent channel power
measurement.
Format
ACPMAX?
Query Data Type
The maximum adjacent channel power in dB.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the
ANALOG method only.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
138
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPMEAS (Measure Adjacent Channel Power)
ACPMEAS (Measure Adjacent Channel Power)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Makes a measurement and calculates the adjacent channel power (ACP) of a
transmitter. The measurement determines the leakage power that is in the channels
adjacent to the carrier. The result is the ratio of the leakage power in the channel
adjacent to the total power transmitted by the transmitter.
139
Format
ACPMEAS
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the
ANALOG method only.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPMSTATE (Adjacent Channel Power Measurement State)
ACPMSTATE (Adjacent Channel Power Measurement State)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the parameters of the measurement state to either the default state
(determined by the setup) or the current state. The state parameters that could
change between the default state and a current state include:
– Resolution bandwidth
– Video bandwidth
– Span
– Sweep time
– Detector mode
– Gating parameters
– Trigger parameters
– Video averaging
Format
ACPMSTATE CURR|DFLT
ACPMSTATE?
Query Data Type
CURR|DFLT
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Default: DFLT.
Not affected by preset or Power Cycle.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
140
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPMSTATE (Adjacent Channel Power Measurement State)
Couplings
Changes the following parameters:
– Resolution bandwidth
– Video bandwidth
– Span
– Sweep time
– Detector mode
– Gating parameters
– Trigger parameters
– Video averaging
Notes
141
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the
ANALOG method only.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPPWRTX (Adjacent Channel Power Total Power Transmitted)
ACPPWRTX (Adjacent Channel Power Total Power Transmitted)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Returns the result of the total power transmitted calculation of the adjacent channel
power measurement.
Format
ACPPWRTX?
Query Data Type
A variable that contains the total transmit band carrier power.
Unit is determined by command "AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude
Units)" on page 163.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The measurement must be made with the analog or burst power
method selected, but the N9061A application supports the ACP
measurement using the ANALOG method only.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
142
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPRSLTS (Adjacent Channel Power Measurement Results)
ACPRSLTS (Adjacent Channel Power Measurement Results)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Returns an array of power data resulting from an ACP measurement of an RF signal.
The number of alternate channel pairs selected by the command "ACPALTCH
(Adjacent Channel Power Alternate Channels)" on page 131 determines the size of
the array.
Format
ACPRSLTS?
Query Data Type
(Analog Method) Number of Results per Set: 2. See "Query Data
Type Details" on page 144 below.
Results (in order of output):
– ACP ratio (lower channel)
– ACP ratio (upper channel)
143
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the
ANALOG method only.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
Query Data Type Details
Query Data Type Details
Alternate
Channels
Channels used for Calculation
Number of Values Returned
0
– Main channel
1 set
– Lower adjacent channel
– Upper adjacent channel
1
Above channels plus:
2 sets
– First alternate lower channel
– First alternate upper channel
2
Above channels plus:
3 sets
– Second alternate lower channel
– Second alternate upper channel
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
144
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPSP (Adjacent Channel Power Channel Spacing)
ACPSP (Adjacent Channel Power Channel Spacing)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the channel spacing for the commands "ACPMEAS (Measure Adjacent Channel
Power)" on page 139 and "ACPCOMPUTE (Adjacent Channel Power Compute)" on
page 135.
Format
ACP <real> with frequency units
ACP?
Range:
<real>: Minimum: 100 Hz. Maximum: 25 GHz.
UP: original value x 1.1.
DN: original value x 0.9.
145
Query Data Type
<real> in Hz
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Default: 12.5 kHz. Not affected by preset or Power Cycle.
Couplings
Channel spacing does not couple with channel bandwidth.
Notes
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the
ANALOG method only.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPT (Adjacent Channel Power T Weighting)
ACPT (Adjacent Channel Power T Weighting)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
This command is used to set the T used in weighting for an adjacent channel power
measurement.
Format
ACPT <real> in time units
ACPT?
Range: 1 μs to 1 s.
Query Data Type
Real number in sec.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Default: 341 μs.
Not affected by preset or Power Cycle.
Notes
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the
ANALOG method only.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
146
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPUPPER (Upper Adjacent Channel Power)
ACPUPPER (Upper Adjacent Channel Power)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Returns the power ratio result of the adjacent channel power measurement for the
upper frequency channel.
147
Format
ACPUPPER?
Query Data Type
The power ratio result in dB.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the
ANALOG method only.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ADJALL (LO and IF Adjustments)
ADJALL (LO and IF Adjustments)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Activates the RF local oscillator (LO) and intermediate frequency (IF) alignment
routines. These are the same routines that occur when the instrument is switched
on. They are also the same routines that are performed when you press System,
Alignments, Align Now, All.
Commands following ADJALL are not executed until after the instrument has
finished the alignment routines.
Format
ADJALL;
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALibration[:ALL] (see "All" on page 823)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
148
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
AMB (A minus B into A)
AMB (A minus B into A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Subtracts the points in Trace B from the corresponding points in Trace A, and sends
the results to Trace A. Thus, AMB can restore the original trace after an "APB (Trace
A Plus Trace B to A)" on page 160 or a "KSc (A Plus B to A)" on page 250 command
has been executed.
The query AMB? returns different responses depending on the language being used.
The 8560 Series languages return either a 1 or a 0 to indicate the On or Off
status.The 8566, 8568 Series languages all return either ON or OFF.
Format
AMB 0|1|OFF|ON
AMB?
149
Query Data Type
1 or 0, indicating ON or OFF state respectively.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
OFF
Couplings
Sets Trace B to View mode and turns "AMBPL (A minus B plus
Display Line into A)" on page 150 (Normalize) OFF. All trace math is
mutually exclusive, so turning one on turns the other off and vice
versa. Similarly, when AMB is on and you change Trace B to
Clearwrite or Maxhold, it turns AMB off.
Notes
The functions of the command AMB are identical to the command
"C2 [two] (A Minus B Into A)" on page 177.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
AMBPL (A minus B plus Display Line into A)
AMBPL (A minus B plus Display Line into A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Does a point-by-point subtraction of Trace B from Trace A, and then adds the display
line point values to the difference. The results are sent to Trace A.
The query command AMBPL? returns different responses depending on the language
being used.
Format
AMBPL (0|1|OFF|ON)
AMBPL?
Query Data Type
8560: 1 or 0, indicating ON or OFF state respectively.
8566A/B, 8568A/B: ON or OFF.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
OFF
Couplings
AMBPL sets Trace B to View mode and turns AMB (Normalize)
OFF. All trace math is mutually exclusive, so turning one on turns
the other off and vice versa. Similarly, when AMBPL is on and you
change Trace B to Clearwrite or Maxhold, it turns AMBPL off.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
150
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
AMPCOR
AMPCOR
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
AMPCOR turns the amplitude correction function on and off. The AMPCOR function is
used to compensate for frequency-dependent amplitude variations.
When AMPCOR is on, the current correction values are added to all measurement
results.
Turning AMPCOR off does not erase the current frequency-amplitude correction
factors.
Performing an instrument preset ("IP (Instrument Preset)" on page 240), or turning off
the instrument, turns off AMPCOR.
Format
AMPCOR (0|1|OFF|ON)
AMPCOR?
151
Query Data Type
1 or 0, indicating ON or OFF state respectively
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
OFF
Couplings
See "AMPCORDATA" on page 154 for details of how to set the
correction data
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
AMPCORCFGCNT
AMPCORCFGCNT
Syntax
AMPCORRCFGCNT?
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Retrieves the count of all AMPCOR settings, not including the one currently in use.
See "AMPCOR" on page 151.
This is an N9061A "extension" query, which is not defined in the command set of any
legacy instrument.
Format
AMPCORRCFGCNT?
Query Data Type
<int>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
152
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
AMPCORCLEAR
AMPCORCLEAR
Syntax
AMPCORCLEAR
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Clears the current AMPCOR setting. See "AMPCOR" on page 151.
This is an N9061A "extension" command, which is not defined in the command set of
any legacy instrument.
153
Format
AMPCORCLEAR
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
AMPCORDATA
AMPCORDATA
Syntax
AMPCORDATA
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
AMPCORDATA allows you to enter or query the frequency-amplitude correction
points that are used to normalize the spectrum analyzer measurement. Up to 200
pairs of frequency-amplitude correction points can be entered.
Whenever "AMPCOR" on page 151 is on, the correction values are added to all
measurement results. Setting AMPCOR off, performing an instrument preset ("IP
(Instrument Preset)" on page 240), or turning off the spectrum analyzer turns off the
amplitude correction. Turning AMPCOR off does not erase the current frequencyamplitude correction factors.
The values of the correction points are applied across the active measurement
range. Between points, the correction values are interpolated. When measuring at
frequencies outside the first and last correction points, these values are used as the
correction value. If you do not want any amplitude correction outside of the first and
last correction points, set the amplitude correction to 0 at the frequencies that are
outside of the first and last correction values.
If any of the trace data is above or below the graticule, AMPCOR may not properly
correct it. The spectrum analyzer amplitude accuracy is not specified above or below
the graticule. Whenever AMPCOR applies a correction such that data outside the
graticule is moved to within the graticule, an error (error number 921 or 922) is
generated. In order to avoid these errors, make sure that the trace data that is being
corrected is within the graticule before the correction is applied.
Format
AMPCORDATA <freq>, <ampl>, …
AMPCORDATA?
Query Data Type
<freq>, <ampl>, … in Hz for <freq> and dB
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Instrument Preset turns off amplitude correction
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
154
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
AMPCORRCL
AMPCORRCL
Syntax
AMPCORRCL
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
AMPCORRCL recalls a set of correction points from one of five possible registers.
The corrections must have been previously saved with the command
"AMPCORSAVE" on page 157.
155
Format
AMPCORRCL <int>
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
AMPCORRESET
AMPCORRESET
Syntax
AMPCORRESET
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Deletes all AMPCOR settings. See "AMPCOR" on page 151.
This is an N9061A "extension" command, which is not defined in the command set of
any legacy instrument.
Format
AMPCORRESET
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
156
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
AMPCORSAVE
AMPCORSAVE
Syntax
AMPCORSAVE
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
AMPCORSAVE saves the current correction points in one of five possible registers.
The correction points can be recalled with the command "AMPCORRCL" on page
155.
157
Format
AMPCORSAVE <int>
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
AMPCORSIZE
AMPCORSIZE
Syntax
AMPCORSIZE
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
AMPCORSIZE returns the number of frequency-amplitude correction points in the
current correction table.
Format
AMPCORSIZE?
Query Data Type
<int>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Couplings
See "AMPCORDATA" on page 154 for details of how to set the
correction data.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
158
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ANNOT (Annotation)
ANNOT (Annotation)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Turns on or off all annotation on the instrument display. Softkey labels are not
affected by this command and remain displayed.
Format
ANNOT (O|1|ON|OFF)
Query Data Type
1 or 0, indicating ON or OFF state respectively.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
DISPlay:ANNotation:SCReen[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
DISPlay::ANNotation:SCReen[:STATe]?
(See "Screen" on page 925)
Preset
ON
Couplings
Following FDSP, ANNOT does nothing until instrument preset.
Notes
The functions of ANNOT are identical to the commands "KSo
(Annotation Off)" on page 271 and "KSp (Annotation On)" on page
273.
The two alternative commands, KSo and KSp, are only valid when
the remote language is either HP8566A, HP8566B, HP8568A, or
HP8568B.
159
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
APB (Trace A Plus Trace B to A)
APB (Trace A Plus Trace B to A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Does a point-by-point addition of Trace A and Trace B, and sends the results to
Trace A. Thus, APB can restore the original trace after an "AMB (A minus B into A)"
on page 149 or a "C2 [two] (A Minus B Into A)" on page 177 command has been
executed.
Format
APB
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of APB are identical to the command "KSc (A Plus B
to A)" on page 250.
The alternative command, KSc, is only valid when the remote
language is either HP8566A, HP8566B, HP8568A, or HP8568B.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
160
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
AT (Input Attenuation)
AT (Input Attenuation)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the RF input attenuation.
Although the attenuation level in the X-series instruments can be specified using
absolute values, you can never set attenuation below 10 dB using the DN
parameter. This is a safety feature to prevent inadvertent setting of attenuation to a
level that could damage the instrument.
Signal levels above +30 dBm will damage the instrument.
Format
AT <number> DB
<number>: any real number or integer. If the value you enter is not
a valid value for the instrument you are using, it switches
automatically to the closest valid setting.
Default unit: dB.
Range: 0 to 70 dB specified absolutely, and 10 to 70 dB in 10 dB
steps. (If 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC is selected, the range is limited to
0 to 60 dB.)
AT OA|DN|UP|AUTO|MAN
(AUTO|MAN available for 8560 Series only)
AT?
(Step Increment: 10 dB)
Query Data Type
<real> in dB.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSE]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:STEP[:INCRement] 10dB (on
mode entry or preset: see "(Mech) Atten Step" on page 456)
[:SENSE]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO (OFF|ON|0|1) (see "(Mech)
Atten " on page 450)
Preset
161
10 dB
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
AT (Input Attenuation)
Notes
In PXA/MXA, the auto attenuation range is 6-70 dB. In EXA, it is 660 dB.
You cannot step down below 10 dB. To set levels below 10 dB, you
must specify the attenuation absolutely. For example, to set
attenuation to 0 dB, you must use the command AT 0DB.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
162
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude Units)
AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude Units)
Syntax
8560 series
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the amplitude readout units for the reference level, the marker, and the
display line.
If your selected remote language is any of the 8560 Series analyzers, and if the
AUNITS setting is AUTO, then a change from log scale (LG) to linear scale (LN)
automatically changes the AUNITS setting. For all other settings, no change to
AUNITS occurs, even when the scale is changed.
Format
AUNITS AUTO|MAN|DBM|DBMV|DBUV|V|W|DM
AUNITS?
163
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude Units)
Query Data Type
DBM|DBMV|DBUV|V
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:UNIT:POWer (DBM|DBMV|DBUV|V|W)
:UNIT:POWer?
(See "Y Axis Unit" on page 461)
Preset
DBM
Notes
The functions of AUNITS are identical to the commands "KSA
(Amplitude in dBm)" on page 245, "KSB (Amplitude in dBmV)" on
page 247, "KSC (Amplitude in dBμV)" on page 249, and "KSD
(Amplitude in Volts)" on page 251.
The four alternative commands, KSA, KSB, KSC, and KSD are only
valid when the remote language is HP8566A/B or HP8568A/B.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
164
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
AUTOCPL (Auto Coupled)
AUTOCPL (Auto Coupled)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets video bandwidth, resolution bandwidth, input attenuation, sweep time and
center frequency step-size to coupled mode.
165
Format
AUTOCPL
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:COUPle ALL (See "Auto Couple" on page 473)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
AXB (Exchange Trace A and Trace B)
AXB (Exchange Trace A and Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Exchanges Trace A and Trace B, point by point.
Format
AXB
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of the command AXB are identical to the command
"EX (Exchange Trace A and Trace B)" on page 215 and to the XCH
TRA,TRB form of the command "XCH (Exchange)" on page 443.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
166
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
B1 [one] (Clear Write for Trace B)
B1 [one] (Clear Write for Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets Trace B to clear write. That is, it continuously displays any signal present at the
instrument input. The B1 command initially clears Trace B, setting all elements to
zero. The sweep trigger then signals the start of the sweep, and Trace B is
continually updated as the sweep progresses. Subsequent sweeps send new
amplitude information to the display addresses.
167
Format
B1
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of B1 are identical to the CLRW TRB form of the
command "CLRW (Clear Write)" on page 187.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
B2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace B)
B2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Updates each trace element with the maximum level detected while the trace is
active.
Format
B2
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent
Commands
None
Notes
The functions of B2 are identical to the MXMH TRB form of the command
"MXMH (Maximum Hold)" on page 345.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
168
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
B3 [three] (View Mode for Trace B)
B3 [three] (View Mode for Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Displays Trace B and then stops the sweep if no other traces are active. Trace B
does not get updated.
169
Format
B3
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent
Commands
None
Notes
The functions of B3 are identical to the VIEW TRB form of the command
"VIEW (View Trace)" on page 440.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
B4 [four] (Blank Trace B)
B4 [four] (Blank Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Blanks Trace B and stops the sweep if no other traces are active. Trace B is not
updated.
Format
B4
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of B4 are identical to the BLANK TRB form of the
command "BLANK (Blank Trace)" on page 172.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
170
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
BL (Trace B minus Display Line to Trace B)
BL (Trace B minus Display Line to Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Subtracts the display line from Trace B and sends the results to Trace B.
The command BL is calculated differently depending on the language being used;
for the 8560 Series the calculation is performed in units of dBm.
8560 Series
The calculation is performed in units of dBm.
8566A/B
The calculation is performed in display units.
8568A/B
171
Format
BL
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of BL are identical to the command "BML (Trace B
Minus Display Line)" on page 173.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
BLANK (Blank Trace)
BLANK (Blank Trace)
Syntax
8560 Series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Blanks Trace 1 or trace 2 and stops taking new data into the specified trace. TRA
corresponds to Trace 1, TRB corresponds to Trace 2, and so on.
Format
8566A/B, 8568A/B: BLANK TRA|TRB|TRC
8560 Series: BLANK TRA|TRB
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
TRACe[1|2|3|4|5|6]:UPDate[:STATe] OFF
TRACe[1|2|3|4|5|6]:DISPlay[:STATe] OFF
(See "View/Blank " on page 858)
Preset
TRB, TRC Blank.
Notes
The functions of BLANK are identical to the commands "A4 [four]
(Blank Trace A)" on page 129, "B4 [four] (Blank Trace B)" on page
170, KSJ, and "KSk (Blank Trace C)" on page 263.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
172
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
BML (Trace B Minus Display Line)
BML (Trace B Minus Display Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Subtracts the display line from trace B (point by point), and sends the difference to
trace B. Trace B corresponds to Trace 2.
The command BML is calculated differently depending on the language being used:
– For the 8560 Series the calculation uses units of dBm.
– For the 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the calculation uses display units.
173
Format
BML
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of BML are identical to the command "BL (Trace B
minus Display Line to Trace B)" on page 171.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
BTC (Transfer Trace B to Trace C)
BTC (Transfer Trace B to Trace C)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Transfers Trace B data to Trace C
Trace C cannot be an active trace. This means that the data in Trace C cannot be
updated as the instrument sweeps. To ensure that the current settings of the
instrument are reflected in the data transferred from Trace B to Trace C, you must
follow the four step process below.
1. Select single sweep mode (S2 or SNGLS command)
2. Select the desired instrument settings
3. Take one complete sweep
4. Transfer the data
Format
BTC
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe:COPY TRACE2, TRACE3 (see "Copy/Exchange" on page 878)
Notes
The functions of BTC are identical to the command "KSl (Transfer
Trace B to Trace C)" on page 265.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
174
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
BXC (Exchange Trace B and Trace C)
BXC (Exchange Trace B and Trace C)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Exchanges Trace B data with Trace C data.
Trace C must not be an active trace. This means that the data in Trace C cannot be
updated as the instrument sweeps. To ensure that the current settings of the
instrument are reflected in the data exchanged between Trace B and Trace C, you
must follow the four step process below.
1. Select single sweep mode (S2 or SNGLS command)
2. Select the desired instrument settings
3. Take one complete sweep
4. Exchange the data
Format
BXC
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
TRACe3:TYPe?
TRACe3:UPDate?
TRACe3:DISPlay?
TRACe2:TYPe?
TRACe2:UPDate?
TRACe2:DISPlay?
TRACe:EXCHange TRACE2, TRACE3
(See "View/Blank " on page 858, etc.)
175
Couplings
Trace Update is set to Off and Trace Display is set to On.
Notes
The functions of BXC are identical to the command "KSi (Exchange
Trace B and Trace C)" on page 260 and to the XCH TRB,TRC form
of the command "XCH (Exchange)" on page 443.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
C1 [one] (Set A Minus B Mode Off)
C1 [one] (Set A Minus B Mode Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Turns the A Minus B mode off. That is, it switches off the functionality that was
switched on by the command "C2 [two] (A Minus B Into A)" on page 177 or by the AMB
ON form of the command "AMB (A minus B into A)" on page 149.
Format
C1
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MATH TRACE4, OFF (see "Math" on page 871)
Notes
The functions of C1 are identical to the AMB OFF form of the
command "AMB (A minus B into A)" on page 149.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
176
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
C2 [two] (A Minus B Into A)
C2 [two] (A Minus B Into A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Subtracts the points in Trace B from the corresponding points in Trace A, and sends
the results to Trace A. Thus, if your input signal remains unchanged, C2 can restore
the original trace after an "APB (Trace A Plus Trace B to A)" on page 160 or a "KSc (A
Plus B to A)" on page 250 command has been executed.
177
Format
C2
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of C2 are identical to the AMB ON form of the
command "AMB (A minus B into A)" on page 149.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
CA (Couple Attenuation)
CA (Couple Attenuation)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
During normal operation, the instrument’s input attenuation is coupled to the
reference level. This coupling keeps the mixer input at a level such that a continuous
wave signal displayed at the reference level is at or below –10 dBm (or the value
specified in the ML command.)
The CA command sets the threshold to –10 dBm (or to the value specified by the
commands "ML (Mixer Level)" on page 341 or "KS, (Mixer Level)" on page 241). The
counterpart to the CA command is "AT (Input Attenuation)" on page 161, which
allows levels less than the threshold value at the mixer input.
Format
CA
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent
Commands
[:SENse]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO ON (see "(Mech) Atten " on page 450)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
178
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
CARROFF (Carrier Off Power)
CARROFF (Carrier Off Power)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Measures the average and peak power of the carrier during the portion of time when
the power is off (when it is not within 20 dB of its peak level). The powers are
combined to provide a calculation of the leakage power.
The measurement must be in zero span for the measurement to run.
179
Format
CARROFF TRA|TRB,?
Query Data Type
<ampl> in dBm.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
CARRON (Carrier On Power)
CARRON (Carrier On Power)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Measures the average power of the carrier during the portion of time when it is on
and within 20 dB of its peak level.
The measurement needs to be in zero span for the measurement to run.
Format
CARRON TRA|TRB,?
Query Data Type
<ampl> in dBm.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
180
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
CF (Center Frequency)
CF (Center Frequency)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the value of the center frequency.
The step size depends on whether the frequency has been coupled to the span width
using the command "CS (Couple Frequency Step Size)" on page 192
– When coupled, the step size is 10% of the span, or one major graticule division.
– When uncoupled, the step size is determined by the command "SS (Center
Frequency Step Size)" on page 402.
Format
CF <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ
Range: Frequency range of the instrument
Default unit is HZ.
CF UP
CF DN
Step size: see Description above.
CF OA
CF?
181
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
CF (Center Frequency)
Query Data Type
<freq> in Hz.
ASCII “0” if 0, otherwise scientific notation with precision to 1 Hz.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer?
(See "Center Freq" on page 496)
Notes
Although the instrument allows entry of frequencies not in the
specified frequency range, using frequencies outside the frequency
span of the instrument is not recommended and is not warranted to
meet specifications.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
182
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
CHANNEL (Channel Selection)
CHANNEL (Channel Selection)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Increments or decrements the instrument center frequency by one channel spacing.
The channel spacing value is set using the command "ACPSP (Adjacent Channel
Power Channel Spacing)" on page 145.
Format
CHANNEL UP|DN
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer?
(See "Center Freq" on page 496)
183
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
CHANPWR (Channel Power)
CHANPWR (Channel Power)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Measures the power within the specified channel bandwidth.
Format
CHANPWR TRA|TRB, <frequency> with frequency unit,?
Query Data Type
<amplitude> in dBm (without explicit units).
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
184
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
CHPWRBW (Channel Power Bandwidth)
CHPWRBW (Channel Power Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Queries or sets the current value of the channel power bandwidth. Channel power
can be measured with the command "CHANPWR (Channel Power)" on page 184.
Format
CHPWRBW <frequency> with frequency unit
CHPWRBW?
185
Query Data Type
<frequency>, 2 digits to the right of the decimal place.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
3 GHz
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
CLRAVG (Clear Average)
CLRAVG (Clear Average)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Restarts the VAVG command by resetting the number of averaged sweeps to one.
The video averaging routine resets the number of sweeps, but does not stop video
averaging. Use VAVG OFF to stop video averaging.
Format
CLRAVG
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:AVERage:CLEar (see "Average/Hold Number" on page
603)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
186
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
CLRW (Clear Write)
CLRW (Clear Write)
Syntax
8560 series
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Clears the specified trace and enables trace data acquisition. The CLRW command
places the indicated trace in clear-write mode. Data acquisition begins at the next
sweep. (See the command "TS (Take Sweep)" on page 432 for more information
about data acquisition.)
TRA corresponds to Trace 1 and TRB corresponds to Trace 2.
In the 8560 series, 8566A/B, and 8568A/B analyzers, the trace settings are
controlled by the trace mode parameters, CLRW, VIEW, BLANK, MINH and MAXH and
the averaging settings by VAVG. In the X-series the same settings are controlled by
the Trace/Detector and View/Blank parameters.
The following table describes the parameters set by N9061A in the X-series
instrument when the legacy commands for trace mode and averaging are sent.
187
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
CLRW (Clear Write)
Legacy Products command mapping to X-series for trace/detector settings
Legacy Products
X-series
Trace
Commands
Averaging
(VAVG)
Detector
(DET)
Trace/Detector
Trace Type
View/Blank
Detector
CLRW
Off
Normal
ClearWrite
On
Last set
CLRW
On
Sample
Trace Average
On
Sample
MXMH
Off
Peak
Max Hold
On
Peak
MXMH
On
Sample
Trace Average
On
Peak
MINH
Off
NegPeak
Min Hold
On
NegPeak
MINH
On
Sample
Trace Average
On
NegPeak
VIEW
Off
Normal
No change
View
No
change
VIEW
On
Sample
Trace Average
View
Sample
BLANK
Off
Normal
No change
Blank
No
change
BLANK
On
Sample
Trace Average
Blank
Sample
For example, if an 8560 series analyzer receives CLRW, and averaging is set to ON,
then the analyzer's detector is automatically set to Sample. In the same
circumstances, N9061A sets the X-series instrument trace type to Trace Average,
View/Blank to On, and the Detector to Sample.
Format
CLRW TRA|TRB
Preset: CLRW TRA
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe1|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE WRITe (see "Trace/Detector" on page 851)
Preset
TRA (after a preset, only trace A is set to clearwrite)
Notes
The functions of CLRW are identical to the command "A1 [one]
(Clear Write for Trace A)" on page 126 and "B1 [one] (Clear Write
for Trace B)" on page 167.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
188
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
CONTS (Continuous Sweep)
CONTS (Continuous Sweep)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the instrument to continuous sweep mode. In the continuous sweep mode, the
instrument takes its next sweep as soon as possible after the current sweep (as long
as the trigger conditions are met). A sweep may temporarily be interrupted by data
entries made over the remote interface or from the front panel.
Format
CONTS
Preset: CONTS
189
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:INITiate:CONTinuous 1 (see "Cont (Continuous
Measurement/Sweep)" on page 488)
Notes
The functions of CONTS are identical to "S1[one] (Continuous
Sweep)" on page 387.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
COUPLE (Input Coupling)
COUPLE (Input Coupling)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Selects AC or DC coupling.
Format
COUPLE AC|DC
COUPLE?
Query Data Type
AC|DC
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:INPut:COUPling AC|DC
:INPut:COUPling?
(See "RF Coupling" on page 507)
Preset
AC (when possible)
Notes
When using the X-series instruments, you must use DC coupling to
see calibrated frequencies of less than 20 MHz. Signals of less than
20 MHz are not calibrated when using AC coupling on these
instruments.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
190
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
CR (Couple Resolution Bandwidth)
CR (Couple Resolution Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Couples the resolution bandwidth to the span.
The counterpart to the CR command is the command "RB (Resolution Bandwidth)"
on page 373 which breaks the coupling. Use the CR command to re-establish
coupling after executing an RB command.
191
Format
CR
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENse]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO ON (see "Res BW " on
page 475)
Preset
ON
Notes
CR uses the legacy instrument settings for resolution bandwidth
only if Mode Setup > Preferences> Limit RBW/VBW is set to ON.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
CS (Couple Frequency Step Size)
CS (Couple Frequency Step Size)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Couples the center frequency step size to the span width, so that the step size
equals 10% of the span width, or one major graticule division.
The counterpart to the CS command is "SS (Center Frequency Step Size)" on page
402 which breaks the coupling. Use the CS command to re-establish coupling after
an SS command has been executed.
Format
CS
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO ON (see "CF Step" on
page 502)
Preset
ON
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
192
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
CT (Couple Sweep Time)
CT (Couple Sweep Time)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Couples the sweep time to the span, resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth.
The counterpart to the CT command is "ST (Sweep Time)" on page 404 which breaks
the coupling. Use the CT command to re-establish coupling after an ST command
has been executed.
193
Format
CT
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON (see "Sweep Time Rules" on page 759)
Preset
ON
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
CV (Couple Video Bandwidth)
CV (Couple Video Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Couples the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth.
The counterpart to the CV command is "VB (Video Bandwidth)" on page 436, which
breaks the coupling. Use the CV command to re-establish coupling after executing a
VB command.
Format
CV
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENse]:BANDwidth:VIDeo:AUTO ON (see "Video BW " on page
477)
Preset
ON
Notes
CV uses the legacy signal analyzer settings for video bandwidth
only if Mode Setup > Preferences> Limit RBW/VBW is set to ON.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
194
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
DA (Display Address)
DA (Display Address)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns the contents of the given display address to the controller.
Format
DA 1 (sets TRA)
DA 1025 (sets TRB)
DA 3073 (sets TRC)
195
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
This command only supports the use of DA 1, DA 1025, and DA
3073; these display addresses contain the trace data and are
equivalent to using the queries and commands"TRA (Trace Data
Input and Output)" on page 426, "TRB (Trace Data Input and
Output)" on page 427, "TRC (Trace Data Input and Output)" on page
428, "TA (Trace A)" on page 416 and "TB (Trace B)" on page 417.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
DELMKBW (Occupied Power Bandwidth Within Delta Marker)
DELMKBW (Occupied Power Bandwidth Within Delta Marker)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Calculates the OBW with respect to the power between the displayed delta
markers. The power between the displayed markers is then used as the reference,
rather than using the total power in the frequency span as is done in the command
"PWRBW (Power Bandwidth)" on page 366.
If the DELMKBW command is used when no marker is active, a delta marker is
activated at the center frequency, and the returned bandwidth is 0. If the active
marker is a normal marker when the DELMKBW command is used, the marker type is
changed to delta, and the returned bandwidth is 0.
Format
DELMKBW TRA|TRB,<real>,?
Query Data Type
<frequency> in Hz
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
196
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
DET (Detection Mode)
DET (Detection Mode)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Selects the type of instrument detection (NEGative peak, NoRMal, POSitive peak, or
SaMPle).
NEG
Enables negative peak detection.
NRM
Enables the ‘rosenfell’ detection algorithm that selectively chooses between
positive and negative values.
POS
Enables positive-peak detection, which displays the maximum video signal
detected over a number of instantaneous samples for a particular frequency.
SMP
Enables sample detection, which uses the instantaneous video signal value. Video
averaging and noise-level markers, when activated, activate sample detection
automatically.
Format
DET NEG|NRM|POS|SMP (For option descriptions, see table above)
DET?
Query Data Type
NEG|NRM|POS|SMP
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]
(NEGative|NORMal|POSitive|SAMPle)
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]?
(See "Detector" on page 861)
197
Preset
NRM
Notes
The functions of DET are identical to the commands"KSa (Normal
Detection)" on page 246, "KSb (Positive Peak Detection)" on page
248, "KSd (Negative Peak Detection)" on page 252, and "KSe
(Sample Detection)" on page 254.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
DL (Display Line)
DL (Display Line)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Defines the level of the display line and displays it on the instrument screen.
Format
DL <number>DB|DBM|DBMV|DBUV|MV|UV|V|MW|UW|W|DM
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
198
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
DL (Display Line)
Default units are DBM
Range: dependent on the reference level
DL UP
DL DN
(Step Increment: 1 major graticule division)
DL ON|OFF
DL OA
DL?
Query Data Type
<number> (Unit: V in LN, DBM in LG)
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe <ampl>
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATE (ON|OFF)
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATE?
(See "Display Line" on page 928)
Preset
199
OFF
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
DLE (Display Line Enable)
DLE (Display Line Enable)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Enables or disables the display line.
Format
DLE ON|OFF
DLE?
Query Data Type
ON|OFF
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATE ON|OFF (see "Display
Line" on page 928)
Preset
OFF
Couplings
Turning DL OFF, then ON again does not reset DL level.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
200
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
DLYSWP (Delay Sweep)
DLYSWP (Delay Sweep)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Delays the start of the sweep until the specified time after the trigger event has
elapsed.
Format
DLYSWP <number>US|MS|SC|S
Range: 2 μS to 65.535 S
DLYSWP ON|OFF|1|0
DLYSWP?
Query Data Type
Returns the value of the sweep delay length in seconds, or a ‘0’
indicating the delay sweep is turned OFF.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay <time>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay?
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay:STATe (OFF|ON|0|1)
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay:STATe?
(See "Trig Delay " on page 895)
Preset
201
OFF, 2 μS
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
DONE (Done)
DONE (Done)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Allows you to determine when the instrument has parsed a list of commands and
has executed all commands prior to and including DONE. The DONE command returns
a value of “1” when all commands in a command string or command list have been
completed.
If a "TS (Take Sweep)" on page 432 command precedes the command list, the TS
command acts as a synchronizing function, since the command list execution begins
after the sweep has been completed.
Format
DONE?
Query Data Type
1
SCPI Equivalent Commands
*WAI or *OPC? (see "Wait-to-Continue " on page 85)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
202
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
DR (Display Read)
DR (Display Read)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sends the contents of the current display address to the controller.
203
Format
DR
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
E1[one] (Peak Marker)
E1[one] (Peak Marker)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Positions the marker at the signal peak.
Format
E1
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:MAXimum (see "Peak Search" on page
669)
Notes
The functions of E1 are identical to MKPK (without secondary
keyword) and MKPK HI. See "MKPK (Marker Peak)" on page 329.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
204
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
E2 [two] (Marker to Center Frequency)
E2 [two] (Marker to Center Frequency)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Positions the marker on the screen at the center frequency position.
205
Format
E2
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6[:SET]:CENTer (see "Mkr->CF " on
page 598)
Notes
Unlike "MKCF (Marker to Center Frequency)" on page 315, which
moves the CF to the current position of the active marker, E2
centers the active marker to the center frequency on the
instrument screen.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
E3 [three] (Delta Marker Step Size)
E3 [three] (Delta Marker Step Size)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Establishes the center frequency step size as being the frequency difference
between the delta marker and the active marker.
Format
E3
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2[:SET]:STEP (see "Mkr->CF Step" on page
598)
Notes
The functions of E3 are identical to the command"MKSS (Marker
to Step Size)" on page 336.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
206
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
E4 [four] (Marker to Reference Level)
E4 [four] (Marker to Reference Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Moves the active marker to the reference level.
207
Format
E4
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2[:SET]:RLEVel (see "Mkr->Ref Lvl" on page
599)
Notes
Unlike "MKRL (Marker to Reference Level)" on page 334, this
command moves to the level of the delta Marker when in delta
Marker mode.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
EDITDONE (Edit Done)
EDITDONE (Edit Done)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
This command is used at the completion of limit-line editing, following an EDITLIML
command.
You can enter the limit line data between the limit line commands beginning with
"EDITLIML (Edit Limit Line)" on page 209 and ending with EDITDONE.
Format
EDITDONE
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DATA <x>,<ampl>,<connect>,… (see Limit
Line Data (Remote Command Only))
Couplings
"EDITLIML (Edit Limit Line)" on page 209, "LIMIREL (Relative Limit
Lines)" on page 287, "LIMF (Limit Line Frequency Value)" on page
282, "LIMU (Upper-Limit Amplitude)" on page 293, "LIML (LowerLimit Amplitude)" on page 289, "LIMTSL (Slope Limit Line)" on page
292
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
208
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
EDITLIML (Edit Limit Line)
EDITLIML (Edit Limit Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
This command is used to initiate limit-line editing.
You can enter the limit line data between the limit line commands beginning with
EDITLIML and ending with "EDITDONE (Edit Done)" on page 208.
209
Format
EDITLIML
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Couplings
"EDITDONE (Edit Done)" on page 208, "LIMIREL (Relative Limit
Lines)" on page 287, "LIMF (Limit Line Frequency Value)" on page
282, "LIMU (Upper-Limit Amplitude)" on page 293, "LIML (LowerLimit Amplitude)" on page 289, "LIMTSL (Slope Limit Line)" on page
292
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ERR (Error)
ERR (Error)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The ERR? query returns a list of three-digit error codes if errors are present. A return
value of “0” means that there are no errors present. Executing ERR? clears all GPIB
errors.
If a command is a valid legacy command but not accepted by the N9061A
application, no error message is generated and the response to ERR? is 0. However,
if logging is enabled, the N9061A application command log registers a “Cmd not
Supported” error.
If a command is not a valid legacy command, a command error is generated; CMD
ERR is displayed on the front panel and the response to ERR? is 112. If logging is
enabled then "Cmd Error" is written to the command error log.
Error codes are provided in N9061A mode for some X-series errors such as external
reference, hardware and alignment errors. The X-series error codes are translated
to 8560 series error codes so that an error query returns the legacy instrument error
code. To review the error via the front panel, select the System > Show > Errors.
The following table shows the X-series error codes and the translated value.
X-Series Error Code
Description
8560 Series Error
Code
Description
40
TG Alignment Failure
758
SYSTEM:
Unknown
system
error
42
RF Alignment Failure
758
SYSTEM:
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
210
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ERR (Error)
X-Series Error Code
Description
8560 Series Error
Code
Description
Unknown
system
error
211
44
IF Alignment Failure
758
SYSTEM:
Unknown
system
error
46
LO Alignment Failure
758
SYSTEM:
Unknown
system
error
48
ADC Alignment Failure
758
SYSTEM:
Unknown
system
error
50
FM Demod Alignment Failure
758
SYSTEM:
Unknown
system
error
54
Extended Align Failure Sum
758
SYSTEM:
Unknown
system
error
71
Characterize Preselector Failure
758
SYSTEM:
Unknown
system
error
-200.3310
Execution Error; Preselector
Centering failed
758
SYSTEM:
Unknown
system
error
503
Frequency Reference Unlocked
336
10 MHz Ref
Cal
oscillator
failed to
lock when
going to
internal 10
MHz
reference.
505
2nd LO Unlocked
336
10 MHz Ref
Cal
oscillator
failed to
lock when
going to
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ERR (Error)
X-Series Error Code
Description
8560 Series Error
Code
Description
internal 10
MHz
reference.
509
LO Unlocked
300
YTO UNL:
YTO (1st
LO) phaselocked loop
(PLL) is
unlocked.
513
IF Synthesizer Unlocked
450
IF SYSTM:
IF hardware
failure.
Check
other error
messages.
515
Calibration Oscillator Unlocked
336
10 MHz
Ref: Cal
oscillator
failed to
lock when
going to
internal 10
MHz
reference
521
External Ref missing or out of
range
905,333
EXT REF:
Unable to
lock cal
oscillator
when set to
external
reference.
Check that
the external
reference is
within
tolerance.
600 UNLK:
600 MHz
reference
oscillator
PLL is
unlocked
Format
ERR?
Query Data Type
0 if no error present.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
212
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ERR (Error)
3-digit number if error present. For valid codes, see table above.
213
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Remote error list cleared. Persistent errors are re-entered into the
error list.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ET (Elapsed Time)
ET (Elapsed Time)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Returns to the controller the elapsed time (in hours) of instrument operation.
Format
ET?
Query Data Type
<number> in hours.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:SYSTem:PON:ETIMe? (see Query the Elapsed Time since First
Power-On)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
214
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
EX (Exchange Trace A and Trace B)
EX (Exchange Trace A and Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
This command exchanges Trace A and Trace B, point by point.
215
Format
EX
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of EX are identical to "AXB (Exchange Trace A and
Trace B)" on page 166 and to the XCH TRA,TRB form of "XCH
(Exchange)" on page 443.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
FA (Start Frequency)
FA (Start Frequency)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the start frequency value. The start frequency is equal to the center
frequency minus the span divided by two (FA = CF – SP/2). Changing the start
frequency changes the center frequency and span.
Format
FA <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ
<real>: Default unit is Hz. Range: frequency range of the
instrument.
FA UP|DN
Step Increment: Frequency span divided by 10.
FA OA
Specifying OA returns only the current value to the controller. It
does not set the active function to the start frequency.
FA?
Query Data Type
<real> in HZ.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSE]:FREQuency:STARt <number> (HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
216
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
FA (Start Frequency)
[:SENSE]:FREQuency:STARt?
[:SENSE]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO?
[:SENSE]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP?
(See "Start Freq" on page 499)
217
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
FB (Stop Frequency)
FB (Stop Frequency)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the stop frequency value. The stop frequency is equal to the center
frequency plus the span divided by two (FB = CF + SP/2). Changing the stop
frequency changes the center frequency and span.
Format
FB <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ
<real>: Default unit is Hz. Range: frequency range of the
instrument.
FB UP|DN
Step Increment: Frequency span divided by 10.
FB OA
Specifying OA returns only the current value to the controller. It
does not set the active function to the start frequency.
FB?
Query Data Type
<real> in HZ.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSE]:FREQuency:STOP <real> (HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ) (see "Stop
Freq" on page 500)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
218
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
FB (Stop Frequency)
219
Preset
Instrument maximum frequency.
Notes
The OA parameter only returns the current value to the controller.
It does not set the active function to the stop frequency.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
FDSP (Frequency Display Off)
FDSP (Frequency Display Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Turns the frequency annotation OFF.
Format
FDSP OFF
FDSP?
Query Data Type
‘1’ or ‘0’, indicating ON or OFF.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
See "ANNOT (Annotation)" on page 159.
Preset
ON
Couplings
It is not possible enable or disable the frequency annotation alone,
leaving other annotation unaffected. Thus, the FDSP command
behaves in the same way as "ANNOT (Annotation)" on page 159. If
the FDSP command has been used to disable the frequency
annotation, sending the command ANNOT ON does not re-enable
the display annotation. The display annotation is only enabled by
sending the command "IP (Instrument Preset)" on page 240.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
220
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
FOFFSET (Frequency Offset)
FOFFSET (Frequency Offset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Selects a value that offsets the frequency scale for all absolute frequency readouts
(for example, center frequency). Relative values such as span and marker delta are
not offset.
When an offset is in effect, it is displayed beneath the bottom graticule line on the
instrument screen.
Execute FOFFSET 0 or IP to turn off the offset.
Format
FOFFSET <real> HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ
<real>: Default unit is Hz.
FOFFSET UP|DN
UP or DN changes by 10% of Span.
FOFFSET OA
FOFFSET?
Query Data Type
<real>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSE]:FREQuency:OFFSet <number>
[:SENSE]:FREQuency:OFFSet?
221
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
FOFFSET (Frequency Offset)
(See "Freq Offset" on page 503)
Preset
0 Hz
Notes
The functions of FOFFSET are identical to "KSV (Frequency
Offset)" on page 275.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
222
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
FPKA (Fast Preselector Peak)
FPKA (Fast Preselector Peak)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B
Description
Automatically adjusts the preselector frequency to yield the greatest signal level at
the active marker. The FPKA command peaks the preselector faster than the
preselector-peak command, PP Although this command can be executed in all
frequency spans, it performs best when the instrument is in zero span. Use the
standard preselector peak for all other frequency spans.
The FPKA command also returns the amplitude value of active marker.
223
Format
FPKA
Query Data Type
Amplitude value of active marker.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PCENter (see "Presel Center" on page 459)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
FREF (Frequency Reference)
FREF (Frequency Reference)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Specifies whether an external source or an internal source is being used.
Format
FREF INT|EXT
FREF?
Query Data Type
INT|EXT
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce:TYPE INTernal|EXTernal|SENSe
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce:TYPE?
(See "Freq Ref In " on page 539)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
224
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
FS (Full Span)
FS (Full Span)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
– 8560 series: Sets the frequency span of the instrument to full span. Resolution
bandwidth, video bandwidth, and sweep time are all set to auto-coupled.
– 8566A/B, 8568A/B: Does an instrument preset, then sets the low band.
Whenever the frequency range of the instrument you are using does not match the
remote language’s own range, the span is limited by the capabilities of the
replacement instrument. The tables below list the frequency ranges for all the
supported remote languages when running on any supported X-series instrument.
Format
FS
Range: see tables below
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENse]:FREQuency:CENTer (see "Center Freq" on page 496)
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN (see "Span " on page 748)
The functions of FS are identical to "LF (Low Frequency Preset)"
on page 280.
Notes
PXA Series - Frequency Ranges Set by the FS Command
225
N9030A-503
N9030A-508
N9030A-513
N9030A-526
Remote
Language
Frequency
Range
Frequency
Range
Frequency
Range
Frequency
Range
8560E/EC
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
8561E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
FS (Full Span)
N9030A-503
N9030A-508
N9030A-513
N9030A-526
Remote
Language
Frequency
Range
Frequency
Range
Frequency
Range
Frequency
Range
8562E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz
0 Hz - 13.2 GHz
0 Hz - 13.2 GHz
8563E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8564E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8565E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8566A
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
8566B
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
8568A
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
8568B
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
MXA Series - Frequency Ranges Set by the FS Command
N9020A-503
N9020A-508
N9020A-513
N9020A-526
Remote
Language
Frequency
Range
Frequency
Range
Frequency
Range
Frequency
Range
8560E/EC
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
8561E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
8562E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz
0 Hz - 13.2 GHz
0 Hz - 13.2 GHz
8563E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8564E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8565E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8566A
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
8566B
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
8568A
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
8568B
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
EXA Series - Frequency Ranges Set by the FS Command
N9010A-503
N9010A-507
N9010A-513
N9010A-526
Remote
Language
Frequency
Range
Frequency
Range
Frequency
Range
Frequency
Range
8560E/EC
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
8561E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
8562E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 7.0 GHz
0 Hz - 13.2 GHz
0 Hz - 13.2 GHz
8563E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 7.0 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8564E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 7.0 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8565E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 7.0 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8566A
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
226
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
FS (Full Span)
227
N9010A-503
N9010A-507
N9010A-513
N9010A-526
Remote
Language
Frequency
Range
Frequency
Range
Frequency
Range
Frequency
Range
8566B
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
8568A
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
8568B
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
GATE (Gate)
GATE (Gate)
Syntax
Preset State: GATE OFF
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Turns the time-gating function on or off. When the time-gating function is turned on,
the instrument activates the time gate circuitry according to the parameters
controlled by gate length ("GL (Gate Length)" on page 231), gate delay ("GD (Gate
Delay)" on page 230) and the gate trigger input.
Format
GATE ON|OFF|1|0
GATE?
Query Data Type
1|0
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 (see "Gate On/Off " on
page 768)
Preset
OFF
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
228
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
GATECTL (Gate Control)
GATECTL (Gate Control)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Selects between the edge and level mode for time gate function.
– In the edge mode, a specified trigger edge starts the gate delay timer that in turn
starts the gate length timer.
– In the level mode, the gate follows the trigger input level.
The gate delay timer ("GD (Gate Delay)" on page 230) and the gate time length ("GL
(Gate Length)" on page 231) are operational in the edge mode, but not in the level
mode.
Format
GATECTL EDGE|LEVEL
GATECTL?
229
Query Data Type
EDGE|LEVEL
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
EDGE
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
GD (Gate Delay)
GD (Gate Delay)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the delay time from when the gate trigger occurs to when the gate is turned on.
GD only applies if "GATECTL (Gate Control)" on page 229 is set to EDGE.
Format
GD <real>US|MS|SC|S
GD UP|DN
GD OA
GD?
Query Data Type
<real> S
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:DELay <time> (see "Gate Delay " on page
773)
Preset
3 μs
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
230
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
GL (Gate Length)
GL (Gate Length)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the length of time the time gate is turned on. GL only applies if "GATECTL (Gate
Control)" on page 229 is set to EDGE.
Format
GL <real>US|MS|SC|S
GL UP|DN
GL OA
GL?
231
Query Data Type
<real> S
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:LENGth <time> (see "Gate Length " on
page 773)
Preset
1 μs
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
GP (Gate Polarity)
GP (Gate Polarity)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the polarity (positive or negative) for the gate trigger.
– If the "GATECTL (Gate Control)" on page 229 is in EDGE mode, the gate delay
timer can be triggered on either a positive or negative edge of the trigger input.
– If the Gate Control is in LEVEL mode and POSitive is selected, the gate is on when
the trigger input is high. If the Gate Control is in LEVEL mode and NEGative is
selected, the gate is on when the trigger is low.
Format
GP NEG|POS
GP?
Query Data Type
NEG|POS
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:SWEep:EGATe:POLarity NEG|POS (see Gate Polarity (Remote
Command Only))
Preset
POS
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
232
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
GRAT (Graticule)
GRAT (Graticule)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Turns the graticule on or off.
Format
GRAT ON|OFF|1|0
GRAT?
233
Query Data Type
ON|OFF|1|0
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID[:STATE] (OFF|ON|0|1)
(see "Graticule " on page 928)
Preset
ON
Notes
The functions of GRAT are identical to "KSm (Graticule Off)" on
page 267 and "KSn (Graticule On)" on page 269.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
HD (Hold Data Entry)
HD (Hold Data Entry)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Disables data entry via the instrument numeric keypad, knob, or step keys. The
active function readout is blanked, and any active function is deactivated.
Format
HD
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
234
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
I1 [one] (Set RF Coupling to DC)
I1 [one] (Set RF Coupling to DC)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8568A/B
Description
Sets the RF coupling to DC.
The tables below list the frequency specifications for all X-Series instruments, for
both DC and AC coupling.
8568A/B Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Analyzer Model
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
8568A/B
100 Hz
1.5 GHz
100 kHz
1.5 GHz
EXA Series Instrument Frequency Coupling Specifications
235
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Instrument Model (N9010A)
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Option 503
9 kHz
3.6 GHz
10 MHz
3.6 GHz
Option 507
9 kHz
7.0 GHz
10 MHz
7.0 GHz
Option 513
9 kHz
13.6 GHz
10 MHz
13.6 GHz
Option 526
9 kHz
26.5 GHz
10 MHz
26.5 GHz
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
I1 [one] (Set RF Coupling to DC)
MXA Series Instrument Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Instrument Model (N9020A)
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Option 503
20 Hz
3.6 GHz
10 MHz
3.6 GHz
Option 508
20 Hz
8.4 GHz
10 MHz
8.4 GHz
Option 513
20 Hz
13.6 GHz
10 MHz
13.6 GHz
Option 526
20 Hz
26.5 GHz
10 MHz
26.5 GHz
PXA Series Instrument Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Instrument Model (N9030A)
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Option 503
3 Hz
3.6 GHz
10 MHz
3.6 GHz
Option 508
3 Hz
8.4 GHz
10 MHz
8.4 GHz
Option 513
3 Hz
13.6 GHz
10 MHz
13.6 GHz
Option 526
3 Hz
26.5 GHz
10 MHz
26.5 GHz
The X-Series instruments only have a single RF input port.
Format
I1
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:INPut:COUPling DC (see "RF Coupling" on page 507)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
236
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
I2 [two] (Set RF Coupling to AC)
I2 [two] (Set RF Coupling to AC)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8568A/B
Description
Sets the RF coupling to AC.
The tables below list the frequency specifications for all X-Series instruments for
both DC and AC coupling.
8568A/B Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Analyzer Model
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
8568A/B
100 Hz
1.5 GHz
100 kHz
1.5 GHz
EXA Series Instrument Frequency Coupling Specifications
237
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Instrument Model (N9010A)
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Option 503
9 kHz
3.6 GHz
10 MHz
3.6 GHz
Option 507
9 kHz
7.0 GHz
10 MHz
7.0 GHz
Option 513
9 kHz
13.6 GHz
10 MHz
13.6 GHz
Option 526
9 kHz
26.5 GHz
10 MHz
26.5 GHz
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
I2 [two] (Set RF Coupling to AC)
MXA Series Instrument Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Instrument Model (N9020A)
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Option 503
20 Hz
3.6 GHz
10 MHz
3.6 GHz
Option 508
20 Hz
8.4 GHz
10 MHz
8.4 GHz
Option 513
20 Hz
13.6 GHz
10 MHz
13.6 GHz
Option 526
20 Hz
26.5 GHz
10 MHz
26.5 GHz
PXA Series Instrument Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Instrument Model (N9030A)
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Option 503
3 Hz
3.6 GHz
10 MHz
3.6 GHz
Option 508
3 Hz
8.4 GHz
10 MHz
8.4 GHz
Option 513
3 Hz
13.6 GHz
10 MHz
13.6 GHz
Option 526
3 Hz
26.5 GHz
10 MHz
26.5 GHz
Format
I2
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:INPut:COUPling AC (see "RF Coupling" on page 507)
Notes
The X-Series instruments only have a single RF input port.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
238
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ID (Identify)
ID (Identify)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The ID? query returns the current remote language to the controller (for example,
“HP8563E”).
The response value is determined by your remote language selection. This is
configured via the selection in the front-panel Mode Setup menu when in N9061A
mode. The remote language selection can also be set using the SCPI command
:SYSTem:LANGuage (see "Mode Setup" on page 661).
ID? also works when the instrument is not in N9061A mode. In this case the
instrument model number is returned. The string that is returned is identical to the
second field of text that is returned from the *IDN? command.
For more information see:
– "Setting up N9061A" on page 76
– "List of Supported SCPI Commands" on page 82
Format
ID OA
ID?
239
Query Data Type
See Description above.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
*IDN? is similar; see "Identification Query " on page 84.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
IP (Instrument Preset)
IP (Instrument Preset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Performs an instrument preset, setting the instrument back to its factory settings. IP
does not affect the contents of any data or trace registers or stored preselector
data. IP does not clear the input or output data buffers on the 8560-series
analyzers, but does clear them on the 8566A/B, 8568A/B.
Instrument preset automatically occurs when you turn on the instrument. IP is a
good starting point for many measurement processes. When IP is executed
remotely, the instrument does not necessarily execute a complete sweep, however.
You should execute a "TS (Take Sweep)" on page 432 to ensure that the trace data is
valid after an IP.
N9061A executes this command after any language switch on the X-Series
instrument.
Format
IP
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of IP are identical to the command "KST (Fast
Preset)" on page 274.
If the external amplifier gain has been set, executing IP does not
reset this value. This is to protect the instrument.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
240
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KS, (Mixer Level)
KS, (Mixer Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the maximum signal level that is applied to the input mixer for a signal that
is equal to or below the reference level.
The effective mixer level is equal to the reference level minus the input attenuator
setting. When KS, is activated, the effective mixer level can be set from –10 dBm to –
70 dBm in 10 dB steps.
As the reference level is changed, the coupled input attenuator automatically
changes to limit the maximum signal at the mixer input to your specified setting for
signals less than or equal to the reference level.
Format
KS, <real>DM|MV|UV
KS, OA
KS,?
Query Data Type
<real>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MIXer:RANGe[:UPPer] <real> dBm
:[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MIXer:RANGe[:UPPer]?
(See "Max Mixer Level" on page 457)
Preset
– 10 dBm
Notes
The functions of KS, are identical to "ML (Mixer Level)" on page
341.
If the external amplifier gain has been set, executing IP does not
reset this value. This is to protect the instrument.
241
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KS= (8566A/B: Automatic Preselector Tracking, 8568A/B: Marker Counter Resolution)
KS= (8566A/B: Automatic Preselector Tracking, 8568A/B:
Marker Counter Resolution)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
– 8566A/B: Reinstates automatic preselector tracking, after KS/ has been
executed. Normally, the center of the preselector filter automatically tracks
signal responses in the four frequency bands of the 2 to 22 GHz range.
The KS/ command allows manual adjustment of the preselector tracking. XSeries instruments can consume this command with no action.
– 8568A/B: Specifies the resolution of the marker frequency counter.
Format
KS= <real>HZ|KZ|MZ|GZ
KS=?
Query Data Type
<real>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]:FCOunt:RESolution <freq> (see "Gate Time "
on page 576)
Notes
For 8568A/B, the functions of KS= are identical to "MKFCR
(Marker Counter Resolution)" on page 321.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
242
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KS( (Lock Registers)
KS( (Lock Registers)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Secures the contents of state registers one through six. When the registers are
secured, the commands "SV (Save State)" on page 409 and "SAVES (Save State)" on
page 390 cannot save more instrument states in the registers, but instead cause the
display of "SAVE LOCK" on the instrument display.
To save an instrument state in a locked register, first execute "KS) (Unlock
Registers)" on page 244 to unlock the registers.
The recall function of the instrument is not affected by this function.
243
Format
KS(
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Unlocked
Couplings
This state is not affected by IP.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KS) (Unlock Registers)
KS) (Unlock Registers)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Unlocks the state registers, where instrument states are stored with "SV (Save
State)" on page 409 and "SAVES (Save State)" on page 390.
Format
KS)
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Unlocked
Couplings
This state is not affected by IP.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
244
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSA (Amplitude in dBm)
KSA (Amplitude in dBm)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the amplitude readout (reference level, marker, display line and threshold) to
dBm units.
245
Format
KSA
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of the KSA command are identical to AUNITS DBM .
See "AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude Units)" on page 163.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSa (Normal Detection)
KSa (Normal Detection)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Selects normal input detection. That is, it enables the Rosenfell detection algorithm
that selectively chooses between positive and negative values.
Format
KSa
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSa are identical to DET NRM. See "DET
(Detection Mode)" on page 197.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
246
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSB (Amplitude in dBmV)
KSB (Amplitude in dBmV)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the amplitude readout (reference level, marker, display line and threshold) to
dBmV units.
247
Format
KSB
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSB are identical to AUNITS DBMV. See
"AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude Units)" on page 163.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSb (Positive Peak Detection)
KSb (Positive Peak Detection)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Enables positive peak input detection for displaying trace information. Trace
elements are only updated when the detected signal level is greater than the
previous signal level.
Format
KSb
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSb are identical to DET POS. See "DET
(Detection Mode)" on page 197.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
248
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSC (Amplitude in dBμV)
KSC (Amplitude in dBμV)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the amplitude readout (reference level, marker, display line and threshold) to
dBμV units.
249
Format
KSC
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent
Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSC are identical to AUNITS DBUV. See "AUNITS (Absolute
Amplitude Units)" on page 163.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSc (A Plus B to A)
KSc (A Plus B to A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Performs a point-by-point addition of Trace A and Trace B, and sends the results to
Trace A. Thus, if your input signal remains unchanged, KSc can restore the original
trace after an AMB or a C2 command has been executed.
Format
KSc
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSc are identical to "APB (Trace A Plus Trace B
to A)" on page 160.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
250
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSD (Amplitude in Volts)
KSD (Amplitude in Volts)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the amplitude readout (reference level, marker, display line and threshold) to
voltage units.
251
Format
KSD
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSD are identical to AUNITS V. See "AUNITS
(Absolute Amplitude Units)" on page 163.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSd (Negative Peak Detection)
KSd (Negative Peak Detection)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Selects negative-peak input detection for displaying trace information. Each trace
element is updated with the minimum value detected during the sweep.
Format
KSd
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion] NEGative (see "Detector" on page
861)
Notes
The functions of KSd are identical to DET NEG. See "DET
(Detection Mode)" on page 197.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
252
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSE (Title Mode)
KSE (Title Mode)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Activates the title mode, writing a message to the top line of the display.
Format
KSE <char><real><terminator>
The only characters that N9061A accepts as <terminator> are ‘@’
and Carriage Return.
253
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:DISPlay:ANNotation:TITLe:DATA “text” (see "Change Title " on
page 926)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSe (Sample Detection)
KSe (Sample Detection)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Selects sample input detection for displaying trace information.
Format
KSe
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion] SAMPle (see "Detector" on page
861)
Notes
The functions of KSe are identical to DET SMP. See "DET
(Detection Mode)" on page 197.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
254
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSG (Video Averaging On)
KSG (Video Averaging On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Enables video averaging. The averaged trace is displayed in Trace A.
Format
KSG <average length>
KSG ON
KSG OA
KSG?
If video averaging is off when either KSG? or KSG OA is sent to the
instrument, video averaging is turned ON and the current average
count is returned to the controller.
Query Data Type
Current average count.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe:COPY TRACE#,TRACE3
:TRACe3:TYPE WRITe
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion] SAMPle
:TRACe#:TYPE AVERage
[:SENSe]:AVERage:COUNT <integer>
(See "Copy/Exchange" on page 878, "Detector" on page 861, etc.)
Preset
Preset state is OFF.
If ON, <average length> is preset to 100.
Notes
255
The functions of KSG are identical to VAVG ON. See "VAVG (Video
Average)" on page 434.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSg (Display Off)
KSg (Display Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Turns the instrument’s display Off.
Format
KSg
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:DISPlay:ENABle OFF (see Display Enable (Remote Command Only))
Notes
On the legacy spectrum analyzers, this command turned the CRT
beam power off to avoid unnecessary wear on the CRT. Although
this command is supported, displays used on the X-Series
instruments have a much longer life than the CRTs used in the
legacy spectrum analyzers.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
256
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSH (Video Averaging Off)
KSH (Video Averaging Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Switches video averaging Off.
Format
KSH
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe3:MODE BLANk
:TRACe#:TYPE WRITe
(See "View/Blank " on page 858)
Notes
257
The functions of KSH are identical to VAVG OFF. See "VAVG
(Video Average)" on page 434.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSh (Display On)
KSh (Display On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Turns the instrument’s display On.
Format
KSh
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:DISPlay:ENABle ON (see Display Enable (Remote Command Only))
Notes
On the early models of spectrum analyzers, CRT beam power was
often switched Off to prevent wear of the CRT. This command was
used to turn the CRT beam power on again. Although this command
is supported, displays used on the X-Series instruments have a
much longer life than the CRTs used in the legacy spectrum
analyzers.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
258
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSI (Extend Reference Level)
KSI (Extend Reference Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
In legacy analyzers, KSI extends the reference level range to maximum limits of –
139.9 dBm and +60 dBm.
N9061A accepts this command but takes no action, because the standard reference
level lower limit of X-Series instruments covers the “extended” range of the legacy
instruments.
259
Format
KSI
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Off
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSi (Exchange Trace B and Trace C)
KSi (Exchange Trace B and Trace C)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Exchanges Trace B data with Trace C data.
Trace C cannot be an active trace. This means that the data in Trace C cannot be
updated as the instrument sweeps. To ensure that the current settings of the
instrument are reflected in the data exchanged between Trace B and Trace C, you
must follow the four step process below.
1. Select single sweep mode ("S2 [two] (Single Sweep)" on page 388 or "SNGLS
(Single Sweep)" on page 398)
2. Select the desired instrument settings
3. Take one complete sweep using the command "TS (Take Sweep)" on page 432
4. Exchange the data
Format
KSi
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSi are identical to "BXC (Exchange Trace B and
Trace C)" on page 175 and the XCH TRB,TRC form of "XCH
(Exchange)" on page 443.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
260
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSj (View Trace C)
KSj (View Trace C)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Displays Trace C.
261
Format
KSj
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent
Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSj are identical to VIEW TRC. See "VIEW (View Trace)" on
page 440.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSK (Marker to Next Peak)
KSK (Marker to Next Peak)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
If there is a marker on the screen, this command moves this marker to the next signal
peak of lower amplitude.
Format
KSK
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:MAXimum:NEXT
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion <rel_ampl>
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold <ampl>
(See "Pk Excursion " on page 673)
Notes
The functions of KSK are similar to the MKPK NH form of "MKPK
(Marker Peak)" on page 329, except that KSK does not take into
account the marker peak threshold value or the marker peak
excursion value.
For more details on marker peak threshold, see the command
"MKPT (Marker Threshold)" on page 330 and "TH (Threshold)" on
page 419.
For more details on marker peak excursion, see the command
"MKPX (Marker Peak Excursion)" on page 331.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
262
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSk (Blank Trace C)
KSk (Blank Trace C)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Blanks Trace C.
263
Format
KSk
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSk are identical to BLANK TRC. See "BLANK
(Blank Trace)" on page 172)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSL (Marker Noise Off)
KSL (Marker Noise Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Disables the noise density function which displays the RMS noise density at the
marker. KSL does not blank the marker.
Format
KSL
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:FUNCtion OFF (see "Marker Function" on
page 578)
Notes
The functions of KSL are identical to MKNOISE OFF. See
"MKNOISE (Marker Noise)" on page 326.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
264
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSl (Transfer Trace B to Trace C)
KSl (Transfer Trace B to Trace C)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Transfers Trace B data to Trace C
Trace C cannot be an active trace. This means that the data in Trace C cannot be
updated as the instrument sweeps. To ensure that the current settings of the
instrument are reflected in the data transferred from Trace B to Trace C, you must
follow the four step process below.
1. Select single sweep mode ("S2 [two] (Single Sweep)" on page 388 or "SNGLS
(Single Sweep)" on page 398)
2. Select the desired instrument settings
3. Take one complete sweep using the command "TS (Take Sweep)" on page 432
4. Transfer the data
265
Format
KSl
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSl are identical to "BTC (Transfer Trace B to
Trace C)" on page 174.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSM (Marker Noise On)
KSM (Marker Noise On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Displays the noise density at the marker. The noise density is normalized to a 1 Hz
bandwidth.
Format
KSM OA
KSM?
Query Data Type
Noise density at the marker.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:FUNCtion NOISe (see "Marker Function"
on page 578)
Notes
The functions of KSM are identical to MKNOISE ON. See
"MKNOISE (Marker Noise)" on page 326.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
266
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSm (Graticule Off)
KSm (Graticule Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Blanks the graticule on the instrument display.
267
Format
KSm
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSm are identical to GRAT OFF. See "GRAT
(Graticule)" on page 233.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSN (Marker Minimum)
KSN (Marker Minimum)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Moves the marker to the minimum value detected.
Format
KSN
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:MINimum (see "Min Search " on page 682)
Notes
The functions of KSN are identical to "MKMIN (Marker Minimum)"
on page 323.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
268
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSn (Graticule On)
KSn (Graticule On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Turns on the graticule on the instrument display.
269
Format
KSn
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSn are identical to GRAT ON. See "GRAT
(Graticule)" on page 233.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSO (Marker Span)
KSO (Marker Span)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
This command operates only when the delta marker is On (see "MKD (Marker Delta)"
on page 316 or "M3 [three] (Delta Marker)" on page 298).
When the delta marker is on and KSO is executed, the left marker specifies the start
frequency, and the right marker specifies the stop frequency.
If the delta marker is off, the command does nothing.
Format
KSO
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer2[:SET]:DELTA:SPAN (see "MkrΔ->Span" on
page 601)
Notes
The functions of KSO are identical to "MKSP (Marker Span)" on
page 335.
If the active marker is not a delta marker, there is no change in its
position.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
270
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSo (Annotation Off)
KSo (Annotation Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Blanks the annotation on the instrument display.
271
Format
KSo
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSo are identical to ANNOT OFF. See "ANNOT
(Annotation)" on page 159.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSP (GPIB Address)
KSP (GPIB Address)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Allows you to display or change the current read/write HP-IB address of the
instrument.
Note that the “HZ” in the command format string is required.
Format
KSP OA
KSP <integer> HZ
Query Data Type
<integer>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess <integer> (see
"GPIB Address" on page 836)
Preset
Factory preset address: 18
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
272
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSp (Annotation On)
KSp (Annotation On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Activates the annotation on the instrument display.
273
Format
KSp
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSp are identical to ANNOT ON. See "ANNOT
(Annotation)" on page 159.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KST (Fast Preset)
KST (Fast Preset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Performs an instrument preset, setting the instrument back to its factory settings.
Format
KST
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
There is no fast preset for X-Series instruments. Instead, the Code
Compatibility software performs an instrument preset (IP) when the
KST command is issued. The functions of KST are therefore
identical to "IP (Instrument Preset)" on page 240.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
274
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSV (Frequency Offset)
KSV (Frequency Offset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Allows you to specify a value that offsets the frequency scale for all absolute
frequency readouts, for example, center frequency. Relative values, for example,
span and delta marker, are not offset.
275
Format
KSV
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSV are identical to "FOFFSET (Frequency Offset)"
on page 221.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSx (External Trigger)
KSx (External Trigger)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Activates the normal external trigger mode. When KSx is executed, the RF input
signal is only displayed when the external trigger level exceeds the trigger threshold
level.
Format
KSx
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSx are identical to TM EXT. See "TM (Trigger
Mode)" on page 424.
If an 8566A/B or an 8568A/B analyzer is in zero span and the
sweep time is less than 20 msec, the display is refreshed only when
a fresh trace has been taken. This can cause the displayed trace to
flicker.
In X-Series instruments, all traces are displayed continuously, so
are therefore free of flicker.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
276
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSy (Video Trigger)
KSy (Video Trigger)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Activates the normal video trigger mode. When KSy is executed, the RF input signal
is only displayed when the video trigger signal, which is internally triggered off the
input signal, exceeds the trigger threshold level.
Format
KSy
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSy are identical to the TM VID form of "TM
(Trigger Mode)" on page 424 and to "T4 [four] (Video Trigger)" on
page 415.
If an 8566A/B or an 8568A/B analyzer is in zero span and the sweep
time is less than 20 msec, the display is refreshed only when a fresh
trace has been taken. This can cause the displayed trace to flicker.
In X-Series instruments, all traces are displayed continuously, so
are therefore free of flicker.
277
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSZ (Reference Level Offset)
KSZ (Reference Level Offset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Offsets all amplitude readouts on the display but without affecting the trace.
Once activated, KSZ displays the amplitude offset on the left side of the screen.
Sending KSZ 0, or presetting the instrument, eliminates an amplitude offset.
Format
KSZ <real>DM|MV|UV
8566A/B only supports unit DM
KSZ OA
KSZ?
Query Data Type
<real>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <rel_ampl>
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet?
(See "Reference Level" on page 447)
Preset
0
Notes
The functions of KSZ are identical to "ROFFSET (Reference Level
Offset)" on page 383.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
278
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
L0 [zero] (Display Line Off)
L0 [zero] (Display Line Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Disables the display line.
279
Format
L0
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of L0 are identical to DLE OFF. See "DLE (Display
Line Enable)" on page 200.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
LF (Low Frequency Preset)
LF (Low Frequency Preset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B
Description
Performs a low frequency preset. That is, it selects a Start Frequency of 0 Hz and a
Stop Frequency of 2.5 GHz, a Reference Level of 0 dBm, and sets all coupled
functions to automatic.
Format
LF
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
280
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
LG (Logarithmic Scale)
LG (Logarithmic Scale)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the amplitude (vertical graticule divisions) as logarithmic units, without
changing the reference level.
Format
LG <number>DB|DM
Range: 1, 2, 5, and 10
LG UP|DN
LG OA
LG?
Query Data Type
<number> DB
When in linear mode, LG? returns "0".
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing
LINear|LOGarithmic
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing?
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision <ampl> dB
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision?
(See "Scale / Div" on page 458)
Preset
281
10 dB
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
LIMF (Limit Line Frequency Value)
LIMF (Limit Line Frequency Value)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
This command is used to enter a frequency value for a limit-line segment.
Format
LIMF <number>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ
The response to the query LIMF? is not supported by N9061A.
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
N/A
Couplings
"EDITLIML (Edit Limit Line)" on page 209, "EDITDONE (Edit Done)"
on page 208
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
282
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
LIMIFAIL (Limits Failed)
LIMIFAIL (Limits Failed)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Returns a number between 0 and 3, which specifies whether the active trace passed
or failed the upper and lower limit line tests.
283
Format
LIMIFAIL?
Query Data Type
The meanings of the returned numbers (0-3) are shown in the
"Query Data Type Codes" on page 284 table below.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:FAIL? (see Limit Line Fail? (Remote
Command Only))
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
Query Data Type Codes
Query Data Type Codes
Results of the LIMIFAIL Query
Result
Meaning
0
The active trace passed both the upper and the lower limit tests. This value is also returned
if there are no limits, or if LIMITST is OFF.
1
The active trace failed the lower limit test.
2
The active trace failed the upper limit test.
3
The active trace failed both the upper and the lower limit tests.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
284
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
LIMIPURGE (Delete Current Limit Line)
LIMIPURGE (Delete Current Limit Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Deletes the current limit line.
285
Format
LIMIPURGE
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:LLINe:ALL:DELete (see "Delete All Limits" on page 620)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
LIMIRCL (Recall Limit Line)
LIMIRCL (Recall Limit Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Recalls a limit-line set from the limit-line table in the module user memory. The
table is stored in user memory with the command "LIMISAV (Save Limit Line)" on
page 288. The command displays a limit line, which is recalled by the name assigned
to it. A limit line may be saved and given a name using LIMISAV, or entered from the
front panel with the screen-title function.
To display the line, send the command LIMITST 1 (see "LIMITST (Activate Limit Line
Test Function)" on page 291).
Format
LIMIRCL delimeter identifier delimiter
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
MMEMory:LOAD:LIMit LLINE1|LLINE2, <“filename”> (see "Limit" on
page 697)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
286
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
LIMIREL (Relative Limit Lines)
LIMIREL (Relative Limit Lines)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Specifies whether the current limit lines are fixed or relative.
Format
LIMIREL ON|OFF|1|0
LIMIREL?
287
Query Data Type
1|0
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:LLINe:CMODe FIXed|RELative (see Fixed / Relative
Limit (Remote Command Only))
Preset
OFF
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
LIMISAV (Save Limit Line)
LIMISAV (Save Limit Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Saves the active limit line to module memory under the name assigned to it. Any
previously existing limit line having the same name is overwritten with the new limitline table data.
Refer also to the command "LIMIRCL (Recall Limit Line)" on page 286.
Format
LIMISAV delimeter identifier delimiter
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
MMEMory:STORe:LIMit LLINE1|LLINE2, <“filename”> (see "Limit "
on page 716)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
288
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
LIML (Lower-Limit Amplitude)
LIML (Lower-Limit Amplitude)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Assigns the lower-limit amplitude value to a limit-line segment.
289
Format
LIML <number>DB|DBM
Query Data Type
N/A. The query is not supported by N9061A.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
LIMTFL (Flat Limit Line)
LIMTFL (Flat Limit Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Used with the command "SEDI (Edit Limit Line Segment)" on page 393 to make the
selected limit-line segment flat.
Format
LIMTFL 0|1
LIMTFL?
Query Data Type
0|1
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
290
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
LIMITST (Activate Limit Line Test Function)
LIMITST (Activate Limit Line Test Function)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Activates the limit-line test function, which compares the trace data in the current
sweep with the limits set up in the limit table of the active limit line. The results of the
current active trace compared with the active limit line can be read using the
command "LIMIFAIL (Limits Failed)" on page 283. When this option is set to 1 (ON),
the active limit-line test limits are displayed on-screen, along with a LIMIT FAILED
message if the trace data fails.
Format
LIMITST 1|0
LIMITST?
Query Data Type
1|0
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DISPlay OFF|ON|0|1 (see "Limit " on page
608)
:CALCulate:LLINe:TEST OFF|ON|0|1 (see "Test Limits" on page 618)
Preset
291
0
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
LIMTSL (Slope Limit Line)
LIMTSL (Slope Limit Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Makes the selected limit-line segment sloped.
Format
LIMTSL 0|1
LIMTSL?
Query Data Type
0|1
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
1 (Sloped)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
292
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
LIMU (Upper-Limit Amplitude)
LIMU (Upper-Limit Amplitude)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Assigns the upper-limit amplitude value to a limit-line segment.
293
Format
LIMU <number>DB|DBM
Query Data Type
N/A (Query is not supported by N9061A)
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
LN (Linear Scale)
LN (Linear Scale)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Scales the amplitude (vertical graticule divisions) proportional to the input voltage
(that is, linearly), without changing the reference level. The bottom line of the
graticule represents 0 V.
Format
LN
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing LINear (see "Scale
Type" on page 459)
Preset
Off
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
294
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
M1 [one] (Marker Off)
M1 [one] (Marker Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Blanks any markers showing on the display.
295
Format
M1
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer#:MODE OFF (see "Marker" on page 562)
Notes
Unlike the MKOFF ALL form of "MKOFF (Marker Off)" on page 327,
M1 also blanks inactive markers.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
M2 [two] (Marker Normal)
M2 [two] (Marker Normal)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Moves the active marker to the marker frequency. If the active marker type is not
currently Normal (for example, if it is Delta), the M2 command changes it to a Normal
marker.
Format
M2 <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ|S|MS|US|SC
M2 UP|DN
UP or DN increments 10% of span
M2 OA
M2?
Query Data Type
<real>. See "MKF (Marker Frequency)" on page 318.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:X <freq|time>
:CALCulate:MARKer:MODE POSition
(See "Marker" on page 562)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
296
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
M2 [two] (Marker Normal)
Notes
The functions of M2 are identical to "MKN (Marker Normal)" on
page 324.
If the active marker has not been declared with "MKACT (Activate
Marker)" on page 313, a Normal marker is turned on and this active
marker is assumed to be marker number 1.
297
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
M3 [three] (Delta Marker)
M3 [three] (Delta Marker)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Computes the frequency and amplitude difference between the active marker and
the delta (or difference) marker.
If a delta marker is not displayed on the screen, M3 places one at the specified
frequency or on the right hand edge of the display. If an active marker is not
displayed on the screen, M3 places an active marker at the center of the screen.
Format
M3 <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ|S|MS|US|SC
M3 UP|DN
UP or DN increments 10% of span
M3 OA
M3?
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
298
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
M3 [three] (Delta Marker)
Query Data Type
<real>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer2:MODE POSition|DELTa|OFF
:CALCulate:MARKer2:REFerence 1
:CALCulate:MARKer2:X <freq|time>
(See "Marker" on page 562)
Preset
0
Notes
The functions of M3 are identical to "MKD (Marker Delta)" on page
316.
The active marker is the number 1 marker unless otherwise
specified by the command "MKACT (Activate Marker)" on page 313.
299
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
M4 [four] (Marker Zoom)
M4 [four] (Marker Zoom)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
This command increases or decreases the frequency span. With the UP/DN
parameters, the change is by one step. With a numeric value, the command moves
the marker's horizontal (X) position to the specified position in frequency or time.
Format
M4 <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ|S|MS|US|SC
M4 UP|DN
UP or DN increases or decreases the frequency span by one step
M4 OA
The OA option only returns the current value to the controller; it
does not set the active function to the active marker.
M4?
Query Data Type
<real>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
300
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MA (Marker Amplitude Output)
MA (Marker Amplitude Output)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns the amplitude level of the active marker if the marker is on the screen. If
both the active marker and the delta marker are displayed, the command returns the
amplitude difference between the two markers.
Format
MA
Query Data Type
8566A/B, 8568A/B: dependent on the currently set trace data
format (see "TDF (Trace Data Format)" on page 418, MDS, O1, O2,
O3, or O4).
8560 Series: Amplitude is always returned as an ASCII value (TDF
P).
301
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Y? (see "Marker" on page 562)
Notes
The functions of MA are identical to "MKA (Marker Amplitude)" on
page 312.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MC0 [zero] (Marker Frequency Counter Off)
MC0 [zero] (Marker Frequency Counter Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8568A/B
Description
Turns the marker frequency counter off.
Format
MC0
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FCOunt[:STATe] OFF (see "Counter "
on page 573)
Preset
Off
Notes
The functions of MC0 are identical to MKFC OFF. See "MKFC
(Marker Counter)" on page 320.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
302
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MC1 [one] (Marker Frequency Counter On)
MC1 [one] (Marker Frequency Counter On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8568A/B
Description
Turns the marker frequency counter on.
Format
MC1
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent
Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FCOunt[:STATe] ON
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FCOunt:X?
(See "Counter " on page 573)
303
Preset
Off
Notes
The functions of MC1 are identical to MKFC ON. See "MKFC (Marker Counter)"
on page 320.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MDS (Measurement Data Size)
MDS (Measurement Data Size)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Formats binary data in one of the following formats:
B
Selects a data size of one byte (8 bits).
W
Selects a data size of one word (16 bits).
If no keyword is specified in the command, the default value of W is assumed.
Format
MDS B|[W]
MDS?
Query Data Type
B|W
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
W
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
304
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MDU (Measurement Data Units)
MDU (Measurement Data Units)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns the measurement data units, as a list of four values. N9061A returns the
values in display units.
Format
MDU[?]
Query Data Type
The four data values returned are as follows:
1. Lower vertical scale limit
2. Upper vertical scale limit
3. Baseline (dBm)
4. Reference level (dBm)
SCPI Equivalent Commands
305
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MEAN (Trace Mean)
MEAN (Trace Mean)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns the mean value of the specified trace in display units.
Format
MEAN TRA|TRB
TRA corresponds to Trace 1 and TRB corresponds to Trace 2.
Query Data Type
Mean value of the specified trace in display units.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
CALCulate:DATA[1|2|3|4|5|6:COMPress? MEAN
TRACe:MATH:MEAN?
TRACE1|TRACE2|TRACE3|TRACE4|TRACE5|TRACE6
(See Mean Trace Data (Remote Command Only) )
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
306
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MEANPWR (Mean Power measurement)
MEANPWR (Mean Power measurement)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Measures the average power of the carrier during that portion of the time when it is
on. The on state is defined as the time when the signal is within a selected number of
dB of its peak level. The range of amplitudes that is defined as the on state can be
set with the command. The amplitude range is set relative to the peak value of the
signal.
Format
MEANPWR TRA|TRB,<number>,?
Range: 0.01 dB to 100 dB
307
Query Data Type
<number> in double.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
MEANPWR is similar to "CARRON (Carrier On Power)" on page 180,
except that CARRON defines ‘on’ as that time when the signal is
within 20 dB of its peak level.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MEAS (Meas)
MEAS (Meas)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns the current sweep status.
– If the instrument is set to sweep and make measurements continuously, the
command returns CONTS.
– If it is set to make a single sweep with a single measurement, the command
returns SNGLS.
The instrument can be set to single sweep using the command "SNGLS (Single
Sweep)" on page 398 and it can be set to continuous sweep using the command
"CONTS (Continuous Sweep)" on page 189.
Format
MEAS?
Query Data Type
SNGLS|CONTS
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:INITiate:CONTinuous? (see "Cont (Continuous
Measurement/Sweep)" on page 488)
Note that the response values for this command differ from those
of the legacy command
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
308
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MF (Marker Frequency Output)
MF (Marker Frequency Output)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns the frequency (or time) of the on-screen active marker. If both an active
marker and the delta marker are on the screen, the frequency difference is returned.
Format
8560 series: MF?
8566A/B, 8568A/B: MF
Query Data Type
8566A/B, 8568A/B: Dependent on the current trace data format
(see "TDF (Trace Data Format)" on page 418, MDS, O1, O2, O3 and
O4).
8560 series: Always returned as an ASCII value (TDF P).
309
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6:X? (see "Marker" on page 562)
Notes
8566 and 8568 only: If the active marker has marker frequency
count set to On when using the MF command, the marker
frequency count value is returned to the controller.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MINH (Minimum Hold)
MINH (Minimum Hold)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Updates the chosen trace with the minimum signal level detected at each tracedata point from subsequent sweeps.
Format
MINH TRA|TRB
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
TRACe[1|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE MINHold (see "Trace/Detector" on page
851)
Preset
After a Preset, all Minhold traces are set to 1000 dBm.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
310
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MINPOS (Minimum X Position)
MINPOS (Minimum X Position)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns the X co-ordinate value that corresponds to the minimum amplitude of the
specified trace.
Format
MINPOS TRA|TRB|TRC
Query Data Type
Value in X-axis display units.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer12:TRACe 1|2|3|4|5|6
:CALCulate:MARKer12:MINimum
:CALCulate:MARKer12:X?
(See "Marker" on page 562)
311
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKA (Marker Amplitude)
MKA (Marker Amplitude)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns the amplitude level of the active marker if the marker is on the screen. If
both the active marker and the delta marker are displayed, the command returns the
amplitude difference between the two markers.
Format
MKA?
Query Data Type
8560 Series: The marker amplitude is always returned as an ASCII
value (TDF P).
8566 and 8568 Series: Specifies the amplitude of the active marker
in dBm when the active marker is the fixed or amplitude type (see
"MKTYPE (Marker Type)" on page 340).
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer1|2:Y? (see "Marker" on page 562)
Notes
The functions of MKA are identical to "MA (Marker Amplitude
Output)" on page 301.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
312
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKACT (Activate Marker)
MKACT (Activate Marker)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the active marker. There can be four different markers, but only one marker
can be active at any time.
Format
MKACT <integer>
Range: 1,2,3,4. Default: 1
MKACT?
313
Query Data Type
<integer>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
1
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKBW (Marker Bandwidth)
MKBW (Marker Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Returns the bandwidth at the specified power level relative to an on-screen marker
(if present) or the signal peak (if no on-screen marker is present).
Format
MKBW <number>?
Query Data Type
<number>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:BANDwidth[:STATe] ON
:CALCulate:BANDwidth:NDB <rel_ampl>
:CALCulate:BANDwidth:RESult?
:CALCulate:BANDwidth[:STATe] OFF
(See "N dB Points " on page 620)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
314
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKCF (Marker to Center Frequency)
MKCF (Marker to Center Frequency)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the center frequency equal to the marker frequency and moves the marker to
the center of the screen.
315
Format
MKCF
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6:X:CENTer (see "Marker" on page
562)
Notes
The functions of MKCF are identical to "E2 [two] (Marker to Center
Frequency)" on page 205.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKD (Marker Delta)
MKD (Marker Delta)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Computes the frequency and amplitude difference of the active marker and the delta
marker. These values are displayed on the screen.
If a delta marker is not displayed on the screen, the command places one at the
specified frequency or on the left or right hand edge of the display.
If an active marker is not displayed on the screen, the command places an active
marker at the center of the screen.
Format
MKD <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ|S|MS|US|SC
MKD UP|DN
UP or DN specifies 10% of the current span.
MKD OA
MKD?
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
316
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKD (Marker Delta)
Query Data Type
<real>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer2:MODE POSition|DELTa|OFF
:CALCulate:MARKer2:REFerence 1
:CALCulate:MARKer2:X
(See "Marker" on page 562)
317
Preset
0
Notes
For 8566A/B and 8568A/B, the functions of MKD are identical to
"M3 [three] (Delta Marker)" on page 298.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKF (Marker Frequency)
MKF (Marker Frequency)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the frequency value of the active marker.
8566 and 8568 only: If the active marker has marker frequency count set to On when
using the MKF? command, the marker frequency count value is returned to the
controller.
Format
MKF <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ|S|MS|US|SC
MKF UP|DN
UP or DN specifies 10% of the current span.
MKF OA
MKF?
Query Data Type
8560 Series: The data is returned in ASCII format.
For all other languages, the format of the returned data is
determined by "TDF (Trace Data Format)" on page 418 command
and, if TDF B (binary data format) has been selected, by "MDS
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
318
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKF (Marker Frequency)
(Measurement Data Size)" on page 304.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
319
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:X (see "Marker" on page 562)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKFC (Marker Counter)
MKFC (Marker Counter)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Turns on or off the marker frequency counter. The resolution of the frequency marker
counter is determined by "MKFC (Marker Counter)" on page 320.
Format
MKFC ON|OFF|1|0
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FCOunt ON|OFF
:CALCulate:MARKer2:FCOunt:X?
(See "Counter " on page 573)
Preset
OFF
Notes
The functions of MKFC are identical to "MC0 [zero]
(Marker Frequency Counter Off)" on page 302 and "MC1 [one]
(Marker Frequency Counter On)" on page 303.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
320
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKFCR (Marker Counter Resolution)
MKFCR (Marker Counter Resolution)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
321
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKFCR (Marker Counter Resolution)
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the resolution of the marker frequency counter. The marker counter resolution
value is always given either in Hertz or in seconds depending on whether the
instrument is operating in the frequency domain or the time domain.
Format
MKFCR <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ
MKFCR UP|DN (8566A/B, 8568A/B only)
MKFCR OA
MKFCR?
Query Data Type
<real> in Hz or S.
SCPI Equivalent
Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]:FCOunt:RESolution <freq> (see "Gate Time " on page 576)
Preset
10 kHz
Notes
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of MKFCR are identical to "KS= (8566A/B:
Automatic Preselector Tracking, 8568A/B: Marker Counter Resolution)" on page
242.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
322
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKMIN (Marker Minimum)
MKMIN (Marker Minimum)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Moves the active marker to the minimum value detected.
323
Format
MKMIN
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:MINimum (see "Min Search " on page 682)
Notes
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of MKMIN are identical to
"KSN (Marker Minimum)" on page 268.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKN (Marker Normal)
MKN (Marker Normal)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Moves the active marker to the specified frequency.
If no marker is currently turned on, a normal marker is turned on.
If the active marker type is not currently Normal (for example, it is Delta), the
command changes it to a Normal marker.
Format
MKN <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ|S|MS|US|SC
MKN UP|DN
UP or DN specifies 10% of the current span.
MKN OA
MKN?
Query Data Type
See "MKF (Marker Frequency)" on page 318.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
324
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKN (Marker Normal)
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:X
:CALCulate:MARKer:MODE POSition
(See "Marker" on page 562)
Notes
325
The functions of MKN are identical to "M2 [two] (Marker Normal)"
on page 296.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKNOISE (Marker Noise)
MKNOISE (Marker Noise)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Displays the average RMS noise density at the marker.
Format
MKNOISE ON|OFF|1|0
MKNOISE?
Query Data Type
1|0
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:FUNCtion NOISe
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:FUNCtion OFF
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:FUNCtion? (Returns OFF|NOIS)
(See "Marker Function" on page 578)
Preset
OFF
Notes
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of MKNOISE are identical to
"KSM (Marker Noise On)" on page 266.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
326
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKOFF (Marker Off)
MKOFF (Marker Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Turns off either the active marker or all the markers. If the ALL parameter is omitted,
only the active marker is turned off.
327
Format
MKOFF [ALL]
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent
Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer#:MODE OFF (see "Marker" on page 562)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKP (Marker Position)
MKP (Marker Position)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the marker position horizontally, in display units.
Format
MKP <integer>
Range: 1 to 1001
MKP?
Query Data Type
<integer>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:X (see "Marker" on page 562)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
328
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKPK (Marker Peak)
MKPK (Marker Peak)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Executing MKPK HI, or simply MKPK (no secondary keyword), positions the active
marker at the highest signal detected. If an active marker is on the screen, the MKPK
parameters move the marker as follows:
HI (highest)
Moves the active marker to the highest peak.
NH (next
highest)
Moves the active marker to the next signal peak of lower amplitude.
NR (next right)
Moves the active marker to the next signal peak to the right of the current
marker.
NL (next left)
Moves the active marker to the next signal peak to the left of the current marker.
Format
MKPK [HI]|NH|NR|NL
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:MAXimum
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:MAXimum:NEXT
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:MAXimum:LEFT|RIGHt
(See "Peak Search" on page 669)
Notes
The functions of MKPK (no secondary keyword) and MKPK HI are
identical to "E1[one] (Peak Marker)" on page 204.
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of MKPK NH are similar to
"KSK (Marker to Next Peak)" on page 262, except that KSK does
not take in to account the marker peak excursion or marker peak
threshold values. For more details on marker peak excursion, see
"MKPX (Marker Peak Excursion)" on page 331.
329
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKPT (Marker Threshold)
MKPT (Marker Threshold)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the minimum amplitude level from which a peak on the trace can be detected.
Format
MKPT <number>DBM
MKPT UP|DN
UP or DN increments by one step size
MKPT OA
MKPT?
Query Data Type
<number>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold <ampl> (see "Pk Threshold "
on page 674)
Preset
–130 dBm
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
330
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKPX (Marker Peak Excursion)
MKPX (Marker Peak Excursion)
Syntax
Preset State: 6 dB
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the minimum signal excursion for the instrument’s internal peak
identification routine.
The default value is 6 dB. In this case, any signal with an excursion of less than 6 dB
on either side of the marker would not be identified. Thus, if an MKPK NH command
were to be executed on such a signal, the instrument would not place a marker on
this signal peak.
Format
MKPX <real>DB
MKPX UP|DN
UP or DN increments by one vertical display division
MKPX OA
MKPX?
331
Query Data Type
<real>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion <rel_ampl> (see "Pk Excursion
" on page 673)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKREAD (Marker Readout)
MKREAD (Marker Readout)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Selects the type of active trace information displayed by the instrument marker
readout.
The MKREAD command can select the following types of active trace information:
FRQ
frequency
SWT
sweep time
IST
inverse sweep time
PER
period
The results of the data depend on the MKREAD parameter and the frequency span,
and whether the marker delta function is used.
MKREAD
Type
Non-Zero
Span
Non-Zero
Span Delta
Zero Span
Zero Span Delta
FRQ
Reads
frequency
Reads delta
frequency
N/A
N/A
SWT
Reads time
since the
start of
sweep
Reads delta
time between
end points
Waveform
measurements of
detected
modulation
Waveform measurements of
detected modulation
IST
N/A
N/A
N/A
Computes frequency
corresponding to delta of
markers. Performs 1/ (T1 – T2)
PER
Period of
frequency
(Pulse
measurement)
delta time
N/A
N/A
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
332
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKREAD (Marker Readout)
Format
MKREAD FRQ|SWT|IST|PER
MKREAD?
Query Data Type
FRQ|SWT|IST|PER
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:X:READout FREQuency|TIME|ITIMe|PERiod
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:X:READout:AUTO ON
(See "X Axis Scale" on page 568)
Preset
FRQ
Notes
The Inverse Sweep Time (IST) readout is only available when using
a delta marker in zero span.
FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) is not available in N9061A.
333
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKRL (Marker to Reference Level)
MKRL (Marker to Reference Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Moves the active marker to the reference level.
Format
MKRL
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2[:SET]:RLEVel (see "Mkr->Ref Lvl" on page
599)
Notes
The functions of MKRL are identical to "E4 [four] (Marker to
Reference Level)" on page 207.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
334
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKSP (Marker Span)
MKSP (Marker Span)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
This command operates only when the delta marker is On (see "MKD (Marker Delta)"
on page 316 or "M3 [three] (Delta Marker)" on page 298). When the delta marker is
On and MKSP is executed, the delta marker and active marker determine the start
and stop frequencies. The left marker specifies the start frequency, and the right
marker specifies the stop frequency. If marker delta is Off, there is no operation.
Format
MKSP
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer2[:SET]:DELTA:SPAN (see "MkrΔ->Span" on
page 601)
Notes
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, The functions of MKSP are identical to
"KSO (Marker Span)" on page 270.
If the active marker is not a delta marker, there is no change in its
position.
335
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKSS (Marker to Step Size)
MKSS (Marker to Step Size)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the center-frequency step-size equal to the marker frequency. If the instrument
is in the delta mode, the step size is set to the frequency difference between the
active and the delta marker.
Format
MKSS
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent
Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2[:SET]:STEP (see "Mkr->CF Step" on page 598)
Notes
When the marker is a delta marker, the functions of MKSS are identical to "E3
[three] (Delta Marker Step Size)" on page 206.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
336
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKT (Marker Time)
MKT (Marker Time)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Places a marker at a position that corresponds to a specified point in time during the
sweep.
Format
MKT <real>S|MS|US|SC
Default unit of time is seconds (‘S’ or ‘SC’).
MKT OA
MKT?
337
Query Data Type
<real>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:X (see "Marker" on page 562)
Preset
½ Sweep time
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKTRACE (Marker Trace)
MKTRACE (Marker Trace)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Moves the active marker to the corresponding position in Trace 1, Trace 2, or Trace
3.
Format
MKTRACE TRA|TRB|TRC
TRA corresponds to Trace 1, TRB corresponds to Trace 2, and TRC
corresponds to Trace 3.
MKTRACE?
Query Data Type
TRA|TRB|TRC
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
338
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKTRACK (Marker Track)
MKTRACK (Marker Track)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Moves the signal on which the active marker is located to the center of the
instrument display and keeps the signal peak at center screen.
To keep a drifting signal at center screen, place the active marker on the desired
signal before turning on MKTRACK.
Format
MKTRACK ON|OFF|1|0
MKTRACK?
Query Data Type
8560 series: 0 |1
8566A/B, 8568A/B: ON|OFF
339
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer#:TRCKing[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 (see "Signal
Track (Span Zoom)" on page 754)
Preset
OFF
Notes
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of MKTRACK are identical to
"MT0 [zero] (Marker Track Off)" on page 343 and "MT1 [one]
(Marker Track On)" on page 344.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKTYPE (Marker Type)
MKTYPE (Marker Type)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the type of marker.
Type
Function
Commands Used to Position
Marker
PSN
Allows the marker to be positioned horizontally in display
units (default)
"MKP (Marker Position)" on
page 328
"MKF (Marker Frequency)" on
page 318
AMP
Allows the marker to be positioned according to
amplitude
"MKA (Marker Amplitude)" on
page 312
FIXED
Allows a marker to be placed at any fixed point on the
display
"MKP (Marker Position)" on
page 328
"MKF (Marker Frequency)" on
page 318
"MKA (Marker Amplitude)" on
page 312
Format
MKTYPE PSN|AMP|FIXED
MKTYPE?
Query Data Type
PSN|AMP|FIXED
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer#:MODE POSition
:CALCulate:MARKer#:MODE FIXed
:CALCulate:MARKer#:X
:CALCulate:MARKer#:Y
(See "Marker" on page 562)
Preset
PSN
Notes
Marker type can only be set for an active marker. The marker type
is reset to PSN when the marker is turned off (using "MKOFF
(Marker Off)" on page 327), or when the instrument is preset.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
340
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ML (Mixer Level)
ML (Mixer Level)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the maximum signal level that is applied to the input mixer for a signal that
is equal to or below the reference level.
The effective mixer level is equal to the reference level minus the input attenuator
setting.
If an external amplifier gain value is set, the mixer level is determined using the
following equation:
– Mixer Level = Ref. Level - Attenuation + Ext. Amplifier Gain
The external amplifier gain is not preset by doing an IP command in case the
instrument is measuring a large signal. This is to protect the instrument from
damage from a large signal.
341
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ML (Mixer Level)
Format
ML <real>DB|DM|MV|UV
ML UP|DN
UP or DN increments by 10 dB
ML OA
ML?
Query Data Type
<real> in dBm
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MIXer:RANGe[:UPPer] <ampl> dBm
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MIXer:RANGe[:UPPer]?
(See "Max Mixer Level" on page 457)
Preset
–10 dBm
Notes
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of ML are identical to "KS,
(Mixer Level)" on page 241.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
342
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MT0 [zero] (Marker Track Off)
MT0 [zero] (Marker Track Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Disables the marker tracking mode.
343
Format
MT0
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of MT0 are identical to MKTRACK OFF. See
"MKTRACK (Marker Track)" on page 339.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MT1 [one] (Marker Track On)
MT1 [one] (Marker Track On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Moves the signal on which the active marker is located to the center of the
instrument display and keeps the signal peak at center screen.
To keep a drifting signal at center screen, place the active marker on the desired
signal before issuing an MT1 command.
Format
MT1
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of MT1 are identical to MKTRACK ON. See
"MKTRACK (Marker Track)" on page 339.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
344
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
MXMH (Maximum Hold)
MXMH (Maximum Hold)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Updates each trace element with the maximum level detected.
MXMH updates the specified trace (either Trace A or Trace B) with a new value from a
detector only if the new value is larger than the previous trace data value.
Format
MXMH TRA|TRB
TRA corresponds to Trace 1 and TRB corresponds to Trace 2.
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe[1|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE MAXHold
[:SENSe]:AVERage:COUNt <integer>
(See "Average/Hold Number" on page 603)
Notes
345
The functions of MXMH are identical to "A2 [two] (Maximum Hold
for Trace A)" on page 127 and "B2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace
B)" on page 168.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
NORMLIZE (Normalize Trace Data)
NORMLIZE (Normalize Trace Data)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Activates or de-activates the normalization routine for stimulus-response
measurements. This function subtracts trace B from trace A, offsets the result by the
value of the normalized reference position (NRL) and displays the result in trace A.
Normalization is automatically turned off by an instrument preset (IP), or at power
on.
Normalization is not available when using linear mode and is mutually exclusive of
other trace math.
Format
NORMLIZE ON|OFF|1|0
NORMLIZE OA
The OA option only returns the current value to the controller; it
does not set the active function to the normalization state.
NORMLIZE?
Query Data Type
1|0
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe:COPY TRACE1, TRACE3 (if necessary)
:TRACe[2]:UPDate OFF (blank Trace2, which corresponds to TRB)
:TRACe[2]:DISPlay OFF
:CALCulate:NTData[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:NTData[:STATe]?
(See "Normalize On/Off" on page 880)
Preset
OFF
Couplings
NORMLIZE sets Trace B to Blank mode and turns AMBPL or AMB
off. All trace math is mutually exclusive, so turning one on turns the
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
346
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
NORMLIZE (Normalize Trace Data)
other off and vice versa. Similarly, when Normalize is on and you
change Trace B to Clearwrite or Maxhold (that is, Active),
Normalize is turned off.
Errors
347
Accurate normalization occurs only if the reference trace and the
measured trace are on-screen. If any of these traces are offscreen, an error message will be displayed.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
NRL (Normalized Reference Level)
NRL (Normalized Reference Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the normalized reference level. Intended for use with the NORMLIZE command.
When using NRL, the input attenuator and IF step gains are not affected. This
function is a trace-offset function enabling the user to offset the displayed trace
without introducing hardware switching errors into the stimulus-response
measurement.
The unit of measurement for NRL is dB.
Format
NRL <number>DB
NRL?
Query Data Type
Returns the current Normalized Reference Level.
SCPI Equivalent
Commands
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRLevel <rel ampl> (see "Norm Ref Lvl"
on page 883)
Preset
0 dB
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
348
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
NRPOS (Normalized Reference Position)
NRPOS (Normalized Reference Position)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Adjusts the normalized reference-position that corresponds to the position on the
graticule where the difference between the measured and calibrated traces reside.
The dB value of the normalized reference position is equal to the normalized
reference level. The normalized reference position can be adjusted between 0.0 and
10.0, corresponding to the bottom and top graticule lines, respectively.
Format
NRPOS <number>
Range: Min = 0; Max = 10
NRPOS UP|DN
UP or DN increments by 1.0
NRPOS OA
NRPOS?
349
Query Data Type
Returns the current Normalized Reference Position.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRPosition <integer> (see
"Norm Ref Posn" on page 884)
Preset
10
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
O1 [one] (Format - Display Units)
O1 [one] (Format - Display Units)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Transmits trace amplitude and position information as decimal values in display
units.
Format
O1
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
350
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
O2 [two] (Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes)
O2 [two] (Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Transmits trace amplitude and position information as two 8-bit binary numbers (one
instruction word).
351
Format
O2
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
O3 [three] (Format - Real Amplitude Units)
O3 [three] (Format - Real Amplitude Units)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Transmits trace vertical axis information only, in measurement units of Hz, dBm, dB,
volts or seconds.
Format
O3
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
352
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
O4 [four] (Format - One 8-Bit Byte)
O4 [four] (Format - One 8-Bit Byte)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Transmits trace amplitude information only as a binary number.
353
Format
O4
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
N/A
Couplings
TDF B ("TDF (Trace Data Format)" on page 418) or "O2 [two]
(Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes)" on page 351.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
OA or ? (Query Active Function)
OA or ? (Query Active Function)
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Query active function.
The active functions are ACPBW, ACPSP, AT, CF, CRTHPOS, CRTVPOS, DA, DL,
DOTDENS, FA, FB, FMGAIN, GD, GL, LG, MKA, MKD, MKFCR, MKN,
MKPAUSE, MKPX, ML, NDB, NRL, RB, RCLS, ROFFSET, RL, RLPOS, SAVES,
SAVRCLN, SETDATE, SETTIME, SP, SQLCH, SRCALC, SRCAT, SRCPOFS,
SRCPSWP, SRCPWR, SRCTK, SS, ST, TH, TVLINE, VB, VBR, and user-defined
active function specified by the ACTDEF command.
Format
OA|?
Note that OA sets the active function, whereas ? does not. Thus, for
example, SP CF? 100MZ sets the Span, whereas SP CF OA
100 MZ sets the Center Frequency.
Query Data Type
Depends on active function.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
354
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
OCCUP (Percent Occupied Power Bandwidth)
OCCUP (Percent Occupied Power Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
This command is used to query the current value of the percent occupied power. This
value is set by "DELMKBW (Occupied Power Bandwidth Within Delta Marker)" on
page 196 and "PWRBW (Power Bandwidth)" on page 366. This command can also be
used to set the percent occupied power.
Format
OCCUP <number>
OCCUP?
Range: 0.10 to 100
355
Query Data Type
<number>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
90
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
OL (Output Learn String)
OL (Output Learn String)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Transmits information to the controller that describes the state of the instrument
when the OL command is executed. This information is called the “Learn String.”
The Learn String can be sent from the controller memory back to the instrument to
restore the instrument to its original state.
The OL command is not completely supported, due to differences between the XSeries and 8566/8568. The following table outlines each byte of the array and the
bits supported within that byte.
Byte
Support Information
1
Fixed decimal value 31
2
Fixed decimal value 118
3 to 9
Supported
10
Supported
11
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
12 to
17
Supported
18
Supported: Bits 6, 2, 1 and 0
Unsupported: Bits 7, 5, 4, and 3
19
Supported:
Bits 7, 6, 4, 3, and 0
Bit 5 on X-Series only
Unsupported:
Bits 1 and 2
20
Supported: Trigger Mode, Sweep Mode, TRB Clearwrite status
Unsupported: Recorder Output
21
Supported
22
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
356
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
OL (Output Learn String)
Byte
Support Information
23 to
25
Supported
26
Supported: Scale Type, Log Scale Factor, and Display State
Unsupported: XY Recorder
27
Supported
28
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
29 to
30
Supported
31
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
32 to
37
Supported
38
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
39 to
45
Supported
46 to
47
VAVG count limit, value returned is always current count value * 2.
48 to
53
Supported
54 to
57
If active marker is a delta marker, active marker absolute Y position only supported for XSeries
58 to
61
If active marker is a delta marker, reference marker absolute Y position only supported for
X-Series
62
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
63
Supported
64
Supported: Log Amp Units, R3, R2, and R4
Unsupported: Stop sweep
65
Supported: Lin Amp Units, TRC View Status
Unsupported: Bits 5 and 4 (always set HI)
66 to
71
Supported
72
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
73
Supported: Video Avg
Unsupported: Power on last, Ext Ref Lvl, Fast HP-IB, Bit 4 (always set HI)
74 to
77
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
78
Unsupported
79
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
80
Fixed decimal 162
Format
357
OL <80-byte string>
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
OL (Output Learn String)
OL?
Query Data Type
See table above.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
358
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
OT (Output Trace Annotations)
OT (Output Trace Annotations)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sends 32 character-strings to the controller. Each of the 32 character-strings can be
up to 64 characters long.
The significance of each string is as follows:
359
Index
Content
1
"BATTERY"
2
"CORR’D"
3
resolution bandwidth
4
video bandwidth
5
sweep time
6
attenuation
7
reference level
8
scale
9
trace detection
10
center frequency or start frequency
11
span or stop frequency
12
reference level offset
13
display line
14
threshold
15
marker frequency
16
marker amplitude
17
frequency offset
18
video averaging
19
title
20
"PL1 UNLOCK"
21
"PL2 UNLOCK"
22
"Y-I-0 UNLOCK"
23
"HET UNLOCK"
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
OT (Output Trace Annotations)
Index
Content
24
"M/N UNLOCK"
25
"REFUNLOCK"
26
"EXT/OVEN"
27
"MEASUNCAL"
28
frequency diagnostics
29
-
30
"SRQ"
31
center frequency "STEP"
32
active function
Format
OT
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent
Commands
None
Notes
The 'data invalid indicator' status report in string 27 of the returned text is only
supported on X-Series instruments.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
360
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
PEAKS (Peaks)
PEAKS (Peaks)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sorts the signal peaks in the source trace by frequency or amplitude, and sends the
results to destination trace.
Format
PEAKS TRA|TRB|TRC,TRA|TRB|TRC,AMP|FRQ[?]
The first trace specified is the destination; the second trace
specified is the source.
Query Data Type
Number of peaks found.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT FREQuency|AMPLitude
:CALCulate:DATA[1]|2|3|4:PEAK?
:TRACe[:DATA] TRACE[1]|2|3
(See "Peak Sort " on page 677)
361
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
PKPOS (Peak Position)
PKPOS (Peak Position)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8568
Description
Returns the X co-ordinate value of the maximum peak in the specified trace.
Format
PKPOS TRA|TRB|TRC
Query Data Type
The X co-ordinate value of the maximum peak in the specified
trace.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer12:MAXimum
:CALCulate:MARKer12:X?
(See "Marker" on page 562)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
362
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
PLOT (Plot)
PLOT (Plot)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Allows you transfer trace data, graticule and annotation information to a printer
using a parallel port.
The legacy analyzers transferred data directly to a plotter via the GPIB connection.
PLOT now transfers data to a printer, and prints the entire screen.
Although PLOT reads in plotter dimension values, N9061A ignores these.
Format
PLOT <value>,<value>,<value>,<value>
N9061A ignores all plotter dimension <value> parameters.
363
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:HCOPY[:IMMediate] (see "Print" on page 492)
Notes
In legacy instruments, PLOT also returns HPGL. The X-series
instruments with N9061A installed do not return HPGL.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
PP (Preselector Peak)
PP (Preselector Peak)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B
Description
Optimizes preselector tracking to peak the amplitude of a signal at the active
marker. If a marker is not on the screen, PP places a marker at the highest signal
level, and optimizes preselector tracking at that frequency.
Format
PP
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PCENter (see "Presel Center" on page 459)
Notes
This command is only supported when the X-series instrument’s
maximum frequency limit is greater than 3.6 GHz. If the command
is sent to an instrument with a maximum frequency limit of 3.6 GHz
or less, the command is not executed, and no error is generated.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
364
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
PRINT (Print)
PRINT (Print)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Transfers trace data, graticule and annotation of the screen directly to the
instrument’s default printer.
Format
PRINT [0|1]
N9061A ignores all parameters for this command.
365
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:HCOPY[:IMMediate] (see "Print" on page 492)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
PWRBW (Power Bandwidth)
PWRBW (Power Bandwidth)
Syntax
8560 Series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Computes the combined power of all signal responses in the specified trace, and
returns the bandwidth of the specified percentage of total power. The number in the
command is a percentage value, that is, it has a range of 0 to 100.
Format
8560 series: PWRBW TRA|TRB, <real>,?
8566A/B, 8568A/B: PWRBW TRA|TRB|TRC, <real>
Range: 0-100 (percentage)
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
If the percent total power is 100%, the power bandwidth equals the
frequency span.
On the 8566A/B analyzer, this command stops the trace. That is
not the case for N9061A.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
366
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
Q0 [zero] (Set Detector to EMI Peak Detection)
Q0 [zero] (Set Detector to EMI Peak Detection)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8568A/B
Description
Sets the detector function to EMI Peak detection. This is the same as the Peak
detector but uses CISPR related bandwidths.
367
Format
Q0
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The effect of Q0 is identical to that of the DET EPK command.
See "DET (Detection Mode)" on page 197.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
Q1 [one] (Set Detector to Quasi Peak Detection)
Q1 [one] (Set Detector to Quasi Peak Detection)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8568A/B
Description
Sets the detector function to Quasi Peak detection. This is a fast-rise, slow-fall
detector used to make CISPR compliant EMI measurements.
Format
Q1
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The effect of Q1 is identical to that of the DET QPD command. See
"DET (Detection Mode)" on page 197.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
368
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
R1 [one] (Illegal Command SRQ)
R1 [one] (Illegal Command SRQ)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Deactivates all instrument service requests (SRQs) except SRQ140, the illegalcommand service request.
The function is identical to RQS 32 (see "RQS (Request Service Conditions)" on page
385).
369
Format
R1
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
R2 [two] (End-of-Sweep SRQ)
R2 [two] (End-of-Sweep SRQ)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Activates the end-of-sweep and illegal-command service requests.
The function is identical to RQS 36 (see "RQS (Request Service Conditions)" on page
385).
Format
R2
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
370
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
R3 [three] (Hardware Broken SRQ)
R3 [three] (Hardware Broken SRQ)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Activates the hardware-broken and illegal-command service requests.
The function is identical to RQS 40 (see "RQS (Request Service Conditions)" on page
385).
371
Format
R3
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
R4 [four] (Units-Key-Pressed SRQ)
R4 [four] (Units-Key-Pressed SRQ)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Activates the units-key-pressed and illegal-command SRQs.
The function is identical to RQS 34 (see "RQS (Request Service Conditions)" on page
385).
Format
R4
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
X-Series instruments cannot replicate the units-key-pressed
Service Request since no front panel interaction is supported.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
372
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
RB (Resolution Bandwidth)
RB (Resolution Bandwidth)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the resolution bandwidth. Available bandwidths are 1 Hz, 3 Hz, 10 Hz, 30
Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz, 300 kHz, 1 MHz, and 3 MHz. The
resolution bandwidths, video bandwidths, and sweep time are normally coupled, but
executing RB decouples them. Execute "CR (Couple Resolution Bandwidth)" on page
191 to re-establish coupling.
Format
373
RB <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
RB (Resolution Bandwidth)
RB UP|DN
UP or DN increments in a 1, 3, 10 sequence
RB AUTO|MAN (8560 series only)
RB OA
RB?
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth[:RESolution] <real>
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]?
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO?
(See "Res BW " on page 475)
Preset
8560 series: Coupled mode, 1 MHz
8566A/B, 8568A/B: Coupled mode, 3 MHz
Notes
Default values on X-Series instruments may vary from the legacy
analyzers. Refer to the X-Series User’s and Programmer’s
Reference to find out any restrictions that may apply.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
374
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
RBR (Resolution Bandwidth to Span Ratio)
RBR (Resolution Bandwidth to Span Ratio)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the coupling ratio between the frequency span and the resolution bandwidth. It
allows you to set the Span/RBW ratio to 1/<value>, where <value> is set by the
user.
Format
RBR <real>
RBR UP|DN
UP or DN increments in a 1, 2, 5 sequence
RBR OA
RBR?
375
Query Data Type
<real> in RBR units
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:RATio
<integer> (see "Span:3dB RBW " on page 480)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
RC (Recall State)
RC (Recall State)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Recalls instrument state data from the specified state register in the instrument’s
memory.
– Registers 1 through 6 are reserved for the user, and contain instrument states
(such as front panel configuration) saved with "SAVES (Save State)" on page 390
or "SV (Save State)" on page 409.
– Option LAST: recalls the instrument state that existed previous to executing the
IP command or switching the instrument off. 8566/8 instruments use register 7
for this purpose.
– Option PWRON: sets the instrument state to the same state that occurred when
the instrument was switched on. This state was originally saved using the SAVES
command.
Format
RC <integer>
Range: 1-6
RC LAST|PWRON
See Description above.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
376
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
RC (Recall State)
377
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
*RCL <integer> (see Recall Instrument State )
Notes
The functions of RC are identical to "RCLS (Recall State)" on page
378.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
RCLS (Recall State)
RCLS (Recall State)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Recalls instrument state data from the specified state register in the instrument’s
memory.
– Registers 1 through 6 are reserved for the user, and contain instrument states
(such as front panel configuration) saved with "SAVES (Save State)" on page 390
or "SV (Save State)" on page 409.
– Option LAST: recalls the instrument state that existed previous to executing the
IP command or switching the instrument off. 8566/8 instruments use register 7
for this purpose.
– Option PWRON: sets the instrument state to the same state that occurred when
the instrument was switched on. This state was originally saved using SAVES.
Format
RCLS <integer>
Range: 1-6
RCLS LAST|PWRON
See Description above.
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
*RCL <integer> (see Recall Instrument State )
Notes
The functions of RCLS are identical to "RC (Recall State)" on page
376.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
378
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
REV (Revision)
REV (Revision)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns the firmware revision number.
In X-Series instruments, this command returns the build date of the N9061A
application that you have installed in your instrument. The date is returned in
YYMMDD format (where YY is the number of years since 1950, and MM is the month
and DD is the date).
379
Format
REV?
Query Data Type
Firmware revision number.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
RL (Reference Level)
RL (Reference Level)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the amplitude level of the top graticule line on the display. This represents
the reference level.
Signal levels above +30 dBm will damage the instrument.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
380
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
RL (Reference Level)
Format
8560 series: RL <real>DBM|DBMV|DBUV|MV|UV|V|MW|UW|W|DM
8566A/B, 8568A/B: RL <real>DB|DM|MV|UV
Range (MXA and PXA): –170 dBm to +30 dBm, with 0 dB
attenuation
Range (EXA): –170 dBm to +23 dBm
RL UP|DN
UP or DN increments by one vertical division in log mode, and in a
1, 2, 5 sequence in linear mode
RL OA
RL?
381
Query Data Type
<real> in dBm [LG] or V [LN]
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <real> (see
"Reference Level" on page 447)
Preset
0
Couplings
If the display line is on, changing the reference level does not
adjust the position of the display line.
Notes
The Reference Level range for the 8566A/B and 8568A/B is –89.9
dBm to +30 dBm.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
RMS (Root Mean Square Value)
RMS (Root Mean Square Value)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns the RMS value of the trace, in display units.
Format
RMS TRA|TRB|TRC
Query Data Type
RMS value of the trace, in display units.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
382
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ROFFSET (Reference Level Offset)
ROFFSET (Reference Level Offset)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Offsets all amplitude readouts without affecting the trace.
Once activated, ROFFSET displays the amplitude offset on the left side of the screen.
Sending ROFFSET 0 or presetting the instrument eliminates any amplitude offset.
Format
ROFFSET <real>DM|MV|UV|DB
ROFFSET UP|DN (8560 series only)
UP or DN increments one vertical division
ROFFSET OA
ROFFSET?
383
Query Data Type
<real> in dB
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRAC:eY[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <rel_ampl>
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ROFFSET (Reference Level Offset)
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet?
(See "Reference Level Offset" on page 468)
Preset
0
Notes
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of ROFFSET are identical to
"KSZ (Reference Level Offset)" on page 278.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
384
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
RQS (Request Service Conditions)
RQS (Request Service Conditions)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets a bit mask for service requests, each service request has a corresponding bit
number and decimal equivalent of that bit number as shown in the table below. Use
the decimal equivalents to set the bit mask.
For example, to set a mask for bits 4 and 5, add the decimal equivalents (16 + 32 =
48), then send RQS 48.
Status Byte Definition
Bit#
State
Description
6
RQS
Request Service
5
Error Present
4
Command Complete
Any command completed.
2
End of Sweep
Any sweep completed.
1
Message
Display message appears.
0
Trigger
Trigger activated.
7
3
Format
RQS <bit number>
RQS OA
RQS?
385
Query Data Type
The current bit mask.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
*SRE
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
RQS (Request Service Conditions)
*SRE? (See Service Request Enable )
STATus:OPERation:ENABle <integer>
STATus:OPERation:ENABle?
STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <integer>
STATus:OPERation:NTRansition?
(See Operation Enable)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
386
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
S1[one] (Continuous Sweep)
S1[one] (Continuous Sweep)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the instrument to continuous sweep mode. In the continuous sweep mode, the
instrument takes its next sweep as soon as possible after the current sweep (as long
as the trigger conditions are met). A sweep may temporarily be interrupted by data
entries made over the remote interface.
Format
S1
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:INITiate:CONTinuous 1 (see "Cont (Continuous
Measurement/Sweep)" on page 488)
Preset
Couplings
Errors
Notes
387
The functions of S1 are identical to "CONTS (Continuous Sweep)"
on page 189.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
S2 [two] (Single Sweep)
S2 [two] (Single Sweep)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the instrument to single sweep mode. Each subsequent time that this
command is sent, one sweep is started if the trigger conditions are met.
Format
S2
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:INITiate:CONTinuous 0 (see "Cont (Continuous
Measurement/Sweep)" on page 488)
Notes
The functions of S2 are similar to "SNGLS (Single Sweep)" on
page 398.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
388
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
SADD (Add Limit Line Segment)
SADD (Add Limit Line Segment)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Used to add a limit-line segment to the current limit line.
389
Format
SADD
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
SAVES (Save State)
SAVES (Save State)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Saves the current state of the instrument in any of the registers one through six.
Format
SAVES <integer>
Range: 1-6
SAVES PWRON
PWRON sets the instrument to the state it was in when power was
turned on.
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
*SAV <integer> (see Save Instrument State )
Notes
The functions of SAVES are identical to "SV (Save State)" on page
409.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
390
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
SDEL (Delete Limit Line Segment)
SDEL (Delete Limit Line Segment)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Deletes the limit-line segment specified with the command "SEDI (Edit Limit Line
Segment)" on page 393.
391
Format
SDEL
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
SDON (Terminate SEDI Command)
SDON (Terminate SEDI Command)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Used to terminate the command "SEDI (Edit Limit Line Segment)" on page 393.
Format
SDON
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
392
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
SEDI (Edit Limit Line Segment)
SEDI (Edit Limit Line Segment)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Activates the limit-line segment you identify by its segment number in the limit-line
table.
393
Format
SEDI <integer>
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
SER (Serial Number)
SER (Serial Number)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Returns the X-series instrument serial number to the controller.
Format
SER OA
SER?
Query Data Type
Serial number.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
*IDN? (see "Identification Query " on page 84)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
394
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
SETDATE (Set Date)
SETDATE (Set Date)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the date of the real-time clock of the instrument. The date takes the form
YYMMDD (Year, Month, Day)
Format
SETDATE <number>
SETDATE?
395
Query Data Type
YYMMDD
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:SYSTem:DATE “YYYY,MM,DD”
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
SETTIME (Set Time)
SETTIME (Set Time)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the date of the real-time clock of the instrument. The time takes the form
HHMMSS (Hour, Minute, Second).
Format
SETTIME <number>
SETTIME?
Query Data Type
HHMMSS
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:SYSTem:TIME “HH,MM,SS”
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
396
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
SMOOTH (Smooth Trace)
SMOOTH (Smooth Trace)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Smooths the trace according to the number of points specified for the running
average.
Each point value is replaced with the average of the values (in measurement units) of
the given number of points centered on it. Increasing the number of points increases
smoothing at the cost of decreasing resolution. If the number of points is an even
number, then the number of points is increased by one.
Smoothing decreases at the endpoints.
Format
SMOOTH TRA|TRB|TRC,<number>
TRA corresponds to Trace 1, TRB corresponds to Trace 2, and TRC
corresponds to Trace 3.
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe:MATH:SMOoth TRACE(1|2|3|4|5|6) (see Smooth Trace Data
(Remote Command Only) )
:CALCulate:DATA:COMPress? ...
Notes
Prerequisite Commands: "TS (Take Sweep)" on page 432 when
using trace data.
Some differences may be noticed between the smoothed trace in
the legacy analyzers and the smoothed trace using the same signal
in X-Series instruments.
397
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
SNGLS (Single Sweep)
SNGLS (Single Sweep)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the instrument to single-sweep mode. Each time "TS (Take Sweep)" on page
432 is sent, one sweep taken as long as the trigger conditions are met.
Format
SNGLS
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:INITiate:CONTinuous 0 (see "Cont (Continuous
Measurement/Sweep)" on page 488)
Notes
The functions of SNGLS are identical to "S2 [two] (Single Sweep)"
on page 388.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
398
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
SP (Frequency Span)
SP (Frequency Span)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
399
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
SP (Frequency Span)
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Changes the total displayed frequency range symmetrically about the center
frequency.
Format
SP <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ
SP UP|DN
Step Increment: 1, 2, 5, 10 sequence (up to the stop frequency of
the instrument)
SP FULL|ZERO|LAST (8560 series only)
SP OA
SP?
Query Data Type
<real> in Hz
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN?
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:PREVious
(See "Last Span " on page 754)
Preset
856x: Full Span
8566: 20 GHz
Couplings
If resolution and video bandwidths are coupled to the span width,
the bandwidths change with the span width to provide a
predetermined level of resolution and noise averaging. Likewise,
the sweep time changes to maintain a calibrated display, if
coupled.
All of these functions are normally coupled, unless "RB (Resolution
Bandwidth)" on page 373, "VB (Video Bandwidth)" on page 436, or
"ST (Sweep Time)" on page 404 have been executed.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
400
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
SRQ (Service Request)
SRQ (Service Request)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sends a service request to the controller when the SRQ operand fits the mask
supplied with "RQS (Request Service Conditions)" on page 385.
401
Format
SRQ <digit>
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
N9061A does not support the setting of bit 1 (units-key-pressed) of
the status byte. Bit 1 of the status byte is always set to Off.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
SS (Center Frequency Step Size)
SS (Center Frequency Step Size)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the center frequency step size.
Format
SS <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
402
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
SS (Center Frequency Step Size)
Range: 25 to hardware maximum
SS UP|DN
UP or DN increments in a 1, 2, 5, 10 sequence
SS AUTO|MAN (8560 series only)
SS OA
SS?
Query Data Type
<real> in Hz
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO ON|OFF
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement] <freq>
(See "CF Step" on page 502)
Preset
403
10 percent of span (1/4 of Res BW if zero-span)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ST (Sweep Time)
ST (Sweep Time)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the time in which the instrument sweeps the displayed frequency or time
span.
Format
ST <real>S|MS|US|SC
ST UP|DN
UP or DN: Increments in a 1,2,5 sequence
ST AUTO|MAN (8560 series only)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
404
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
ST (Sweep Time)
ST OA
ST?
The OA option in the ST command behaves in the same manner
as the ST? query, in that it returns the current value to the
controller. However, the OA option does not set the active
function to Sweep Time.
Query Data Type
<real> in seconds
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME <time>
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON
(See "Sweep Time" on page 757)
Preset
405
AUTO
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
STB (Status Byte Query)
STB (Status Byte Query)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Returns to the controller the decimal equivalent of the bits set in the status byte (see
"RQS (Request Service Conditions)" on page 385 and "SRQ (Service Request)" on
page 401). STB is equivalent to a serial poll.
Format
STB?
Query Data Type
Status Byte (8 bits)
SCPI Equivalent Commands
*STB? (see Status Byte Query )
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
406
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
STDEV (Standard Deviation of Trace Amplitudes)
STDEV (Standard Deviation of Trace Amplitudes)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns the standard deviation of the trace amplitude in display units.
Format
STDEV TRA|TRB|TRC
TRA corresponds to Trace 1, TRB corresponds to Trace 2, and TRC
corresponds to Trace 3.
407
Query Data Type
Standard deviation of the trace amplitude in display units.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe[:DATA]? TRACE(1|2|3|4|5|6) (see Send/Query Trace Data
(Remote Command Only))
Notes
Prerequisite Commands: "TS (Take Sweep)" on page 432 when
using trace data
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
SUM (Sum)
SUM (Sum)
Syntax
8560 Series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Returns the sum of all the trace values to the controller.
Format
SUM TRA|TRB|TRC(,)(?)
Query Data Type
Sum of all the trace values.
The 8560 series returns display units, range (0-610)*601 points, or,
if "TDF (Trace Data Format)" on page 418 is set to M, it returns
ASCII.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
408
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
SV (Save State)
SV (Save State)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Saves the current state of the instrument in any of the registers one through six.
409
Format
SV <integer>
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
*SAV <integer> (see Save Instrument State )
Notes
The functions of SV are identical to "SAVES (Save State)" on page
390.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
SWPCPL (Sweep Couple)
SWPCPL (Sweep Couple)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Selects either a stimulus-response (SR) or signal-analyzer (SA) auto-coupled sweep
time. In stimulus response mode, auto-coupled sweep times are usually much faster
for swept response measurements. Stimulus response auto-coupled sweep times
are typically valid in stimulus-response measurements when the system frequency
span is less than 20 times the bandwidth of the device under test.
Format
SWPCPL SA|SR
SWPCPL?
Query Data Type
SA|SR
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO:RULes NORMal|ACCuracy|SRESponse
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO:RULes?
(See "Sweep Time Rules" on page 759)
Preset
SA
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
410
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
T0 [zero] (Turn Off Threshold Level)
T0 [zero] (Turn Off Threshold Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Removes the threshold boundary and its readout from the display.
411
Format
T0
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of T0 are identical to THE OFF. See "THE (Threshold
Enable)" on page 421.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
T1 [one] (Free Run Trigger)
T1 [one] (Free Run Trigger)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the instrument sweep to free run trigger mode.
Format
T1
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of T1 are identical to TM FREE. See "TM (Trigger
Mode)" on page 424.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
412
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
T2 [two] (Line Trigger)
T2 [two] (Line Trigger)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the instrument sweep to line trigger mode.
413
Format
T2
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of T2 are identical to TM LINE. See "TM (Trigger
Mode)" on page 424.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
T3 [three] (External Trigger)
T3 [three] (External Trigger)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the instrument sweep to external trigger mode.
Format
T3
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of T3 are identical to TM EXT. See "TM (Trigger
Mode)" on page 424.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
414
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
T4 [four] (Video Trigger)
T4 [four] (Video Trigger)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the instrument sweep to video trigger mode.
415
Format
T4
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of T4 are identical to TM VID. See "TM (Trigger
Mode)" on page 424.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
TA (Trace A)
TA (Trace A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns trace A amplitude values from the instrument to the controller.
Format
TA?
Query Data Type
The display unit values are transferred in sequential order (from left
to right) as seen on the screen.
Display unit values can be transferred to the controller in any one
of the four output formats as determined by "O1 [one] (Format Display Units)" on page 350, "O2 [two] (Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes)"
on page 351, "O3 [three] (Format - Real Amplitude Units)" on page
352 and "O4 [four] (Format - One 8-Bit Byte)" on page 353.
The format of the returned data is also affected by "TDF (Trace
Data Format)" on page 418, and if TDF B (binary data format) has
been selected, by "MDS (Measurement Data Size)" on page 304.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe[:DATA]? TRACE(1|2|3|4|5|6)
:FORMat:[:TRACe][:DATA]
(See Send/Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only))
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
416
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
TB (Trace B)
TB (Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns trace B amplitude values from the instrument to the controller.
Format
TB?
Query Data Type
The display unit values are transferred in sequential order (from left
to right) as seen on the screen.
Display unit values can be transferred to the controller in any one
of the four output formats as determined by "O1 [one] (Format Display Units)" on page 350, "O2 [two] (Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes)"
on page 351, "O3 [three] (Format - Real Amplitude Units)" on page
352 and "O4 [four] (Format - One 8-Bit Byte)" on page 353.
The format of the returned data is also affected by "TDF (Trace
Data Format)" on page 418, and, if TDF B (binary data format) has
been selected, by "MDS (Measurement Data Size)" on page 304.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe? TRACE(1|2|3|4|5|6)
:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA]
(See Send/Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only))
417
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
TDF (Trace Data Format)
TDF (Trace Data Format)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Formats trace information for return to the controller.
The different trace data formats are as follows:
Option
Format
P
Parameter data format. Numbers are in Hz, Volts, Watts, dBm, dBmV, DBuV, DBV.
A
Returns data as an A-block data field. MDS determines whether data comprises one or
two 8-bit bytes. (See "MDS (Measurement Data Size)" on page 304.)
I
Returns data as an I-block data field. MDS determines whether data comprises one or
two 8-bit bytes. (See "MDS (Measurement Data Size)" on page 304.)
M
ASCII data format.
B
Binary data format. MDS determines whether data comprises one or two 8-bit bytes. (See
"MDS (Measurement Data Size)" on page 304.)
Format
TDF P|A|I|M|B
TDF?
Query Data Type
P|A|I|M|B
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA] ASCii | INTeger,32 | REAL,32 | REAL,64
(See Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only))
Preset
P
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
418
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
TH (Threshold)
TH (Threshold)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Blanks signal responses below the threshold level, similar to a base line clipper. The
threshold level is nine major divisions below the reference level, unless otherwise
specified.
Format
TH <real>DM|MV|UV|DB
TH UP|DN
UP or DN increments by one step size
419
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
TH (Threshold)
TH ON|OFF (8560 series only)
TH OA
TH?
Query Data Type
<real> in dB
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold <ampl> (see "Pk Threshold "
on page 674)
Preset
–130 dBm
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
420
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
THE (Threshold Enable)
THE (Threshold Enable)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Turns the threshold on or off.
Format
THE ON|OFF
THE?
421
Query Data Type
ON|OFF
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
OFF
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
TIMEDATE (Time Date)
TIMEDATE (Time Date)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets and returns the date and time of the real-time clock of the instrument. The
number takes the form YYMMDDHHMMSS (Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute,
Second).
TIMEDATE ON and TIMEDATE OFF commands are supported on some models of the
8560 series. This set of commands displays or hides the time and date in the
graticule.
N9061A does not support these commands, but accepts them and does not display
a CMD ERR error or CMD NOT SUPPORTED error.
Format
TIMEDATE <number>
TIMEDATE?
Query Data Type
<number> (YYMMDDHHMMSS)
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:SYSTem:DATE ...
:SYSTem:DATE?
:SYSTem:TIME ...
:SYSTem:TIME?
Notes
This command changes the system clock of the instrument and
may invalidate any time-based licenses installed on the instrument.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
422
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
TITLE (Title)
TITLE (Title)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Activates the screen title mode, enabling you to enter your own title for the screen.
Valid string delimiters, which must be used to start and terminate the title, are listed
below.
See the 8560 Series User’s Guide for more details.
Format
TITLE <string delimiter>(<char>)(<real>)<string delimiter>
Valid string delimiters: !, ", $, %, &, ’, /, :, =, \, ~, @
423
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:DISPlay:ANNotation:TITLe:DATA “text” (see "Change Title " on
page 926)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
TM (Trigger Mode)
TM (Trigger Mode)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Selects a trigger mode: free, line, video, or external.
The options are as follows:
Option
Mode Selected
EXT
External mode. Connect an external trigger source to J5 EXT/GATE TRIG INPUT on the rear
panel of the instrument. The source must range from 0 to 5 V (TTL). The trigger occurs on
the rising, positive edge of the signal (about 1.5 V).
FREE
Free-run mode. Sweep triggers occur as fast as the instrument will allow.
LINE
Line mode. Sweep triggers occur at intervals synchronized to the line frequency.
VID
Video mode. Sweep triggers occur whenever the positively-sloped part of the input signal
passes through the video trigger level. This trigger level can be changed (refer to the VTL
command), and a dashed line appears on the screen to denote (approximately) the selected
level. Video triggering is not available for resolution bandwidths <100 Hz.
TV
Allows TV triggering if Options 101 and 102, or Option 301 is installed. The functions of TM
TV and TV TRIG are similar. TM TV does not select the TV line number, set up the
amplitude level, change the span, change the bandwidth, or change the sweep time.
Format
TM FREE|VID|LINE|EXT|TV
TM?
Query Data
Type
FREE|VID|LINE|EXT|TV
SCPI
Equivalent
Commands
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce
EXTernal1|EXTernal2|IMMediate|LINE|FRAMe|RFBurst|VIDeo|TV
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
424
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
TM (Trigger Mode)
(See "Trigger" on page 886)
425
Preset
FREE
Notes
The functions of TM are identical to "T1 [one] (Free Run Trigger)" on page 412, "T2
[two] (Line Trigger)" on page 413, "T3 [three] (External Trigger)" on page 414 and "T4
[four] (Video Trigger)" on page 415.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
TRA (Trace Data Input and Output)
TRA (Trace Data Input and Output)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Transfers Trace A amplitude values from the instrument to the controller.
Format
TRA?
Query Data Type
The format depends on the trace data format selected. See "TDF
(Trace Data Format)" on page 418 for details on formatting.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe? TRACE(1|2|3|4|5|6) (see Send/Query Trace Data (Remote
Command Only))
:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA] ...
:FORMat:BORDer NORMal|SWAPped
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
426
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
TRB (Trace Data Input and Output)
TRB (Trace Data Input and Output)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Transfers Trace B amplitude values between the instrument and the controller.
Format
TRB?
Query Data Type
The format depends on the trace data format selected. See "TDF
(Trace Data Format)" on page 418 for details on formatting.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe? TRACE(1|2|3|4|5|6) (see Send/Query Trace Data (Remote
Command Only))
:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA] ...
:FORMat:BORDer NORMal|SWAPped
427
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
TRC (Trace Data Input and Output)
TRC (Trace Data Input and Output)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Transfers Trace Amplitude values from the instrument to the controller.
Format
TRC?
Query Data Type
The format depends on the trace data format selected. See "TDF
(Trace Data Format)" on page 418 for details on formatting.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe? TRACE(1|2|3|4|5|6) (see Send/Query Trace Data (Remote
Command Only))
:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA] ...
:FORMat:BORDer NORMal|SWAPped
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
428
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
TRDSP (Trace Display)
TRDSP (Trace Display)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Displays a trace or turns it off.
Format
TRDSP TRA|TRB|TRC ON|OFF|1|0
TRDSP TRA|TRB|TRC ? (Not supported in 8566A/B)
429
Query Data Type
1|0
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe#:DISPlay[:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0 (see "View/Blank " on page
858)
Preset
ON for TRA, OFF for TRB and TRC
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
TRIGPOL (Trigger Polarity)
TRIGPOL (Trigger Polarity)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Selects the edge (positive or negative) of the trigger input that causes the trigger
event. TRIGPOL is available in all trigger modes.
Format
TRIGPOL POS|NEG
TRIGPOL?
Query Data Type
POS|NEG
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative (see "Trig Slope "
on page 895)
Preset
POS
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
430
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
TRSTAT (Trace State)
TRSTAT (Trace State)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns trace states to the controller. Valid trace states are Clear-write, View,
Blank, Maximum Hold, and Off.
Possible Trace States
Trace State Description
Trace State Data Returned
Clear-write
CLRW
View
VIEW
Blank
BLANK
Maximum Hold
MXMH
Off
No data is returned
Format
TRSTAT?
Query Data Type
CLRW|VIEW|BLANK|MXMH
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe[1]|2|3:UPDate?
:TRACe[1]|2|3:DISPlay?
(See "View/Blank " on page 858)
431
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
TS (Take Sweep)
TS (Take Sweep)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Starts and completes one full sweep before the next command is executed. A TS
command is required for each sweep in the single-sweep mode. TS always restarts
a sweep even if a sweep is already in progress.
Format
TS
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:INITiate[:IMMediate] (see "Restart" on page 699)
*OPC? (see Operation Complete )
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
432
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
USERREV
USERREV
Syntax
USERREV ""|"NNNNNNN"
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Modifies the response returned by the query "REV (Revision)" on page 379. This
command sets the response to be either the supplied parameter value, or else, if this
command's parameter is empty or missing, the system-defined value.
This is an N9061A "extension" command, which is not defined in the command set of
any legacy instrument.
Format
USERREV ""|"NNNNNNN"
"N" is any digit 0-9
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
System-defined value
Notes
Usually, you need to set the REV? response only once with this
command, and the setting is retained while power is on. However,
you will need to set the response again in the following 3 cases:
1. Keysight recovery
2. Instrument software upgrade
3. Restore Mode Defaults
433
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
VAVG (Video Average)
VAVG (Video Average)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Enables the video-averaging function, which averages trace points to smooth the
displayed trace. The VAVG? query returns the number of averages for the 8560 series
of analyzers.
There are a few differences in the way video averaging works in the N9061A
application compared to the legacy analyzers. See the following table for a
summary of these differences.
Legacy Analyzers - Video Averaging Behavioral Differences
Condition
Legacy Spectrum Analyzers
N9061A application
All conditions.
8566 and 8568 only Original trace is displayed in
Trace C.
Only displays the averaged trace. The
averaged trace is displayed in Trace A.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
434
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
VAVG (Video Average)
Condition
Legacy Spectrum Analyzers
N9061A application
Average Count value
set to 0.
Cannot be set to 0.
Video averaging is turned off if the
Averaging Count is set to 0.
Change in Average
Count setting to a
higher value.
8566 and 8568 only Continues counting from
where the previous value left
off.
Resets the counter to zero and starts the
measurement again.
Change in average
counter setting to a
lower value.
8566 and 8568 only Updates the screen
annotation with the lower
averaging value.
If the new count value has not been
reached, continues until the new lower
count has been reached.
Averaging turned on.
Sweep time remains
unchanged.
Sweep time changes due to the selection
of the sample detector.
Change in resolution
bandwidth, video
bandwidth, sweep
time, reference level
or attenuation.
8566 and 8568 only - In
single sweep mode, resets
counter to zero and starts
the averaging again.
Continues the measurement without
resetting the counter.
Change in center
frequency or span.
In single sweep mode, resets
counter to zero and starts
the averaging again.
In single sweep mode the X-Series
instrument uses all stored averages. Does
not reset the counter after changes in
RBW, VBW, Sweep Time, Ref. Level and
Attenuation.
8566 and 8568 only - Also
resets the counter after
changes in RBW, VBW,
Sweep Time, Ref. Level and
Attenuation.
Format
If the new, lower count value has already
been reached, the instrument will stop and
wait until you take a new sweep.
VAVG <average length>
Range: Integer from 1 to 999
VAVG UP|DN (8560 series only)
UP or DN: Increments by 1
VAVG ON|OFF
VAVG?
Query Data Type
<number>, or 0 if it is OFF
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe#:TYPE AVERage (for VAVG ON)
:TRACe#:TYPE WRITe (for VAVG OFF)
[:SENSe]:AVERage:COUNT <integer>
(See "Average/Hold Number" on page 603)
435
Preset
100, OFF
Notes
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of VAVG are identical to
"KSG (Video Averaging On)" on page 255 or "KSH (Video Averaging
Off)" on page 257.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
VB (Video Bandwidth)
VB (Video Bandwidth)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the video bandwidth, which is a post-detection, low-pass filter.
When auto coupled, the video bandwidth is calculated as Resolution Bandwidth x
Video Resolution Bandwidth Ratio. See "VBO (Video Bandwidth Coupling Offset)" on
page 438 for more details.
Format
VB <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
436
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
VB (Video Bandwidth)
VB UP|DN
UP or DN increments in a 1, 3, 10 sequence
VB AUTO|MAN (8560 series only)
VB OA
VB?
Query Data Type
<real>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth:VIDeo <freq>
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth:VIDeo:AUTO ON
(See "Video BW " on page 477)
Preset
437
Coupled mode, 1 MHz
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
VBO (Video Bandwidth Coupling Offset)
VBO (Video Bandwidth Coupling Offset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the relationship between the video and resolution bandwidths which is
maintained when these bandwidths are coupled. The bandwidths are usually
coupled unless "RB (Resolution Bandwidth)" on page 373 or "VB (Video Bandwidth)"
on page 436 have been executed.
The options specify the behavior as follows:
Option
Behavior
1
The video bandwidth is one step higher than the resolution bandwidth. That is, the video
bandwidth:resolution bandwidth ratio is 3.
–1
The video bandwidth is one step lower than the resolution bandwidth. That is, the video
bandwidth:resolution bandwidth ratio is 0.3.
0
The ratio remains fixed at 1. That is, the resolution bandwidth and the video bandwidth are
always equal.
Format
VBO 1|-1|0
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
438
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
VBR (Video Bandwidth to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio)
VBR (Video Bandwidth to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Specifies the relationship between the video and resolution bandwidths that is
maintained when these bandwidths are coupled.
Format
VBR <number>
<number> Range: 0.003 to 3
VBR UP|DN
UP or DN: increment in a 1, 3, 10 sequence
VBR OA
VBR?
439
Query Data Type
<number>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth:VIDeo:RATio <real> (see "VBW:3dB RBW " on
page 478)
Preset
1
Notes
VBR uses the legacy signal analyzer settings for video bandwidth
only if Mode Setup > Preferences> Limit RBW/VBW is set to ON.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
VIEW (View Trace)
VIEW (View Trace)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Displays Trace A, Trace B, or Trace C, and stops taking new data into the viewed
trace.
Format
VIEW TRA|TRB|TRC
TRA corresponds to Trace 1 and TRB corresponds to Trace 2.
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:UPDate OFF
:TRACe[1|2|3|4|5|6:DISPlay[:STATe] ON
(See "View/Blank " on page 858)
Notes
The functions of VIEW are identical to "A3 [three] (View Mode for
Trace A)" on page 128 and "B3 [three] (View Mode for Trace B)" on
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
440
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
VIEW (View Trace)
page 169.
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, VIEW is also identical to "KSj (View Trace
C)" on page 261.
441
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
VTL (Video Trigger Level)
VTL (Video Trigger Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the signal level that triggers a sweep.
Format
VTL <number>DB|DBM|DBMV|DBUV|MV|UV|V|MW|UW|W|DM
<number> Range: –220 to 30
VTL UP|DN
UP or DN increments by 1 vertical division
VTL?
Query Data Type
<real>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel <ampl> (see "Trigger Level " on
page 894)
Preset
0 dBm
Notes
Setting a value for VTL sets the trigger mode to VIDEO, even if it
was not already set to VIDEO. See "TM (Trigger Mode)" on page
424.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
442
5 Legacy Command Descriptions
XCH (Exchange)
XCH (Exchange)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Exchanges the contents of the source and destination traces. The traces are
analyzed and adjusted to fit the number of display points on the screen.
Format
XCH TRA|TRB|TRC,TRA|TRB|TRC
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe#:DISPlay[:STATe]?
:TRACe#:UPDate[:STATe]?
:TRACe:EXCHange TRACE#, TRACE#
:TRACe#:DISPlay[:STATe]
:TRACe#:UPDate[:STATe]
(See "View/Blank " on page 858)
Notes
The functions of XCH TRA,TRB are identical to "AXB (Exchange
Trace A and Trace B)" on page 166 and "EX (Exchange Trace A and
Trace B)" on page 215.
The functions of XCH TRB,TRC are identical to "BXC (Exchange
Trace B and Trace C)" on page 175 and "KSi (Exchange Trace B and
Trace C)" on page 260.
443
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
The Swept SA measurement uses both swept and FFT analysis, and the frequency and
time domains. For more details, see "RLC Swept SA Measurement Description" on
page 446 below.
In many of the key and command descriptions that follow, reference is made to the
"Spectrum Analyzer Mode" and "Swept SA Measurement". In all cases, the
information applicable to this mode and measurement also applies to the RLC Mode
and RLC Swept SA Measurement.
444
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
SCPI Support
N9061A supports only a small subset of SCPI commands. The full set of supported
commands is provided in "List of Supported SCPI Commands" on page 82.
The following key and function descriptions may apply to multiple instrument modes
and measurements. For this reason, the topic content may include SCPI command
definitions that are not supported by N9061A.
445
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
RLC Swept SA Measurement Description
– Swept Spectrum Analysis (Freq Domain): The instrument sweeps the LO to
generate a heterodyned IF signal that can be detected to analyze the signal
content of a range of frequencies. The x-axis of the display is frequency, the Y Axis
is amplitude.
– Swept FFT Analysis (Freq Domain): In some cases there is an advantage to not
actually sweeping the LO, but instead analyzing the signal by taking a time
record and performing FFT analysis. This is what is done in swept FFT analysis,
but the data is still presented as though it were a sweeping spectrum analyzer.
The x-axis of the display is frequency, the Y Axis is amplitude.
– Zero Span Analysis (Time Domain): In Zero Span analysis, the instrument stops
sweeping the LO, placing it at the center frequency, and then takes time data
from the detector while stopped at that frequency. Because the LO is not moving,
the frequency span is zero. The time data is presented left to right across the
screen just like on an oscilloscope. The x-axis of the display is time, and the Y Axis
is amplitude.
All of the tools such as markers, peak tables, limit lines, trace math, N dB points, and
marker functions are available in Zero Span measurement analysis, although some
work differently in the time and frequency domains.
Key Path
Meas
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
446
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
AMPTD Y Scale
The Amplitude front-panel key activates the Amplitude menu and selects Reference
Level or Reference Value (depending on the measurement) as the active function.
Some features in the Amplitude menu apply to multiple measurements; others apply
only to specific measurements. Keys that only apply to some measurements are
blanked or grayed out in measurements that are not supported. Key Path
Front-panel key
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Reference Level
The Reference Level specifies the amplitude represented by the topmost graticule
line.
Changing the reference level does not restart a measurement, because it is a
display function only; instead it vertically ‘pans’ all displayed traces and markers to
the new value. If a change to the reference level changes the attenuation value (e.g.
through an auto coupling), then the measurement will be restarted.
– See "Amplitude Representations" on page 448
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale
Couplings
If you reduce the attenuation, the analyzer may have to lower the reference level to keep it below
its allowed maximum. This allowed maximum level is specified in the “Max” row, below, along
with other variables which affect it. When you increase attenuation, the reference level does not change.
Preset
0 dBm
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
RefLevelMin = –170 dBm + RefLevelOffset - ExtGain.
Max
The maximum Ref Level is typically:
+30 dBm + RL Offset – External Gain (for MXA and PXA)
+23 dBm + RL Offset – External Gain (for EXA and CXA)
This maximum value is determined by the maximum power that can be safely applied to the input
circuitry. The actual maximum value at any given time may be even less than this, depending on
other values including Mech Atten, Int Preamp Gain, Swept IF Gain, FFT IF Gain, Max Mixer
Level, and the total attenuation currently available. Note that the maximum reference level is unaffected by the input choice of external mixing.
Default Unit
Depends on the current selected Y axis unit
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
1. In PSA, there was a restriction on Ref Level Max which was that it could not exceed 0 dBm
when the preamp was on. This restriction does not apply to X-Series.
2. Ref Level – Ref Level is a display function, not a measurement control function, so a change
in the setting does not start a new sweep (unless attenuation changes). This behavior differs
from that of legacy analyzers
447
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Amplitude Representations
The following is an illustration of the reference level and Y Axis scales under various
conditions:
Attenuation
This menu controls the attenuator functions and interactions between the
attenuation system components.
There are two attenuator configurations in the X-Series. One is a dual attenuator
configuration consisting of a mechanical attenuator and an optional electronic
attenuator. The other configuration uses a single attenuator with combined
mechanical and electronic sections that controls all the attenuation functions. Different models in the X-Series come with different configurations, as described in
more detail below:
– "Dual Attenuator Configurations" on page 449
– "Single Attenuator Configuration" on page 449
– "Determining Attenuator Configuration" on page 449
Most Attenuation settings are the same for all measurements; they do not change
as you change measurements. Settings like these are called “Meas Global” and are
unaffected by Meas Preset. Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale
Scope
Meas Global
Dependencies
In measurements that support the I/Q inputs, this key is unavailable when I/Q is the selected
input, and is replaced by the Range key in that case.
Readback Line
Contains a summary in [ ] brackets of the current total attenuation. See the descriptions of the "
(Mech) Atten " on page 450, "Enable Elec Atten" on page 452, and "Elec Atten" on page 454 keys
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
448
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
for more detail on the contributors to the total attenuation.
Note that when "Pre-Adjust for Min Clip" on page 455 is on, this value can change at the start of
every measurement.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.03.00
Dual Attenuator Configurations
Configuration 1: Mechanical attenuator + optional electronic attenuator
Configuration 2: Mechanical attenuator, no optional electronic attenuator
(note that Configuration 2 is not strictly speaking a dual-section attenuator, since
there is no electronic section available. However, it behaves exactly like
Configuration 1 without the Electronic Attenuator option EA3, therefore for the sake
of this document it is grouped into the “Dual Attenuator” configuration)
Single Attenuator Configuration
Determining Attenuator Configuration
You can tell which attenuator configuration you have by pressing the Attenuation
key, which (in most modes) opens the Attenuation menu. As shown in the examples
below, if the first key in the Attenuation menu says Mech Atten, then you have the
dual attenuator configuration. If the first key says Atten, then you have the single
attenuator configuration.
449
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Dual Attenuator
Single Attenuator
In the single attenuator configuration, you control the attenuation with a single
control, as the fixed stage has only two states. In the dual attenuator configuration,
both stages have significant range so you are given separate control of the
mechanical and electronic attenuator stages. When you have the dual attenuator configuration, you may still have only a single
attenuator, because unless option EA3 (the Electronic Attenuator option) is
available, and you purchase it, you will have only the mechanical attenuator.
(Mech) Atten
This key is labeled Mech Atten in dual attenuator models and Atten in single
attenuator models. In the dual attenuator configuration, this key only affects the
mechanical attenuator. This key lets you modify the attenuation applied to the RF input signal path. This
value is normally auto coupled to the Ref Level, the Internal Preamp Gain, any
External Gain that is entered, and the Max Mixer Level, as described in the table
below.
See "Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man" on page 451
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation
Dependencies
Some measurements do not support the Auto setting of (Mech) Atten. In these measurements,
the Auto/Man selection is not available, and the Auto/Man line on the key disappears.
In dual attenuator configurations, when the electronic attenuator is enabled, the mechanical
attenuator has no auto setting and the Auto/Man line on the key disappears. The state of
Auto/Man is remembered and restored when the electronic attenuator is once again disabled.
This is described in more detail in the "Enable Elec Atten" on page 452 key description.
See "Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man" on page 451 for more information on the
Auto/Man functionality of Attenuation.
Couplings
When (Mech) Atten is in Auto, it uses the following algorithm to determine a value:
Atten = ReferenceLevel + PreAmpGain + ExternalGain – RefLevelOffset - MaxMixerLevel + IF
Gain.
Limit this value to be between 6 dB and the Max value. No value below 6 dB can ever be chosen
by Auto.
The resulting value is rounded up to the largest value possible given the attenuation step setting.
That is, 50.01 dB would change to 60 dB (for a 10 dB attenuation step).
The “IF Gain” term in the equation above is either 0 dB or +10 dB, depending on the settings of
FFT IF Gain, Swept IF Gain, max Ref Level and the Auto/Man setting of Mech Atten. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
450
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
In External Mixing and BBIQ,where the Attenuator is not in the signal path, the Attenuator
setting changes as described above when (Mech) Atten is in Auto, but no changes are made to
the actual attenuator hardware setting until the input is changed back to the RF Input.
Preset
The preset for Mech Attenuation is “Auto.” The Auto value of attenuation is:
CXA, EXA, MXA and PXA: 10 dB
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
0 dB
The attenuation set by this key cannot be decreased below 6 dB with the knob or step keys. To
get to a value below 6 dB it has to be directly entered from the keypad or via SCPI. This protects
from adjusting the attenuation to a dangerously small value which can put the instrument at risk
of damage to input circuitry. However, if the current mechanical attenuation is below 6 dB it can
be increased with the knob and step keys, but not decreased.
Max
CXA N9000A–503/507: 50 dB
CXA N9000A–513/526: 70dB
EXA: 60 dB
MXA and PXA: 70 dB
In the single attenuator configuration, the total of ATT and EATT cannot exceed 50 dB, so if the
EATT is set to 24 dB first, the main attenuation cannot be greater than 26 dB and will be reduced
accordingly; if the main attenuator is set to 40 dB first, EATT cannot be greater than 10 dB.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.03.00
Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man
As described in the Attenuation key description, there are two distinct attenuator
configurations available in the X-Series, the single attenuator and dual attenuator
configurations. In dual attenuator configurations, we have the mechanical
attenuation and the electronic attenuation, and the current total attenuation is the
sum of the electronic + mechanical attenuation. In single attenuator configurations,
we refer to the attenuation set using the (Mech) Atten key (or POW:ATT SCPI) as the
“main” attenuation; and the attenuation that is set by the SCPI command POW:EATT
as the “soft” attenuation (the POW:EATT command is honored even in the single
attenuator configuration, for compatibility purposes). Then the current total
attenuation is the sum of the main + soft attenuation. See the Elec Atten key
description for more on “soft” attenuation.
In the dual attenuator configuration, when the electronic attenuator is enabled,
there is no Auto/Man functionality for the mechanical attenuator, and the third line of
the key label (the Auto/Man line) disappears:
451
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Enable Elec Atten
Enables the Electronic Attenuator.
The electronic attenuator offers finer steps than the mechanical attenuator, has no
acoustical noise, is faster, and is less subject to wear. These advantages primarily
aid in remote operation and are negligible for front panel use. See "Using the
Electronic Attenuator: Pros and Cons" on page 454 for a detailed discussion of the
pros and cons of using the electronic attenuator.
For the single attenuator configuration, for SCPI backwards compatibility, the “soft”
attenuation feature replaces the dual attenuator configuration’s electronic
attenuator. All the same couplings and limitations apply. See "Attenuator
Configurations and Auto/Man" on page 451
– See "More Information" on page 453
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation
Dependencies
This key only appears in Dual Attenuator models with an Electronic Attenuator installed. It does
not appear in models with the Single Attenuator configuration, as in the single attenuator
configuration there is no “electronic attenuator” there is only a single integrated attenuator
(which has both a mechanical and electronic stage). However, in the single attenuator
configuration, EATT SCPI commands are accepted for compatibility with other X-series
instruments and set a “soft” attenuation as described in "Attenuator Configurations and
Auto/Man" on page 451
The electronic attenuator (and the “soft” attenuation function provided in single attenuator
configurations) is unavailable above 3.6 GHz. Therefore, if the Stop Frequency of the analyzer is >
3.6 GHz then the Enable Elec Atten key will be OFF and grayed out.
If the Internal Preamp is on, meaning it is set to Low Band or Full, the electronic attenuator (and
the “soft” attenuation function provided in single attenuator configurations) is unavailable. In this
case the Enable Elec Atten key will be OFF and grayed out.
If the electronic/soft Attenuator is enabled, then the Stop Freq of the analyzer is limited to
3.6 GHz and the Internal Preamp is unavailable.
The SCPI-only “soft” electronic attenuation for the single-attenuator configuration is not
available in all measurements; in particular, it is not available in the Swept SA measurement.
Couplings
Enabling and disabling the Electronic Attenuator affects the setting of the Mechanical Attenuator
(in dual attenuator configurations). This is described in more detail below this table.
Preset
OFF for Swept SA measurement; ON for all other measurements that support the electronic
attenuator
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.03.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
452
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
More Information
Mechanical Attenuator Transition Rules
When the Electronic Attenuator is enabled, the Mechanical Attenuator transitions to
a state that has no Auto function. Below are the rules for transitioning the
Mechanical Attenuator. The information below only applies to the dual attenuator configurations, and only
when the Electronic Attenuator is installed.
When the Electronic Attenuation is enabled from a disabled state:
– The Mechanical Attenuator is initialized to 10 dB (this is its optimal performance
setting). You can then set it as desired with SCPI, numeric keypad, step keys, or
knob, and it behaves as it normally would in manual mode
– The Auto/Man state of (Mech) Atten is saved
– The Auto/Man line on the (Mech) Atten key disappears and the auto rules are
disabled
– The Electronic Attenuator is set to 10 dB less than the previous value of the
Mechanical Attenuator, within the limitation that it must stay within the range of
0 to 24 dB of attenuation.
Examples in the dual attenuator configuration:
– Mech Atten at 20 dB. Elec Atten enabled, Mech Atten set to 10 dB, and Elec
Atten set to 10 dB. New total attenuation equals the value before Elec Atten
enabled.
– Mech Atten at 0 dB. Elec Atten enabled, Mech Atten set to 10 dB, and Elec Atten
set to 0 dB. New total attenuation does not equal the value before Elec Atten
enabled.
– Mech Atten at 40 dB. Elec Atten enabled, Mech Atten set to 10 dB, and Elec
Atten set to 24 dB. New total attenuation does not equal the value before Elec
Atten enabled.
When the Electronic Attenuation is disabled from an enabled state:
– The Elec Atten key is grayed out
– The Auto/Man state of (Mech) Atten is restored
– If now in Auto, (Mech) Atten recouples
– If now in Man, (Mech) Atten is set to the value of total attenuation that existed
before the Elec Atten was disabled. The resulting value is rounded up to the
453
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
smallest value possible given the (Mech) Atten Step setting - (That is, 57 dB
changes to 58 dB when (Mech) Atten Step is 2 dB.)
Using the Electronic Attenuator: Pros and Cons
The electronic attenuator offers finer steps than the mechanical attenuator, has no
acoustical noise, is faster, and is less subject to wear. The “finer steps” advantage of the electronic attenuator is beneficial in optimizing
the alignment of the analyzer dynamic range to the signal power in the front panel
as well as remote use. Thus, you can achieve improved relative signal measurement
accuracy. Compared to a mechanical attenuator with 2 dB steps, the 1 dB resolution
of the electronic attenuator only gives better resolution when the odd-decibel steps
are used. Those odd-decibel steps are less accurately calibrated than the evendecibel steps, so one tradeoff for this superior relative accuracy is reduced absolute
amplitude accuracy.
Another disadvantage of the electronic attenuator is that the spectrum analyzer
loses its “Auto” setting, making operation less convenient.
Also, the relationship between the dynamic range specifications (TOI, SHI,
compression and noise) and instrument performance are less well-known with the
electrical attenuator. With the mechanical attenuator, TOI, SHI and compression
threshold levels increase dB-for-dB with increasing attenuation, and the noise floor
does as well. With the electronic attenuator, there is an excess attenuation of about
1 to 3 dB between 0 and 3.6 GHz, making the effective TOI, SHI, and so forth, less
well known. Excess attenuation is the actual attenuation relative to stated
attenuation. Excess attenuation is accounted for in the analyzer calibration
Elec Atten
Controls the Electronic Attenuator in dual attenuator configurations. This key does
not appear in single attenuator configurations, as the control of both the mechanical
and electronic stages of the single attenuator is integrated into the single Atten key.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation
Notes
Electronic Attenuation’s specification is defined only when Mechanical Attenuation is 6 dB.
Dependencies
This key only appears in Dual Attenuator models with an Electronic Attenuator installed. It does
not appear in models with the Single Attenuator configuration, as in the single attenuator
configuration there is no “electronic attenuator” there is only a single integrated attenuator
(which has both a mechanical and electronic stage). However, in the single attenuator
configuration, EATT SCPI commands are accepted for compatibility with other X-series
instruments and set a “soft” attenuation as described in "Attenuator Configurations and
Auto/Man" on page 451. The “soft” attenuation is treated as an addition to the “main”
attenuation value set by the Atten softkey or the POW:ATT SCPI command and affects the total
attenuation displayed on the Attenuation key and the Meas Bar.
When Enable Elec Atten is off or grayed out, the Elec Atten key is grayed out.
Preset
0 dB
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
454
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
0 dB
Max
Dual attenuator configuration: 24 dB
Single attenuator configuration: the total of ATT and EATT cannot exceed 50 dB, so if the EATT is
set to 24 dB first, the main attenuation cannot be greater than 26 dB and will be reduced
accordingly; if the main attenuator is set to 40 dB first, EATT cannot be greater than 10 dB
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.03.00
Adjust Atten for Min Clip
Sets the combination of mechanical and electronic attenuation based on the current
measured signal level so that clipping will be at a minimum.
This is an "immediate action" function, that is, it executes once, when the key is
pressed.
This key is grayed out in measurements that do not support this functionality. The
spectrum analyzer measurement, Swept SA, does not support this functionality.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.03.00
Pre-Adjust for Min Clip
If this function is on, it does the adjustment described under "Adjust Atten for Min
Clip" on page 455 each time a measurement restarts. Therefore, in Continuous
measurement mode, it only executes before the first measurement.
In dual attenuator models, you can set Elec+Mech Atten, in which case both
attenuators participate in the autoranging, or Elec Atten Only, in which case the
mechanical attenuator does not participate in the autoranging. This latter case
results in less wear on the mechanical attenuator and is usually faster.
This key is grayed out in measurements that do not support this functionality. The
spectrum analyzer measurement, Swept SA, does not support this functionality.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation
Dependencies
This key only appears in Dual Attenuator models with an Electronic Attenuator installed. It does
not appear in models with the Single Attenuator configuration, as in the single attenuator
configuration there is no “electronic attenuator” there is only a single integrated attenuator
(which has both a mechanical and electronic stage). When Enable Elec Atten is off or grayed out, the Pre-Adjust for Min Clip key is grayed out.
455
Preset
OFF for Swept SA measurement; ON for all other measurements that support Pre-Adjust for Min
Clip
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Range
Dual attenuator models:
Off | Elec Atten Only | Mech + Elec Atten
Single attenuator models:
Off | On
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.03.00
Off
Turns Pre-Adjust for Min Clip off. This is the default setting.
This key is grayed out in measurements that do not support this functionality. The
spectrum analyzer measurement, Swept SA, does not support this functionality.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation, Pre-Adjust for Min Clip
Example
:POW:RANGe:OPT:ATT OFF
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Elec Atten Only
Selects only the electric attenuator to participate in auto ranging. This offers less
wear on the mechanical attenuator and is usually faster.
This key is grayed out in measurements that do not support this functionality. The
spectrum analyzer measurement, Swept SA, does not support this functionality.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation, Pre-Adjust for Min Clip
Example
:POW:RANGe:OPT:ATT ELEC
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Mech + Elec Atten
In dual attenuator models, this selects both attenuators participate in the
autoranging.
This key is grayed out in measurements that do not support this functionality. The
spectrum analyzer measurement, Swept SA, does not support this functionality.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation, Pre-Adjust for Min Clip
Example
:POW:RANGe:OPT:ATT COMB
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
(Mech) Atten Step
This controls thestep size used when making adjustments to the input attenuation.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
456
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
This key is labeled Mech Atten Step in dual attenuator models and Atten Step in
single attenuator models. In the dual attenuator configuration, this key only affects
the step size of the mechanical attenuator. Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation
Notes
Note this feature works like a 1-N choice from the front panel, but it takes a specific value (in dB)
when used remotely. The only valid values are 2 and 10.
Dependencies
Blanked in CXA and EXA if option FSA (2 dB steps) is not present. If blanked, attempts to set it via
SCPI will yield an error. Couplings
When the attenuation step size changes, the current mechanical attenuation value is adjusted (if
necessary) to be quantized to the new step size. That is, if step is set to 10 dB, mech atten is
increased if necessary so it is a multiple of 10 dB
Preset
PXA and MXA: 2 dB
EXA and CXA: 10 dB (2 dB with option FSA)
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.03.00
Max Mixer Level
Controls the limitation on the Ref Level for a given attenuation setting, and therefore
also interacts with the Auto rules for selecting the attenuation as a coupling from the
reference level.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation
Preset
–10 dBm
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
–50 dBm
Max
–10 dBm
Default Unit
Depends on the current selected Y axis unit, see Swept SA discussion of Y Axis Unit
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Max Mixer Lvl Rule
This function is available only in the Swept SA measurement of the SA Mode, and in
all measurements of the RTSA Mode.
The Max Mixer Level Rule key allows you to optimize the Max Mixer Level setting for
certain kinds of measurements.
– Normal – Normal is the historical, and thus backwards compatible, setting range
(−50 to 0 dBm) and default setting (−10 dBm). The instrument has been designed
so that, at the default setting, any signal below the reference level is extremely
unlikely to cause ADC overloads. At this mixer level the scale fidelity will be
within specifications, thus compression with be negligible.
457
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
– TOI – Choosing the setting “TOI-limited dynamic range” allows a range of
settings of the Max Mixer Level, −50 to −10 dBm, that can be optimum for
measurements limited by the analyzer third-order dynamic range. The default
setting, −25 dBm, is commonly appropriate but RBW affects this. A good setting
for Max Mixer Level would be higher than the optimum mixer level by half of the
attenuator step size.
– Compression – Choosing the setting “Compression-limited dynamic range”
allows a range of settings of the Max Mixer Level, −10 to +10 dBm or more, that
can be optimum for measurements limited by the tradeoffs between analyzer
accuracy due to compression, and dynamic range due to the noise floor. The
default setting, −3 dBm, is commonly appropriate, representing mixer drive levels
that cause 1 dB or less compression at most carrier frequencies. Typical
measurements that would be optimized by this setting are the measurement of
low sideband levels, including nulls, in angle-modulated signals (FM and PM).
Also pulsed-RF measurements, including finding nulls to estimate pulse width,
which are often best done with significant overdrive (compression) of the front
end.
Setting
Name
(readback)
Setting Name
(verbose)
Max Mixer
Level Preset
Value, dBm
Max Mixer Level
minimum value,
dBm
Max Mixer Level
maximum value,
dBm
Normal
Normal – balance
TOI, noise and
compression
−10
−50
0
TOI
TOI-limited dynamic
range
−25
−50
−10
Compression
Compression-limited
dynamic range
−3
−10
+30
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation
Preset
NORM
Initial S/W Revision
A.19.00
Scale / Div
Sets the units per vertical graticule division on the display. This function is only
available when Scale Type (Log) is selected and the vertical scale is power. When
Scale Type (Lin) is selected, Scale/Div is grayed out.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
458
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Dependencies
Scale/Div is grayed out in linear Y scale. Sending the equivalent SCPI command does change the
Scale/Div, though it has no affect while in Lin.
Preset
10.00 dB / Div
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
0.10 dB
Max
20 dB
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Scale Type
Chooses a linear or logarithmic vertical scale for the display and for remote data
readout.
When Scale Type (Log) is selected, the vertical graticule divisions are scaled in
logarithmic units. The top line of the graticule is the Reference Level and uses the
scaling per division Scale/Div to assign values to the other locations on the graticule.
When Scale Type (Lin) is selected, the vertical graticule divisions are linearly scaled
with the reference level value at the top of the display and zero volts at the bottom.
Each vertical division of the graticule represents one-tenth of the Reference Level.
The Y Axis Unit used for each type of display is set by pressing Y Axis Unit. The
analyzer remembers separate Y Axis Unit settings for both Log and Lin.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale
Dependencies
If Normalize is on, Scale Type forced to Log and is grayed out.
Couplings
Changing the Scale Type always sets the Y Axis unit to the last unit specified for the current
amplitude scale. In other words, we restore the Y Axis unit setting appropriate per log/lin.
Preset
LOG
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Presel Center
When this key is pressed, the centering of the preselector filter is adjusted to
optimize the amplitude accuracy at the frequency of the selected marker. If the
selected marker is not on when Presel Center is pressed, the analyzer will turn on
the selected marker, perform a peak search, and then perform centering on the
marker’s center frequency. If the selected marker is already on and between the
start and stop frequencies of the analyzer, the analyzer performs the preselector
calibration on that marker’s frequency. If the selected marker is already on, but
outside the frequency range between Start Freq and Stop Freq, the analyzer will first
perform a peak search, and then perform centering on the marker’s center
frequency.
The value displayed on the Presel Adjust key will change to reflect the new
preselector tuning (see Presel Adjust.
459
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
A number of considerations should be observed to ensure proper operation. See
"Proper Preselector Operation" on page 460.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale
Notes
Note that the rules outlined above under the key description apply for the remote command as
well as the key. The result of the command is dependent on marker position, and so forth. Any
message shown by the key press is also shown in response to the remote command.
Dependencies
– Grayed out if the microwave preselector is off. )
– If the selected marker’s frequency is below Band 1, advisory message 0.5001 is generated
and no action is taken.
– Grayed out if entirely in Band 0. – Blank in models that do not include a preselector, such as option 503. If the SCPI is sent in
these instruments, it is accepted without error, and the query always returns 0.
– Grayed out in the Spectrogram View.
Couplings
The active marker position determines where the centering will be attempted.
If the analyzer s in a measurement such as averaging when centering is initiated, the act of
centering the preselector will restart averaging but the first average trace will not be taken until
the centering is completed.
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
When centering the preselector, *OPC will not return true until the process is complete and a
subsequent measurement has completed, nor will results be returned to a READ or MEASure
command.
The Measuring bit should remain set while this command is operating and should not go false
until the subsequent sweep/measurement has completed.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.03.00
Proper Preselector Operation
A number of considerations should be observed to ensure proper operation:
1. If the selected marker is off, the analyzer will turn on a marker, perform a peak
search, and adjust the preselector using the selected marker’s frequency. It uses
the "highest peak" peak search method unqualified by threshold or excursion, so
that there is no chance of a ‘no peak found’ error. It continues with that peak,
even if it is the peak of just noise. Therefore, for this operation to work properly,
there should be a signal on screen in a preselected range for the peak search to
find.
2. If the selected marker is already on, the analyzer will attempt the centering at
that marker’s frequency. There is no preselector for signals below about
3.6 GHz, therefore if the marker is on a signal below 3.6 GHz, no centering will be
attempted and an advisory message generated
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
460
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
3. In some models, the preselector can be bypassed. If it is bypassed, no centering
will be attempted in that range and a message will be generated.
Preselector Adjust
Allows you to manually adjust the preselector filter frequency to optimize its
response to the signal of interest. This function is only available when "Presel
Center" on page 459 is available.
For general purpose signal analysis, using Presel Center is recommended.
Centering the filter minimizes the impact of long-term preselector drift. Presel Adjust
can be used instead to manually optimize the preselector. One application of manual
optimization would be to peak the preselector response, which both optimizes the
signal-to-noise ratio and minimizes amplitude variations due to small (short-term)
preselector drifting.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale
Scope
Meas Global
Notes
The value on the key reads out to 0.1 MHz resolution.
Dependencies
– Grayed out if microwave preselector is off
– Grayed out if entirely in Band 0. – Blank in models that do not include a preselector, such as option 503. If the SCPI is sent in
these instruments, it is accepted without error, and the query always returns 0.
– Grayed out in the Spectrogram View.
Preset
0 MHz
State Saved
The Presel Adjust value set by Presel Center, or by manually adjusting Presel Adjust, is not saved
in instrument state, and does not survive a Preset or power cycle.
Min
–500 MHz
Max
500 MHz
Default Unit
Hz
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.03.00
Y Axis Unit
Displays the menu keys that enable you to change the vertical (Y) axis amplitude
unit. The analyzer retains the entered Y Axis Unit separately for both Log and Lin
amplitude scale types. For example, if Scale Type has been set to Log, and you set Y
Axis Unit to dBm, pressing Scale Type (Log) sets the Y Axis Unit to dBm. If Scale Type
has been set to Lin and you set Y Axis Unit to V, pressing Scale Type (Lin) sets the Y
Axis Unit to V. Pressing Scale Type (Log) again sets the Y axis unit back to dBm.
461
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
The units of current (A, dBmA, dBuA) are calculated based on 50 ohms input
impedance.
All four of the EMI units (dBµA/m, dBµV/m, dBG, dBpT) are treated by the
instrument exactly as though they were dBuV. The user must load an appropriate
correction factor using Amplitude Corrections for accurate and meaningful results.
If a SCPI command is sent to the analyzer that uses one of the EMI units as a
terminator, the analyzer treats it as though DBUV had been sent as the terminator.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale
Mode
SA
Scope
Meas Global
Notes
The Y axis unit has either logarithmic or linear characteristics. The set of units that is logarithmic
consists of dBm, dBmV, dBmA, dBµV, dBµA, dBµV/m, dBµA/m, dBpT, and dBG. The set of units
that are linear consists of V, W, and A. The chosen unit will determine how the reference level
and all the amplitude-related outputs like trace data, marker data, etc. read out.
Notes
The settings of Y Axis Unit and Scale Type, affect how the data is read over the remote interface.
When using the remote interface no unit is returned, so you must know what the Y axis unit is to
interpret the results:
Example 1, set the following:
– Scale Type (Log)
– Y Axis Unit, dBm
– Scale/Div, 1 dB
– Ref Level, 10 dBm
This sets the top line to 10 dBm with each vertical division representing 1 dB. Thus, if a point on
trace 1 is on the fifth graticule line from the top, it represents 5 dBm and will read out remotely
as 5.
Example 2, set the following:
– Scale Type (Lin)
– Y Axis Unit, Volts
– Ref Level, 100 mV (10 mV/div)
This sets the top line to 100 mV and the bottom line to 0 V, so each vertical division represents
10 mV. Thus, if a point on trace 1 is on the fifth graticule line from the top, it represents 50 mV
and will read out remotely as 50.
Dependencies
If an amplitude correction with an Antenna Unit other than None is applied and enabled, then
that antenna unit is forced and the key with that unit is the only Y Axis Unit available. All other Y
Axis Unit keys are grayed out. If an amplitude correction with an Antenna Unit other than None is applied and enabled, and you
then turn off that correction or set Apply Corrections to No, the Y Axis Unit that existed before
the Antenna Unit was applied is restored.
Couplings
The analyzer retains the entered Y Axis Unit separately for both Log and Lin amplitude scale
types
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
462
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Preset
dBm for log scale, V for linear. The true ‘preset’ value is dBm, since at preset the Y Scale type is
set to logarithmic.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback line
1-of-N selection
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.02.00, A.04.00, A.11.00
dBm
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBm.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit
Example
UNIT:POW DBM
Dependencies
Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. Readback
dBm
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.02.00
dBmV
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBmV.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit
Example
UNIT:POW DBMV
Dependencies
Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. Readback
dBmV
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.02.00
dBmA
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBmA.
463
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit
Example
UNIT:POW DBMA
Dependencies
Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. Readback
dBmA
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.02.00
W
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to watt.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit
Example
UNIT:POW W
Dependencies
Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. Readback
W
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.02.00
V
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to volt.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit
Example
UNIT:POW V
Dependencies
Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON.
Readback
V
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.02.00
A
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to Ampere.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit
Example
UNIT:POW A
Dependencies
Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. Readback
A
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
464
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
dBµV
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBµV.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit
Example
UNIT:POW DBUV
Dependencies
Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. Readback
dBµV
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.02.00
dBµA
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBµA.
The unit dBuA can also appear as an Antenna Unit. This will be used by customers
using current probes, because current probes are often supplied with conversion
tables that provide the transducer factors. When dBuA is used as an Antenna Unit
the normal conversion from power to amps for dBuA (based on the analyzer input
impedance) is not done, but instead the conversion is based solely on the Correction
that contains the transducer factors. This is what distinguishes dBuA as a normal
unit from dBuA as an antenna unit. When querying the Y-Axis unit, you can query the
Antenna Unit to distinguish between regular dBuA and the dBuA antenna unit. If
:CORR:CSET:ANT? returns NOC (for No Conversion), you are using a normal Y Axis
dBuA. If it returns UA you are using an Antenna Unit dBuA.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit
Example
UNIT:POW DBUA
Dependencies
Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. Readback
dBµA
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.02.00
dBpW
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBpW.
465
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit
Example
UNIT:POW DBPW
Dependencies
Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Readback
dBµA
Initial S/W Revision
A.11.00
Antenna Unit
When a Correction is turned on that uses an Antenna Unit, the Y Axis Unit changes to
that Antenna Unit. All of the keys in the Y-Axis Unit menu are then greyed out, except
the Antenna Unit key. The unit being used is shown on this key and is shown as
selected in the submenu.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit
Dependencies
Grayed out if no Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is on. Readback line
Currently selected unit
Initial S/W Revision
A.11.00
None
This is selected if no Antenna Unit is currently on, however you cannot actually set
this value, since it is always grayed out. The key is included simply to provide an
indication on the Readback line of the Antenna Unit key when there is no Antenna
Unit selected.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit, Antenna Unit
Readback
“None”
Initial S/W Revision
A.11.00
dBµV/m
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBµV/m. This is
an antenna unit, and this key is grayed out unless a Correction with this Antenna
Unit selected is ON. If this is the case, all of the other Antenna Units are grayed out.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit, Antenna Unit
Example
UNIT:POW DBUVM
Dependencies
Grayed out if no Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is on. Readback
dBµV/m
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
466
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
dBµA/m
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBµA/m. This is
an antenna unit, and this key is grayed out unless a Correction with this Antenna Unit
selected is ON. If this is the case, all of the other Antenna Units are grayed out.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit, Antenna Unit
Example
UNIT:POW DBUAM
Dependencies
Grayed out if no Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is on.
Readback
dBµA/m
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
dBpΤ
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBpT. This is an
antenna unit, and this key is grayed out unless a Correction with this Antenna Unit
selected is ON. If this is the case, all of the other Antenna Units are grayed out.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit, Antenna Unit
Example
UNIT:POW DBPT
Dependencies
Grayed out if no Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is on. Readback
dBpT
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
dBG
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBG. This is an
antenna unit, and this key is grayed out unless a Correction with this Antenna Unit
selected is ON. If this is the case, all of the other Antenna Units are grayed out.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit, Antenna Unit
Example
UNIT:POW DBG
Dependencies
Grayed out if no Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is on.
Readback
dBG
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
dBµA
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBµA. This is an
antenna unit, and this key is grayed out unless a Correction with this Antenna Unit
selected is ON. If this is the case, all of the other Antenna Units are grayed out.
467
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit, Antenna Unit
Example
UNIT:POW DBUAM
Dependencies
Grayed out if no Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is on.
Readback
dBµA
Initial S/W Revision
A.11.00
Reference Level Offset
Adds an offset value to the displayed reference level. The reference level is the
absolute amplitude represented by the top graticule line on the display.
– See "More Information" on page 468
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale
Mode
SA
Scope
Meas Global
Preset
0 dBm
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
The range for Ref Lvl Offset is variable. It is limited to values that keep the reference level within
the range of –327.6 dB to 327.6 dB.
Max
327.6 dB
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
1. In pre-X-Series instruments, Ref Level Offset could not be adjusted by the knob or step keys.
That is no longer the case.
2. In ESA and PSA, Ref Level Offset was applied to the data as it was acquired; thus if the Offset
changed the new offset was not applied until new trace data was taken. In X-Series, the
offset is applied as the data is displayed/queried, so if you change the offset, it will change
the data immediately.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.04.00
More Information
Offsets are used when gain or loss occurs between a device under test and the
analyzer input. Thus, the signal level measured by the analyzer may be thought of
as the level at the input of an external amplitude conversion device. Entering an
offset does not affect the trace position or attenuation value, just the value of the top
line of the display and the values represented by the trace data. Thus, the values of
exported trace data, queried trace data, marker amplitudes, trace data used in
calculations such as N dB points, trace math, peak threshold, and so forth, are all
affected by Ref Level Offset.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
468
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Changing the offset causes the analyzer to immediately stop the current sweep and
prepare to begin a new sweep, but the data will not change until the trace data
updates, because the offset is applied to the data as it is taken. If a trace is exported
with a nonzero Ref Level Offset, the exported data will contain the trace data with
the offset applied.
The maximum reference level available is dependent on the reference level offset.
That is, Ref Level - Ref Level Offset must be in the range –170 to +30 dBm. For
example, the reference level value range can be initially set to values from –170
dBm to 30 dBm with no reference level offset. If the reference level is first set to –20
dBm, then the reference level offset can be set to values of –150 to +50 dB.
If the reference level offset is first set to –30 dB, then the reference level can be set
to values of –200 dBm to 0 dBm. In this case, the reference level is “clamped” at 0
dBm because the maximum limit of +30 dBm is reached with a reference level setting
of 0 dBm with an offset of –30 dB. If instead, the reference level offset is first set to 30
dB, then the reference level can be set to values of –140 to +60 dBm.
µW Path Control
The µW Path Control functions include the µW Preselector Bypass (Option MPB) and
Low Noise Path (Option LNP) controls in the High Band path circuits.
When the µW Preselector is bypassed, the user has better flatness, but will be
subject to spurs from out of band interfering signals. When the Low Noise Path is
enabled, the analyzer automatically switches around certain circuitry in the high
frequency bands which can contribute to noise, when it is appropriate based on other
analyzer settings.
For most applications, the preset state is Standard Path, which gives the best
remote-control throughput, minimizes acoustic noise from switching and minimizes
the risk of wear out in the hardware switches. For applications that utilize the
wideband IF paths, the preset state is the µW Preselector Bypass path, if option
MPB is present. This is because, when using a wideband IF such as the 140 MHz IF,
the µW Preselector’s bandwidth can be narrower than the available IF bandwidth,
causing degraded amplitude flatness and phase linearity, so it is desirable to bypass
the preselector in the default case.
Selecting the Low Noise Path Enable option provides a lower noise floor, especially
in the 21–26.5 GHz region, though without improving many measures of dynamic
range, and without giving the best possible noise floor. The preamp, if purchased and
used, gives better noise floor than does the Low Noise Path, however its
compression threshold and third-order intercept are much poorer than that of the
non-preamp Low Noise Path. There are some applications, typically for signals
around −30 dBm, for which the third-order dynamic range of the standard path is
good enough, but the noise floor is not low enough even with 0 dB input attenuation.
When the third-order dynamic range of the preamp path is too little and the noise
floor of the standard path is too high, the Low Noise Path can provide the best
dynamic range.
Key Path
469
AMPTD Y Scale
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Mode
SA, BASIC, PNOISE, VSA , LTE, LTETDD
Scope
Meas Global
Notes
If a Presel Center is performed, the analyzer will momentarily switch to the Standard Path,
regardless of the setting of µW Path Control
The DC Block is always switched in when the low noise path is switched in, to protect succeeding
circuitry from DC. Note that this does not mean “when the low noise path is enabled” but when,
based on the Low Noise Path rules, the path is actually switched in. This can happen when the
selection is Low Noise Path Enable . In the case where the DC Block is switched in the analyzer
is now AC coupled. However, if you have selected DC coupling, the UI will still behave as though
it were DC coupled, including all annunciation, warnings, status bits, and responses to SCPI
queries. This is because, based on other settings, the analyzer could switch out the low noise
path at any time and hence go back to being DC coupled.
Alignment switching ignores the settings in this menu, and restores them when finished.
Dependencies
Unavailable in BBIQ and External Mixing
Preset
– All modes other than IQ Analyzer mode and VXA: STD
– IQ Analyzer, VXA and WLAN mode: – MPB option present and licensed: MPB
– MPB option not present and licensed: STD
State Saved
Save in instrument state
Readback
Value selected in the submenu
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.10.00
Standard Path
This path gives the best remote-control throughput, minimizes acoustic noise from
switching and minimizes the risk of wear in the hardware switches, particularly in
remote test scenarios where both low band and high band setups will follow in rapid
succession. In this path, the bypass of the low band/high band switch and microwave preamp is
never activated, which can cause some noise degradation but preserves the life of
the bypass switch.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, µW Path Control
Example
:POW:MW:PATH STD Readback Text
Standard Path
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
470
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
µW Preselector Bypass
This key toggles the preselector bypass switch for band 1 and higher. When the
microwave presel is on, the signal path is preselected. When the microwave
preselector is off, the signal path is not preselected. The preselected path is the
normal path for the analyzer.
The preselector is a tunable bandpass filter which prevents signals away from the
frequency of interest from combining in the mixer to generate in-band spurious
signals (images). The consequences of using a preselector filter are its limited
bandwidth, the amplitude and phase ripple in its passband, and any amplitude and
phase instability due to center frequency drift.
Option MPB or pre-selector bypass provides an unpreselected input mixer path for
certain X-Series signal analyzers with frequency ranges above 3.6 GHz. This signal
path allows a wider bandwidth and less amplitude variability, which is an advantage
when doing modulation analysis and broadband signal analysis. The disadvantage is
that, without the preselector, image signals will be displayed. Another disadvantage
of bypassing the preselector is increased LO emission levels at the front panel input
port.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, µW Path Control
Dependencies
Key is blanked if current mode does not support it.
Key is grayed out if mode supports it but current measurement does not support it.
Key is blank unless Option MPB is present and licensed. If SCPI command sent when MPB not
present, error –241, "Hardware missing; Option not installed" is generated.
Readback Text
µW Preselector Bypass
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
Internal Preamp
Accesses a menu of keys that control the internal preamps. Turning on the preamp
gives a better noise figure, but a poorer TOI to noise floor dynamic range. You can
optimize this setting for your particular measurement.
The instrument takes the preamp gain into account as it sweeps. If you sweep
outside of the range of the preamp the instrument will also account for that. The
displayed result will always reflect the correct gain.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale
Scope
Meas Global
Dependencies
Preamp is not available on all hardware platforms. If the preamp is not present or is unlicensed,
the key is not shown.
The preamp is not available when the electronic/soft attenuator is enabled.
471
Preset
OFF
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Off
Turns the internal preamp off
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Internal Preamp
Example
:POW:GAIN OFF
Readback
Off
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Low Band
Sets the internal preamp to use only the low band.
The frequency range of the installed (optional) low-band preamp is displayed in
square brackets on the Low Band key label.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Internal Preamp
Example
:POW:GAIN ON
:POW:GAIN:BAND LOW
Readback
Low Band
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Full Range
Sets the internal preamp to use its full range. The low band (0–3.6 GHz or 0–3GHz,
depending on the model) is supplied by the low band preamp and the frequencies
above low band are supplied by the high band preamp.
The frequency range of the installed (optional) preamp is displayed in square
brackets on the Full Range key label. If the high band option is not installed the Full
Range key does not appear.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Internal Preamp
Example
:POW:GAIN ON
:POW:GAIN:BAND FULL
Readback
Full Range
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
472
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Auto Couple
Auto Couple
The Auto Couple feature provides a quick and convenient way to automatically
couple multiple instrument settings. This helps ensure accurate measurements and
optimum dynamic range. When the Auto Couple feature is activated, either from the
front panel or remotely, all parameters of the current measurement that have an
Auto/Manual mode are set to Auto mode and all measurement settings dependent
on (or coupled to) the Auto/Man parameters are automatically adjusted for optimal
performance.
However, the Auto Couple key actions are confined to the current measurement
only. It does not affect other measurements in the mode, and it does not affect
markers, marker functions, or trace or display attributes.
For more details, see "More Information" on page 473 below.
Key Path
Front-panel key
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
More Information
There are two types of functions that have Auto/Manual modes, as described below:
Auto/Man Active Function keys
An Auto/Man toggle key controls the binary state associated with an instrument
parameter by toggling between Auto (where the parameter is automatically coupled
to the other parameters it is dependent upon) and Man (where the parameter is
controlled independent of the other parameters), as well as making the parameter
the active function. The current mode is indicated on the softkey with either Auto or
Man underlined as illustrated below.
Auto/Man 1-of-N keys
An Auto/Man 1-of-N key allows you to manually pick from a list of parameter values,
or place the function in Auto, in which case the value is automatically selected (and
indicated) as shown below. If in Auto, Auto is underlined on the calling key. If in
manual operation, manual is indicated on the calling key. But the calling key does
not actually toggle the function, it simply opens the menu.
473
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Auto Couple
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
474
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
BW
BW
The BW key opens the bandwidth menu, which contains keys to control the
Resolution Bandwidth and Video Bandwidth functions of the instrument.
The Resolution BW functions control filter bandwidth and filter type. There are two
filter types, Gaussian and Flattop. The Gaussian filters have a response curve that is
parabolic on a log scale. The Flattop filter shape is a close approximation of a
rectangular filter.
The AVERAGE functions, which appeared in the BW menu in earlier analyzers, can
now be found in the Trace/Detector menu and the Meas Setup menu. In the
Trace/Detector menu, you may turn Trace Averaging on or off for the desired traces
(rather than globally as in the past); and in the Meas Setup menu you may configure
Averaging, by setting the Average Number and the Average Type.
Key Path
Front-panel key
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
In previous analyzers, the BW hardkey was labeled “BW/Avg” and included menu keys to control
the averaging behavior of the instrument, which was global.
In the X-Series, averaging is performed on a trace-by-trace basis, with a corresponding impact on
the SCPI functions. A backwards compatibility command ([:SENSe]:AVERage[:STATe]) is
provided to preserve the old global behavior. See the section "Trace/Detector" on page 851 for
details.
The control for the Average number is now found in the Meas Setup menu. See the section
"Meas Setup" on page 603 for details.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Res BW
Activates the resolution bandwidth active function, which allows you to manually set
the resolution bandwidth (RBW) of the analyzer. Normally, Res BW (Auto) selects
automatic coupling of the Res BW to Span using the ratio set by the Span:3 dB RBW
key. To decouple the resolution bandwidth, press Res BW until Man is underlined, or
simply enter a different value for Res BW.
– See "More Information" on page 476
Key Path
BW
Notes
For numeric entries, all RBW Types choose the nearest (arithmetically, on a linear scale, rounding
up) available RBW to the value entered.
The setting and querying of values depends on the current bandwidth type.
Dependencies
When in Zero Span with no EMI Standard selected, there is no Auto setting for Res BW. The
Auto/Man line on the Res BW softkey disappears in this case, and if the SCPI command
[:SENSe]:BWID[:RESolution]:AUTO ON is sent, it generates a message.
While using the Tracking Generator, you must make sure the Start Frequency is high enough to
avoid capturing LO feedthrough in the trace. How high you must make the Start Frequency to
avoid this will depend on the RBW you have set. The analyzer displays a condition warning
475
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
BW
message if the Start Frequency falls below roughly 2.5 times the current RBW. The warning is “Source Uncal;adj Start Freq|RBW|Points”. When you see this warning, you should increase the
Start Freq, narrow the RBW, or increase the number of Sweep Points. Couplings
Res BW is normally coupled to Span; if Res BW is set to Auto, as the Span decreases, so will the
Res BW. Normally, in Zero Span, this coupling is turned off and Res BW has no Auto setting.
When a CISPR or MIL EMI Standard is in use, the Res BW is coupled to Center Frequency and not
to Span, and this is true even in Zero Span.
Sweep time is coupled to RBW when in a non-zero span. If Sweep Time is set to Auto, then the
sweep time is changed as the RBW changes, to maintain amplitude calibration.
Video bandwidth (VBW) is normally coupled to RBW. If VBW is set to Auto, then the VBW is
changed as the RBW changes, to maintain the ratio set by VBW:3 dB RBW. See the "VBW:3dB
RBW " on page 478"VBW:3dB RBW " on page 478 key description.
Preset
3 MHz
ON
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
1 Hz
Max
8 MHz is the max equivalent –3 dB RBW, which means that the named RBW (the one shown on
the key etc) can actually exceed 8 MHz if using a filter other than –3 dB Gaussian
Default Unit
Hz
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
For backwards compatibility this command obeys both the BANDwidth and BWIDth forms.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
For ESA, the maximum Res BW was 5 MHz; on X-Series it is 8 MHz.
More Information
When the Res BW is manually selected, it may be returned to the coupled state by
pressing the Res BW key until Auto is underlined. This may also be done by pressing
Auto Couple or by performing a Preset.
When Res BW is set to Auto, the bandwidth selected depends on the Filter Type
(see “Filter Type” below).
Only certain discrete resolution bandwidths are available. The available bandwidths
are dependent on the Filter Type or the EMC Standard. If an unavailable bandwidth
is entered with the numeric keypad, the closest available bandwidth is selected.
The zero-span case deserves some mention, because RBW is coupled to Span when
in a swept (non-zero) span and in zero span there is normally no meaningful RBW
coupling in Zero Span. However, when a MIL or CISPR EMC Standard is selected,
there IS a meaningful coupling for RBW in Zero Span – in fact, it is coupled to Center
Frequency, in order to make measurements according to the EMI specifications.
The annotation under RBW in the bottom left of the screen shows the type of filter or
bandwidth that is being used. The following examples illustrate this:
–3 dB (Normal) filter BW: Res BW 300 Hz
–6 dB filter BW: Res BW (–6 dB) 422 Hz
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
476
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
BW
Noise filter BW: Res BW (Noise) 317 Hz
Impulse filter BW: Res BW (Impulse) 444 Hz
CISPR filter BW :Res BW (CISPR) 200 Hz
MIL filter BW:Res BW (MIL) 1 kHz
Flattop filter type:Res BW (Flattop) 300 Hz
Video BW
Lets you change the analyzer post-detection filter (VBW or “video bandwidth”) from
1 Hz to 8 MHz in approximately 10% steps. In addition, a wide-open video filter
bandwidth may be chosen by selecting 50 MHz. The VBW is annotated at the
bottom of the display, in the center.
An * is displayed next to the VBW annotation when certain detector types (Average,
EMI Average, Quasi Peak, and RMS Average) are in use. This is because the VBW
filter is out of the circuit for these detectors and does not affect any traces which use
them. If there is any active trace using one of these detectors the * is displayed. See
"Annotation Examples" on page 478.
Normally, Video BW (Auto) selects automatic coupling of the Video BW filter to the
resolution bandwidth filter using the ratio set by the VBW:3 dB RBW key. To
decouple the video bandwidth, press Video BW until Man is underlined, or simply
enter a new value.
When the Video BW is manually selected, it may be returned to the coupled state by
pressing the Video BW key until Auto is underlined. This may also be done by
pressing Auto Couple or by performing a Preset.
Key Path
BW
Notes
For numeric entries, the analyzer chooses the nearest (arithmetically, on a linear scale, rounding
up) available VBW to the value entered. The 50 MHz VBW is defined to mean “wide open”.
The values shown in this table reflect the conditions after a Mode Preset.
Dependencies
Sometimes the displayed Video BW is not actually used to process the trace data:
– When the Average Detector is selected and Sweep Type is set to Swept, the video
bandwidth filter cannot be used, because it uses the same hardware as the Average
Detector. – When the Quasi-Peak, EMI Average or RMS Average detector is selected the VBW is
implemented by the digital IF as part of the detector
When this is the case, the VBW still acts to change the Sweep Time, if Sweep Time is in Auto,
and still affects the data on other traces for which this is not the case.
Preset
3 MHz
ON
477
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
1 Hz
Max
50 MHz
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
BW
Default Unit
Hz
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
For backwards compatibility this command obeys both the BANDwidth and BWIDth forms.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.02.00
Annotation Examples
All active traces using VBW One or more active traces not using VBW
VBW:3dB RBW
Selects the ratio between the video bandwidth and the equivalent 3 dB resolution
bandwidth to be used for setting VBW when VBW is in Auto.
VBW:3dB RBW (Auto) selects automatic coupling of the VBW:3 dB RBW ratio to
Detector using the rules described below in "Auto Rules" on page 479. To decouple
the ratio, press VBW:3 dB RBW until Man is underlined, or simply enter a new value.
When the VBW:3dB RBW is manually selected, it may be returned to the coupled
state by pressing the VBW:3 dB RBW key until Auto is underlined. This may also be
done by pressing Auto Couple or by performing a Preset.
Key Path
BW
Notes
The values shown in this table reflect the conditions after a Mode Preset.
Couplings
See “Coupling Auto Rules”
Preset
1
ON
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
0.00001
Max
3000000
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
478
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
BW
Auto Rules
The Auto Rules for the VBW:3dB RBW function follow.
First, if Source Mode is set to “Tracking”: Use 1.0
Otherwise, we go through the following list of detector numbers and find the lowest
numbered detector being used on any active traces (traces for which Update is On):
1. Peak
2. Normal
3. Average
4. Sample
5. Negative Peak
6. EMI Average
7. Quasi Peak
8. RMS Average
Use that detector to pick the ratio based on the following criteria:
1. If the detector is Peak and the EMC Standard is set to either CISPR or MIL, use
10.0 (we use wide VBWs to capture peak levels accurately).
2. Otherwise, if the detector is Negative Peak, use 1.0 (in the Negative Peak case,
there are no known significant use models so we use a medium ratio).
3. Otherwise, if the detector is Normal, use 1.0.
4. Otherwise, if the detector is Average, and the span in nonzero, use 0.1. The use
of a small ratio in Average detection is desirable because of its effect on the
sweep time equations. The VBW filter is not actually in-circuit when the average
detector is on. If the detector is Average, and the span is zero, use 10.0, which
gives optimal behavior for Interval Markers in zero span.
5. Otherwise, if the detector is EMI Average, Quasi Peak or RMS Average, use 10.0.
In fact this is a “don’t care” since no VBW is used for these detectors, as noted
under “Dependencies” for the VBW key
6. Otherwise, the detector is simply Peak or Sample. These two detectors can use
the same rules. In these cases, if any active trace is in max hold or min hold, use
10.0, because Max and Min Hold operations will usually be intended to capture
peaks and pits without smoothing from the VBW filter; otherwise, use 1.0 as a
compromise, because you have not set the analyzer in a way that implies that
479
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
BW
you are measuring noise, pulsed-RF or CW signals, and for backward
compatibility with earlier analyzers.
Note that because the above couplings depend on which traces are active, they are
re-examined whenever any trace goes active or inactive, except when this leaves no
traces active. Transitioning to the state where no traces are active should not affect
the couplings; in that way, the annotation will always reflect the state of the last
trace which was active.
Span:3dB RBW
Selects the ratio between span and resolution bandwidth.
Normally, Span:3dB RBW (Auto) selects a Span:3 dB RBW ratio of 106:1. If you
manually enter the ratio, Man will become underlined, which enables you to
manually select ratios more suitable for certain measurements.
When the Span:3dB RBW is manually selected, it may be returned to the coupled
state by pressing the Span:3dB RBW key until Auto is underlined. This may also be
done by pressing Auto Couple or by performing a Preset.
Key Path
BW
Notes
The values shown in this table reflect the conditions after a Mode Preset.
Dependencies
Grayed out when the EMC Standard is set to CISPR or MIL, since RBW is coupled to Center
Frequency rather than Span in this case.
If the grayed out key is pressed, an advisory message is generated.
Preset
106
ON
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
2
Max
10000
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
RBW Control
Selects the type/shape for the resolution bandwidth filters. Historically, the Res BW
filters in Agilent spectrum analyzers were Gaussian filters, specified using the –3 dB
bandwidth of the filter. That is, a 10 MHz Res BW filter was a Gaussian shape with its
–3 dB points 10 MHz apart. In the X-Series you can, using the Filter BW key, specify
bandwidths other than the –3 dB bandwidth (–6 dB, Noise, Impulse) for the width of
the Gaussian filters. Furthermore, the Filter BW menu lets you choose between a
Gaussian and Flat Top filter shape, for varying measurement conditions.
Key Path
BW
Dependencies
The RBW Control key is grayed out if the EMC Standard is set to CISPR or MIL. In this case the
Filter Type is always Gaussian; the Filter BW is chosen as appropriate for the filter and the
standard.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
480
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
BW
Readback line
[<filter type>] or, if Filter Type is Gaussian, [Gaussian,<filter BW>]
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.02.00
Filter Type
Besides the familiar Gaussian filter shape, there are certain special filter types, such
as Flat Top, that are desirable under certain conditions. The Filter Type menu gives
you control over these types.
– See "More Information" on page 481
Key Path
BW, RBW Control
Notes
GAUSsian= Gaussian
FLATtop = Flattop
Dependencies
When EMC Standard is set to CISPR or MIL, the Filter Type is always Gaussian. Any attempt to
set it to Flattop will give an error.
Preset
Auto Couple chooses the preset value
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback line
1-of-N selection
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.02.00
More Information
Gaussian filters
When the Gaussian filter type is chosen, a set of 160 RBW filters are available whose
shape is approximately Gaussian. The actual bandwidths used to realize the XSeries’ Gaussian filters are chosen to come as close as possible to a 24 step per
decade series, within the limitations of the digital IF.
For Gaussian filters, the annotation at the bottom of the screen shows the filter
bandwidth type (unless it is Normal). This will be shown parenthetically between the
words “Res BW” and the value, for example
– Res BW 10.0 Hz (Normal bandwidth)
– Res BW (Impulse) 14.8 Hz (Impulse bandwidth)
Flattop filters
When the Flattop filter type is chosen, a new set of 134 RBW hardware settings are
available. These settings realize filters that are approximately rectangular in shape.
481
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
BW
When this shape is chosen the filter bandwidth options are irrelevant and therefore
unavailable.
The annotation at the bottom of the screen will show that the Flattop shape is being
used, for example:
– Res BW (Flattop) 10 Hz
Gaussian
Selects the Gaussian filter type. There are 160 of these RBWs. They are arranged in
a 24-per-decade sequence from 1 Hz through 3 MHz, plus the 4, 5, 6 and 8 MHz
settings.
Key Path
BW, RBW Control, Filter Type
Example
BAND:SHAP GAUS
Notes
Parameter is GAUSsian. See remote command in section "Filter Type " on page 481.
Readback
Gaussian
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Flattop
Selects the flat top filter type
Key Path
BW, RBW Control, Filter Type
Example
BAND:SHAP FLAT
Readback
Flattop
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Filter BW
When using the Gaussian filters for certain types of applications it can be useful to
be able to specify the filter width using points other than the –3 dB points. The Filter
BW function allows you to pick the filter based on its –3 dB (Normal) bandwidth, its –
6 dB bandwidth, its Noise bandwidth, or its Impulse bandwidth. Note that in all four
cases the –3 dB bandwidth is the same. The filter does not change, but the way you
specify it changes.
– See "More Information" on page 483
Key Path
BW, RBW Control
Notes
DB3 = –3 dB (Normal)
DB6 = –6 dB
IMPulse = Impulse
NOISe = Noise
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
482
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
BW
Dependencies
Grayed out if the Flattop filter type is selected.
When EMC Standard is set to CISPR or MIL, the Filter BW key is greyed out and the readback
annotation on the key is blanked. This is because the Filter BW is chosen as appropriate for the
filter and the standard and not selected by this key.Any attempt to set it otherwise will give an
error.
Preset
Auto Couple chooses the preset value
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback line
1-of-N selection
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.02.00
More Information
The analyzer provides four ways of specifying the bandwidth of a Gaussian filter:
1. The –3 dB bandwidth of the filter
2. The –6 dB bandwidth of the filter
3. The equivalent Noise bandwidth of the filter, which is defined as the bandwidth of
a rectangular filter with the same peak gain which would pass the same power
for noise signals.
4. The equivalent Impulse bandwidth of the filter, which is defined as the bandwidth
of a rectangular filter with the same peak gain which would pass the same power
for impulsive (narrow pulsed) signals.
The figure below shows the relationships of the various filter bandwidths for filters
with the X-Series’ shape factor (shape factor is defined as the ratio of the –60 dB
bandwidth to the – 3 dB bandwidth):
483
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
BW
The Filter Type menu lets you choose the filter bandwidth (–3 dB, –6 dB, Noise or
Impulse) that will be used when specifying the width of the filter. Note that for a
given Gaussian filter, changing the filter bandwidth specification does not affect the
filter width at all but only the means of specifying it. For example, the filter whose –3
dB bandwidth is 1.0 kHz is the same as the filter whose –6 dB bandwidth is 1.41 kHz,
whose Noise bandwidth is 1.06 kHz, and whose Impulse bandwidth is 1.48 kHz. As
you cycle through these various filter bandwidths the filter does not change, but the
way the filter is annotated and the value which appears in the active function area
and on the softkey does.
–3 dB (Normal)
Selects the normal Gaussian-shaped bandwidths that are defined by their –3 dB
bandwidths.
Key Path
BW, RBW Control, Filter BW
Example
BAND:TYPE DB3
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
484
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
BW
Readback
–3 dB
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
–6 dB
Selects the filter bandwidths where the bandwidth is defined at the –6 dB points.
This uses the normal RBW filters, but the value displayed on the key, active function
line and screen annotation changes to reflect the –6 dB bandwidth instead of the –3
dB bandwidth.
Key Path
BW, RBW Control, Filter BW
Example
BAND:TYPE DB6
Readback
–6 dB
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Noise
Selects the noise filter bandwidths. This uses the normal RBW filters, but the value
displayed on the key, active function line and screen annotation changes to reflect
the equivalent noise bandwidth, instead of the –3 dB bandwidth.
Key Path
BW, RBW Control, Filter BW
Example
BAND:TYPE NOIS
Readback
Noise
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Impulse
Selects the impulse bandwidths. This uses the normal RBW filters, but the value
displayed on the key, active function line and screen annotation changes to reflect
the equivalent impulse bandwidth instead of the –3 dB bandwidth.
Key Path
BW, RBW Control, Filter BW
Example
BAND:TYPE IMP
Readback
Impulse
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Wide Bandwidths
The Wide Bandwidths key lets you access a set of Resolution Bandwidths that are
wider than the standard RBW’s. These wide bandwidths only appear in the Swept SA
485
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
BW
measurement. The Wide Bandwidths key is only available when Span is set to Zero
Span, otherwise the key is grayed out.
When Wide Bandwidths are On:
– The minimum RBW is 10 MHz. The Wide Bandwidths selection must be Off
to select RBWs 8 MHz or narrower.
– A channel filter shape is used that is nearly square (shape factor 1.2:1),
rather than Gaussian or Flattop, and the RBW Filter Type control is grayed
out and displays “Channel”.
– The RBW Filter BW control is grayed out and shows “−3 dB”.
– No VBW filter is used, so VBW averaging is not available. Since VBW
averaging is not available, the VBW annotation has the * symbol added
(meaning no video averaging). When no VBW averaging is available, this is
equivalent to having a VBW setting that is greater than RBW.
– Only the Peak detector is available, all other detectors are grayed out
– Gate is not available
– TV Trigger is not available
The instrument independently remembers the RBW settings for when Wide
Bandwidths are set to Off and when Wide bandwidths are set to On. For example, if
an RBW of 300 kHz was set before Wide Bandwidths was turned on, then the
instrument will go back to an RBW of 300 kHz when Wide bandwidths is turned off.
As with the standard set of RBW’s, there is a set of specific RBW’s available when
Wide Bandwidths is set to On. Here is the list:
– Wideband IF’s with information bandwidth less than 160 MHz : 10 MHz, 15
MHz, 20 MHz, 25 MHz, 30 MHz, 40 MHz, 50 MHz, 60 MHz, 70 MHz
– Wideband IF’s with 160 MHz information bandwidth: add 80 MHz, 100 MHz
and 133 MHz RBW’s.
– Wideband IF’s with information bandwidth of 255 MHz or 510 MHz: add 150
MHz, 200 MHz and 212 MHz RBW’s.
Key Path
BW
Dependencies
Only appears if at least one of options B85, B1A, B1X, B1Y, B2X, B5X is installed.
Only appears if option RBE is installed.
Only appears in the Swept SA measurement.
Grayed out unless in Zero Span.
Preset
Off
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
486
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
BW
487
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
A.17.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep)
Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep)
Sets the analyzer for Continuous measurement operation. The single/continuous
state is Meas Global so the setting will affect all measurements. If you are Paused,
pressing Cont does a Resume.
Key Path
Front-panel key
Preset
ON
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
For Spectrum Analysis mode in ESA and PSA, there is no Cont hardkey, instead there is a Sweep
Single/Cont key. In these analyzers, switching the Sweep Single/Cont key from Single to Cont
restarts averages (displayed average count reset to 1), but does not restart Max Hold and Min
Hold.
The X-Series has Single and Cont keys in place of the SweepSingleCont key. In the X-Series, if in
single measurement, the Cont key (and INIT:CONT ON ) switches to continuous measurement, but
never restarts a measurement and never resets a sweep.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
In Swept SA Measurement (Spectrum Analysis Mode):
– The instrument takes repetitive sweeps, averages, measurements, etc., when in
Continuous mode. When the average count reaches the Average/Hold Number
the count stops incrementing, but the analyzer keeps sweeping. See the
Trace/Detector section for the averaging formula used both before and after the
Average/Hold Number is reached. The trigger condition must be met prior to
each sweep. The type of trace processing for multiple sweeps, is set under the
Trace/Detector key, with choices of Trace Average, Max Hold, or Min Hold.
In Other Measurements/Modes:
– With Avg/Hold Num (in the Meas Setup menu) set to Off or set to On with a value
of 1, a sweep is taken after the trigger condition is met; and the instrument
continues to take new sweeps after the current sweep has completed and the
trigger condition is again met. However, with Avg/Hold Num set to On with a
value >1, multiple sweeps (data acquisitions) are taken for the measurement.
The trigger condition must be met prior to each sweep. The sweep is not stopped
when the average count k equals the number N set for Avg/Hold Num is reached,
but the number k stops incrementing. A measurement average usually applies to
all traces, marker results, and numeric results. But sometimes it only applies to
the numeric results.
If the analyzer is in Single measurement, pressing the Cont key does not change k
and does not cause the sweep to be reset; the only action is to put the analyzer into
Continuous measurement operation.
If it is already in continuous sweep:
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
488
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep)
– the INIT:CONT 1 command has no effect
– the INIT:CONT 0 command places the analyzer in Single Sweep, but has no
effect on the current sequence until k = N, at which point the current sequence
stops and the instrument goes into the idle state.
489
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
File
File
Opens a menu that enables you to access various standard and custom Windows
functions. Press any other front-panel key to exit.
Key Path
Front-panel key
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
File Explorer
Opens the standard Windows File Explorer. The File Explorer opensin the My
Documents directory for the current user.
The File Explorer is a separate Windows application, so to return to the analyzer
once you are in the File Explorer, you may either:
Exit the File Explorer by clicking on the red X in the upper right hand corner, with a
mouse
Or use Alt-Tab: press and hold the Alt
key and press and release the Tab key
until the Analyzer logo is showing in the window in the center of the screen, as
shown above, then release the Alt key.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
490
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
File
Key Path
File
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Page Setup
The Page Setup key brings up a Windows Page Setup dialog that allows you to
control aspects of the pages sent to the printer when the PRINT hardkey is pressed.
Key Path
File
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Paper size, the printer paper source, the page orientation and the margins are all
settable. Just like any standard Windows dialog, you may navigate the dialog using
the front-panel keys, or a mouse. There are no SCPI commands for controlling these
parameters.
Also contained in this dialog is a drop-down control that lets you select the Theme to
use when printing. For more on Themes, see information under View/Display,
Display, System Display Settings, Theme. The Theme control has a corresponding
SCPI command.
491
Parameter Name
Print Themes
Parameter Type
Enum
Mode
All
Preset
FCOL; not part of Preset, but is reset by Restore Misc Defaults or Restore System Defaults All
and survives subsequent running of the modes.
State Saved
No
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
File
Print
This front-panel key is equivalent to performing a File, Print, OK. It immediately
performs the currently configured Print to the Default printer.
Key Path
Front-panel key
Restore Down
This key allows you to Restore Down the Instrument Application and reverses the
action taken by Maximize. This key is only visible when the application has been
maximized, and after the Restore Down action has been completed this key is
replaced by the Maximize key.
Key Path
File
Mode
All
Notes
No equivalent remote command for this key.
State Saved
No
Initial S/W Revision
A.05.01
Minimize
The Minimize key causes the analyzer display to disappear down into the task bar,
allowing you to see the Windows Desktop. You can use Alt-Tab ( press and hold the
Alt
key and press and release the Tab key) to restore the analyzer display.
Key Path
File
Mode
All
Notes
No equivalent remote command for this key.
State Saved
No
Initial S/W Revision
A.05.01
Exit
This key, when pressed, will exit the Instrument Application. A dialog box is used to
confirm that you intended to exit the application:
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
492
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
File
493
Key Path
File
Mode
All
Notes
The Instrument Application will close. No further SCPI commands can be sent. Use with caution!
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
FREQ Channel
FREQ Channel
Accesses a menu of keys that allow you to control the Frequency and Channel
parameters of the instrument.
Some features in the Frequency menu are the same for all measurements – they do
not change as you change measurements. Settings like these are called “Meas
Global” and are unaffected by Meas Preset. For example, the Center Freq setting is
the same for all measurements - it does not change as you change measurements. Key Path
Front-panel key
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Zone Center
Zone Center appears as the top key in the Frequency menu in the Trace Zoom View
of the Spectrum Analyzer & RLC Modes.
Zone Center allows you to change the frequency of the zone without changing the
zone span. As the zone center is changed, the center frequency of the lower window
is changed. Note that the lower window is not updated to reflect the change unless
it is selected as the active window.
The center frequency for the lower window is not limited by the selected start and
stop frequencies in the upper window. However, if the frequency span of the lower
window is at all outside of the span for the upper window, an orange arrow pointing
left or right will be displayed at the left or right edge of the top window.
Key Path
FREQ Channel
Notes
Min and Max values depend on the Hardware Options (5xx)
Dependencies
Only appears when the Zone Span View of the Swept SA measurement is selected. If the SCPI
command is sent in other Views, an error is generated.
Couplings
Center Frequency of lower window changes so that it is always the same as Zone Center, and
vice-versa
Affected by Freq Offset exactly the same as is Center Frequency.
Preset
On entry to Zone Span, the Zone Center frequency is the same as the analyzer Center Frequency.
So if you do a Mode Preset and then immediately go into Zone Span, Zone Center matches the
Preset values listed in the table under the Center Freq key description.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
Hardware dependent; Zone Span dependent. Zone Center cannot go so low as to force Zone Left
to be <0.
Max
The maximum Zone Center frequency is the same as the maximum analyzer Center Frequency,
which is basically the instrument maximum frequency minus 5 Hz. See the table under the key
description for "Center Freq" on page 496.
Default Unit
Hz
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
494
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
FREQ Channel
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Non-overlapped
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Zoom Center
Zoom Center appears as the top key in the Frequency menu in the Trace Zoom View
of the Spectrum Analyzer Mode.
Zoom Center allows you to change the frequency of the zoom region, and hence of
the lower window, without changing the Zoom Span.
The Zoom Center value is displayed in the lower left corner of the zoom window
(below the graticule) when the frequency entry mode is Center/Span (pressing
Center Freq or Span sets the frequency entry mode to Center/Span). When the
frequency entry mode is Start/Stop, Zoom Start is displayed in this lower left
annotation position (pressing Start Freq or Stop Freq sets the frequency entry mode
to Start/Stop).
Key Path
FREQ Channel
Dependencies
Only appears in the Trace Zoom View of the Swept SA measurement. Couplings
The center frequency for the lower window is limited by the start and stop frequencies in the
upper window. You cannot move the zoom region out of the upper window, nor does changing the
Zoom Center frequency ever change the Zoom Span. When Zoom Center increases or decreases
to a value that causes the zoom region to touch an edge of the top window, the Zoom Center is
clipped at that value. If the analyzer Start and/or Stop frequencies change such that the Zoom
Region is no longer between them, the Zoom Region is moved to the far left or right of the top
window as appropriate.
Affected by Freq Offset exactly the same as is Center Frequency.
Preset
13.255 GHz
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
Start Frequency of top window
Max
The maximum Zoom Center frequency is the same as the maximum analyzer Center Frequency,
which is basically the instrument maximum frequency – 5 Hz. See the table under the Center
Freq key description.
Default Unit
Hz
Initial S/W Revision
A.07.01
Preset
On entry to Trace Zoom, the Zoom Center frequency is the same as the analyzer Center
Frequency. So if you do a Mode Preset and then immediately go into Trace Zoom, Zoom Center
matches the Preset values listed in the table under the Center Freq key description.
Auto Tune
Auto Tune appears as the top key in the Frequency menu in the Normal and
Spectrogram views of the Spectrum Analyzer Mode.
Auto Tune is an immediate action key. When it is pressed, it causes the analyzer to
change Center Frequency to the strongest signal in the tunable span of the
495
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
FREQ Channel
analyzer, excluding the LO. It is designed to quickly get you to the most likely signal
(s) of interest, with no signal analysis knowledge required. As such, there are no
configurable parameters for this feature. There are only pre-selected values that
work in most real world situations.
Auto Tune performs a Preset as part of its function, so it always returns you to the
Normal View and a preset state, although it does leave the AC/DC coupling and
Single/Cont state unaffected.
You may see a slight pause before the signal of interest is presented at midscreen.
Key Path
FREQ Channel
Dependencies
Auto Tune is not available (grayed out) when Source Mode=Tracking. Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Center Freq
Sets the frequency that corresponds to the horizontal center of the graticule (when
frequency Scale Type is set to linear). While adjusting the Center Frequency the
Span is held constant, which means that both Start Frequency and Stop Frequency
will change.
Pressing Center Freq also sets the frequency entry mode to Center/Span. In
Center/Span mode, the center frequency and span values are displayed below the
graticule, and the default active function in the Frequency menu is Center Freq.
The center frequency setting is the same for all measurements within a mode, that
is, it is Meas Global. Some modes are also able to share a Mode Global center
frequency value. If this is the case, the Mode will have a Global Settings key in its
Mode Setup menu.
The Center Freq function sets (and queries) the Center Frequency for the currently
selected input. If your analyzer has multiple inputs, and you select another input, the
Center Freq changes to the value for that input. SCPI commands are available to
directly set the Center Freq for a specific input.
Center Freq is remembered as you go from input to input. Thus you can set a Center
Freq of 10 GHz with the RF Input selected, change to BBIQ and set a Center Freq of
20 MHz, then switch to External Mixing and set a Center Freq of 60 GHz, and when
you go back to the RF Input the Center Freq will go back to 10 GHz; back to BBIQ and
it is 20 MHz; back to External Mixing and it is 60 GHz. – See "Center Frequency Presets" on page 497
Key Path
FREQ Channel
Scope
Meas Global
Notes
This command sets either the RF or I/Q Center Frequency depending on the selected input.
For RF input it is equivalent to FREQ:RF:CENT
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
496
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
FREQ Channel
For I/Q input it is equivalent to FREQ:IQ:CENT
Preset and Max values are dependent on Hardware Options (5xx)
If no terminator (e.g. MHz) is sent the terminator Hz is used. If a terminator with unit other than
Frequency is used, an invalid suffix error message is generated.
Dependencies
The Center Frequency can be limited by Start or Stop Freq limits, if the Span is so large that
Start or Stop reach their limit. Couplings
When operating in “swept span”, any value of the Center Frequency or Span that is within the
frequency range of the analyzer is allowed when the value is being set through the front panel
numeric key pad or the SCPI command. The other parameter is forced to a different value if
needed, to keep the Start and the Stop Frequencies within the analyzer’s frequency range
Preset
Depends on instrument maximum frequency, mode, measurement, and selected input.
See "Center Frequency Presets" on page 497 and "Center Freq" on page 496 and Ext Mix Center
Freq and "Center Freq" on page 496.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
Depends on instrument maximum frequency, mode, measurement, and selected input..
See "Center Frequency Presets" on page 497 and "Center Freq" on page 496 and "Center Freq"
on page 496.
Max
Depends on instrument maximum frequency, mode, measurement, and selected input..
See "Center Frequency Presets" on page 497 and "Center Freq" on page 496 and "Center Freq"
on page 496.
Default Unit
Hz
Status Bits/OPC
Dependencies
Non-overlapped
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Center Frequency Presets
The following table provides the Center Frequency Presets for the Spectrum
Analyzer mode, and the Max Freq, for the various frequency options: Freq Option
CF
Stop Freq
after Mode
Preset
Max Freq
after Mode Preset
503 (all but N9000A)
1.805 GHz
3.6 GHz
3.7 GHz
503 (N9000A)
1.505 GHz
3.0 GHz
3.08 GHz
507 (all but N9000A)
3.505 GHz
7.0 GHz
7.1 GHz
507 (N9000A)
3.755 GHz
7.5 GHz
7.58 GHz
508
1.805 GHz
3.6 GHz
8.5 GHz
508 (N9038A)
4.205 GHz
8.4 GHz
8.5 GHz
513
6.805 GHz
13.6 GHz
13.8 GHz
526 (all but N9000A and
N9038A)
13.255 GHz
26.5 GHz
27.0 GHz
(can't tune
above)
(all but N9038A)
497
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
FREQ Channel
526 (N9000A)
13.255 GHz
26.5 GHz
26.55 GHz
526 (N9038A)
1.805 GHz
3.6 GHz
27.0 GHz
532
16.005 GHz
32.0 GHz
32.5 GHz
543
21.505 GHz
43.0 GHz
TBD
544
22.005 GHz
44.0 GHz
44.5 GHz
550
25.005 GHz
50.0 GHz
51 GHz
Input 2:
Model
CF
Stop Freq
after
Mode
Preset
Max Freq
after Mode
Preset
N9000A opt
C75
0.7505GHz
1.5 GHz
1.58 GHz
N9038A
505 MHz
1 GHz
1.000025
GHz
(can't tune
above)
Tracking Generator Frequency Limits (N9000A only):
Tracking
Generator
Option
Min Freq (clips to this freq when
turn TG on and can’t tune below
while TG on)
If above this Freq, Stop Freq
clipped to this Freq when TG
turned on
Max Freq
(can't tune
above) while
TG on
T03
9 kHz
3.0 GHz
3.08 GHz
T06
9 kHz
6.0 GHz
6.05 GHz
The following table shows the Center Frequency Presets for modes other than
Spectrum Analyzer:
Mode
CF Preset for RF
WCDMA
1 GHz
WIMAXOFDMA,
1 GHz
BASIC
1 GHz
ADEMOD
1 GHz
VSA
1 GHz
TDSCDMA
1 GHz
PNOISE
1 GHz
LTE
1 GHz
LTETDD
1 GHz
MSR
1 GHz
GSM
935.2 MHz
NFIGURE
1.505 GHz
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
498
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
FREQ Channel
Start Freq
Sets the frequency at the left side of the graticule. While adjusting the start
frequency, the stop frequency is held constant, which means that both the center
frequency and span will change.
Start Freq also sets the frequency entry mode to Start or Stop. In Start or Stop
mode, the start frequency and stop frequency values are displayed below the
graticule, and the default active function in the Frequency menu is Start Freq.
Key Path
FREQ Channel
Notes
Max values depends on Hardware Options (5xx)
Dependencies
By direct entry:
You cannot set Start frequency > Stop frequency. You cannot set Start frequency = Stop
frequency. You cannot select zero span by setting Start = Stop. You cannot set Start Frequency to
a value that would create a span of less than 10 Hz. If you try to do any of these, Stop Frequency
will change to maintain a minimum value of 10 Hz for the difference between Start and Stop.
With the knob or step keys:
Cannot increment Start Freq to a value greater than Stop Freq – 10 Hz. If already in zero span,
cannot increment at all, and the first decrement will be forced to at least 10 Hz.
The Start Frequency can be limited by Span limits, if the Stop Frequency is below its preset value.
If the electronic/soft attenuator is enabled, any attempt to set the Start Frequency such that the
Stop Frequency would be >3.6 GHz fails and results in an advisory message. If the equivalent SCPI
command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict” warning. If Source Mode is set to Tracking, and the Max or Min Start Freq is therefore limited by the limits
of the source, a warning message is generated, “Data out of range;clipped to source max/min” if
these limits are exceeded. Note that for an external source, these limits can be affected by the
settings of Source Numerator, Source Denominator and Power Sweep.
Couplings
In the Spectrum Analyzer, the four parameters Center Freq, Start Freq, Stop Freq and Span are
interdependent, as changing one necessarily affects one or more of the others. The couplings
between Center Freq and Span are detailed under the key descriptions for those keys. These
couplings also affect Start Freq and Stop Freq.
You cannot set Start frequency = Stop frequency. You cannot select zero span by setting Start =
Stop. The instrument will alter the value of the last setting to maintain a minimum value of 10 Hz
for the difference between Start and Stop.
Preset
Start Freq does not preset. On Mode Preset, Span & CF preset, and Start Freq is derived. On a
Meas Preset only Span presets, CF does not, so Start Freq will vary depending on CF.
When a Mode Preset is performed while in External Mixing, the Start frequency of the current
Mode is set to the nominal Min Freq of the lowest harmonic range in the Harmonic Table for the
current mixer setup. If the current measurement has a limited Span available to it, and cannot achieve the Span
shown in the table (Span=Stop Freq – Start Freq), the analyzer uses the maximum Span the
measurement allows, and sets the Center Freq to the midpoint of the Start and Stop Freq values
in the Harmonic Table. Thus, in this case, the Start Freq will preset to a frequency below the
preset Center Freq by ½ of the maximum Span.
When Restore Input/Output Defaults is performed, the mixer presets to the 11970A, whose Start
frequency is 26.5 GHz.
Therefore, after a Restore Input/Output Defaults, if you go into External Mixing and do a Mode
499
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
FREQ Channel
Preset while in the Spectrum Analyzer Mode, the resulting Start Freq is 26.5 GHz.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
–80 MHz, unless Source Mode is set to Tracking, in which case it is limited by the minimum
frequency of the Source
If the knob or step keys are being used, depends on the value of the other three interdependent
parameters
While in External Mixing, the minimum Start Freq you can set is determined by the external
mixing parameters. It will be close to the minimum LO frequency (3.8 GHz if undoubled, 8.6 GHz if
doubled) times the harmonic number, for the lowest harmonic range in the Harmonic Table for the
current mixer setup. It can be queried with the SCPI command :FREQ:STARt? MIN.
Max
Depends on the instrument maximum frequency – 10 Hz. Note that, if the Source Mode is set to
Tracking, the effective instrument maximum frequency may be limited by the source maximum
frequency.
If the knob or step keys are being used, it depends on the value of the other three interdependent
parameters.
While in External Mixing, the maximum Start Freq you can set is determined by the external
mixing parameters. It will be close to the maximum LO frequency (7 GHz if undoubled, 14 GHz if
doubled) times the harmonic number, for the highest harmonic range in the Harmonic Table for
the current mixer setup. It can be queried with the SCPI command :FREQ:STARt? MAX.
Default Unit
Hz
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Non-overlapped
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.03.00
Stop Freq
Sets the frequency at the right side of the graticule. While adjusting the stop
Frequency, the start frequency is held constant, which means that both the center
frequency and span will change.
Stop Freq also sets the frequency entry mode to Start or Stop. In Start or Stop
mode, the start frequency and stop frequency values are displayed below the
graticule, and the default active function in the Frequency menu is Start Freq.
Key Path
FREQ Channel
Notes
Preset and Max values are dependent on Hardware Options (5xx)
Dependencies
By direct entry:
You cannot set the Stop frequency < Start frequency. You cannot set Start frequency = Stop
frequency. You cannot select zero span by setting Start = Stop. You cannot set Stop Frequency to
a value that would create a span of less than 10 Hz. If you try to do any of these, Start Frequency
will change to maintain a minimum value of 10 Hz for the difference between Start and Stop.
With the knob or step keys:
Cannot decrement Stop Freq to a value less than Start Freq + 10 Hz. If already in zero span,
cannot decrement at all, and the first increment will be forced to at least 10 Hz.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
500
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
FREQ Channel
The Stop Frequency can be limited by Span limits, if the Start Frequency is above its preset
value.
If the electronic/soft attenuator is enabled, any attempt to set the Stop Frequency >3.6 GHz fails
and results in an advisory message. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is
generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict” warning. If Source Mode is set to Tracking, and the Max or Min Stop Freq is therefore limited by the limits
of the source, a warning message is generated, “Data out of range;clipped to source max/min” if
these limits are exceeded. Note that for an external source, these limits can be affected by the
settings of Source Numerator, Source Denominator and Power Sweep.
Couplings
In the Spectrum Analyzer, the four parameters Center Freq, Start Freq, Stop Freq and Span are
interdependent, as changing one necessarily affects one or more of the others. The couplings
between Center Freq and Span are detailed under the key descriptions for those keys. These
couplings also affect Start Freq and Stop Freq.
You cannot set Start frequency = Stop frequency. You cannot select zero span by setting Start =
Stop. The instrument will alter the value of the last setting to maintain a minimum value of 10 Hz
for the difference between Start and Stop.
Preset
On Mode Preset, Span & CF preset, and Stop Freq is derived. See "Center Frequency Presets" on
page 497 for a table which shows the Stop Freq after Preset for various model and option
numbers).
On a Meas Preset only Span presets, CF does not, so Stop Freq will vary depending on CF.
When a Mode Preset is performed while in External Mixing, the Stop frequency of the current
Mode is set to the nominal Max Freq of the highest harmonic range in the Harmonic Table for the
current mixer setup.
If the current measurement has a limited Span available to it, and cannot achieve the Span
shown in the table (Span=Stop Freq – Start Freq), the analyzer uses the maximum Span the
measurement allows, and sets the Center Freq to the midpoint of the Start and Stop Freq values
in the Harmonic Table. Thus, in this case, the Stop Freq will preset to a frequency above the
preset Center Freq by ½ of the maximum Span.
When Restore Input/Output Defaults is performed, the mixer presets to the 11970A, whose Stop
frequency is 40 GHz.
Therefore, after a Restore Input/Output Defaults, if you go into External Mixing and do a Mode
Preset while in the Spectrum Analyzer Mode, the resulting Stop Freq is 40 GHz.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
–79.999999999 MHz, unless Source Mode is set to Tracking, in which case it is limited by the
minimum frequency of the Source
If the knob or step keys are being used, depends on the value of the other three interdependent
parameters
While in External Mixing, the minimum Stop Freq you can set is determined by the external
mixing parameters. It will be close to the minimum LO frequency (3.8 GHz if undoubled, 8.6 GHz if
doubled) times the harmonic number, for the lowest harmonic range in the Harmonic Table for
the current mixer setup.
Max
Depends on instrument maximum frequency. Note that, if the Source Mode is set to Tracking, the
effective instrument maximum frequency may be limited by the source maximum frequency.
If the knob or step keys are being used, depends on the value of the other three interdependent
parameters.
While in External Mixing, the maximum Stop Freq you can set is determined by the external
501
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
FREQ Channel
mixing parameters. It will be close to the maximum LO frequency (7 GHz if undoubled, 14 GHz if
doubled) times the harmonic number, for the highest harmonic range in the Harmonic Table for
the current mixer setup.
Default Unit
Hz
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Non-overlapped
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.03.00
CF Step
Changes the step size for the center frequency and start and stop frequency
functions. Once a step size has been selected and the center frequency function is
active, the step keys (and the UP|DOWN parameters for Center Frequency from
remote commands) change the center frequency by the step-size value. The step
size function is useful for finding harmonics and sidebands beyond the current
frequency span of the analyzer.
Note that the start and stop frequencies also step by the CF Step value. Key Path
FREQ Channel
Notes
Preset and Max values are depending on Hardware Options (503, 507, 508, 513, 526)
Notes
Preset and Max values are dependent on Hardware Options (5xx)
Dependencies
Freq Offset is not available in External Mixing. In this case the Freq Offset key is grayed out and
shows a value of zero. It will once again be available, and show the previously set value, when you
return to the RF Input.
Dependencies
Span, RBW, Center frequency
If the electronic/soft attenuator is enabled, any attempt to change the value of the center
frequency >3.6 GHz by pressing the Up-arrow key, fails and results in an advisory message. If the
equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings
conflict” warning. Couplings
When auto-coupled in a non-zero span, the center frequency step size is set to 10% of the span.
When auto-coupled in zero span, the center frequency step size is set to the equivalent –3 dB
RBW value.
Preset
Auto
ADEMOD: 1 MHz
ON
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
– (the maximum frequency of the instrument). That is, 27 GHz max freq instrument has a CF step
range of +/– 27 GHz. Note that this is the maximum frequency given the current settings of the
instrument, so in External Mixing, for example, it is the maximum frequency of the current mixer
band.
Max
The maximum frequency of the instrument. That is, 27 GHz max freq instrument has a CF step
range of +/– 27 GHz. Note that this is the maximum frequency given the current settings of the
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
502
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
FREQ Channel
instrument, so in External Mixing, for example, it is the maximum frequency of the current mixer
band.
Default Unit
Hz
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
non-overlapped
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.03.00
Freq Offset
Enables you to set a frequency offset value to account for frequency conversions
outside of the analyzer. This value is added to the display readout of the marker
frequency, center frequency, start frequency, stop frequency, and all other absolute
frequency settings in the analyzer including frequency count. When a frequency
offset is entered, the value appears below the center of the graticule. To eliminate
an offset, perform a Mode Preset or set the frequency offset to 0 Hz.
See "More Information" on page 504.
Key Path
FREQ Channel
Scope
Meas Global
Notes
Preset and Max values are dependent on Hardware Options (503, 507, 508, 513, 526)
Dependencies
Freq Offset is not available in External Mixing. In this case the Freq Offset key is grayed out and
shows a value of zero. However, the value of CF Offset that was set for the RF Input is retained
and restored when the user switches back to the RF Input. Preset
See the table in See "Center Frequency Presets" on page 497
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
–500 GHz
Max
500 GHz
Default Unit
Hz
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Non-overlapped
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
1. In pre-X-Series instruments, Frequency Offset could not be adjusted by the knob or step keys.
That is no longer the case.
2. Some previous spectrum analyzers did not adjust frequency counter results for the Frequency
Offset. The X-Series does adjust the frequency counter for the offset.
503
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.04.00, A.08.50
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
FREQ Channel
More Information
This command does not affect any bandwidths or the settings of relative frequency
parameters such as delta markers or span. It does not affect the current hardware
settings of the analyzer, but only the displayed frequency values. Entering an offset
does not affect the trace position or display, just the value of the start and stop
frequency and the values represented by the trace data. The frequency values of
exported trace data, queried trace data, markers, trace data used in calculations
such as N dB points, trace math, etc., are all affected by Freq Offset. Changing the
offset, even on a trace that is not updating will immediately change all of the above,
without taking new data.
If a trace is exported with a nonzero Freq Offset, the exported data will contain the
trace data with the offset applied. Therefore, if that trace were to be imported back
into the analyzer, you would want Freq Offset to be 0, or the offset would be applied
again to data which is already offset. No such care need be taken when saving a
State+Trace file because the data and state are saved together.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
504
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Input/Output
The Input/Output features are common across multiple Modes and Measurements.
These common features are described in this section. See the Measurement
description for information on features that are unique.
The Input/Output key accesses the keys that control the Input/Output parameters of
the instrument. In general, these are functions associated with external connections
to the analyzer, either to the inputs or the outputs. Since these connections tend to
be fairly stable within a given setup, in general, the input/output settings do not
change when you Preset the analyzer.
Other functions related to the input/output connections, but which tend to change
on a measurement by measurement basis, can be found under the Trigger and
AMPTD Y Scale keys. In addition, some of the digital I/O bus configurations can be
found under the System key.
The functions in the Input/Output menu are "global" (common) to all Modes
(applications). But individual Input/Output functions only appear in a Mode if they
apply to that Mode. Functions that apply to a Mode but not to all measurements in
the Mode may be grayed-out in some measurements.
"Input/Output variables - Preset behavior" on page 506
The Input Port selection is the first menu under the Input/Output key:
Key Path
Front-panel key
Couplings
The [:SENSe]:FEED RF command turns the calibrator OFF
Preset
This setting is unaffected by a Preset or power cycle. It survives a Mode Preset and mode
changes.
It is set to RF on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All"
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
Most of the settings in the X-Series Input/Output system, including External Gain, Amplitude
Corrections settings and data, etc., are shared by all modes and are not changed by a mode
switch. Furthermore, most variables in the Input/Output system key are not affected by Mode
Preset. Both of these behaviors represent a departure from legacy behavior. In the X-Series, Input/Output settings are reset by using the "Restore Input/Output Defaults"
function. They can also be reset to their default values through the System->Restore System
Defaults-> In/Out Config key or through the System ->Restore System Defaults -> All key (and
corresponding SCPI).
While this matches most use cases better, it does create some code compatibility issues. For
example, Amplitude Corrections are no longer turned off by a Mode Preset, but instead by using
the "Restore Input/Output Defaults" key/SCPI.
Although Input/Output settings are not part of each Mode’s State, they are saved in the Save
State files, so that all of the instrument settings can be recalled with Recall State, as in legacy
instruments.
Initial S/W Revision
505
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Input/Output variables - Preset behavior
Virtually all the input/output settings are not a part of mode preset. They can be set
to their default value by one of the three ways:
– by using the Restore Input/Output Defaults key on the first page of the
input/output menu,
– by using the System->Restore System Defaults->Input/Output Settings or,
– by using the System -> Restore System Defaults->All. Also, they survive a Preset
and a Power cycle.
A very few of the Input/Output settings do respond to a Mode Preset; for example, if
the Calibrator is on it turns off on a Preset, and if DC coupling is in effect it switches
to AC on a Preset. These exceptions are made in the interest of reliability and
usability, which overrides the need for absolute consistency. Exceptions are noted in
the SCPI table for the excepted functions.
RF Input
Selects the front-panel RF input port to be the analyzer signal input. If RF is already
selected, pressing this key accesses the RF input setup functions.
Key Path
Input/Output
Example
[:SENSe]:FEED RF
Readback
The RF input port, RF coupling, and current input impedance settings appear on this key as:
"XX, YY, ZZ" where
– XX is RF, RF2, RFIO1, RFIO2, depending on what input is selected (only appears on analyzers
with multiple RF inputs)
– YY is AC or DC
– ZZ is 50Ω or 75Ω
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Input Z Correction
Sets the input impedance for unit conversions. This affects the results when the yaxis unit is voltage or current units (dBmV, dBµV, dBµA, V, A), but not when it is
power units (dBm, W). The impedance you select is for computational purposes only,
since the actual impedance is set by internal hardware to 50 ohms. Setting the
computational input impedance to 75 ohms is useful when using a 75 ohm to 50 ohm
adapter to measure a 75 ohm device on an analyzer with a 50 ohm input impedance.
There are a variety ways to make 50 to 75 ohm transitions, such as impedance
transformers or minimum loss pads. The choice of the solution that is best for your
measurement situation requires balancing the amount of loss that you can tolerate
with the amount of measurement frequency range that you need. If you are using
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
506
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
one of these pads/adaptors with the Input Z Corr function, you might also want to
use the Ext Gain key. This function is used to set a correction value to compensate
for the gain (loss) through your pad. This correction factor is applied to the displayed
measurement values.
Key Path
Input/Output, RF Input
Couplings
In the N9000A option C75, when RF Input 2 is selected, the Input Z Correction will automatically
change to 75 ohms. The user may then change it to whatever is desired. When the main RF Input
is selected, the Input Z Correction will automatically change to 50 ohms. The user may then
change it to whatever is desired. Preset
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to 50 ohms on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or
"Restore System Defaults->All"
Some instruments/options may have 75 ohms available.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback
50 Ω or 75 Ω. Current setting reads back to the RF key.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
RF Coupling
Specifies alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC) coupling at the analyzer RF
input port. Selecting AC coupling switches in a blocking capacitor that blocks any DC
voltage present at the analyzer input. This decreases the input frequency range of
the analyzer, but prevents damage to the input circuitry of the analyzer if there is a
DC voltage present at the RF input.
In AC coupling mode, you can view signals below the corner frequency of the DC
block, but below a certain frequency the amplitude accuracy is not specified. The
frequency below which specifications do not apply is:
X-Series Model
Lowest Freq for meeting
specs when AC coupled
Lowest Freq for meeting
specs when DC coupled
N9000A–503/507
100 kHz
n/a
N9000A-C75 Input 2
1 MHz
n/a
N9000A–513/526
10 MHz
9 kHz
N9010A
10 MHz
9 kHz
N9020A
10 MHz
20 Hz
N9030A
10 MHz
3 Hz
Some amplitude specifications apply only when coupling is set to DC. Refer to the
appropriate amplitude specifications and characteristics for your analyzer.
When operating in DC coupled mode, ensure protection of the analyzer input
circuitry by limiting the DC part of the input level to within 200 mV of 0 Vdc. In AC or
DC coupling, limit the input RF power to +30 dBm (1 Watt).
507
Key Path
Input/Output, RF Input
Remote Command
:INPut:COUPling AC|DC|RLC
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
:INPut:COUPling?
Example
INP:COUP DC
Dependencies
This key does not appear in models that are always AC coupled. When the SCPI command to set
DC coupling is sent to these models, it results in the error “Illegal parameter value; This model is
always AC coupled” In these models, the SCPI query INP:COUP? always returns AC.
This key does not appear in models that are always DC coupled.When the SCPI command to set
AC coupling is sent to these models, it results in the error “Illegal parameter value; This
instrument is always DC coupled” In these models, the SCPI query INP:COUP? always returns DC.
Preset
AC on models that support AC coupling
On models that are always DC coupled, such as millimeter wave models (frequency ranges 30
GHz and above), the preset is DC.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.03.00
I/Q
This feature is not available unless the "Baseband I/Q (Option BBA)" on page 508 is
installed.
Selects the front-panel I/Q input ports to be the analyzer signal input. If I/Q is
already selected, pressing this key accesses the I/Q setup menu.
Key Path
Input/Output
Mode
BASIC, CDMA2K, EDGEGSM, TDSCMDA, VSA89601, WIMAXOFDMA
Example
FEED AIQ
Notes
Not all measurements support the use of the I/Q signal input. When I/Q is selected in a
measurement that does not support it, the “No Result; Meas invalid with I/Q inputs” error
condition message appears. This is error 135
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Baseband I/Q (Option BBA)
The Baseband I/Q functionality is a hardware option. It is option BBA. If the option is
not installed, none of the I/Q functionality is enabled.
The Baseband I/Q has four input ports and one output port. The input ports are I, Ibar, Q, and Q-bar. The I and I-bar together compose the I channel and the Q and Qbar together compose the Q channel. Each channel has two modes of operation,
Single-Ended (also called "unbalanced") and Differential Input (also called
"balanced"). When in Single-Ended operation, only the main port (I or Q) is used and
the complementary port (I-bar or Q-bar) is ignored. When in Differential Input mode,
both main and complementary ports are used.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
508
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
The input settings (range, attenuation, skew, impedance, external gain) apply to the
channels, not the individual ports.
The system supports a variety of 1 MΩ input passive probes as well as the Keysight
113x Series active differential probes using the Infinimax probe interface. The Keysight 113x Series active probes can be used for both single ended and
differential measurements. In either case a single connection is made for each
channel (on either the I or Q input). The input is automatically configured to 50 Ω
single ended and the probe power is supplied through the Infinimax interface. The
probe can be configured for a variety of input coupling and low frequency rejection
modes. In addition, a wide range of offset voltages and probe attenuation
accessories are supported at the probe interface. The active probe has the
advantage that it does not significantly load the circuit under test, even with unity
gain probing. With passive 1 MΩ probes, the probe will introduce a capacitive load on the circuit,
unless higher attenuation is used at the probe interface. Higher attenuation reduces
the signal level and degrades the signal-to-noise-ratio of the measurement. Passive
probes are available with a variety of attenuation values for a moderate cost. Most
Keysight passive probes can be automatically identified by the system, setting the
input impedance setting required as well as the nominal attenuation. For single
ended measurements a single probe is used for each channel. Other passive probes
can be used, with the attenuation and impedance settings configured manually.
For full differential measurements, the system supports probes on each of the four
inputs. The attenuation of the probes should be the same for good common mode
rejection and channel match.
Both active and passive probes in single ended and differential configurations can be
calibrated. This calibration uses the Cal Out BNC connection and a probe
connection accessory. The calibration achieves excellent absolute gain flatness in a
probed measurement. It matches both the gain and frequency response of the I and
Q channels as well as any delay skew, resulting in high accuracy in derived
measurements such as Error Vector Magnitude (EVM).
When a probe is connected a status message will be displayed. The message will
indicate if calibration data is available or not. Calibration data is saved for each type
of probe (including "none") for each port and will be reapplied whenever that type of
probe is re-connected to the same port. For probes with EEPROM identification, the
calibration data will be stored based on the unique probe identifier and will reapply
data for that particular probe if it is available. The data will not follow a probe from
one port to another. For probes without EEPROM identification, the instrument
cannot distinguish between different probes of the same type and it will use the data
from the last calibration for that probe type on that port.
When in differential mode, both the main and complementary probes are expected
to be of the same type.
In some situations, the I and Q channels should be configured identically. In other
situations it is convenient to control them independently. Some menus have a "Q
Same as I" setting that will cause the Q channel configuration to mirror the I channel
509
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
configuration, avoiding the overhead of double data entry when the channels should
be the same.
The output port is for calibrating the I/Q input ports, although it can also be manually
controlled.
There are two types of calibrations available: cable calibration and probe calibration.
The cable calibration will guide the user through connecting each input port in turn.
All ports must be calibrated together. The probe calibration is done for a specific
channel (I or Q). If in Single-Ended mode, only the main port is calibrated. When in
Differential Input mode, the user is guided through calibrating both main and
complementary ports.
The front panel I/Q port LEDs indicate the current state of that port. On (green)
indicates it is active, and off (dark) indicates it is not in use. For example, the Cal Out
port LED is on if and only if there is signal coming out of that port.
The input is a context and some parameters have separate values for each context.
The SCPI for these parameters has an optional "[:RF|IQ]" node. If the specific context
is omitted, the command acts on the current input context's value. Here are the
parameters that are input context sensitive:
– Center Frequency
– Trigger Source
It is important to distinguish between the I and Q input ports and the displayed I and
Q data values. The I and Q input ports feed into a digital receiver that does digital
tuning and filtering. The I and Q data seen by the user (either on the display or
through SCPI) corresponds to the real ("I") and the imaginary ("Q") output from the
digital receiver. When the input path is I+jQ or I Only and the center frequency is 0 Hz
the I input ends up in as the real output from the receiver and appears as "I" data.
Likewise, when the input path is I+jQ and the center frequency is 0 Hz, the Q input
ends up as the imaginary output from the receiver and appears as "Q" data.
However, when the input path is Q Only, the Q input is sent to the receiver as Q+j0,
so the receiver output has the Q input coming out on the real output, and so in Q
Only, the signal from the Q input port appears as the "I" data. Another situation
where the I and Q data do not necessarily correspond directly to the I and Q inputs is
when the center frequency is non-zero. The digital processing involved in the tuning
is a complex operation. This will result in I Only data appearing as both "I" and "Q"
data, the same as that signal would appear if seen through the RF input port.
Baseband I/Q Remote Language Compatibility
For the Keysight E4406A VSA Series Transmitter Tester, Option B7C provided
baseband I/Q inputs. Code compatibility has been provided to allow many of the
commands for option B7C to function properly with the X-Series. The X-Series has
hardware differences and additional capabilities (e.g., E4406A does not have
independent settings of I & Q nor does it provide for probe calibrations) which make
100% compatibility impossible.
The following commands are supported:
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
510
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
– :CALibration:IQ:FLATness
– :INPut:IMPedance:IQ U50|B50|U1M|B1M
– :INPut:IMPedance:REFerence <integer>
The [:SENSe]:FEED RF|IQ|IONLy|QONLy|AREFerence|IFALign command supports all
parameters except IFALign. The FEED? query returns only RF|AIQ|AREF.
The following commands are not supported:
– :CALibration:GIQ
– :CALibration:IQ:CMR
– :INPut:IQ:ALIGn OFF|ON|0|1
The Rohde & Schwarz FSQ-B71 also provides baseband I/Q inputs. A certain
amount of code compatibility is provided in the X-Series, however hardware
differences make this a somewhat limited set.
Supported:
– The "<1|2>" is supported as "[1]".
– INPut<1|2>:IQ:BALanced[:STATe] ON | OFF
– INPut<1|2>:IQ:TYPE I | Q | IQ
– INPut<1|2>:IQ:IMPedance LOW | HIGH
Not Supported:
– INPut<1|2>:SELect AIQ | RF
– TRACe<1|2>:IQ:DATA:FORMat COMPatible | IQBLock | IQPair>
– TRACe<1|2>:IQ:DATA:MEMory? <offset samples>,<# of samples>
– TRACe<1|2>:IQ:DATA?
– TRACe<1|2>:IQ:SET <filter type>,<rbw>,<sample rate>,<trigger source>,<trigger
slope>, <pretrigger samples>, <# of samples>
– TRACe<1|2>:IQ:SRATe 10.0kHz to 81.6MHz
– TRACe<1|2>:IQ[:STATe] ON|OFF
The Rohde & Schwarz FMU has the following SCPI, which is not supported (these
commands start/abort the probe calibration procedure, which is manually
interactive from the front panel):
511
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
– CALibration:ABORt
– CALibration:PROBe[:STARt]
I/Q Path
Selects which I/Q input channels are active. The LED next to each I/Q input port will
be on when that port is active.
The analysis bandwidth for each channel is the same as that of the instrument. For
example, the base N9020A has a bandwidth of 10 MHz. With I/Q input the I and Q
channels would each have an analysis bandwidth of 10 MHz, giving 20 MHz of
bandwidth when the I/Q Path is I+jQ. With option B25, the available bandwidth
becomes 25 MHz, giving 25 MHz each to I and Q and 50 MHz to I+jQ.
I/Q voltage to power conversion processing is dependent on the I/Q Path selected.
– With I+jQ input we know that the input signal may not be symmetrical about 0 Hz,
because it has a complex component. Therefore, above 0 Hz only the positive
frequency information is displayed, and below 0 Hz only the negative frequency
information is displayed.
– With all other Input Path selections, the input signal has no complex component
and therefore is always symmetrical about 0 Hz. In this case, by convention, the
power conversion shows the combined voltage for both the positive and negative
frequencies. The information displayed below 0 Hz is the mirror of the
information displayed above 0 Hz. This results in a power reading 6.02 dB higher
(for both) than would be seen with only the positive frequency voltage. Note also
that, in this case the real signal may have complex modulation embedded in it,
but that must be recovered by further signal processing.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q
Notes
The Independent I and Q selection is only available in GPVSA
Preset
IQ
State Saved
Yes
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to the default value on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults"
or "Restore System Defaults->All"
Range
I+jQ | I Only | Q Only | Independent I and Q
Readback Text
I+jQ | I Only | Q Only | Ind I/Q
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
I+jQ
Sets the signal input to be both the I and Q channels. The I and Q channel data will
be combined as I + j * Q.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
512
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I/Q Path
Example
Set the input to be both the I and Q channels, combined as I + j * Q.
FEED:IQ:TYPE IQ
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
I Only
Sets the signal input to be only the I channel. The Q channel will be ignored. The
data collected is still complex. When the center frequency is 0 the imaginary part will
always be zero, but for any other center frequency both the real and imaginary parts
will be significant.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I/Q Path
Example
Set the input to be only the I channel.
FEED:IQ:TYPE IONL
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Q Only
Sets the signal input to be only the Q channel. The I channel will be ignored. The Q
channel will be sent to the digital receiver block as Q+j0. The receiver's output is still
complex. When the center frequency is 0 the imaginary part will always be zero, but
for any other center frequency both the real and imaginary parts will be significant.
Note that since the receiver's real output is displayed as the "I" data, when the
center frequency is 0, the Q Only input appears as the "I" data.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I/Q Path
Example
Set the input to be only the Q channel.
FEED:IQ:TYPE QONL
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
I Setup
Access the channel setup parameters for the I channel.
513
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
I Differential Input
Selects differential input on or off for the I channel. For differential input (also called
balanced input), the analyzer uses both main and complementary ports. When
differential input is off (also called single-ended or unbalanced input), the analyzer
uses only the main port.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup
Notes
When I Differential Input = On, the analyzer will check for attenuation mismatches between the I
and I-bar ports. If the difference in attenuation values exceeds 0.5 dB a Settings Alert error
condition, error 159 will be set.
When I Differential Input = On, and IQ Path is I+jQ, the Q Differential input must also be On. Similarly, when I Differential Input = Off, and IQ Path is I+jQ, the Q Differential input must also be
Off. If the states of the two inputs do not match, an error condition message is generated,
159;Settings Alert;I/Q mismatch:Differential.
Couplings
Some active probes include built-in differential capability. When one of these probes is sensed,
this key is disabled. Since the differential capability is handled in the probe, the Analyzer will use
only the main port and the key will show that the Analyzer's Differential Input mode is Off
(indicating that the complementary port is not in use).
When Q Same as I is On, the value set for I will also be copied to Q.
Preset
Off
State Saved
Yes
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to the default value on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults"
or "Restore System Defaults->All"
Range
Off | On
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
I Input Z
Selects the input impedance for the I channel. The impedance applies to both the I
and I-bar ports.
The input impedance controls the hardware signal path impedance match. It is not
used for converting voltage to power. The voltage to power conversion always uses
the Reference Z parameter. The Reference Z parameter applies to both I and Q
channels.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup
Notes
LOW = 50 Ω, HIGH = 1 MΩ
When IQ Path is I+jQ, the I Input Z setting must be the same as the Q Input Z setting. If the
settings of the two inputs do not match, an error condition message is generated, 159;Settings
Alert;I/Q mismatch:Input Z.
Couplings
Input impedance is a built-in characteristic of a probe. Therefore, whenever a probe is sensed,
this key is disabled and the value is set to match the probe.
When no probe is sensed on Q and Q Same as I is On, the value set for I will also be copied to Q.
Preset
LOW
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
514
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
State Saved
Yes
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to the default value on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults"
or "Restore System Defaults->All"
Range
50 Ω | 1 MΩ
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
I Skew
Sets the skew factor for the I channel. The skew will shift the channel's data in time.
Use this to compensate for differences in the electrical lengths of the input paths due
to cabling.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup
Preset
0
State Saved
Yes
This is unaffected by Preset but is set to the default value on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or
"Restore System Defaults->All"
Range
0 s to 100 ns
Min
0s
Max
+100 ns
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
I Probe
Access the probe setup parameters for the I channel. See "I/Q Probe Setup" on page
523.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup
State Saved
No
Readback Text
[<I port probe id>]
This is reporting the type of probe sensed on the I port. There is no parameter for overriding what
is sensed.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Attenuation
The attenuation is part of the calibration data stored with the probe type and is
initially the value that was returned by the last calibration. You can modify this value
and any changes will be stored with the calibration data and will survive power
cycles and presets. When a probe calibration is performed the attenuation value will
be overwritten by the calibration.
515
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe
Notes
Each probe type has its own attenuation setting. As probes are changed the attenuation value will
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
reflect the new probe's setting. Changing the attenuation affects only the current probe type's
setting and leaves all others unchanged.
When the IQ Path is I+jQ, the Q probe attenuation setting must match the I Probe attenuation
setting within 1 dB. If this is not the case, an error condition message is generated, 159;Settings
Alert;I/Q mismatch:Attenuation.
Preset
Each probe type has its own default. The default for the "Unknown" probe type is 1:1.
State Saved
Saved with probe calibration data. It survives a power cycle and is not affected by a Preset or
Restore.
Range
0.001 to 10000
Min
0.001
Max
10000
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Calibrate
Invokes the guided probe calibration. The guided probe calibration is context
sensitive and depends on the channel (I or Q) and the Differential Input state. The
calibration is only performed on the selected channel. When Differential Input is on,
both the probe attached to the main port and the probe attached to the
complementary port are calibrated. When Differential Input is off, only the probe
attached to the main port is calibrated. See "I/Q Guided Calibration" on page 561.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe, Coupling
Readback Text
The last calibration date, or if no calibration exists, "(empty)".
Last: <cal date>
<cal time>
Example:
Last: 8/22/2007
1:02:49 PM
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Clear Calibration
Clears the calibration data for the current port and probe. It does not clear the data
for other probe types or other ports. If the sensed probe has EEPROM identification,
only the data for that specific probe is cleared. After this command has completed,
the probe calibration state will be the same as if no probe calibration had ever been
performed for the specified channel and probe. The probe attenuation will be the
default value for that probe type and the Cable Calibration frequency response
corrections will be used. This command is dependent on the Differential Input state.
When Differential Input is on, both the data for the probe attached to the main port
and the data for the probe attached to the complementary port are cleared. When
Differential Input is off, only data for the probe attached to the main port is cleared.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
516
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Q Setup
Access the channel setup parameters for the Q channel.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q
Readback Text
When Q Same as I is On the readback is "Q Same as I".
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Q Same as I
Many, but not all, usages require the I and Q channels have an identical setup. To
simplify channel setup, the Q Same as I will cause the Q channel parameters to be
mirrored from the I channel. That way you only need to set up one channel (the I
channel). The I channel values are copied to the Q channel, so at the time Q Same as
I is turned off the I and Q channel setups will be identical. This does not apply to
Probe settings or to parameters that are determined by the probe.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, Q Setup
Couplings
Only displayed for the Q channel. When Yes, the I channel values for some parameters are
mirrored (copied) to the Q channel. However, when a parameter is determined by the type of
probe and a probe is sensed, the probe setting is always used and the I channel setting is ignored.
The following parameters are mirrored:
Differential Input (when not determined by probe)
Input Z (when not determined by probe)
Preset
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to the default value (Q Same as I set to "On") on a
"Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All"
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Range
On | Off
Readback Text
"Q Same as I" when On, otherwise none.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Q Differential Input
Selects differential input on or off for the Q channel. For differential input (also called
balanced input), the analyzer uses both the Q and Q-bar ports. When differential
input is off (also called single-ended or unbalanced input), the analyzer uses only the
Q port.
517
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, Q Setup
Notes
When Differential Input = On, the analyzer will check for attenuation mismatches between the Q
and Q-bar ports. If the difference in attenuation values exceeds 0.5 dB a Settings Alert error
condition, error 159 will be set.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
When Q Differential Input = On, and IQ Path is I+jQ, the I Differential input must also be On. Similarly, when Q Differential Input = Off, and IQ Path is I+jQ, the I Differential input must also be
Off. If the states of the two inputs do not match, an error condition message is generated,
159;Settings Alert;I/Q mismatch:Differential.
Couplings
Some active probes include built-in differential capability. When one of these probes is sensed,
this key is disabled. Since the differential capability is handled in the probe, the Analyzer will use
only the main port and the key will show that the Analyzer's Differential Input mode is Off
(indicating that the complementary port not in use).
When a differential probe is not sensed and Q Same as I is On, the value set for I will be copied to
Q. This key is disabled when Q Same as I is On.
Preset
Off
State Saved
On
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to the default value on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults"
or "Restore System Defaults->All"
Range
Off | On
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Q Input Z
Selects the input impedance for the Q channel. The impedance applies to both the Q
and Q-bar ports.
The input impedance controls the hardware signal path impedance match. It is not
used for converting voltage to power. The voltage to power conversion always uses
the Reference Z parameter. The Reference Z parameter applies to both I and Q
channels.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, Q Setup
Notes
LOW = 50 Ω, HIGH = 1 MΩ
When IQ Path is I+jQ, the I Input Z setting must be the same as the Q Input Z setting. If the
settings of the two inputs do not match, an error condition message is generated, 159;Settings
Alert;I/Q mismatch:Input Z.
Couplings
Input impedance is a built-in characteristic of a probe. Therefore, whenever a probe is sensed,
this key is disabled and the value is set to match the probe.
When no probe is sensed and Q Same as I is On, the value set for I will also be copied to Q. This
key is disabled when Q Same as I is On.
Preset
LOW
State Saved
On
This is unaffected by Preset but is set to the default value on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or
"Restore System Defaults->All"
Range
50 Ω | 1 MΩ
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
518
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Q Skew
Sets the skew factor for the Q channel. The skew will shift the channel's data in time.
Use this to compensate for differences in the electrical lengths of the input paths due
to cabling and probes.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, Q Setup
Preset
0
State Saved
Yes
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to the default value on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults"
or "Restore System Defaults->All"
Range
0 s to 100 ns
Min
0s
Max
+100 ns
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Q Probe
Accesses the probe setup parameters for the Q channel. See "I/Q Probe Setup" on
page 523.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, Q Setup
State Saved
No
Readback Text
[<Q port probe id>]
This is reporting the type of probe sensed on the Q port. There is no parameter for overriding
what is sensed.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Attenuation
The attenuation is part of the calibration data stored with the probe type and is
initially the value that was returned by the last calibration. You can modify this value
and any changes will be stored with the calibration data and will survive power
cycles and presets. When a probe calibration is performed the attenuation value will
be overwritten by the calibration.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe
Notes
Each probe type has its own attenuation setting. As probes are changed the attenuation value will
reflect the new probe's setting. Changing the attenuation affects only the current probe type's
setting and leaves all others unchanged.
When the IQ Path is I+jQ, the Q probe attenuation setting must match the I Probe attenuation
setting within 1 dB. If this is not the case, an error condition message is generated, 159;Settings
Alert;I/Q mismatch:Attenuation.
519
Preset
Each probe type has its own default. The default for the "Unknown" probe type is 1:1.
State Saved
Saved with probe calibration data. It survives a power cycle and is not affected by a Preset or
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Restore.
Range
0.001 to 10000
Min
0.001
Max
10000
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Calibrate
Invokes the guided probe calibration. The guided probe calibration is context
sensitive and depends on the channel (I or Q) and the Differential Input state. The
calibration is only performed on the selected channel. When Differential Input is on,
both the probe attached to the main port and the probe attached to the
complementary port are calibrated. When Differential Input is off, only the probe
attached to the main port is calibrated. See "I/Q Guided Calibration" on page 561.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe, Coupling
Readback Text
The last calibration date, or if no calibration exists, "(empty)".
Last: <cal date>
<cal time>
Example:
Last: 8/22/2007
1:02:49 PM
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Next
Perform the Q port calibration.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, Q Setup, Q Probe, Calibrate
Notes
The calibration data is saved as soon as the port is calibrated and will survive power cycles. It is
not reset by any preset or restore data commands.
State Saved
No
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Clear Calibration
Clears the calibration data for the current port and probe. It does not clear the data
for other probe types or other ports. If the sensed probe has EEPROM identification,
only the data for that specific probe is cleared. After this command has completed,
the probe calibration state will be the same as if no probe calibration had ever been
performed for the specified channel and probe. The probe attenuation will be the
default value for that probe type and the Cable Calibration frequency response
corrections will be used. This command is dependent on the Differential Input state.
When Differential Input is on, both the data for the probe attached to the main port
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
520
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
and the data for the probe attached to the complementary port are cleared. When
Differential Input is off, only data for the probe attached to the main port is cleared.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Reference Z
Sets the value of the impedance to be used in converting voltage to power for the I
and Q channels. This does not change the hardware's path impedance (see "I Input
Z" on page 514 ).
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q
Preset
50 Ω
State Saved
Yes
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to the default value on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults"
or "Restore System Defaults->All"
Range
1 Ω to 1 MΩ
Min
1Ω
Max
1 MΩ
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
I/Q Cable Calibrate…
The I/Q cable calibration creates correction data for each of the front panel I/Q ports.
This calibration data is used whenever no probe specific calibration data is available.
It is important that all ports are calibrated using the same short BNC cable so that
the data is comparable from port to port.
The guided calibration (front panel only) will show connection diagrams and guide
you through the isolation calibration and calibrating each port. The calibration data
for each port is stored separately, so as soon as a port is calibrated that data is
saved and will be used. If you press "Exit" to exit the calibration process, the data for
the ports already completed will still be used. It is recommended that a calibration
be completed once started, or if exited, that it be properly done before the next use
of the I/Q ports. The "Next" button will perform the calibration for the current port
and then proceed to the next step in the calibration procedure. The "Back" button will
return to the prior port in the procedure. Both keys and dialog buttons are supplied
for ease of use. The dialog buttons are for mouse use and the softkeys for front panel
use.
The calibration can also be done via SCPI, but no connection diagrams will be
shown. You will have to make the correct connections before issuing each port
calibration command. Again, it is recommended that all ports be calibrated at the
same time.
The instrument state remains as it was prior to entering the calibration procedure
except while a port is actually being calibrated. Once a port is calibrated it returns to
the prior state. A port calibration is in process only from the time the "Next" button is
521
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
pressed until the next screen is shown. For SCPI, this corresponds to the time from
issuing the CAL:IQ:FLAT:I|IB|Q|QB command until the operation is complete.
For example, if the prior instrument state is Cal Out = Off, Input = I+jQ, and
Differential = Off, then up until the time the "Next" button is pressed the I Input and Q
Input LEDs are on and the Cal Out, I-bar Input and Q-bar Input LEDs are off. Once the
"Next" button is pressed for the I port calibration, only the Cal Out and I Input LEDs
will be on and the others will be off. When the screen progresses to the next step
("Next" button again enabled), the prior state is restored and only the I Input and Q
Input LEDs are on (Cal Out is off again).
The last calibration date and time for each port will be displayed. Any calibrations
that are more than a day older than the most recent calibration will be displayed
with the color amber.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Next
Perform the I/Q Isolation calibration.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I/Q Cable Calibration
Notes
All front panel I/Q ports must not be connected to anything.
State Saved
No.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Exit
Exits the calibration procedure. All ports calibrated before pressing Exit will use the
newly acquired calibration data.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I/Q Cable Calibration
Notes
Using the Exit button does not restore the calibration data to the state prior to entering the
guided calibration. Once a port is calibrated the data is stored immediately and the only way to
change it is to redo the calibration step.
When the calibration may be left in an inconsistent state, a confirmation dialog is displayed (see
"Exit Confirmation" on page 522 ).
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Exit Confirmation
When Exit is pressed during one of the calibration routines, the calibration may be in
an inconsistent state, with some of the ports having newly measured calibration
data and others with old data. If this is the case, a dialog box appears, to confirm that
you really want to exit.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
522
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
– A "Yes" answer exits the calibration procedure, leaving potentially inconsistent
calibration data in place.
– A "No" answer returns you to the calibration procedure.
I/Q Probe Setup
The set of I/Q probe setup parameters will change based on the type of probe that is
sensed. All probe types have the Attenuation parameter, and all probe types can be
calibrated. The remaining parameters are only available for some probe types and
will not be shown when not available. The probe type is determined by and reported
for only for the I and Q ports, never the I-bar or Q-bar ports. The menu title will be
"<ch>: <probe id>", where "<ch>" is either "I" or "Q" and "<probe id>" is the type of
probe. For example, for the I Probe setup with a Keysight 1130A probe connected to
the I port, the title will be "I: 1130A".
Probe calibration data is stored for each probe type for each channel. When no
probe is sensed, the probe type "Unknown" is used, and this is also treated like a
probe type with its own calibration data. When a probe is changed, the calibration
data for that probe type for that port is restored. An advisory message will be
displayed showing the new probe type and the calibration status. The calibration
data is stored permanently (survives a power cycle) and is not affected by a Preset or
any of the Restore commands. When the probe has EEPROM identification (most
newer Keysight probes have this), the calibration data is stored by probe serial
number and port, so if you have two probes of the same type, the correct calibration
data will be used for each. For probes that do not have EEPROM identification, the
calibration data is stored by probe type and port and the instrument cannot
distinguish between different probes of the same type. In all cases (with or without
EEPROM identification), the calibration data is port specific, so it will not follow a
specific probe from port to port if the probe is moved.
The "Unknown" probe type is used whenever no probe is sensed. When no
calibration data exists for "Unknown" the latest cable calibration data is used (see
Section "I/Q Guided Calibration" on page 561).
Attenuation
The attenuation is part of the calibration data stored with the probe type and is
initially the value that was returned by the last calibration. You can modify this value
and any changes will be stored with the calibration data and will survive power
cycles and presets. When a probe calibration is performed the attenuation value will
be overwritten by the calibration.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe
Notes
Each probe type has its own attenuation setting. As probes are changed the attenuation value will
reflect the new probe's setting. Changing the attenuation affects only the current probe type's
setting and leaves all others unchanged.
When the IQ Path is I+jQ, the Q probe attenuation setting must match the I Probe attenuation
setting within 1 dB. If this is not the case, an error condition message is generated, 159;Settings
Alert;I/Q mismatch:Attenuation.
523
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Preset
Each probe type has its own default. The default for the "Unknown" probe type is 1:1.
State Saved
Saved with probe calibration data. It survives a power cycle and is not affected by a Preset or
Restore.
Range
0.001 to 10000
Min
0.001
Max
10000
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Offset
Some active probes have DC offset capability. When one of these probes is
connected this control will be visible. The signal is adjusted for the DC offset before
entering the analyzer's port. This allows for removal of a DC offset before reaching
the analyzer's input port voltage limits. For example, a signal that varies 1 V peakto-peak with a DC offset equal to the analyzer's max input voltage would exceed the
input limits of the analyzer for half its cycle. Removing the DC offset allows the
analyzer to correctly process the entire signal.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe
Notes
Only some probe types support Offset. For those that do, each probe type has its own Offset
setting. As probes are changed the Offset value will reflect the new probe's setting. Changing the
Offset affects only the current probe type's setting and leaves all others unchanged.
Preset
0V
State Saved
Saved with probe calibration data. It survives power cycle and is not affected by Preset or
Restore.
Range
–18 V to +18 V
Min
–18 V
Max
+18 V
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Coupling
Some probe types allow coupling to reject low frequencies. This will filter out the DC
component of a signal that is composed of a DC bias plus some AC signal. This
control is visible only for probe types that have this capability.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe
Remote Command
:INPut:COUPling:I|Q DC|LFR1|LFR2
:INPut:COUPling:I|Q?
Example
Set the probe to low frequency rejection below 1.7 Hz.
INP:COUP:I LFR1
Notes
Only some probe types support Coupling. For those that do, each probe type has its own Coupling
setting. As probes are changed the Coupling value will reflect the new probe's setting. Changing
the Coupling affects only the current probe type's setting and leaves all others unchanged.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
524
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Preset
DC
State Saved
Saved with probe calibration data. It survives a power cycle and is not affected by a Preset or
Restore.
Range
DC | AC 1.7 Hz LFR1 | AC 0.14 Hz LFR2
Readback Text
DC | LFR1 | LFR2
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
DC
Turns off low frequency rejection, allowing signals down to DC.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe, Coupling
Example
Turn off low frequency rejection on the I channel
INP:COUP:I DC
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
LFR1
Turns on low frequency rejection, rejecting signal component lower than 1.7 Hz.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe, Coupling
Example
Turn on low frequency rejection on the I channel for frequencies lower than 1.7 Hz
INP:COUP:I LFR1
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
LFR2
Turns on low frequency rejection, rejecting signal component lower than 0.14 Hz.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe, Coupling
Example
Turn on low frequency rejection on the I channel for frequencies lower than 0.14 Hz
INP:COUP:I LFR2
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Calibrate
Invokes the guided probe calibration. The guided probe calibration is context
sensitive and depends on the channel (I or Q) and the Differential Input state. The
calibration is only performed on the selected channel. When Differential Input is on,
both the probe attached to the main port and the probe attached to the
525
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
complementary port are calibrated. When Differential Input is off, only the probe
attached to the main port is calibrated. See "I/Q Guided Calibration" on page 561.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe, Coupling
Readback Text
The last calibration date, or if no calibration exists, "(empty)".
Last: <cal date>
<cal time>
Example:
Last: 8/22/2007
1:02:49 PM
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Clear Calibration
Clears the calibration data for the current port and probe. It does not clear the data
for other probe types or other ports. If the sensed probe has EEPROM identification,
only the data for that specific probe is cleared. After this command has completed,
the probe calibration state will be the same as if no probe calibration had ever been
performed for the specified channel and probe. The probe attenuation will be the
default value for that probe type and the Cable Calibration frequency response
corrections will be used. This command is dependent on the Differential Input state.
When Differential Input is on, both the data for the probe attached to the main port
and the data for the probe attached to the complementary port are cleared. When
Differential Input is off, only data for the probe attached to the main port is cleared.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
RF Calibrator
Lets you choose a calibrator signal to look at or turns the calibrator "off".
Key Path
Input/Output
Dependencies
Selecting an input (RF or I/Q) turns the Calibrator OFF. This is true whether the input is selected
by the keys or with the [:SENSe]:FEED command.
The 4.8 GHz internal reference is only available in some models and frequency range options. If
the 4.8 GHz reference is not present, the 4.8 GHz softkey will be blanked, and if the REF4800
parameter is sent, the analyzer will generate an error.
Couplings
When one of the calibrator signals is selected, the analyzer routes that signal (an internal
amplitude reference) to the analyzer, and changes the main input selection to RF so the
calibrator signal can be seen. When you turn the calibrator off it does not switch back to the
previously selected input.
Preset
OFF
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
526
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Readback
Off, 50 MHz, 4.8 GHz
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
50 MHz
Selects the 50 MHz internal reference as the input signal.
Key Path
Input/Output, RF Calibrator
Example
:FEED:AREF REF50
Readback
50 MHz
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
4.8 GHz
Selects the 4.8 GHz internal reference as the input signal.
Key Path
Input/Output, RF Calibrator
Example
:FEED:AREF REF4800
Dependencies
The 4.8 GHz internal reference is only available in some models and frequency range options. If
the 4.8 GHz reference is not present, the 4.8 GHz softkey will be blanked, and if the REF4800
parameter is sent, the analyzer will generate an error. Readback
4.8 GHz
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.03.00
Off
Switches the input back to the selected input (RF or I/Q)
Key Path
Input/Output, RF Calibrator
Example
:FEED:AREF OFF
Readback
Off
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
External Gain
Compensates for gain or loss in the measurement system outside the spectrum
analyzer. The External Gain is subtracted from the amplitude readout (or the loss is
added to the amplitude readout). So, the displayed signal level represents the signal
level at the output of the device-under-test, which can be the input of an external
device that provides gain or loss.
527
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Entering an External Gain value does not affect the Reference Level, therefore the
trace position on screen changes, as do all of the values represented by the trace
data. Thus, the values of exported trace data, queried trace data, marker
amplitudes, trace data used in calculations such as N dB points, trace math, peak
threshold, etc., are all affected by External Gain. Changing the External Gain, even
on a trace that is not updating, will immediately change all of the above, without
new data needing to be taken.
Changing the External Gain causes the analyzer to immediately stop the current
sweep and prepare to begin a new sweep. The data will not change until the trace
data updates because the offset is applied to the data as it is taken. If a trace is
exported with a nonzero External Gain, the exported data will contain the trace data
with the offset applied.
In the Spectrum Analyzer mode, a Preamp is the common external device providing
gain or loss. In a measurement application mode like GSM or W-CDMA, the gain or
loss could be from a BTS (Base Transceiver Station) or an MS (Mobile Station). So in
the Spectrum Analyzer mode MS and BTS would be grayed out and the only choice
would be Ext Preamp. Similarly in some of the digital communications applications,
Ext Preamp will be grayed out and you would have a choice of MS or BTS.
Key Path
Input/Output
Couplings
The Ext Preamp, MS, and BS keys may be grayed out depending on which measurement is
currently selected. If any of the grayed out keys are pressed, or the equivalent SCPI command is
sent, an advisory message is generated.
Readback
1-of-N selection | [variable]
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Ext Preamp
This function is similar to the reference level offset function. Both affect the
displayed signal level. Ref Lvl Offset is a mathematical offset only, no analyzer
configuration is affected. Ext Preamp gain is used when determining the autocoupled value of the Attenuator. The External Gain value and the Maximum Mixer
Level settings are both part of the automatic setting equation for the RF attenuation
setting. (10 dB of Attenuation is added for every 10 dB of External Gain.)
Note that the Ref Lvl Offset and Maximum Mixer Level are described in the Amplitude
section. They are reset by the instrument Preset. The External Preamp Gain is reset
by the "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All functions. .
The External Gain is subtracted from the amplitude readout so that the displayed
signal level represents the signal level at the output of the device-under-test, which
is the input of the external device that is providing gain or loss.
Key Path
Input/Output, External Gain
Notes
Does not auto return.
Dependencies
The reference level limits are determined in part by the External Gain/Atten, Max Mixer Level,
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
528
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
and RF Atten.
This key is grayed out in Modes that do not support External Gain
Preset
This is unaffected by Preset but is set to 0 dB on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore
System Defaults->All"
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
–120 dB
Max
120 dB
Readback
Preamp Gain, <Ext Gain value> dB
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
MS
Sets an external gain/attenuation value for MS (Mobile Station) tests.
Key Path
Input/Output, External Gain
Notes
Does not auto return.
Dependencies
The reference level limits are determined in part by the External Gain, Max Mixer Level, RF Atten
This key is grayed out in modes that do not support MS.
Preset
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to 0 dB on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore
System Defaults->All"
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Min
–100 dB
Max
100 dB
Readback
MS, <Ext Gain value> dB
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
BTS
Sets an external attenuation value for BTS (Base Transceiver Station) tests.
Key Path
Input/Output, External Gain
Notes
Does not auto return.
Dependencies
The reference level limits are determined in part by the External Gain, Max Mixer Level, RF Atten
This key is grayed out in modes that do not support BTS.
529
Preset
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to 0 dB on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore
System Defaults->All"
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Min
–100 dB
Max
100 dB
Readback
BTS, <Ext Gain value> dB
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
I Ext Gain
This function affects only the I channel input, except when the Input Path is I+jQ. In
I+jQ this setting is applied to both I and Q channel inputs. It is not available unless
the Baseband I/Q option (BBA) is installed.
Key Path
Input/Output, External Gain
Notes
Not available unless option BBA is installed
Preset
0 dB
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to 0 dB on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore
System Defaults->All"
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Min
–100 dB
Max
100 dB
Readback Text
I Gain, <I Ext Gain> dB
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Q Ext Gain
This function affects only the Q channel input and only when the Input Path is not
I+jQ. It is not available unless the Baseband I/Q option (BBA) is installed.
Key Path
Input/Output, External Gain
Notes
Not available unless option BBA is installed.
Preset
0 dB
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to 0 dB on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore
System Defaults->All"
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Min
–100 dB
Max
100 dB
Readback Text
Q Gain, <I Ext Gain> dB
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Restore Input/Output Defaults
This selection causes the group of settings and data associated with the
Input/Output key to be a reset to their default values. In addition, when a Source is
installed, licensed and selected, Restore Input/Output defaults will initiate a Source
Preset. This level of Restore System Defaults does not affect any other system settings or
mode settings and does not cause a mode switch. All the features described in this
section are reset using this key, including Input Corrections and Data (described in
the Corrections section).
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
530
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Key Path
Input/Output
Example
:SYST:DEF INP presets all the Input/Output variables to their factory default values.
Notes
Refer to the Utility Functions for information about Restore System Defaults and the complete
description of the :SYSTem:DEFault INPut: command.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Corrections
This key accesses the Amplitude Corrections menu.
Amplitude Corrections arrays can be entered, sent over SCPI, or loaded from a file. They allow you to correct the response of the analyzer for various use cases. The Xseries supports four separate Corrections arrays, each of which can contain up to
2000 points. They can be turned on and off individually and any or all can be on at
the same time.
Trace data is in absolute units and corrections data is in relative units, but we want
to be able to display trace data at the same time as corrections data. Therefore we
establish a reference line to be used while building or editing a Corrections table. The reference line is halfway up the display and represents 0 dB of correction. It is
labeled “0 dB CORREC”. It is drawn in blue. Corrections data is always in dB. Whatever dB value appears in the correction table
represents the correction to be applied to that trace at that frequency. So if a table
entry shows 30 dB that means we ADD 30 dB to each trace to correct it before
displaying it. In zero span, where the frequency is always the center frequency of the analyzer, we
apply the (interpolated) correction for the center frequency to all points in the trace. In the event where there are two correction amplitudes at the center frequency, we
apply the first one in the table.
Note that the corrections are applied as the data is taken; therefore, a trace in View
(Update Off) will not be affected by changes made to the corrections table after the
trace is put in View.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Mode
SA, DVB-T/H, DTMB, SEQAN, TDSCDMA
Dependencies
This key will only appear if you have the proper option installed in your instrument.
Amplitude correction may not be available in all modes; if a mode does not support amplitude
correction, the Corrections key should be blanked while in that mode. If an application supports
corrections but the current measurement does not, then the key should be grayed out in that
measurement
531
Preset
Corrections arrays are reset (deleted) by Restore Input/Output Defaults. They survive shutdown
and restarting of the analyzer application, which means they will survive a power cycle.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Select Correction
Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout
this document to specify which correction will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Mode
SA
Notes
The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu.
Preset
Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults
Readback
Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Correction On/Off
Turning the Selected Correction on allows the values in it to be applied to the data.
This also automatically turns on "Apply Corrections" (sets it to ON), otherwise the
correction would not take effect.
A new sweep is initiated if an amplitude correction is switched on or off. Note that
changing, sending or loading corrections data does NOT directly initiate a sweep,
however in general these operations will turn corrections on, which DOES initiate a
sweep.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Dependencies
Turning this on automatically turns on "Apply Corrections"
Only the first correction array (Correction 1) supports antenna units. When this array is turned
on, and it contains an Antenna Unit other than “None”, the Y Axis Unit of the analyzer is forced to
that Antenna Unit. All other Y Axis Unit choices are grayed out. Note that this means that a correction file with an Antenna Unit can only be loaded into the
Corrections 1 register. Consequently only for Correction 1 does the dropdown in the Recall
dialog include.ant, and if an attempt is made to load a correction file into any other Correction
register which DOES contain an antenna unit, a Mass Storage error is generated. This command will generate an “Option not available” error unless you have the proper option
installed in your instrument. Preset
Not affected by a Preset. Set to OFF by Restore Input/Output Defaults
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
Unlike legacy analyzers, Preset does not turn Corrections off (Restore Input/Output Defaults
does).
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Properties
Accesses a menu that lets you set the properties of the selected correction.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
532
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Select Correction
Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout
this document to specify which correction will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Mode
SA
Notes
The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu.
Preset
Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults
Readback
Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Antenna Unit
For devices (like antennas) that make measurements of field strength or flux density,
the correction array should contain within its values the appropriate conversion
factors such that, when the data on the analyzer is presented in dBµV, the display is
calibrated in the appropriate units. The "Antenna Unit" used for the conversion is
contained within the corrections array database. It may be specifiedor loaded in from
an external file or SCPI.
When an array with an Antenna Unit other than "None" is turned on, the Y Axis Unit of
the analyzer is forced to that unit. When this array is turned on, and it contains an
Antenna Unit other than “None”, the Y Axis Unit of the analyzer is forced to that
Antenna Unit., and all other Y Axis Unit choices are grayed out.
Antenna Unit does not appear in all Modes that support Corrections. Only the
modes listed in the Mode row of the table below support Antenna Units. Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections, Properties
Mode
SA
Dependencies
Only the first correction array (Correction 1) supports antenna units. Note that this means that a correction file with an Antenna Unit can only be loaded into the
Corrections 1 register. Consequently only for Correction 1 does the dropdown in the Recall dialog
include.ant, and if an attempt is made to load a correction file into any other Correction register
which DOES contain an antenna unit, a Mass Storage error is generated. 533
Preset
Unaffected by Preset. Set to NOC by Restore Input/Output Defaults
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
None
Selects no antenna unit for this Correction set. Thus no Y Axis unit will be forced.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections, Properties, Antenna Unit
Example
:CORR:CSET:ANT NOC
Readback
"None"
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
dBµV/m
Sets the antenna unit to dBµV/m. If this correction is turned on, and Apply
Corrections is on, the Y Axis Unit will then be forced to dBµV/m and all other Y Axis
Unit selections will be grayed out.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections, Properties, Antenna Unit
Example
:CORR:CSET:ANT UVM
Readback
"dBµV/m"
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
dBµA/m
Sets the antenna unit to dBµA/m. If this correction is turned on, and Apply
Corrections is on, the Y Axis Unit will then be forced to dBµA/m and all other Y Axis
Unit selections will be grayed out.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections, Properties, Antenna Unit
Example
:CORR:CSET:ANT UVA
Readback
" dBµA/m"
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
dBpT
Sets the antenna unit to dBpT. If this correction is turned on, and Apply Corrections
is on, the Y Axis Unit will then be forced to dBpT and all other Y Axis Unit selections
will be grayed out.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections, Properties, Antenna Unit
Example
:CORR:CSET:ANT PTES
Readback
"dBpT"
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
534
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
dBG
Sets the antenna unit to dBG. If this correction is turned on, and Apply Corrections is
on, the Y Axis Unit will then be forced to dBG and all other Y Axis Unit selections will
be grayed out.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections, Properties, Antenna Unit
Example
:CORR:CSET:ANT GAUS
Readback
" dBG"
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
dBµA
Sets the antenna unit to dBµA. If this correction is turned on, and Apply Corrections
is on, the Y Axis Unit will then be forced to dBµA and all other Y Axis Unit selections
will be grayed out.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections, Properties, Antenna Unit
Example
:CORR:CSET:ANT UA
Readback
" dBµA"
Initial S/W Revision
A.11.00
Frequency Interpolation
This setting controls how the correction values per-bucket are calculated. We
interpolate between frequencies in either the logarithmic or linear scale.
This setting is handled and stored individually per correction set.
See "Interpolation" on page 535
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections, Properties
Preset
Unaffected by a Preset. Set to Linear by Restore Input/Output Defaults.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Interpolation
For each bucket processed by the application, all of the correction factors at the
frequency of interest (center frequency of each bucket) are summed and added to
the amplitude. All trace operations and post processing treat this post-summation
value as the true signal to use.
To effect this correction, the goal, for any particular start and stop frequency, is to
build a correction trace, whose number of points matches the current Sweep Points
535
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
setting of the instrument, which will be used to apply corrections on a bucket by
bucket basis to the data traces.
For amplitudes that lie between two user specified frequency points, we interpolate
to determine the amplitude value. You may select either linear or logarithmic
interpolation between the frequencies.
If we interpolate on a log scale, we assume that the line between the two points is a
straight line on the log scale. For example, let’s say the two points are (2,4) and
(20,1). A straight line between them on a log scale looks like:
On a linear scale (like that of the spectrum analyzer), this translates to:
If we interpolate on a linear scale, we assume that the two points are connected by
a straight line on the linear scale, as below:
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
536
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
The correction to be used for each bucket is taken from the interpolated correction
curve at the center of the bucket.
Description
Sets an ASCII description field which will be stored in an exported file. Can be
displayed in the active function area by selecting as the active function, if desired to
appear in a screen capture.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections, Properties
Notes
45 chars max; may not fit on display if max chars used
Preset
Unaffected by a Preset. Set to empty by Restore Input/Output Defaults
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Comment
Sets an ASCII comment field which will be stored in an exported file. Can be
displayed in the active function area by selecting as the active function, if desired to
appear in a screen capture.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections, Properties
Notes
60 chars max; may not fit on display if max chars used
Preset
Unaffected by Preset. Set to empty by Restore Input/Output Defaults
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Edit
Invokes the integrated editing facility for this correction set. When entering the menu, the editor window turns on, the selected correction is
turned On, Apply Corrections is set to On, the amplitude scale is set to Log, and the
Amplitude Correction (“Ampcor”) trace is displayed. The actual, interpolated
correction trace is shown in green for the selected correction. Note that since the
actual interpolated correction is shown, the correction trace may have some
537
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
curvature to it. This trace represents only the correction currently being edited,
rather than the total, accumulated amplitude correction for all amplitude corrections
which are currently on, although the total, accumulated correction for all corrections
which are turned on is still applied to the data traces.
Because corrections data is always in dB, but the Y-axis of the analyzer is in absolute
units, it is necessary to establish a reference line for display of the Corrections data. The reference line is halfway up the display and represents 0 dB of correction. It is
labeled “0 dB CORREC”. It is drawn in blue.
Corrections data is always in dB. Whatever dB value appears in the correction table
represents the correction to be applied to that trace at that frequency. So if a table
entry shows 30 dB that means we ADD 30 dB to each trace to correct it before
displaying it. By definition all points are connected. If a gap is desired for corrections
data, enter 0 dB. Note that a well-designed Corrections array should start at 0 dB and end at 0 dB. This is because whatever the high end point is will be extended to the top frequency
of the instrument, and whatever the low end point is will be extended down to 0 Hz. So for a Corrections array to have no effect outside its range, you should start and
end the array at 0 dB.
The table editor will only operate properly if the analyzer is sweeping, because its
updates are tied to the sweep system. Thus, you should not try to use the editor in
single sweep, and it will be sluggish during compute-intensive operations like
narrow-span FFT sweeps.
When exiting the edit menu (by using the Return key or by pressing an instrument
front-panel key), the editor window turns off and the Ampcor trace is no longer
displayed; however, Apply Corrections remains On, any correction that was on while
in the editor remains on, and the amplitude scale returns to its previous setting.
Corrections arrays are not affected by a Preset, because they are in the
Input/Output system. They also survive shutdown and restarting of the analyzer
application, which means they will survive a power cycle.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Delete Correction
Deletes the correction values for this set. When this key is pressed a prompt is
placed on the screen that says “Please press Enter or OK key to delete correction. Press ESC or Cancel to close this dialog.” The deletion is only performed if you press
OK or Enter.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Notes
Pressing this key when no corrections are present is accepted without error.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
538
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Apply Corrections
Applies amplitude corrections, which are marked as ON to the measured data. If this
is set to OFF, then no amplitude correction sets will be used, regardless of their
individual on/off settings. If set to ON, the corrections that are marked as ON (see
"Correction On/Off" on page 532) are used.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Preset
Not affected by Preset. Set to OFF by Restore Input/Output Defaults
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Delete All Corrections
Erases all correction values for all 4 Amplitude Correction sets.
When this key is pressed a prompt is placed on the screen that says “Please press
Enter or OK key to delete all corrections. Press ESC or Cancel to close this dialog.” The deletion is only performed if you press OK or Enter.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Freq Ref In
Specifies the frequency reference as being the internal reference, external reference
or sensing the presence of an external reference.
When the frequency reference is set to internal, the internal 10 MHz reference is
used even if an external reference is connected.
When the frequency reference is set to external, the instrument will use the external
reference. However, if there is no external signal present, or it is not within the
proper amplitude range, a condition error message is generated. When the external
signal becomes valid, the error is cleared.
If Sense is selected, the instrument checks whether a signal is present at the
external reference connector and will automatically switch to the external reference
when a signal is detected. When no signal is present, it automatically switches to
the internal reference. No message is generated as the reference switches between
external and internal. The monitoring of the external reference occurs approximately
on 1 millisecond intervals, and never occurs in the middle of a measurement
acquisition, only at the end of the measurement (end of the request).
If for any reason the instrument’s frequency reference is not able to obtain lock,
Status bit 2 in the Questionable Frequency register will be true and a condition error
message is generated. When lock is regained, Status bit 2 in the Questionable
Frequency register will be cleared and the condition error will be cleared.
539
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
If an external frequency reference is being used, you must enter the frequency of the
external reference if it is not exactly 10 MHz. The External Ref Freq key is provided for
this purpose.
Key Path
Input/Output
Preset
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to SENSe on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or
"Restore System Defaults->All".
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency bit 2 set if unlocked.
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
Freq Ref In was not saved in state in the legacy instruments. It is a part of state in the X-Series.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Sense
The external reference is used if a valid signal is sensed at the Ext Ref input.
Otherwise the internal reference is used.
Key Path
Input/Output, Freq Ref In
Example
:ROSC:SOUR:TYPE SENS
Readback
Sense
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Internal
The internal reference is used.
Key Path
Input/Output, Freq Ref In
Example
:ROSC:SOUR:TYPE INT
Readback
Internal
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
External
The external reference is used.
Key Path
Input/Output, Freq Ref In
Example
:ROSC:SOUR:TYPE EXT
Readback
External
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
540
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Ext Ref Freq
This key tells the analyzer the frequency of the external reference. When the
external reference is in use (either because the reference has been switched to
External or because the Reference has been switched to Sense and there is a valid
external reference present) this information is used by the analyzer to determine the
internal settings needed to lock to that particular external reference signal. For the instrument to stay locked, the value entered must be within 5 ppm of the
actual external reference frequency. So it is important to get it close, or you risk an
unlock condition.
Note that this value only affects the instrument’s ability to lock. It does not affect any
calculations or measurement results. See "Freq Offset" in the Frequency section for
information on how to offset frequency values.
Key Path
Input/Output, Freq Ref In
Notes
Still available with Internal selected, to allow setup for when External is in use.
Preset
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to 10 MHz on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or
"Restore System Defaults->All"
Min
CXA: 10 MHz
EXA: 10 MHz or 13 MHz, depending on whether N9010A-R13 is licensed
MXA: 1 MHz
PXA: 1 MHz
Max
CXA: 10 MHz
EXA: 10 MHz
MXA: 50 MHz
PXA: 50 MHz
Default Unit
Hz
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
External Reference Lock BW
This control lets you adjust the External Reference phase lock bandwidth. This
control is available in some models of the X-Series.
The PXA variable reference loop bandwidth allows an external reference to be used
and have the analyzer close-in phase noise improved to match that of the reference.
This could result in an improvement of tens of decibels. The choice of “Wide” or
“Narrow” affects the phase noise at low offset frequencies, especially 4 to 400 Hz
offset. When using an external reference with superior phase noise, we recommend
setting the external reference phase-locked-loop bandwidth to wide (60 Hz), to take
advantage of that superior performance. When using an external reference with
inferior phase noise performance, we recommend setting that bandwidth to narrow
(15 Hz). In these relationships, inferior and superior phase noise are with respect to
−134 dBc/Hz at 30 Hz offset from a 10 MHz reference. Because most reference
sources have phase noise behavior that falls off at a rate of 30 dB/decade, this is
usually equivalent to −120 dBc/Hz at 10 Hz offset.
541
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Key Path
Input/Output, Freq Ref In
Scope
Mode Global
Dependencies
This key only appears in analyzers equipped with the required hardware.
Preset
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to Narrow on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or
"Restore System Defaults -> All"
State Saved
Saved in Input/Output state.
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
External Ref Coupling
Only appears with option ERC installed and licensed.
This function lets you couple the sweep system of the analyzer to the state of the
External Reference. If Normal is selected, data acquisition proceeds regardless of
the state of the External Reference. When you select Ext Ref Out Of Range Stops
Acquisition, the data acquisition (sweep or measurement) stops when either the
"521, External ref out of range" or the "503, Frequency Reference unlocked” error
message is asserted. Note that this will only take place if the Freq Ref In selection is
External.
With the acquisition stopped, the data display will stop updating (even if this occurs
in the middle of a sweep or measurement) and no data will be returned to a READ?
or MEASure? query; that is, these queries will not complete because the analyzer
will not respond to them. Furthermore, no response will be generated to a *WAI? or
*OPC? query. Proper SCPI sequences are shown below, which will always fail to return if the
acquisition stops during the requested sweep or measurement. Note that, for
predictable operation of this function, it is best to operate the analyzer in single
measurement mode (INIT:CONT OFF), because if operating in continuous mode, the
analyzer may respond to the above queries even after the acquisition stops, with
data left over from the previous acquisition. :INIT:CONT OFF
:INIT:IMM;*OPC?
-:INIT:CONT OFF
:INIT:IMM;*WAI?
-:INIT:CONT OFF
:READ?
-:INIT:CONT OFF
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
542
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
:MEASure?
When the acquisition ceases, in addition to the error condition(s) described above, a
popup error message will be generated informing you that the acquisition has
ceased due to an invalid external reference. This message will stay on the screen
while the acquisition is suspended.
If you press the Restart key this message will be taken off the screen and a new
acquisition will be attempted. If the External Reference problem persists the
message will re-appear. You can also remove the message by changing back to the
Normal setting of Sweep/Ext Ref Coupling, or by pressing Freq Ref In, Internal, or
Freq Ref In, Sense, or Restore Input/Output Defaults.
The setting of External Ref Coupling is persistent across power-cycling and is not
reset with a Preset. It is reset to the default state (Normal) when Restore
Input/Output Defaults is invoked, which will also restart normal data acquisition.
The detection of invalid external reference is under interrupt processing. If the
external reference becomes invalid then returns to valid in too short a time, no error
condition will be detected or reported and therefore the acquisition will not be
stopped.
Key Path
Input/Output, Freq Ref In
Mode
All
Preset
This setting is persistent: it survives power-cycling or a Preset and is reset with Restore
Input/Output defaults.
State Saved
Not saved in instrument state
Readback
Normal|Stop Acq
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
External Ref Coupling
Only appears with option ERC installed and licensed.
This function lets you couple the sweep system of the analyzer to the state of the
External Reference. If Normal is selected, data acquisition proceeds regardless of
the state of the External Reference. When you select Ext Ref Out Of Range Stops
543
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Acquisition, the data acquisition (sweep or measurement) stops when either the
"521, External ref out of range" or the "503, Frequency Reference unlocked” error
message is asserted. Note that this will only take place if the Freq Ref In selection is
External.
With the acquisition stopped, the data display will stop updating (even if this occurs
in the middle of a sweep or measurement) and no data will be returned to a READ?
or MEASure? query; that is, these queries will not complete because the analyzer
will not respond to them. Furthermore, no response will be generated to a *WAI? or
*OPC? query. Proper SCPI sequences are shown below, which will always fail to return if the
acquisition stops during the requested sweep or measurement. Note that, for
predictable operation of this function, it is best to operate the analyzer in single
measurement mode (INIT:CONT OFF), because if operating in continuous mode, the
analyzer may respond to the above queries even after the acquisition stops, with
data left over from the previous acquisition. :INIT:CONT OFF
:INIT:IMM;*OPC?
-:INIT:CONT OFF
:INIT:IMM;*WAI?
-:INIT:CONT OFF
:READ?
-:INIT:CONT OFF
:MEASure?
When the acquisition ceases, in addition to the error condition(s) described above, a
popup error message will be generated informing you that the acquisition has
ceased due to an invalid external reference. This message will stay on the screen
while the acquisition is suspended.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
544
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
If you press the Restart key this message will be taken off the screen and a new
acquisition will be attempted. If the External Reference problem persists the
message will re-appear. You can also remove the message by changing back to the
Normal setting of Sweep/Ext Ref Coupling, or by pressing Freq Ref In, Internal, or
Freq Ref In, Sense, or Restore Input/Output Defaults.
The setting of External Ref Coupling is persistent across power-cycling and is not
reset with a Preset. It is reset to the default state (Normal) when Restore
Input/Output Defaults is invoked, which will also restart normal data acquisition.
The detection of invalid external reference is under interrupt processing. If the
external reference becomes invalid then returns to valid in too short a time, no error
condition will be detected or reported and therefore the acquisition will not be
stopped.
Key Path
Input/Output, Freq Ref In
Mode
All
Preset
This setting is persistent: it survives power-cycling or a Preset and is reset with Restore
Input/Output defaults.
State Saved
Not saved in instrument state
Readback
Normal|Stop Acq
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
External Ref Coupling
Only appears with option ERC installed and licensed.
This function lets you couple the sweep system of the analyzer to the state of the
External Reference. If Normal is selected, data acquisition proceeds regardless of
the state of the External Reference. When you select Ext Ref Out Of Range Stops
Acquisition, the data acquisition (sweep or measurement) stops when either the
"521, External ref out of range" or the "503, Frequency Reference unlocked” error
message is asserted. Note that this will only take place if the Freq Ref In selection is
External.
With the acquisition stopped, the data display will stop updating (even if this occurs
in the middle of a sweep or measurement) and no data will be returned to a READ? or
545
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
MEASure? query; that is, these queries will not complete because the analyzer will
not respond to them. Furthermore, no response will be generated to a *WAI? or
*OPC? query. Proper SCPI sequences are shown below, which will always fail to return if the
acquisition stops during the requested sweep or measurement. Note that, for
predictable operation of this function, it is best to operate the analyzer in single
measurement mode (INIT:CONT OFF), because if operating in continuous mode, the
analyzer may respond to the above queries even after the acquisition stops, with
data left over from the previous acquisition. :INIT:CONT OFF
:INIT:IMM;*OPC?
-:INIT:CONT OFF
:INIT:IMM;*WAI?
-:INIT:CONT OFF
:READ?
-:INIT:CONT OFF
:MEASure?
When the acquisition ceases, in addition to the error condition(s) described above, a
popup error message will be generated informing you that the acquisition has
ceased due to an invalid external reference. This message will stay on the screen
while the acquisition is suspended.
If you press the Restart key this message will be taken off the screen and a new
acquisition will be attempted. If the External Reference problem persists the
message will re-appear. You can also remove the message by changing back to the
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
546
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Normal setting of Sweep/Ext Ref Coupling, or by pressing Freq Ref In, Internal, or
Freq Ref In, Sense, or Restore Input/Output Defaults.
The setting of External Ref Coupling is persistent across power-cycling and is not
reset with a Preset. It is reset to the default state (Normal) when Restore
Input/Output Defaults is invoked, which will also restart normal data acquisition.
The detection of invalid external reference is under interrupt processing. If the
external reference becomes invalid then returns to valid in too short a time, no error
condition will be detected or reported and therefore the acquisition will not be
stopped.
Key Path
Input/Output, Freq Ref In
Mode
All
Preset
This setting is persistent: it survives power-cycling or a Preset and is reset with Restore
Input/Output defaults.
State Saved
Not saved in instrument state
Readback
Normal|Stop Acq
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Output Config
Accesses keys that configure various output settings, like the frequency reference
output, trigger output and analog output.
Key Path
Input/Output
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
In ESA there was not a user interface to enable the Video Output (Analog Output), Trigger Output,
or Gate Output. In the X-Series each of these physical connectors requires configuration, thus
the user interface has been added for X-Series, along with the potential for an output you think
is always on to be switched off.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Trig Out (1 and 2)
Select the type of output signal that will be output from the rear-panel Trig 1 Out or
Trig 2 Out connectors.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config
Dependencies
The second Trigger output (Trig 2 Out) does not appear in all models; in models that do not
support it, the Trig 2 Out key is blanked, and sending the SCPI command for this output generates
an error, “Hardware missing; Not available for this model number” In models that do not support
the Trigger 2 output, this error is returned if trying to set Trig 2 Out and a query of Trig 2 Out
returns OFF.
Preset
Trigger 1: Sweeping (HSWP)
Trigger 2: Gate
This is unaffected by a Preset but is preset to the above values on a "Restore Input/Output
Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All"
547
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Polarity
Sets the output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector to trigger on either the
positive or negative polarity.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Preset
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to POSitive on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or
"Restore System Defaults->All"
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Off
Selects no signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP OFF
Readback
Off
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Sweeping (HSWP)
Selects the Sweeping Trigger signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out
connector when a measurement is made. This signal has historically been known as
"HSWP" (High = Sweeping), and is 5 V TTL level with 50 ohm output impedance.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP HSWP
Readback
Sweeping
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Measuring
Selects the Measuring trigger signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out
connector. This signal is true while the Measuring status bit is true.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP MEAS
Readback
Measuring
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
548
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Main Trigger
Selects the current instrument trigger signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2
Out connector.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP MAIN
Readback
Main Trigger
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Gate Trigger
Selects the gate trigger signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector.
This is the source of the gate timing, not the actual gate signal.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP GTR
Readback
Gate Trigger
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Gate
Selects the gate signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector. The
gate signal has been delayed and its length determined by delay and length
settings. When the polarity is positive, a high on the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out
represents the time the gate is configured to pass the signal.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP GATE
Readback
Gate
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Odd/Even Trace Point
Selects either the odd or even trace points as the signal to be output to the Trig 1
Out or Trig 2 Out connector when performing swept spectrum analysis. When the
polarity is positive, this output goes high during the time the analyzer is sweeping
past the first point (Point 0) and every other following trace point. The opposite is
true if the polarity is negative.
Key Path
549
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP OEV
Readback
Odd/Even
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Trig Out (1 and 2)
Select the type of output signal that will be output from the rear-panel Trig 1 Out or
Trig 2 Out connectors.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config
Dependencies
The second Trigger output (Trig 2 Out) does not appear in all models; in models that do not
support it, the Trig 2 Out key is blanked, and sending the SCPI command for this output
generates an error, “Hardware missing; Not available for this model number” In models that do
not support the Trigger 2 output, this error is returned if trying to set Trig 2 Out and a query of
Trig 2 Out returns OFF.
Preset
Trigger 1: Sweeping (HSWP)
Trigger 2: Gate
This is unaffected by a Preset but is preset to the above values on a "Restore Input/Output
Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All"
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Polarity
Sets the output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector to trigger on either the
positive or negative polarity.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Preset
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to POSitive on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or
"Restore System Defaults->All"
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Off
Selects no signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP OFF
Readback
Off
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
550
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Sweeping (HSWP)
Selects the Sweeping Trigger signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out
connector when a measurement is made. This signal has historically been known as
"HSWP" (High = Sweeping), and is 5 V TTL level with 50 ohm output impedance.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP HSWP
Readback
Sweeping
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Measuring
Selects the Measuring trigger signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out
connector. This signal is true while the Measuring status bit is true.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP MEAS
Readback
Measuring
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Main Trigger
Selects the current instrument trigger signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2
Out connector.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP MAIN
Readback
Main Trigger
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Gate Trigger
Selects the gate trigger signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector.
This is the source of the gate timing, not the actual gate signal.
551
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP GTR
Readback
Gate Trigger
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Gate
Selects the gate signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector. The
gate signal has been delayed and its length determined by delay and length
settings. When the polarity is positive, a high on the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out
represents the time the gate is configured to pass the signal.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP GATE
Readback
Gate
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Odd/Even Trace Point
Selects either the odd or even trace points as the signal to be output to the Trig 1
Out or Trig 2 Out connector when performing swept spectrum analysis. When the
polarity is positive, this output goes high during the time the analyzer is sweeping
past the first point (Point 0) and every other following trace point. The opposite is
true if the polarity is negative.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP OEV
Readback
Odd/Even
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Analog Out
This menu lets you control which signal is fed to the “Analog Out” connector on the
analyzer rear panel.
See "More Information" on page 552
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config
Preset
OFF
Preset
This is unaffected by Preset but is set to DAUDio on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or
"Restore System Defaults->All
State Saved
Saved in Input/Output State
Readback line
1-of-N selection [variable]
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
More Information
The table below gives the range for each output.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
552
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Analog
Out
Nominal
Range exc.
(10%
overrange)
Off
0V
Screen
Video
Scale Factor
Notes
0 – 1 V open
circuit
10%/division
8566 compatible
Log
Video
0– 1V
terminated
1/(192.66
dB/V)
dB referenced to mixer level, 1V out for –10 dBm at
the mixer.
Linear
Video
0– 1V
terminated
100%/V
Linear referenced to Ref Level, 1 V out for RF
envelope at the Ref Level.
Demod
Audio
(varies with analyzer setting)
Auto
Selects the Auto state for the Analog Output menu. In this state, the Analog Output
will automatically be set to the most sensible setting for the current mode or
measurement.
If you make a selection manually from the Analog Out menu, this selection will
remain in force until you change it (or re-select Auto), even if you go to a mode or
measurement for which the selected output does not apply.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Analog Out
Preset
ON
State Saved
Saved in Input/Output State
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
Off
Turns off the analog output.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Analog Out
Example
OUTP:ANAL OFF ! causes the analog output to be off
Readback Text
Off
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
Screen Video
Selects the analog output to be the screen video signal. In this mode, the predetector data is output to the Analog Out connector. The output looks very much
like the trace displayed on the analyzer’s screen, and depends on the Log/Lin display
Scale, Reference Level, and dB per division, but is not influenced by the selected
detector or any digital flatness corrections or trace post-processing (like Trace
Averaging).
553
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Note that this mode is similar to the Analog Output of the HP 8566 family and the
Video Out (opt 124) capability of the Keysight PSA analyzer (E444x), although there
are differences in the behavior. Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Analog Out
Example
OUTP:ANAL SVID
Dependencies
Because the Screen Video output uses one of the two IF processing channels, only one detector
is available while Screen Video is selected. All active traces will change to use the same
detector as the selected trace when Screen Video is activated. Screen Video output is not available while any EMI Detector is selected (Quasi Peak, RMS
Average or EMI Average), because these detectors use both IF processing channels. Consequently, if the user chooses an EMI Detector, there will be no Screen Video output.
The output holds at its last value during an alignment and during a marker count. After a sweep:
– If a new sweep is to follow (as in Continuous sweep mode), the output holds at its last value
during the retrace before the next sweep starts. If the analyzer is in zero-span, there is no
retrace, as the analyzer remains tuned to the Center Frequency and does not sweep. Therefore, in zero-span, the output simply remains live between display updates.
– If no new sweep is to follow (as in Single sweep mode), the output remains live, and continues
to show the pre-detector data This function depends on optional capability; the key will be blanked and the command will
generate an “Option not available” error unless you have Option YAV or YAS licensed in your
instrument. Couplings
Screen Video output changes while in FFT Sweeps, so for measurements that use exclusively FFT
Sweeps, or if the user manually chooses FFT Sweeps, the Screen Video output will look different
than it does in swept mode.
Readback Text
Screen Video
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
See "Backwards Compatibility:" on page 554, below.
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
Backwards Compatibility:
The Screen Video function is intended to be very similar to the 8566 Video Output
and the PSA Option 124. However, unlike the PSA, it is not always on; it must be
switched on by the Screen Video key. Also, unlike the PSA, there are certain
dependencies (detailed above) – for example, the Quasi Peak Detector is unavailable when Screen Video is on.
Furthermore, the PSA Option 124 hardware was unipolar and its large range was
padded to be exactly right for use as a Screen Video output. In the X-Series, the
hardware is bipolar and has a wider range to accommodate the other output
choices. Therefore, the outputs won’t match up exactly and users may have to
modify their setup when applying the X-Series in a PSA application.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
554
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Log Video (RF Envelope, Ref=Mixer Level)
Selects the analog output to be the log of the video signal. In this mode, the predetector data is output to the Analog Out connector with a Log scaling. The output is
referenced to the current level at the mixer, does not depend on display settings like
Reference Level or dB per division, and it is not influenced by the selected detector or
any digital flatness corrections or trace post-processing (like Trace Averaging), but
does change with input attenuation.
The output is designed so that full scale (1 V) corresponds to –10 dBm at the mixer. The full range (0–1 V) covers 192.66 dB ; thus, 0 V corresponds to –202.66 dBm at
the mixer.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Analog Out
Example
OUTP:ANAL LOGV
Dependencies
Because the Log Video output uses one of the two IF processing channels, only one detector is
available while Screen Video is selected. All active traces will change to use the same detector
as the selected trace when Log Video is activated. Log Video output is not available while any EMI Detector is selected (Quasi Peak, RMS Average
or EMI Average), because these detectors use both IF processing channels. Consequently, if the
user chooses an EMI Detector, there will be no Log Video output.
The output holds at its last value during an alignment, during a marker count, and during retrace
(after a sweep and before the next sweep starts).
This function depends on optional capability. The key will be blanked and the command will
generate an “Option not available” error unless you have Option YAV licensed in your instrument. Couplings
Log Video output changes while in FFT Sweeps, so for measurements that use exclusively FFT
Sweeps, or if the user manually chooses FFT Sweeps, the Log Video output will look different
than it does in swept mode.
Readback Text
Log Video
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
Linear Video (RF Envelope, Ref=Ref Level)
Selects the analog output to be the envelope signal on a linear (voltage) scale. In
this mode, the pre-detector data is output to the Analog Out connector with a Linear
scaling. The output is based on the current Reference Level, and is not influenced by
the selected detector or any digital flatness corrections or trace post-processing
(like Trace Averaging).
The scaling is set so that 1 V output occurs with an instantaneous video level equal
to the reference level, and 0 V occurs at the bottom of the graticule. This scaling
gives you the ability to control the gain without having another setup control for the
key. But it requires you to control the look of the display (the reference level) in order
to control the analog output.
This mode is ideal for looking at Amplitude Modulated signals, as the linear envelope
effectively demodulates the signal.
555
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Analog Out
Example
OUTP:ANAL LINV
Dependencies
Because the Linear Video output uses one of the two IF processing channels, only one detector is
available while Linear Video is selected. All active traces will change to use the same detector
as the selected trace when Log Video is activated. Linear Video output is not available while any EMI Detector is selected (Quasi Peak, RMS
Average or EMI Average), because these detectors use both IF processing channels. Consequently, if the user chooses an EMI Detector, there will be no Linear Video output.
The output holds at its last value during an alignment and during a marker count and during
retrace (after a sweep and before the next sweep starts).
This function depends on optional capability; the key will be blanked and the command will
generate an “Option not available” error unless you have Option YAV licensed in your instrument. Couplings
Linear Video output changes while in FFT Sweeps, so for measurements that use exclusively FFT
Sweeps, or if the user manually chooses FFT Sweeps, the Linear Video output will look different
than it does in swept mode.
Readback Text
Linear Video
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
Demod Audio
Selects the analog output to be the demodulation of the video signal. When Demod Audio is selected, the demodulated audio signal appears at this
output whenever the Analog Demod application is demodulating a signal or when
Analog Demod Tune and Listen is operating in the Swept SA measurement.
When Analog Out is in the Auto state, this output is auto-selected when in the
Analog Demod mode or when Analog Demod Tune and Listen is operating in the
Swept SA measurement. If any other Analog Output is manually selected when in the Analog Demod mode or
when Analog Demod Tune and Listen is operating in the Swept SA measurement, a
condition warning message appears.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Analog Out
Example
OUTP:ANAL DAUD
Dependencies
This key only appears if the Analog Demod application (N9063A), the N6141A or W6141A
application, or Option EMC is installed and licensed, otherwise the key will be blanked and the
command will generate an “Option not available” error. The output holds at its last value during an alignment and during a marker count. It is not held
between sweeps, in order for Tune and Listen to work properly.
When Demod Audio is the selected Analog Output:
– all active traces are forced to use the same detector.
– CISPR detectors (QPD, EMI Avg, RMS Avg) are unavailable
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
556
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Readback Text
Demod Audio
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00 (this was the default functionality, and there was no selection)
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.04.00
Digital Bus
This menu allows you to configure the LVDS connector located on the rear panel of
the instrument. It is a unidirectional link of real time data at a 90 MSa/s rate. The
ADC is sampling a 22.5 MHz IF.
The data that appears on this port is raw, uncorrected ADC samples, unless you
have option RTL. With option RTL, you get fully corrected I/Q data.
This connector will only be active when the Narrowband IF Path is currently in use.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
Bus Out On/Off
When Bus Out is on, all acquisitions are streamed to the output port including
acquisitions for internal purposes such as Alignment. The internal processing and
routing of acquisitions continues as usual and is unaffected by the state of Bus Out.
When Bus Out is off, no signal appears on the LVDS port.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Digital Bus
Scope
Mode Global
Preset
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to Off on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore
System Defaults -> All"
State Saved
Saved in Input/Output State
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.04.00
I/Q Cal Out
The Baseband I/Q "Cal Out" port can be turned on with either a 1 kHz or a 250 kHz
square wave. This can be turned on independent of the input selection. A Preset will
reset this to Off.
557
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config
Couplings
An I/Q Cable Calibration or an I/Q Probe Calibration will change the state of the Cal Out port as
needed by the calibration routine. When the calibration is finished the I/Q Cal Out is restored to
the pre-calibration state.
Preset
Off
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Range
1 kHz Square Wave|250 kHz Square Wave|Off
Readback Text
1 kHz|250 kHz|Off
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Saved State
Saved in instrument state
1 kHz Square Wave
Turns on the 1 kHz square wave signal at the Cal Out port. This choice is only
available with option BBA.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, I/Q Cal Out
Readback
I/Q 1kHz
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
250 kHz Square Wave
Turns on the 250 kHz square wave signal at the Cal Out port. This choice is only
available with option BBA.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, I/Q Cal Out
Readback
I/Q 250kHz
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Off
Turns off the signal at the Cal Out port. This choice is only available with option BBA.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, I/Q Cal Out
Readback
Off
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Aux IF Out
This menu controls the signals that appear on the SMA output on the rear panel
labeled “AUX IF OUT
The Aux IF Out functionality is only valid for RF and External Mixer inputs. When using
the External Mixing path, the Aux IF Out levels (for all three Options CR3, CRP, and
ALV) will be uncalibrated because the factory default Aux IF level was set to
accommodate the expected IF levels for the RF path.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
558
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config
Dependencies
The softkey does not appear in models that do not support the Aux IF Out.
Preset
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to OFF on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore
System Defaults->All”
State Saved
Saved in Input/Output state
Readback line
1-of-N selection [variable]
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
Off
In this mode nothing comes out of the “AUX IF OUT” connector on the rear panel. The connector appears as an open-circuit (that is, it is not terminated in any way).
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Aux IF Out
Example
OUTP:AUX OFF
causes the aux output type to be off
Readback Text
Off
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
Second IF
In this mode the 2nd IF output is routed to the rear panel connector. The annotation
on the key shows the current 2nd IF frequency in use in the analyzer.
The frequency of the 2nd IF depends on the current IF signal path as shown in the
table below:
IF Path Selected
Frequency of “Second IF” Output
10 MHz
322.5 MHz
25 MHz
322.5 MHz
40 MHz
250 MHz
140 MHz
300 MHz
The signal quality, such as signal to noise ratio and phase noise, are excellent in this
mode.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Aux IF Out
Example
OUTP:AUX SIF
causes the aux output type to be Second IF
559
Dependencies
Does not appear unless Option CR3 is installed.
Readback Text
Second IF
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Arbitrary IF
In this mode the 2nd IF output is mixed with a local oscillator and mixer to produce
an arbitrary IF output between 10 MHz and 75 MHz with 500 kHz resolution. The
phase noise in this mode will not be as good as in Second IF mode. The IF output frequency is adjustable, through an active function which appears on
the Arbitrary IF selection key, from 10 MHz to 75 MHz with 500 kHz resolution.
The bandwidth of this IF output varies with band and center frequency, but is about
40 MHz at the –3 dB width. When the output is centered at lower frequencies in its
range, signal frequencies at the bottom of the bandwidth will “fold”. For example,
with a 40 MHz bandwidth (20 MHz half-bandwidth), and a 15 MHz IF center, a signal
–20 MHz relative to the spectrum analyzer center frequency will have a relative
response of about –3 dB with a frequency 20 MHz below the 15 MHz IF center. This –
5 MHz frequency will fold to become a +5 MHz signal at the IF output. Therefore,
lower IF output frequencies are only useful with known band-limited signals.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Aux IF Out
Dependencies
Does not appear unless Option CRP is installed.
Readback Text
Arbitrary IF
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Aux IF Out
Scope
Mode Global
Preset
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to 70 MHz on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or
"Restore System Defaults->All”
State Saved
Saved in Input/Output State
Min
10 MHz
Max
75 MHz
Default Unit
Hz
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
Fast Log Video
In this mode the 2nd IF output is passed through a log amp and the log envelope of
the IF signal is sent to the rear panel. The open circuit output level varies by about
25 mV per dB, with a top-of-screen signal producing about 1.6 Volts. The output
impedance is nominally 50 ohms.
This mode is intended to meet the same needs as Option E4440A-H7L Fast Rise
Time Video Output on the Keysight E4440A PSA Series, allowing you to characterize
pulses with fast rise times using standard measurement suites on modern digital
scopes.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
560
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Aux IF Out
Example
OUTP:AUX LOGVideo
causes the aux output type to be Fast Log Video
Dependencies
Does not appear unless Option ALV is installed.
The output is off during an alignment but not during a marker count, and is not blanked during
retrace (after a sweep and before the next sweep starts).
Readback Text
Fast Log Video
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
I/Q Guided Calibration
Calibrating the Baseband I/Q ports requires several steps and manual connections.
The Guided Calibration interactively guides you through the required steps,
displaying diagrams to help with the connections. The steps vary depending on the
setup.
In the Guided Calibration windows, the date and time of the last calibration are
displayed. If any of the items listed are displayed in yellow, this indicates that the
calibration for that item is inconsistent with the latest calibration, and you should
complete the entire calibration process before you exit the calibration.
I/Q Isolation Calibration
The I/Q Isolation Calibration must be run before calibrating any port with either the
I/Q Cable Calibration or I/Q Probe Calibration. This calibration is performed with
nothing connected to any of the front panel I/Q ports. This is the first step in both the
I/Q Cable Calibration and the I/Q Probe Calibration.
561
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Marker
The Marker key accesses the Marker menu. A marker can be placed on a trace to
allow the value of the trace at the marker point to be determined precisely. The
functions in this menu include a 1-of-N selection of the control mode Normal, Delta,
Fixed, or Off for the selected marker.
The fundamental marker operation involves setting a Marker’s X-Axis value and then
reading the marker’s Y-Axis value. From the front panel you do this using the Marker
menu and the green marker readout in the upper right corner of the display. When Marker is pressed, if the selected marker is Off, pressing Marker sets it to
Normal and places it at the center of the screen on the trace determined by the
Marker Trace rules. If the selected marker is already On it will remain at the
frequency/time and amplitude to which it is already set, even if this means it will be
offscreen.
Markers can be on and not be visible because they are offscreen. This may occur if
you set a marker to a frequency outside of the current settings of the Start and Stop
frequencies, or in Spectrogram View, you place a marker on a Display Trace other
than 0. To move the marker on to the display, press Peak Search.
Markers may also be used in pairs to read the difference (or delta) between two data
points. They can be used in Marker Functions to do advanced data processing, or to
specify operating points in functions like Signal Track and N dB Points.
The command in the table below selects the marker and sets the marker control
mode as described under Normal, Delta, Fixed and Off, below. All interactions and
dependencies detailed under the key description are enforced when the remote
command is sent.
– See "Marker Control Mode" on page 562.
– See "Marker Backwards Compatibility" on page 563
Key Path
Front-panel key
Preset
OFF (all markers)
State Saved
The marker control mode is saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Marker Control Mode
There are four control modes for markers:
– Normal (POSition) - A marker that can be moved to any point on the X Axis by
specifying its X Axis value, and who's absolute Y Axis value is then the value of
the trace point at that X Axis value.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
562
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
– Delta (DELTa) - A marker that can be moved to any point on the X Axis by
specifying its X Axis offset from a reference marker, and whose absolute Y Axis
value is then the value of the trace point at that X Axis value.
– Fixed (FIXed) - A marker whose X Axis and Y Axis values may be directly or
indirectly specified by you, but whose Y Axis value remains fixed, once specified,
and does not follow the trace. Fixed markers are useful as reference markers for
Delta markers, as operands in a Peak Search operation, and as arbitrary
reference points settable by you. These markers are represented on the display
by an “X” rather than a diamond.
– Off (OFF) - A marker that is not in use.
In the Swept SA measurement, the Preset control mode is Off for all markers.
Marker Backwards Compatibility
In earlier analyzers, markers were position markers, which means that Normal and
Delta markers stayed at the same screen position when X Axis parameters were
changed. So a marker at center screen stayed at center screen even if Center
Frequency was changed (which means that the marker’s frequency changed). In the
X-Series, markers are value markers, which means that when the analyzer’s X Axis
settings are changed, the marker’s X Axis value in fundamental X Axis units remains
unchanged. For example, if you put a marker at a particular frequency, it will stay at
that frequency regardless of whether or not you change the Center Frequency of the
analyzer, even if that means that the marker ends up offscreen.
While this change resulted in an overall higher level of usability of the marker
system, there are some use cases where the user depends on the marker staying at
the center of the screen. The most common one is where the user turns on a marker
at center screen and uses it to measure the trace amplitude at the center frequency
or at a series of center frequencies, without the need to ever move the marker. In
the X-Series, to mimic the legacy behavior for this use case, the user must turn the
marker off and then back on after changing the center frequency of the analyzer. This causes the marker to reappear in the center of the screen.
Also as a result of the change from position markers to value markers, markers can
be at a frequency which is offscreen, whereas in the past, they were clipped to the
screen edges and hence were never offscreen. Users who depended on this clipping
behavior to force markers to the edges of the screen will have to rewrite their code. Furthermore, since markers could never be offscreen they always returned a valid
result. In the X-Series, markers which are offscreen return not a number as a result;
hence the potential now exists for not a number to be returned for a marker query.
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this
document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions.
563
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Normal
Sets the control mode for the selected marker to Normal and turns on the active
function for setting its value. If the selected marker was Off, it is placed at the center
of the screen on the trace specified by the marker’s Trace attribute. A Normal mode (POSition type) marker can be moved to any point on the X Axis by
specifying its X Axis value. Its absolute Y Axis value is then the value of the trace
point at that X Axis value.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
See the description under the “ Marker” key.
Couplings
The marker addressed by this command becomes the selected marker on the front panel.
State Saved
The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X Axis value are saved in instrument
state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Delta
Sets the control mode for the selected marker to Delta and turns on the active
function for setting its delta value. If the selected marker was Off, it is placed at the
center of the screen on the trace specified by the marker’s Trace attribute.
In Delta mode the marker result shows the relative result between the selected
(Delta) marker and its reference marker. A delta marker can be moved to any point
on the X Axis by specifying its X Axis offset from a reference marker. Its absolute Y
Axis value is then the value of the trace point at that X Axis value.
Key Path
Marker
Example
:CALC:MARK:MODE DELT sets marker 1 to Delta.
Notes
See the description under the “ Marker” key.
State Saved
The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X Axis value are saved in instrument
state
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
Previously, pressing Delta (or sending the CALC:MARK:MODE:DELTa command) always moved
the reference marker to the delta marker. Now it only does so if the marker was already a delta
marker.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
564
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Fixed
Sets the control mode for the selected marker to Fixed. A fixed marker is fixed in the
sense that it stays where you place it. It can be directly moved in both X and Y. It can
be moved with a Peak Search. It can also be indirectly moved by re-zeroing the delta
if it is a relative marker. If it is moved, it again becomes fixed at the X Axis point it
moved to and it has a Y-axis result that it took on when it moved there. If a Normal or
Delta marker is changed to Fixed it becomes fixed at the X Axis point it was at, and
with the Y-axis result it had when it was set to Fixed.
In Fixed mode the marker result shows:
– If no Marker Function is on, the absolute X Axis and Y axis value of the marker
– If a Marker Function is on, the X Axis value and the Y-axis function result the
marker had when it became fixed.
For more information, see "Fixed Marker X Axis Value" on page 565, "Fixed Marker Y
Axis Value" on page 565, and Fixed Marker Z Axis Value.
Fixed Marker X Axis Value
Key Path
Marker, Fixed
Example
:CALC:MARK:MODE FIX sets Marker 1 to Fixed.
Notes
See the description under “ Marker”.
Dependencies
– You cannot directly set the X or Y value of a Fixed marker which has a marker function turned
on. If an attempt is made to actually adjust it while a Marker Function is on, a warning
message is generated.
– You cannot directly set the Y value of a Fixed marker while Normalize is turned on. If an
attempt is made to do so while Normalize is on, a warning message is generated.
State Saved
The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X and Y Axis values are saved in
instrument state
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
In legacy analyzers, only a Reference marker could be Fixed, and it was always Fixed. Additionally it could not be noved. In the X-Series, any marker can be set to Fixed and can be
moved to any X or Y value.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Fixed Marker Y Axis Value
565
Key Path
Marker, Fixed
Example
:CALC:MARK:MODE FIX sets Marker 1 to Fixed.
Notes
See the description under the Marker key.
Dependencies
You cannot directly set the X or Y value of a Fixed marker which has a marker function turned on.
If an attempt is made to actually adjust it while a Marker Function is on, a warning message is
generated.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
State Saved
The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X and Y Axis values are saved in
instrument state
Default Unit
Depends on the current selected Y axis unit
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Fixed Marker Z Axis Value
The Marker Z position determines which of the 301 traces (0–300) the selected
marker is on. It cannot be set above the maximum trace in the Spectrogram window
and, unlike the Marker X position, will not move off screen in the Spectrogram
Window if the storage size is smaller than the number of traces that can be viewed.
If Spectrogram is on, the marker result block has a third line displaying the time
value of Marker Z. If the marker is a delta marker, the delta time value is displayed.
Although the Z Marker position can be moved to trace 0, this is not recommended, as
the current trace value is constantly being updated by new acquisitions and
therefore the Z time value for trace 0 is not completely registered until the trace is
completed.
Marker Z position is only available in the Spectrogram View
Key Path
Marker, Fixed
Example
:CALC:MARK2:MODE FIX sets Marker 2 to Fixed.
:CALC:MARK2:Z:POS 150 puts Marker 2 on Trace 150
Dependencies
Only appears in the Spectrogram view, otherwise blanked
State Saved
The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X, Y and Z Axis values are saved in
instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
A.07.01
Off
Turns off the selected marker.
In addition, Off removes the marker annunciation from the display, turns off any
active function and any marker function, and resets the following properties to their
default value:
– X Axis scale: Auto
– Band/Interval Span: 0
– Auto Trace: On
Off does not affect which marker is selected.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
See the description under the “ Marker” key.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
566
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
State Saved
The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) is saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Properties
Opens a menu used to set certain properties of the selected marker.
Key Path
Marker
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this
document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Relative To
Selects the marker that the selected marker will be relative to (its reference marker).
Every marker has another marker to which it is relative. This marker is referred to as
the “reference marker” for that marker. This attribute is set by the Marker,
Properties, Relative To key. The marker must be a Delta marker to make this
attribute relevant. If it is a Delta marker, the reference marker determines how the
marker is controlled and how its value is displayed. A marker cannot be relative to
itself.
Key Path
Marker, Properties
Notes
A marker cannot be relative to itself so that choice is grayed out. If the grayed out key is pressed,
an advisory message is generated.
Couplings
The act of specifying the selected marker’s reference marker makes the selected marker a Delta
marker. If the reference marker is off it is turned on in Fixed mode at the delta marker location.
Preset
The preset default “Relative To” marker (reference marker) is the next higher numbered marker
(current marker +1). For example, if marker 2 is selected, then it’s default reference marker is
marker 3. The exception is marker 12, which has a default reference of marker 1.
Set to the defaults by using Restore Mode Defaults. This is not reset by Marker Off, All Markers
Off, or Preset.
State Saved
567
Saved in instrument state. Not affected by Marker Off and hence not affected by Preset or power
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
cycle.
Min
1
Max
12
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
none
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Default (selected when Restore Mode Defaults is pressed): next higher numbered marker or 1 if
marker 12.
X Axis Scale
Accesses a menu that enables you to affect how the X Axis information for the
selected marker is displayed in the marker area (top-right of display) and the active
function area of the display, and how the marker is controlled. The available settings
for the X Axis Scale are Frequency, Period, Time, and Inverse Time.
See "More Information" on page 568.
Key Path
Marker, Properties
Preset
AUTO
Marker Preset (selected when a marker is turned Off): Auto (see below). In most measurements
the Auto settings results in Frequency being the preset readout.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
The X Axis Scale of a marker (Readout in legacy analyzers) now has only one value, not one value
for frequency domain and another value for time domain. The value changes (if in Auto) when the
domain of the trace it is on changes. This means that the default behaviors are identical, but if
the user changes the readout manually in swept and expects the default to remain in zero span,
there may be some backwards compatibility problems. As an example, in the old instruments, if
the user set Readout to Period in a swept span, and the instrument was set to zero span, the
readout changed to Time, the default for Zero Span. Now, it will stay in Period even in Zero Span
until the user changes it or sets it back to Auto.
Additionally, all choices for X Axis Scale are now always allowed. In legacy analyzers the choices
of X Axis Scale were restricted based on the domain the instrument was currently in. Since the
new behavior is less restrictive this should not show up as a backwards compatibility issue.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
More Information
The X Axis Scale of a marker is the scale of its X Axis value. This affects the units
displayed in the Marker Result block and used to specify the marker’s X Axis location.
The X Axis Scale is specified using the Marker, Properties, X Axis Scale key.
All markers in swept spans have both a time and frequency value. Which of these is
used for the result display, and for positioning the marker, depends on the X Axis
Scale setting. The X Axis Scale setting can be Frequency or Time, as well as the
reciprocal of either (Period or Inverse Time). There is also an Auto setting - when in
Auto, a marker’s X Axis Scale changes whenever the domain of the trace, upon
which it set, changes. All choices for X Axis Scale are allowed. Note that this
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
568
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
behavior differs from the behavior in previous instruments: previously the instrument
remembered a different X Axis Scale (formerly called Readout) for each domain, and
the choices of X Axis Scale were restricted. These restrictions were based on the
current domain of the instrument.
Auto
When in Auto, the X-Axis Scale is Frequency if the Marker Trace is a frequency
domain trace, Time if the Marker Trace is a time domain trace. When in Auto, if the
marker changes traces, or the domain of the trace the marker is on changes, the
auto result is re-evaluated. If the X Axis Scale is chosen manually, that Scale is used
regardless of the domain of the trace.
Key Path
Marker, Properties, X Axis Scale
Example
CALC:MARK2:X:READ:AUTO ON sets the marker 2 X-axis scaling to automatically select the
most appropriate units.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Frequency
Sets the marker X Axis scale to Frequency, displaying the absolute frequency of a
normal marker or the frequency of the delta marker relative to the reference marker.
Frequency is the auto setting for frequency domain traces.
If Frequency is selected for a time domain trace, all of the points in the trace will
show the same value. Attempting to use the knob or step keys to adjust the X Axis
value of the marker or entering an X Axis value from the numeric keypad or remotely
will have no effect but will generate no error.
Key Path
Marker, Properties, X Axis Scale
Example
CALC:MARK2:X:READ FREQ sets the marker 2 X Axis scale to Frequency.
Notes
1-of-N readback is Frequency
State Saved
The X Axis Scale setting is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Period
Sets the marker X Axis scale to Period, displaying the reciprocal of the frequency of
the marker, or the reciprocal of the frequency separation of the two markers in a
delta-marker mode. The units are those of time (sec, msec, etc). If the markers are at
the same frequency in a delta marker mode, the result will be the reciprocal of 0,
which is infinitely large. The display will show “---” and a SCPI query will return
infinity.
If Period is selected for a time domain trace, all of the points in the trace will show
the same value. Attempting to use the knob or step keys to adjust the X Axis value of
569
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
the marker or entering an X Axis value from the numeric keypad or remotely will have
no effect but will generate no error.
Key Path
Marker, Properties, X Axis Scale
Example
CALC:MARK2:X:READ PER sets the marker 2 X Axis scale to Period.
Notes
1-of-N readback is Period
State Saved
The X Axis Scale setting is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Time
Sets the marker X Axis scale to Time, displaying the time interval between a normal
marker and the start of a sweep or the time of the delta marker relative to the
reference marker. Time is the auto setting for time domain traces. In a delta-marker
mode it is the (sweep) time interval between the two markers.
Key Path
Marker, Properties, X Axis Scale
Example
CALC:MARK2:X:READ TIME sets the marker 2 X Axis Scale to Time..
Notes
1-of-N readback is Time
Couplings
Frequency domain traces taken in FFT mode have no valid time data. Therefore when Time is
selected for markers on such traces, the X Axis value is taken as the appropriate percentage of
the displayed sweep time, which is a calculated estimate.
State Saved
The X Axis Scale setting is saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Inverse Time
Sets the marker X Axis scale to Inverse Time, displaying the reciprocal time. It is
useful in a delta mode to show the reciprocal of (sweep) time between two markers.
This function is only meaningful when on a time domain trace and in the Delta
control mode. If the markers are at the same X Axis value, the time between them is
0, so the reciprocal of sweep time is infinitely large. The display will show “---” and a
SCPI query will return infinity.
Key Path
Marker, Properties, X Axis Scale
Example
:CALC:MARK2:X:READ ITIM sets the marker 2 X Axis scale to Inverse Time.
Notes
1-of-N readback is Inverse Time
Couplings
Frequency domain traces taken in FFT mode have no valid time data. Therefore when Inverse
Time is selected for markers on such traces, the X Axis value is undefined, shows as “---” and
returns not a number to a query.
State Saved
The X Axis Scale setting is saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
570
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Marker Trace
Selects the trace that you want your marker to be placed on. A marker is associated
with one and only one trace. This trace is used to determine the placement, result,
and X Axis Scale of the marker. All markers have an associated trace, even Fixed
markers; it is from that trace that they determine their attributes and behaviors, and
it is to that trace that they go when they become Normal or Delta markers.
– See "Auto Init On" on page 571.
– See "Auto Init Rules Flowchart" on page 572.
Key Path
Marker, Properties
Notes
A marker may be placed on a blanked and/or inactive trace, even though the trace is not visible
and/or updating.
An application may register a trace name to be displayed on the key instead of a trace number.
Couplings
The state of Marker Trace is not affected by the Auto Couple key.
If a Marker Trace is chosen manually, Auto Init goes to Off for that marker.
Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected.
Preset
Presets on Preset or All Markers Off
State Saved
The Marker Trace and state of Auto Init for each marker is saved in instrument state.
Min
1
Max
6
Readback line
[TraceN, Auto Init] or [TraceN, Manual] where N is the trace number to which the marker is
currently assigned.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Auto Init On
When Auto Init is true, the marker’s trace attribute is re-determined automatically by
the analyzer whenever the marker turns on (Normal, Delta or Fixed) from an Off
state. (The trace attribute is also determined for all markers that are on, whenever
Auto Init is turned on).
When the marker moves between traces the marker’s X position in trace points is
retained as it moves. For moving between active traces this generally means the xaxis value of the marker will not change. But for moving to or from an inactive trace,
the x-axis value will take on that of the new trace at the bucket the marker was on
the old trace (and is still on, on the new trace, since the bucket doesn’t change).
Note this is true even if the marker is off screen. Thus, a marker that is at the center
of the screen on the old trace stays at the center of the screen on the new trace. A
marker that is off screen one whole screen to the left on the old trace remains off
screen one whole screen to the left on the new trace – even if this means it will be at
negative time!
Marker Trace is set to 1, and Auto Init is set to On, on a Preset or All Markers Off.
571
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Auto Init Rules Flowchart
The following flowchart depicts the Auto Init rules:
This flowchart makes it clear that putting all lower-numbered traces in View is the
simplest way to specify which trace you want the markers to go to when they turn
on. For example, if you want all Markers to go to trace 2 when they turn on, put trace
1 in View.
Lines
When on, displays a vertical line of graticule height and a horizontal line of graticule
width, intersecting at the indicator point of the marker (that is, the center of the X or
the bottom tip of the diamond. The lines are blue in color.
If the marker is off screen the lines should be extended from the marker so that they
go thru the screen area if possible. This is really useful for off screen Fixed markers
as it lets you see their amplitude even though they are off the X Axis.
Key Path
Marker, Properties
Couplings
Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected.
Preset
OFF
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
572
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Marker Table
When set to On, the display is split into a measurement window and a marker data
display window. For each marker which is on, information is displayed in the data
display window, which includes the marker number, control mode, trace number, X
axis scale, X axis value, and the Y-axis result. Additional information is shown for
markers which have marker functions turned on.
Turning the Marker Table on turns the Peak Table off and vice versa.
Key Path
Marker
Preset
OFF
State Saved
The on/off state of the Marker Table is saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Marker Count
Accesses the marker count menu.
Key Path
Marker
Readback line
[On] if count on for the selected marker, [Off] if it is off.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Counter
Turns the marker frequency counter on and off. The selected marker is counted, and
if the selected marker is a delta marker and its reference marker is not fixed, the
reference marker is counted as well.
– See "Understanding the Marker Counter" on page 574.
Key Path
Marker, Marker Count
Notes
Fixed markers are not counted, but a Fixed marker will have a count stored in it if it is selected or
is the reference marker for the selected marker. The count already in the marker is stored when
the marker becomes fixed and if there is none or the marker moves (for example, Pk Search) it is
counted and stored after the next sweep.
If a Fixed marker has a count stored in it, that count will be displayed when the marker is
selected, and used as the reference count when that marker is a reference marker.
If a Fixed marker has a count stored in it, that count will be deleted if the marker X is adjusted.
If a Fixed marker has a count stored in it, and a Search function is performed using the Fixed
marker, while the counter is on, the count stored in the marker will be updated.
If a Fixed marker has a count stored in it, and is a reference marker, and the reference is moved
to a valid trace point by re-zeroing the delta (by pressing Delta again or sending the DELTa SCPI
command), while the counter is on, the count stored in the marker will be updated.
Notes
573
This command causes the specified marker to become selected.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Dependencies
Marker Count is unavailable (grayed out and Off) if the Gate function is on.
Couplings
If the selected marker is Off when the counter is turned on, the selected marker is set to Normal
and placed at center of screen on the trace determined by the Marker Trace rules.
If a marker that is OFF is selected while the counter is on, the counter remains on, but since the
marker is off, the count is undefined. In this case the analyzer will return not a number to a SCPI
count query.
The counter is turned OFF when the selected marker is turned OFF.
Preset
OFF
State Saved
The state of the counter (on/off) is saved in instrument state. In the case of Fixed markers, the
count stored in the marker is saved in instrument state.
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
In some legacy analyzers (e.g., the 8560 series) the FreqOffset value was applied to the Marker
Count. In others (e.g., ESA and PSA) it was not. The X-Series follows the ESA/PSA model and
does not apply Freq Offset to the Marker Count.
In ESA and PSA the reference marker for Delta markers was always counted. In the X-Series the
marker is counted for Normal and Delta markers; but for the reference marker, if it is a Fixed
marker, we use the count stored in the Fixed marker. This enhanced capability may require a
change to some users’ code and/or test procedures.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Understanding the Marker Counter
– See "Counting Off-screen Markers" on page 575.
– See "Delta Marker" on page 575.
– See "Fixed Markers" on page 575.
– See "More Information on "Counter"" on page 575.
Using the internal counter we can count the frequency of a marker, but we cannot
count while we are actually sweeping. So, once we are done with a sweep, we move
to the selected marker frequency and count that frequency. Then, if the marker is a
Delta marker, the count is also taken for its reference marker. The count is actually
performed by moving the LO to the frequency (or frequencies in the case of a delta
marker) we wish to count. The count is executed on a marker by marker basis and no
further count is taken until after the next sweep (even if the marker moves before
another sweep has completed).
The Marker Count is taken by tuning the instrument to the frequency of the marker
and counting the IF, with the instrument not sweeping. The count is adjusted for
display by adding or subtracting it (as appropriate) from the LO frequency, so that
you see a count that represents the signal frequency. This is true even if External
Mixing is on. Since all this happens between sweeps, you never see the instrument
retuning to do the counts.
If you wish to see the entered frequency of a counted marker it will appear in the
active function area when that marker is selected (for Fixed markers, you have to
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
574
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
press the Marker, Fixed key to select Fixed markers and then press it a second time
to view or adjust the x or y marker values).
Counting Off-screen Markers
If the selected marker is off the X-axis the instrument can still be tuned to the marker
(unless it is outside the current range of the instrument), so the count can still be
displayed. This means you can see a count for an off-screen marker even though
there may be no valid Y-value for the marker. If the marker frequency is outside the
range of the instrument, the display will show three dashes in the count block (---),
and not a number is returned to a SCPI count query.
Delta Marker
When a Delta Marker is selected while Marker Count is on:
1. If the reference marker is not a fixed marker, the display shows the difference
between the count of the selected marker and the count of the reference marker
2. If the reference marker is a fixed marker and there is a count stored in the marker
(because Marker Count was on when the marker became a fixed marker), the
display shows the difference between the count at the marker and the count
stored in the reference marker.
Marker Count works in zero span as well as in Swept SA. The instrument tunes to
the frequency of the selected marker, which, for active zero span traces, is simply
the center frequency of the analyzer.
Fixed Markers
Fixed markers have a count stored in them that is generally kept fixed and not
updated. If a fixed marker is selected, or used as a reference, the signal at the
marker frequency is not counted; rather the stored count is seen or used as the
reference. The count is stored, if Count is on, when the marker becomes fixed or
when, while fixed, the marker is moved by re-zeroing the reference (if it is the
reference marker) or via a peak search (since both of these, by definition, use valid
trace data). The count stored in a Fixed marker is lost if the counter is turned off, if the
marker is moved to an inactive trace, or if the marker is moved by adjusting its xvalue.
More Information on "Counter"
When the counter is on, the count (or the delta count) for the selected marker is
displayed.
The invalid data indicator (*) will turn on until the completion of the first count.
Marker Count frequency readings are corrected using the Freq Offset function (in
some previous analyzers, they were not). Note however that Marker Delta readings
are not corrected, as any offset would be applied to both.
In zero span on active traces the counter continues to function, counting any signal
near the center frequency of the analyzer.
575
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
No signal farther from the marker frequency than the Res BW will be seen by the
counter.
The above command turns on or off the frequency counter. If the specified marker
number in the command is not the selected marker, it becomes the selected marker.
If the specified marker number is not on, FCOunt ON sets it to Normal and places it at
center of screen on the trace determined by the Marker Trace rules. Once the
marker count is on, it is on for any selected marker, not just for the one used in the
command. A 1 is returned to the state query only if marker count is on and the
specified number is the selected marker. The invalid data indicator (*) will turn on
until the completion of the first count but this does not keep a value from being
returned.
Gate Time
Controls the length of time during which the frequency counter measures the signal
frequency. Longer gate times allow for greater averaging of signals whose frequency
is “noisy”, though the measurement takes longer. If the gate time is an integer
multiple of the length of a power-line cycle (20 ms for 50 Hz power, 16.67 ms for 60
Hz power), the counter rejects incidental modulation at the power line rate. The
shortest gate time that rejects both 50 and 60 Hz modulation is 100 ms, which is the
value chosen in Auto, or on Preset or when Auto Couple is pressed.
The start time of the Gate Time of the counter must be controlled by the same
trigger parameters as controls the sweep. Thus, if the Trigger is not in Free Run, the
counter gate must not start until after the trigger is received and delayed.
Key Path
Marker Function, Marker Count
Notes
When Auto Couple is pressed, Gate Time is set to 100 ms.
Notes
This command causes the specified marker to become selected.
Preset
100 ms
ON
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Min
1 us
Max
500 ms
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Couple Markers
When this function is On, moving any marker causes an equal X Axis movement of
every other marker which is not Fixed or Off. By “equal X Axis movement” we mean
that we preserve the difference between each marker’s X Axis value (in the
fundamental x-axis units of the trace that marker is on) and the X Axis value of the
marker being moved (in the same fundamental x-axis units).
Note that Fixed markers do not couple. They stay where they were while all the
other markers move. Of course, if a Fixed marker is being moved, all the non-fixed
markers do move with it.
This may result in markers going off screen.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
576
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Key Path
Marker
Preset
Off, presets on Mode Preset and All Markers Off
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
All Markers Off
Turns off all markers. See Marker, "Off " on page 566.
577
Key Path
Marker
Couplings
Sets the selected marker to 1.
Preset
n/a.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Marker Function
The Marker Function key opens up a menu of softkeys that allow you to control the
Marker Functions of the instrument. Marker Functions perform post-processing
operations on marker data. Band Functions are Marker Functions that allow you to
define a band of frequencies around the marker. The band defines the region of data
used for the numerical calculations. These marker functions also allow you to
perform mathematical calculations on trace and marker data and report the results
of these calculations in place of the normal marker result.
Unlike regular markers, marker function markers are not placed directly on the
trace. They are placed at a location which is relative to the result of the function
calculation.
– See "More Information" on page 578.
– See "Fixed marker functions" on page 579.
– See "Interval Markers" on page 579.
Key Path
Front-panel key
Dependencies
Fixed markers: It is not possible to change the Band Function for a Fixed marker; so all of the
Band Function keys are grayed out for a Fixed marker.
If a marker function was already on when the marker became Fixed, then the selected Band
Function is shown but cannot be changed. Therefore, you cannot directly set the X or Y value of a
Fixed marker that has a marker function turned on. To turn off the function, turn off the marker.
Preset
OFF
State Saved
The band function for each marker is saved in instrument state
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
The introduction of adjustable-width Band Functions in the X-Series fundamentally changes the
way Band Power markers are controlled. See the section entitled "Band Function Backwards
Compatibility" on page 579 below for a complete discussion of programming Band Functions in a
backwards compatible fashion.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
More Information
The units to be used for displaying Marker Function results in Delta mode vary
depending on what is the reference marker and what it is referenced to.
Marker Functions are different from Measurements, which automatically perform
complex sequences of setup, data acquisition, and display operations in order to
measure specified signal characteristics. Marker Functions are specified for each
individual marker and may be turned on individually for each marker.
The Marker Fctn menu controls which marker functions are turned on and allows you
to adjust setup parameters for each function. The Marker Functions are Marker
Noise, Band/Interval Power, and Band/Interval Density, only one of which can be on
for a given marker.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
578
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
If the selected marker is off, pressing Marker Fctn sets it to Normal and places it at
the center of the display on the trace determined by the Marker Trace rules.
However, if the selected marker was Off, Marker Function Off had to be the selected
function, and it remains so even after the marker is thus turned on, although you may
then change it.
Fixed marker functions
In the case of a fixed marker, it is not possible to turn on or change a band function.
This is because a Fixed marker holds the value it had when it became fixed; the trace
it was on may keep on changing, so the function value, which depends on trace data,
could not be calculated on an ongoing basis.
It is possible to have a Marker Function on for a Fixed marker, in the case where a
function was already on when the marker became Fixed. In this case the function
value will be retained in the marker. It is also possible to have a Marker Function on
for a Fixed marker in the case when the marker was off and was turned on as Fixed
because Delta was pressed to create a reference marker - in which case the marker
function, marker function width, Y Axis value and marker function result that the
Delta marker had when Delta was pressed are copied into the Fixed marker. If Delta
is pressed again, causing the fixed reference marker to move to the delta marker’s
position, the marker function, marker function width, Y Axis value and marker
function result that the Delta marker had when Delta was pressed are again copied
into the fixed reference marker.
If a Marker Function is on for a Fixed marker, the marker’s reported value is derived
by the function. Therefore you cannot directly set the X or Y value of a Fixed marker
which has a marker function turned on. Indirect setting as detailed above or when a
Peak Search is performed is allowed, as the Fixed marker is always placed on a trace
and can derive its function value from the trace at the moment when it is placed.
Interval Markers
What is an interval marker? The band power marker computes the total power within
a span in a nonzero span. The results computation must include the RBW. The
interval power marker measures the average power across some time interval in
zero span.
Interval Density is defined to be Interval Power divided by Bn. Bn is the noise
bandwidth of the RBW filter, as noted and used within the Band Power computation.
Band Function Backwards Compatibility
To define the Band Power function, the ESA and PSA analyzers used Delta Marker
functionality with two markers, for example, Marker 1 and its Reference Marker, as
shown below:
579
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
e
The marker modes known as Span Pair and Delta Pair (Band Pair in ESA) were used
to set two markers for the primary purpose of defining the band of a Band Power
function. The two markers were set by adjusting their span and centerpoint (Span
Pair mode) or by adjusting their locations independently to directly define the Start
and Stop edges of the band (Band Pair/Delta Pair modes).
In the X-Series, the introduction of adjustable-width Band Functions fundamentally
changes the way Band Power markers are controlled, by using a single marker to
completely define the function, as shown below:
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
580
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
. In the X-Series the marker itself has a width attribute, which you set using the Band
Span function. The marker shows “wings” that define the edges of the band in which
the Band Power is being measured. You only need one marker, not a pair of markers,
to completely define a Band Power function (making it possible to do Delta Band
Power, which PSA and ESA could not do).
Additional control functions of Band Left and Band Right are provided for the case
when you need to precisely set the band edges. Note that the marker itself always
remains centered in the band.
To map the old Span Pair and Band Pair/Delta Pair functions to the X-Series for code
compatibility, aliases and compatibility commands were added. Since Span Pair and
Band Pair/Delta Pair were primarily used for making band power measurements, the
aliases are provided for setting the parameters of a Band Function. If the user was
using the old commands for anything other than Band Power these aliases will likely
not yield compatible results.
For example, some users took advantage of the fact that the Band Pair commands
let you arbitrarily set the frequency (time) of a delta marker and its non-fixed
reference marker. In these cases, which had nothing to do with Band Power, the
new commands will not be compatible. For these use cases, you must use two
markers and position each using the CALC:MARK:X commands, since “marker pairs”
no longer exist.
581
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Note that all of the alias commands described below cause the specified marker to
become selected.
Band changes with analyzer settings
In the past, when a marker pair was used to set the width of the band for Band
Power, the markers held their screen positions when analyzer frequency settings
such as Span changed. The result of this was that as the Span changed, the
frequency difference and hence the width of the band changed as well. In the XSeries, as a result of the change from position markers to value markers, the width of
the band remains constant as frequency settings of the analyzer change.
Offscreen Markers
As a result of the change from position markers to value markers, markers can be at
a frequency which is offscreen, whereas in the past, they were clipped to the screen
edges and hence were never offscreen. Users who depended on this clipping
behavior by setting Band Span to a high value in order to force Band Power markers
to the left and right edges of the screen will have to rewrite their code. Furthermore, since markers could never be offscreen, Band Power always returned
a valid result. In the X-Series, if either edge of the Band is offscreen, Band Power
returns not a number as a result.
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this
document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Marker Noise
Turns on the Marker Noise function for the selected marker, making it a noise
marker. If the selected marker is off, it is turned on in Normal mode and located at
the center of the screen.
When Marker Noise is selected while in the Marker Function Off state, the Band
Span or Interval Span is initialized to 5% of the screen width.
When Marker Noise is on, the marker’s Y Axis Result is the average noise level,
normalized to a 1 Hz noise power bandwidth, in the band specified under the Band
Adjust key.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
582
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
– See "More Information" on page 583.
– See "Off-trace Markers" on page 583.
Key Path
Marker Function
Example
CALC:MARK:FUNC NOIS turns on marker 1 as a noise marker.
CALC:MARK:FUNC? returns the current marker function for the marker specified. In this case it
returns the string: NOIS.
CALC:MARK:Y? returns the y-axis value of the Marker Noise function for marker 1 (if Marker
Noise is ON for marker 1). Note that the delta value when the Y axis unit is Watt is the square of
the delta value when the Y axis unit is Volt. For example, when the percent ratio with Y axis unit in
Volt is 0.2, the percent ratio with Y axis unit in Watt will be 0.22 = 0.04. When you read the value
out remotely you have to know whether your Y Axis Unit is log (dB), linear (V or A), or power (W).
Notes
See the description under the “"Marker Function" on page 578” key.
Dependencies
Fixed markers: It is not possible to change the Band Function for a Fixed marker; so all of the
Band Function keys are grayed out for a Fixed marker.
Couplings
Average detector and Power Averaging auto selected when Marker Noise on
If the selected (specified) marker is off, selecting Marker Noise via front panel or SCPI will turn
the marker on.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
More Information
To guarantee accurate data for noise-like signals, a correction for equivalent noise
bandwidth is made by the analyzer. The Marker Noise function accuracy is best
when the detector is set to Average or Sample, because neither of these detectors
will peak-bias the noise. The tradeoff between sweep time and variance of the result
is best when Average Type is set to Power Averaging. Therefore, Auto coupling
chooses the Average detector and Power Averaging when Marker Noise is on.
Though the Marker Noise function works with all settings of detector and Average
Type, using the positive or negative peak detector gives less accurate measurement
results.
Off-trace Markers
If a Normal or Delta noise marker is so near to the left or right edge of the trace that
some of the band is off the trace, then it uses only that subset of the Band Width that
is on-trace. If the marker itself is off-trace, its value becomes undefined.
Neither band/interval power nor band/interval density markers are defined if any
part of the band is off-trace (unless they are Fixed with a stored function value in
them), except that when the edges of the bandwidth are trivially off-screen, due to
mathematical limitations in the analyzer or in the controlling computer, the result
will still be considered valid.
Band/Interval Power
Turns on the Band/Interval Power function for the selected marker. If the selected
marker is off it is turned on in Normal marker and located at the center of the screen.
583
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
When Band/Interval Power is selected while in the Marker Function Off state, the
Band Span or Interval Span is initialized to 5% of the screen width.
If the detector mode for the detector on the marker’s trace is set to Auto, the
average detector is selected. If the Average type is set to Auto, Power Averaging is
selected. Other choices for the detector or Average type will usually cause
measurement inaccuracy.
Key Path
Marker Function
Example
CALC:MARK:FUNC BPOW turns on marker 1 as a band power marker.
CALC:MARK2:FUNC? returns the current setting of marker function for marker 2. In this case it
returns the string: BPOW.
CALC:MARK:Y? returns the y-axis value of the Band Power function for marker 1. Note that the
delta value when the Y axis unit is Watt is the square of the delta value when the Y axis unit is
Volt. For example, when the percent ratio with Y axis unit in Volt is 0.2, the percent ratio with Y
axis unit in Watt will be 0.22 = 0.04. When you read the value out remotely you have to know
whether your Y Axis Unit is log (dB), linear (V or A), or power (W).
Notes
See the description under the “"Marker Function" on page 578” key, above.
Dependencies
Fixed markers: It is not possible to change the Band Function for a Fixed marker, so all of the
Band Function keys are grayed out for a Fixed marker.
Couplings
If the detector mode for the detector on the marker’s trace is set to Auto, the average detector is
selected. If the Average type is set to Auto, Power Averaging is selected.
If the selected (specified) marker is off, selecting Band Power via thefront panel or SCPI will turn
the marker on.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Band/Interval Density
Turns on the Band/Interval Density function for the selected marker. If the selected
marker is off it is turned on in Normal marker mode and located at the center of the
screen.
When Band/Interval Density is selected while in the Marker Function Off state, the
Band Span or Interval Span is initialized to 5% of the screen width.
– See "More Information" on page 585.
– See "What is band/interval density? " on page 585
Key Path
Marker Function
Example
CALC:MARK:FUNC BDEN turns on marker 1 as a band density marker.
CALC:MARK:FUNC? returns the current setting of band function for the marker specified. In this
case it returns the string: BDEN.
CALC:MARK:Y? returns the y-axis value of the Band Density function for marker 1. Note that the
delta value when the Y axis unit is Watt is the square of the delta value when the Y axis unit is
Volt. For example, when the percent ratio with Y axis unit in Volt is 0.2, the percent ratio with Y
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
584
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
axis unit in Watt will be 0.22 = 0.04. When you read the value out remotely you have to know
whether your Y Axis Unit is log (dB), linear (V or A), or power (W).
Notes
The zero-width case is treated as one bucket wide although it shows a width of 0.
When the trace the marker is on crosses domains, the width crosses domains as well, to remain
the same percentage of the trace.
Notes
See the description under the “"Marker Function" on page 578” key.
Dependencies
Fixed markers: It is not possible to change the Band Function for a Fixed marker, so all of the
Band Function keys are grayed out for a Fixed marker.
Couplings
If the detector mode for the detector on the marker’s trace is set to Auto, the average detector is
selected. If the Average type is set to Auto, Power Averaging is selected.
If the selected (specified) marker is off, selecting Band Density via front panel or SCPI will turn
the marker on.
State Saved
n/a.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
More Information
It may seem like the band density marker function is exactly like a function of a noise
marker with variable width. But they are somewhat different. The Noise markers
assume that the signal to be measured is noise-like. Based on this assumption, we
can actually make reasonable measurements under very nonideal conditions: any
detector may be used, any averaging type, any VBW. In contrast, the Band Power
and Band Density markers make no assumption about the statistics of the signal.
If the detector mode for the detector on the marker’s trace is set to Auto, the
average detector is selected. If the Average type is set to Auto, Power Averaging is
selected. Other choices for the detector or Average type will usually cause
measurement inaccuracy.
What is band/interval density?
On frequency domain traces, the average density across a band is the total band
power divided by the bandwidth over which it is measured.
On time domain traces, interval density is the average power in the interval divided
by the noise bandwidth of the RBW of the trace.
Marker Function Off
Turns off band functions for the selected marker.
585
Key Path
Marker Function
Example
:CALC:MARK:FUNC OFF turns off marker functions for marker 1
Notes
See the description under the "Marker" on page 562 key, above.
Dependencies
Fixed markers: It is not possible to change the Band Function for a Fixed marker, so all of the
Band Function keys are grayed out for a Fixed marker, including Off
Couplings
Turning off the marker function has no effect on the band span nor does it turn the marker off.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Band Adjust
Opens a menu that lets you set the width or left or right edges of the band.
It is legal to change the width of the band even if there is no marker function on.
Generally this can only happen by sending the SCPI command since access to the
menu is restricted if no marker function is on.
Key Path
Marker Function
Dependencies
If the marker is Fixed, Band Adjust is grayed out.
If the marker function is Off, Band Adjust is grayed out.
Couplings
If any of the Band Adjust functions are the active function, the wings and arms of the selected
marker display in green; otherwise they display in white.
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
If any of the band adjust SCPI commands (including the legacy compatibility commands
documented under "Band Function Backwards Compatibility" on page 579) are sent while the
marker function is off, they will be accepted and the value stored. If sent while the marker is off,
they will be accepted and ignored.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Band/Interval Span
Sets the width of the span for the selected marker.
It is legal to change the width of the band even if there is no marker function on.
Generally this can only happen by sending the SCPI command since access to the
menu is restricted if no marker function is on.
In the table below, sweep_width = max(1,sweep_points–1) and sweep_points is the
number of sweep points, set in the Sweep menu.
Key Path
Marker Function, Band Adjust
Notes
Units are those of the trace’s domain, Hz for frequency domain, s for time domain.
Couplings
Changing the Band/Interval Span necessarily changes the Band/Interval Left and Band/Interval
Right values
Band/Interval Span is set to 0 when the marker is turned off
Band/Interval Span is set to 5% of span when any marker function is turned on if and only if it is
zero at that time
Preset
If 0, set to 5% of span, when a marker function is turned on
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
0 Hz
Max
Infinity. Unlike legacy analyzers, where the markers were forced to be on screen, X-Series
marker values are not limited and do not clip
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
586
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Band/Interval Left
Sets the left edge frequency or time for the band of the selected marker. The right
edge is unaffected.
It is legal to change the width of the band even if there is no marker function on.
Generally this can only happen by sending the SCPI command since access to the
menu is restricted if no marker function is on.
In the table below, sweep_width = max(1,sweep_points–1) and sweep_points is the
number of sweep points, set in the Sweep menu.
Key Path
Marker Function, Band Adjust
Notes
Units are those of the trace’s domain, Hz for frequency domain, s for time domain. When the left
edge is moved, the right edge stays anchored; thus, the marker’s frequency will change.
Sending this command selects the subopcoded marker
The unit of the parameter must match the current domain of the trace the selected marker is on,
or an invalid suffix error will be generated.If no unit is sent the fundamental unit for the trace
domain will be used (Hz for freq domain traces, s for time domain traces).
Note that all the values provided in this table are only valid for frequency domain traces. If the
current domain of the trace is time domain, values and unit will be different. In frequency domain,
the Preset value is dependent on the frequency range of the instrument. The default value 1.3245
GHz is appropriate only if the instrument is a 26.5 GHz instrument (Option 526). In a 26.5 GHz
Instrument, the default span is 26.49 GHz, so 5% of the span corresponds to 1.3245 GHz.
Couplings
Changing the Band/Interval Left necessarily changes the Band/Interval Span and Band/Interval
Center values.
Band/Interval Span is set to 0 when the marker is turned off so that means Band/Interval Left is
set to the center value at this time.
Band/Interval Span is set to 5% of span when any marker function is turned on if and only if it is
zero at that time.
Preset
If 0, Band/Interval Span is set to 5% of span, when a marker function is turned on, which affects
Band/Interval Left.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
0 Hz
Max
Infinity. Unlike legacy analyzers, where the markers were forced to be on screen, X-Series
marker values are not limited and do not clip
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Band/Interval Right
Sets the right edge frequency or time for the band of the selected marker. The left
edge is unaffected
In the table below, sweep_width = max(1,sweep_points–1) and sweep_points is the
number of sweep points, set in the Sweep menu.
It is legal to change the width of the band even if there is no marker function on.
Generally this can only happen by sending the SCPI command since access to the
menu is restricted if no marker function is on.
587
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Key Path
Marker Function, Band Adjust
Notes
Units are those of the trace’s domain, Hz for frequency domain, s for time domain. When the right
edge is moved, the left edge stays anchored; thus, the marker’s frequency will change.
Sending this command selects the subopcoded marker
The unit of the parameter must match the current domain of the trace the selected marker is on,
or an invalid suffix error will be generated. If no unit is sent the fundamental unit for the trace
domain will be used (Hz for freq domain traces, s for time domain traces).
Note that all the values provided in this table are only valid for frequency domain traces. If the
current domain of the trace is time domain, values and unit will be different. In frequency domain,
the Preset value is dependent on the frequency range of the instrument. The default value 1.3245
GHz is appropriate only if the instrument is a 26.5 GHz instrument (Option 526). In a 26.5 GHz
Instrument, the default span is 26.49 GHz, so 5% of the span corresponds to 1.3245 GHz.
Couplings
Changing the Band/Interval Right necessarily changes the Band/Interval Span and Band/Interval
Center values
Band/Interval Span is set to 5% of span when any marker function is turned on if and only if it is
zero at that time
Preset
If 0, Band/Interval Span is set to 5% of span, when a marker function is turned on, which affects
Band/Interval Right
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
0 Hz
Max
Infinity. Unlike legacy analyzers, where the markers were forced to be on screen, X-Series
marker values are not limited and do not clip
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Band Span Auto/Man
Determines whether the Band Span for Marker Noise will track the analyzer’s Span.
Band Span is initialized as specified above, under Band/Interval Span. Subsequently, if the analyzer’s Span is changed, the effect on Band Span depends
on the Auto/Man setting of Band Span:
– If in Auto, then whenever the Span changes, the Band Span for Marker Noise is
changed to 5% of the new Span.
– If in Man, the Band Span does not change when the Span is changed.
The Band Span is set to 5% regardless of whether or not this would place part of the
Band offscreen. The Marker Noise function is well able to function with part of the
band offscreen.
This function only affects Marker Noise. The key only appears when Maker Noise is
the Marker Function for the selected marker.
Note that, if in Zero Span, “Span” should be replaced by “Sweep Time” and “Band
Span” should be replaced by “Band Interval”, in the above specification and in the
table below:
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
588
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Key Path
Marker Function, Band Adjust
Dependencies
This only appears when the Marker Function for the selected marker is Marker Noise. If the SCPI
command is sent to a marker that does not have Marker Noise selected, it is honored but of
course, the user will not see any indication of this.
Couplings
When Auto Band Span is turned on, it immediately adjusts the band span to 5% of the Span.
If the Band Span is changed, either by the Band/Interval Span key, the Band/Interval Left key, or
the Band/Interval Right key, or the equivalent SCPI commands, this function is set to Man.
This function is set to Auto on Preset and when the Auto Couple key is pressed.
This function is set to Auto when Marker Noise is turned on, if the value of Band/Interval Span is
0. Note that this test must be performed before Band/Interval Span is initialized, because
Band/Interval Span is initialized to 5% if Band/Interval Span is 0 when the marker function is
turned on.
Sending this command selects the subopcoded marker.
Preset
Auto
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
Initial S/W Revision
In legacy analyzers, the Noise Marker had a width that was always equal to 5% of the span. But
in the X-Series it is possible for the user to change the span of the Marker Noise band using
the Band Adjust function. To preserve the legacy behavior, the Band Span Auto/Man function
is provided. When it is in Auto, which it is by default, the Maker Noise band is always held at
5% of Span, even if the Span changes. When the user adjusts the Marker Noise Band Span,
Band Span Auto/Man is set to Manual. So the legacy behavior is preserved, but now the user
can set the Marker Noise Span as well and that setting will be preserved when Span is
changed.
Prior to A.02.00
Measure at Marker
This key and all the keys in this menu only appear with the N6141A or W6141A
application or when Option EMC is installed and licensed.
Key Path
Marker Function
Dependencies
The Measure at Marker menu is not available in Spectrogram. Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Measure at Marker
When this key is pressed, the analyzer executes one Measure at Marker function and
then returns. Measure at Marker goes to the frequency of the selected marker and
takes a reading with each of the three detectors selected in the Detectors menu,
using the dwell times specified there, then displays the readings in a window on the
display, using the current Y-Axis Unit.
When the Measure at Marker is complete, the analyzer restores all settings to their
pre-Measure-at-Marker values and normal sweeps resume.
589
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker
Dependencies
If BW & Avg Type is in an Autocoupled state, the (up to three) measurements taken by Measure
at Marker are taken with Auto Coupled settings for the functions in the BW menu, even if those
functions are in manual. Couplings
If the specified Marker is not on, the analyzer turns it on at the center of the screen and does a
peak search before performing the function. Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
OPC goes true when the measurement is complete
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Measure at Marker presents its information in a separate window that normally
appears in the upper right of the display, but it can be repositioned to the upper left.
The Measure at Marker box shows the detector name for the selected detectors and
“Off” for those not selected. The names used are:
Name
Detector
Normal
Normal
Peak
Peak
Sample
Sample
Neg Peak
Negative Peak
RMS
Average detector with Power Average
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
590
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Name
Detector
(RMS)
Log Avg
Average detector with Log-Pwr Average
VoltageAvg
Average detector with Voltage Average
Quasi Peak
Quasi Peak
EMI Avg
EMI Average
RMS Avg
RMS Average
The marker frequency is shown in the “Freq” field. The measured value is shown for
all detectors except those that are “Off.” For these, --- is displayed. The current YAxis unit is used, and the precision that is used for the detector value displays is
exactly the same as for the Marker. The precision used for the Frequency display is
six significant digits.
The sequence of steps in the measurement is as follows:
– Any sweep in progress is aborted.
– If in Zero Span, the Center Frequency is used as the frequency at which to take
the reading, since in Zero Span, all markers are by definition at the Center
Frequency
– If not in Zero Span:
– If the selected marker is Off, it is first turned on in the center of the screen and
a peak search performed. – If the selected marker is on, but offscreen, it is first moved to the center of the
screen and a peak search performed. .
– A frequency “zoom” function is performed to determine the frequency of the
selected marker to the required precision. If you are operating with too large
a value of (span/sweep points) then the Measure at Marker window will not
display, but instead an advisory message, “Span per point too large, narrow
span or increase RBW or number of points”.This means you have chosen a
combination of RBW, span and sweep points that makes each trace point
much wider than the RBW, so that the trace point in which the signal appears
is an inadequately precise measure of its frequency—for example, with a 30
MHz to 1000 MHz span, 601 trace points and 120 kHz RBW, each trace point
is 13 times as wide as the RBW. In this case, a SCPI query of the results will
yield –999 dBm for each detector.
– If the zoom is successful, the analyzer goes to zero span at this frequency.
– Each detector is then read in successive single-point zero span sweeps, using a
sweep time equal to the specified dwell time. The value displayed by Measure at
591
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Marker represents the maximum value output by the detector during the dwell
timeAutocoupled bandwidth and average type settings are used for each
detector unless the BW & Avg Type key is set to As Set, in which case the current
bandwidth and average type settings are used. – Each result is then displayed in the measure at marker window as it becomes
available. – The analyzer returns to its pre-Measure at Marker span and settings after
executing a Measure at Marker function, including Bandwidth, Avg Type, and
EMC Std - regardless of the setting of BW & Avg Type.
– Finally, if the sweep had to be aborted, the aborted sweep is restarted.
– While the function is executing, all the fields except Freq show “---“ for their
values until the measurement is complete for that detector. As each detector is
read, an informational message is displayed in the status line, for example:
– Measuring with detector 1 (Peak) with RBW=120 kHz
– After the last detector, the status line is cleared. Meas at Marker Window
This key opens a menu which controls the Measure at Marker window. Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker
Readback
In square brackets, the state of the window then the window position, separated by commas, as
[On, Left]
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Window
This key turns the Measure at Marker window on and off. It turns on automatically
when Measure at Marker is initiated and turns off on a Preset. If the Window is
turned on without a Measure at Marker result, “---“ is displayed for each result for
which the detector is not “Off”.
Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Meas at Marker Window
Couplings
The window turns on automatically when Measure at Marker is initiated and turns off on a
Preset.
Preset
Off
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback Text
On|Off
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
592
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Position
This key controls the placement of the Measure at Marker window on the display.
Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Meas at Marker Window
Preset
Right
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback Text
Left|Right
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Detectors
This key opens up a menu that allows you to configure the detectors to be used for
the Measure at Marker reading. Any of the analyzer’s detectors can be used for
each of the three detectors, or any of the three can be turned off. The dwell time for
each detector is also settable.
When performing a Meas at Marker, the dwell time settings that you select will
depend on the characteristics of the emission you are measuring. The default dwell
time (200 ms) should work well for typical EUT emissions, but sometimes you will
encounter emissions for which the defaults are not optimal. This is especially the
case for emissions that vary slowly over time or have a slow repetition rate. By
lengthening the dwell times you can increase the likelihood of accurately measuring
these low repetition rate signals.
When Measure at Marker is activated, the receiver makes a zero span measurement
for each of the (up to) three detectors selected, using the Dwell Time set for each
detector. If the signal's repetition period is greater than 200 ms (the default setting),
the dwell time should be increased to capture at least two and preferably more
repetitions of the signal. Additionally, if you do not need or do not wish to use a
detector to make a measurement, that specific detector may be turned off.
If the Measure at Marker window is being displayed, and one of the detectors is
changed, any value being displayed for that detector changes to “---“ until the next
successful reading from that detector.
Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker,
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Detector 1
This menu lets you select the detector to be used for Detector 1, or turn Detector 1
off. This is a 1-of-N menu that shows the normal list of detectors, but with the “Auto”
key replaced by “Off”.
593
Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Detectors
Remote Command
See "Detectors" on page 593. Example
:CALC:MAM:DET QPE
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Quasi peak
:CALC:MAM:DET OFF
Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Off
Preset
Peak
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback Text
Detector name
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Detector 2
This menu lets you select the detector to be used for Detector 2, or turn Detector 2
off. This is a 1-of-N menu that shows the normal list of detectors, but with the
“Auto” key replaced by “Off”.
Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Detectors
Preset
Quasi Peak
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback Text
Detector name
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Detector 3
This menu lets you select the detector to be used for Detector 3, or turn Detector 3
off. This is a 1-of-N menu that shows the normal list of detectors, but with the
“Auto” key replaced by “Off”.
Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Detectors
Preset
EMI Average
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback Text
Detector name
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Detector 1 Dwell Time
This is the time specified by the user to dwell while taking the measurement for
detector 1. The minimum allowed dwell time is based on the current detector If “Off”
is selected for detector 1, this key is grayed out and shows 200 ms.
Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Detectors
Remote Command
See "Detectors" on page 593. Example
:CALC:MAM:DET:DWEL 400 ms
Sets the dwell time for detector 1 to 400 ms
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
594
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Preset
200 ms
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
1 ms
Max
60 s
Default Unit
s
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Detector 2 Dwell Time
This is the time specified by the user to dwell while taking the measurement for
detector 2. The minimum allowed dwell time is based on the current detector. If “Off”
is selected for detector 2, this key is grayed out and shows 200 ms.
Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Detectors
Remote Command
See "Detectors" on page 593. Example
:CALC:MAM:DET2:DWEL 400 ms
Sets the dwell time for detector 2 to 400 ms
Preset
200 ms
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
1 ms
Max
60 s
Default Unit
s
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Detector 3 Dwell Time
This is the time specified by the user to dwell while taking the measurement for
detector 3. The minimum allowed dwell time is based on the current detector. If “Off”
is selected for detector 3, this key is grayed out and shows 200 ms.
Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Detectors
Remote Command
See "Detectors" on page 593. Example
:CALC:MAM:DET3:DWEL 400 ms
Sets the dwell time for detector 1 to 400 ms
595
Preset
200 ms
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
1 ms
Max
60 s
Default Unit
s
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
BW & Avg Type
This key controls the type of bandwidth and average type coupling used in Measure
at Marker. If set to “Autocoupled”, then the RBW and Average Type are selected by the
instrument during the Measure at Marker function, according to the normal
Autocouple rules, regardless of whether RBW and Average Type are currently in
Auto. If set to “As Set”, then the current value for RBW and Average Type are used
(which could also be “Auto”). Here are the details of the two modes:
If BW & Avg Type is set to Autocoupled, Measure at Marker behaves as follows:
1. The EMC Std changes to CISPR if any of the CISPR detectors (EMI Avg, RMS Avg,
QPD) becomes selected; for all other detectors, the value of EMC Std that
existed before Measure at Marker is used.
2. RBW autocouples throughout Measure at Marker, even if RBW is set to Manual. The autocouple rules are based on whatever the instantaneous setting of EMC
Std, Span, and Center Freq are.
If BW & Avg Type is set to As Set, Measure at Marker behaves as follows:
1. The EMC Std never changes; so if it is set to None it stays at None throughout,
even if one of the CISPR detectors is selected. 2. If RBW is set to Auto, then RBW autocouples throughout Measure at Marker. The autocouple rules are based on whatever the setting of EMC Std, Span, and
Center Freq are.
3. If RBW is set to Manual, the RBW never changes at all throughout Measure at
Marker, it stays at the value to which it was set before Measure at Marker began.
The analyzer returns to its pre-Measure at Marker span and settings after executing
a Measure at Marker function, including Bandwidth, Avg Type, and EMC Std.
It is important to note that, when RBW is coupled to Frequency, as it is when EMC
Std is anything but “None”, for all EMI measurements, the frequency it is coupled to
for Measure at Marker is the MARKER frequency, not the Center Frequency.
Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker
Preset
Autocoupled
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback Text
Autocoupled|As Set
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
596
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Center Presel On/Off
This key controls the automatic centering of the preselector for the Measure at
Marker function. When Center Presel is On, the first step in performing the Measure at Marker
function is to perform a Presel Center. This is not performed if the microwave
preselector is off, or the selected marker’s frequency is below Band 1. If the function
is not performed, no message is generated.
597
Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker
Dependencies
Blank in models that do not include a preselector, such as option 503. If the SCPI is sent in these
instruments, it is accepted without error, and the query always returns 0.
Preset
On
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker To
Marker To
The Marker -> key accesses menu keys that can copy the current marker value into
other instrument parameters (for example, Center Freq). The currently selected
marker is made the active function on entry to this menu (if the currently selected
marker is not on when you press this front panel key, it will be turned on at the
center of the screen as a normal type marker and then made the active function).
The Marker -> feature is used to quickly assign a marker’s x- or y-axis value to
another parameter. For example, if a marker’s x-axis value is 500 MHz and y-axis
value is –20 dBm, pressing Mkr -> CF assigns 500 MHz to Center Freq and pressing
Mkr - >Ref Lvl assigns –20 dBm to Ref Level.
Key Path
Front-panel key
Notes
All Marker To functions executed from the front panel use the selected marker’s values, while all
Marker To remote commands specify in the command which marker’s value to use.
Consistent with other remote marker commands, sending a Marker To remote command will
never change which marker is selected.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Mkr->CF
Sets the center frequency of the analyzer to the frequency of the selected marker.
The marker stays at this frequency, so it moves to the center of the display. In delta
marker mode, this function sets the center frequency to the x-axis value of the delta
marker. When the frequency scale is in log mode, the center frequency is not at the
center of the display.
If the currently selected marker is not on when this key is pressed, it will be turned
on at the center of the screen as a normal type marker.
Key Path
Marker ->
Dependencies
This function is not available (key is grayed out) when x-axis is the time domain
Couplings
All the usual couplings associated with setting Center Frequency apply.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Mkr->CF Step
Sets the center frequency (CF) step size of the analyzer to the marker frequency, or
in a delta-marker mode, to the frequency difference between the delta and
reference markers.
If the currently selected marker is not on when this key is pressed, it will be turned
on at the center of the screen as a normal type marker.
Key Path
Marker ->
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
598
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker To
Dependencies
This function is not available (key is grayed out) when x-axis is the time domain
Couplings
All the usual couplings associated with setting CF Step apply.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Mkr->Start
Changes the start frequency to the frequency of the selected marker. The marker
stays at this frequency, so it moves to the left edge of the display. In delta marker
mode, this function sets the start frequency to the x-axis value of the delta marker.
If the currently selected marker is not on when this key is pressed, it will be turned on
at the center of the screen as a normal type marker.
Key Path
Marker ->
Dependencies
This function is not available (key is grayed out) when x-axis is the time domain
Couplings
All the usual couplings associated with setting Start Frequency apply.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Mkr->Stop
Changes the stop frequency to the frequency of the selected marker. The marker
stays at this frequency, so it moves to the right edge of the display. In delta marker
mode, this function sets the stop frequency to the x-axis value of the delta marker.
If the currently selected marker is not on when this key is pressed, it will be turned on
at the center of the screen as a normal type marker.
Key Path
Marker ->
Dependencies
This function is not available (key is grayed out) when x-axis is the time domain
Couplings
All the usual couplings associated with setting Stop Frequency apply.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Mkr->Ref Lvl
Sets the reference level to the amplitude value of the selected marker, moving the
marked point to the reference level (top line of the graticule). The marker’s mode
(Normal, Delta, Fixed) doesn’t matter in this case. For example, given a delta marker,
if the delta marker is the selected marker, its amplitude is applied to the reference
level. If the reference marker is selected, its amplitude is applied to the reference
level.
If the currently selected marker is not on when this key is pressed, it will be turned on
at the center of the screen as a normal type marker, and its amplitude applied to the
reference level.
599
Key Path
Marker ->
Couplings
All the usual couplings associated with setting Reference Level apply. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker To
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
Mkr-> RefLvl behavior for a delta marker is slightly different from earlier models. ESA would
calculate the delta amplitude (difference between reference marker and delta marker in dB) and
assign that value to the reference level (in dBm). PSA would just assign the delta marker’s
amplitude to the reference level, ignoring the reference marker altogether. The X-Series products
allow the user to select either the reference or the delta marker individually. It is the selected
marker’s amplitude that will be applied to the reference level.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Mkr -> Zoom Center
Only appears in the Trace Zoom View of the Swept SA measurement. Moves the zoom region so that it is centered at the selected marker in the top
window. The Zoom Span is not changed, except as necessary to keep the entire
Zoom Region between the top window Start and Stop frequencies. The center
frequency of the lower window changes to reflect the new zoom center frequency.
If the marker frequency is entirely outside the current analyzer (top window) Start
and Stop frequencies, a Mkr->CF function is first performed. (Note that if this Mkr>CF causes the Zoom Region to be outside the new Start and Stop frequencies, the
Zoom Region is re-initialized to the new analyzer Center Freq with a span of 10% of
the analyzer Span). After the Mkr->CF is performed, the Mkr->Zoom Center is
performed.
Key Path
Marker ->
Dependencies
Only appears in the Trace Zoom View of the Swept SA measurement. If the SCPI command is
sent in other Views, gives an error.
Initial S/W Revision
A.07.01
Mkr -> Zone Center
Moves the zone so that it is centered at the selected marker in the top window. The
zone span is not changed. The center frequency of the lower window changes to
reflect the new zone center frequency. The lower window will not be updated until it
is made active.
Key Path
Marker ->
Dependencies
Only appears in the Zone Span View of the Swept SA measurement. If the SCPI command is sent
in other Views, gives an error.
In addition, this function is not available when the bottom window is in Zero Span. Initial S/W Revision
A.07.01
MkrΔ->CF
Sets the center frequency to the frequency difference between the selected marker
and its reference marker. The marker is then changed to a Normal marker and
placed at the center of span.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
600
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker To
Key Path
Marker ->
Dependencies
This function is only available when the selected marker is a delta marker. Otherwise the key is
grayed out.
In addition, this function is not available when x-axis is the time domain
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
MkrΔ->Span
Sets the start and stop frequencies to the values of the delta markers. That is, it
moves the lower of the two marker frequencies to the start frequency and the higher
of the two marker frequencies to the stop frequency. The marker mode is unchanged
and the two markers (delta and reference) end up on opposite edges of the display.
Key Path
Marker ->
Dependencies
This function is only available when the selected marker is a delta marker. Otherwise the key is
grayed out.
In addition, this function is not available when x-axis is the time domain
601
Couplings
All the usual couplings associated with setting Span apply (see “"SPAN X Scale" on page 748”).
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas
Meas
Pressing the Meas key displays a menu of measurements that are available in the
current mode. For the N9061A RLC mode, there is only one available measurement
selection: RLC Swept SA, which is selected by default. For details, see "RLC Swept
SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference" on page 444.
Operation for some keys differs between measurements. The information displayed
in Help pertains to the current measurement. To examine how a key operates in a
different measurement, exit Help (press the Cancel Esc key), select the
measurement, then reenter Help (press the Help key) and press that key.
Key Path
Front-panel key
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
602
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
Meas Setup
The Meas Setup key opens a menu of softkeys that allow you to control the most
important parameters for the current measurement.
In the Meas Setup menu, you may configure Averaging, by setting the Average
Number and the Average Type.
Key Path
Front-panel key
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Average/Hold Number
Sets the terminal count number N for Average, Max Hold and Min Hold trace types.
This number is an integral part of how the average trace is calculated. Basically,
increasing N results in a smoother average trace.
– See "More Information" on page 603.
Key Path
Meas Setup
Preset
100
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
1
Max
10000
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
See "Sweep/Control" on page 757for a discussion of the Sweeping, Measuring, Settling and OPC
bits, and the Hi Sweep line. All are affected when a sequence is reset.
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
In the past, when changing the Average Count (now Average/Hold Number), you had to re-start
the trace at the beginning of a sweep to ensure valid average data. Now, the system will ensure
valid results when changing the count limit.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
More Information
When in Single, the sweep stops when N is reached. You can add more sweeps by
increasing the Average/Hold Number. For example, if you want to add one more
Average, or one more trace to Max Hold or Min Hold, simply increment this number
by one, which you can do by pressing the Up key while Average/Hold Number is the
active function.
In Cont (continuous), averaging and holding continues even after N is reached.
Therefore, using doing trace holding in Cont, the value of N is irrelevant. But for
averaging, each new sweep is exponentially averaged in with a weighting equal to N.
For details of how the average trace is calculated and how this depends on the
Average/Hold Number, see "Average Type" on page 604, below. For details on how
603
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
the various control functions in the instrument start and restart averaging, see
"Average Type" on page 604.
The Average/Hold Number is not affected by Auto Couple.
Average Type
Lets you control the way averaging is done by choosing one of the following
averaging scales: log-power (video), power (RMS), or voltage averaging. Also lets
you choose Auto Average Type (default). When performing Trace Averaging, , the equation that is used to calculate the
averaged trace depends on the average type. See the descriptions for the keys
which select each Average Type ("Log-Pwr Avg (Video)" on page 605, "Pwr Avg
(RMS)" on page 606, or "Voltage Avg" on page 606) for details on these equations.
– See "More Information" on page 604.
Key Path
Meas Setup
Preset
ON
State Saved
Saved in Instrument State
Readback line
1-of-N selection as
Log-Pwr (Video) for Log-Pwr (Video) Avg
Pwr (RMS) for Power Avg
Voltage
for Voltage
Initial S/W
Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Notes
Parameters map to avg types as:
RMS = Pwr (RMS) Avg
LOG = Log-Pwr (Video) Avg
SCALar = Voltage Avg
Preset
LOG
Initial S/W
Revision
Prior to A.02.00
More Information
When you select log-power averaging, the measurement results are the average of
the signal level in logarithmic units (decibels). When you select power average
(RMS), all measured results are converted into power units before averaging and
filtering operations, and converted back to decibels for displaying. Remember: there
can be significant differences between the average of the log of power and the log of
the average power.
These are the averaging processes within a spectrum analyzer and all of them are
affected by this setting:
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
604
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
1. Trace averaging (see “"Trace/Detector" on page 851”) averages signal
amplitudes on a trace-to-trace basis. The average type applies to all traces in
Trace Average (it is not set on a trace-by-trace basis).
2. Average detector (see “"Trace/Detector" on page 851”) averages signal
amplitudes during the time or frequency interval represented by a particular
measurement point.
3. Noise Marker (see “"Marker Function" on page 578”) averages signal amplitudes
across measurement points to reduce variations for noisy signals.
4. VBW filtering (see “"BW" on page 475”) adds video filtering which is a form of
averaging of the video signal.
When Auto is selected, the analyzer chooses the type of averaging (see below).
When one of the average types is selected manually, the analyzer uses that type
regardless of other analyzer settings, and shows Man on the Average Type softkey.
Auto
Chooses the optimum type of averaging for the current instrument measurement
settings.
Key Path
Meas setup, Average Type
Example
AVER:TYPE:AUTO ON
Notes
See Average Type, above
Couplings
Here are the auto-select rules for Average Type:
Auto selects VoltageAveraging if the Detector for any active trace is EMI Average or QPD or RMS
Average; otherwise it selects Power (RMS) Averaging if a Marker Function (Marker Noise,
Band/Intvl Power) is on, or Detector is set to Man and Average; otherwise if Amplitude, Scale
Type is set to Lin it selects Voltage Averaging; otherwise, if the EMC Standard is set to CISPR, it
selects Voltage; otherwise Auto selects Log-Power Average.
Note that these rules are only applied to active traces. Traces which are not updating do not
impact the auto-selection of Average Type.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback
The type auto-selected is displayed in the readback line on the Average Type key
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Log-Pwr Avg (Video)
Selects the logarithmic (decibel) scale for all filtering and averaging processes. This
scale is sometimes called “Video” because it is the most common display and
analysis scale for the video signal within a spectrum analyzer. This scale is excellent
for finding CW signals near noise, but its response to noise-like signals is 2.506 dB
lower than the average power of those noise signals. This is compensated for in the
Marker Noise function.
605
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
The equation for trace averaging on the log-pwr scale is shown below, where K is
the number of averages accumulated. (In continuous sweep mode, once K has
reached the Average/Hold Number, K stays at that value, providing a continuous
running average.)
New avg = ((K–1)Old avg + New data)/K
Assumes all values in decibel scale.
Key Path
Meas setup, Average Type
Example
AVER:TYPE LOG
Notes
See “"Average Type" on page 604”
Couplings
See “"Auto" on page 605”
Readback
Log-Pwr (Video)
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Pwr Avg (RMS)
In this average type, all filtering and averaging processes work on the power (the
square of the magnitude) of the signal, instead of its log or envelope voltage. This
scale is best for measuring the true time average power of complex signals. This
scale is sometimes called RMS because the resulting voltage is proportional to the
square root of the mean of the square of the voltage.
In the equation for averaging on this scale (below), K is the number of averages
accumulated. (In continuous sweep mode, once K has reached the Average/Hold
Number, K stays at that value, providing a running average.)
New avg = 10 log ((1/K)((K–1)(10Old avg/10)+10New data/10))
Equation assumes all values are in the decibel scale.
Key Path
Meas setup, Average Type
Example
AVER:TYPE RMS
Notes
See "Average Type" on page 604
Couplings
See "Auto" on page 605
Readback
Pwr (RMS)
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Voltage Avg
In this Average type, all filtering and averaging processes work on the voltage of the
envelope of the signal. This scale is good for observing rise and fall behavior of AM or
pulse-modulated signals such as radar and TDMA transmitters, but its response to
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
606
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
noise-like signals is 1.049 dB lower than the average power of those noise signals.
This is compensated for in the Marker Noise function.
In the equation for averaging on this scale (below), K is the number of averages
accumulated. (In continuous sweep mode, once K has reached the Average/Hold
Number, K stays at that value.)
New avg = 20 log ((1/K)((K–1)(10Old avg/20)+10New data/20))
Equation assumes all values are in the decibel scale.
Key Path
Meas setup, Average Type
Example
AVER:TYPE SCAL
Notes
See "Average Type" on page 604
Couplings
See "Auto" on page 605
Readback
Pwr (RMS)
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Limits
The limits key opens a menu of softkeys to control the limits for the current
measurement. Limits arrays can be entered by the user, sent over SCPI, or loaded
from a file. Key Path
Meas Setup
Dependencies
This key will only appear if you have the proper option installed in your instrument.
Preset
Limits are turned off by a Preset, but the Limits arrays (data) are only reset (deleted) by Restore
Mode Defaults. They survive shutdown and restarting of the analyzer application, which means
they will survive a power cycle.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Select Limit
Specifies the selected limit. The term “selected limit” is used throughout this
document to specify which limit will be affected by the functions.
607
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits
Notes
The selected limit is remembered even when not in the Limit Menu.
Preset
Limit 1, not affected by Mode Preset, preset by Restore Mode Defaults.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
Limit
Selects whether the limit and margin are displayed. If Test Limits is on, this also
determines whether the test trace (see "Test Trace" on page 609) will be tested
against the limit. If Limit On/Off is On, the following occurs:
– The limit line is displayed, in the same color as the limited trace, but paler. Portions of traces which fail the limits will be displayed in red. – The margin line is displayed if Margin is on and the Margin Value is non-zero (see
"Margin" on page 613). The margin line is displayed in the same color as the limit
line, but paler still and dashed. Portions of traces which pass the limits but fail
the margin will be displayed in amber.
– The trace is tested for the purpose of the “Trace Pass/Fail” indication in the
graticule if, in addition to Limit On/Off being On, the trace is displayed and Test
Limits (All Limits) is on (see "Test Limits" on page 618). If the trace is not tested,
no report of the trace passing or failing is seen on the graticule. Note that the
SCPI queries of Limit Pass/Fail are independent of these conditions; the test is
always performed when queried over SCPI.
The PASS/FAIL box in the corner of the Meas Bar is only displayed if there is at least
one “Trace Pass/Fail” indication displayed in the graticule.
Note that the red and amber coloring of traces which fail the limits and/or margins
only applies to traces whose X-axis corresponds to the current analyzer X-axis. Traces which are not updating (in View, for example) will not change color if the
analyzer X-axis settings (e.g., start and stop frequency) do not match those of the
trace, for example if they have been changed since the trace stopped updating. In
this case, the Invalid Data indicator (*) will appear in the upper right hand corner.
When the limits are frequency limits but the trace is a zero-span trace, the limit trace
is drawn at the limit amplitude of the center frequency. When the limits are time
limits but the trace is a frequency domain trace, the limit trace is drawn according to
the current time axis, with the left of the screen being 0 and the right being equal to
sweep time.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits
Dependencies
This command will generate an “Option not available” error message unless you have the proper
option installed in your instrument. Couplings
Limit display ON selects the limit.
Testing is done on all displayed limits if Test Limits (All Limits) is ON.
Entering the limit menu from the GUI turns on the selected limit.
Preset
OFF
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
608
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
Properties
Accesses a menu which lets you set the properties of the selected limit.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Select Limit
Specifies the selected limit. The term “selected limit” is used throughout this
document to specify which limit will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits, Properties
Notes
The selected limit is remembered even when not in the Limit Menu.
Preset
Limit 1, not affected by Mode Preset, preset by Restore Mode Defaults.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Test Trace
Selects the trace you want the limit to test. A limit is applied to one and only one
trace; each trace can have both an upper and a lower limit. When executing Limit
Test, the limit is applied only to the specified trace.
A trace can have multiple limit lines simultaneously; in that case, only one upper and
one lower limit line will affect the color of the trace. Other limit lines will be
displayed, and will affect the pass/fail status, but the trace will not turn red if it
crosses a secondary limit line.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits, Properties
Notes
When the trace display is off, the trace is not tested. The trace is tested only when the trace
display is on and Test Limits (see "Test Limits" on page 618) is on.
Preset
Limits 1 and 2 preset to 1, Limits 3 and 4 preset to 2, Limits 5 and 6 preset to 3
Not affected by Mode Preset, preset by Restore Mode Defaults.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Min
1
Max
6
Readback
Trace 1|2|3|4|5|6
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Type
Selects whether the limit you are editing is an upper or lower limit. An upper limit
fails if the trace exceeds the limit. A lower limit fails if the trace falls below the limit.
609
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits, Properties
Couplings
If a margin has already been set for this limit line, and this key is used to change the limit type,
then the margin value will reverse sign.
Preset
Upper for Line 1, 3, and 5; Lower for Line 2, 4, 6.
Not affected by Mode Preset, preset by Restore Mode Defaults.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Interpolation
Accesses a menu which lets you set the frequency and amplitude interpolation of
the selected limit.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits, Properties
Readback
[Lin|Log Frequency, Lin|Log Amplitude]
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Frequency Interpolation
This key is grayed out if Time is the selected X Axis Units. Sets the interpolation
between frequency points, allowing you to determine how limit trace values are
computed between points in a limit table. The available interpolation modes are
linear and logarithmic. If frequency interpolation is logarithmic (Log), frequency
values between limit points are computed by first taking the logarithm of both the
table values and the intermediate value. A linear interpolation is then performed in
this logarithmic frequency space. An exactly analogous manipulation is done for
logarithmic amplitude interpolation.
Note that the native representation of amplitude is in dB.
For linear amplitude interpolation and linear frequency interpolation, the
interpolation is computed as:
For linear amplitude interpolation and log frequency interpolation, the interpolation
is computed as:
For log amplitude interpolation and linear frequency interpolation, the interpolation
is computed as:
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
610
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
For log amplitude interpolation and log frequency interpolation, the interpolation is
computed as:
Interpolation modes determine how limit values are computed between points in the
limit table. The appearance of a limit trace is also affected by the amplitude scale,
which may be linear or logarithmic.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits, Properties, Interpolation
Preset
Linear, not affected by Mode Preset, preset by Restore Mode Defaults.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Amplitude Interpolation
Sets the interpolation to linear or logarithmic for the specified limiting points set,
allowing you to determine how limit trace values are computed between points in a
limit table. See Frequency Interpolation for the equations used to calculate limit
values between points.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits, Properties, Interpolation
Preset
Logarithmic, not affected by Mode Preset, preset by Restore Mode Defaults.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Fixed / Relative
Opens a menu which will allow you to specify that the selected limit is relative to
either Center Frequency or Reference level.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits, Properties
Readback
Fixed|Rel to CF|Rel to RL|Rel to CF + RL (square brackets)
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
You can now set relative amplitude and relative frequency independently for each limit line.
:CALC:LLIN:CMOD REL makes all limit lines relative to the center frequency and reference level.
:CALC:LLIN:CMOD? returns 1 if Limit Line 1 is set Relative to CF, and returns 0 otherwise.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Relative to CF
Chooses whether the limit line frequency points are coupled to the instrument
center frequency, and whether the frequency points are expressed as an offset from
611
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
the instrument center frequency. If the limit lines are specified with time, this has no
effect. The limit table must in this case support negative frequencies.
For example, assume you have a frequency limit line, and the analyzer center
frequency is at 1 GHz. If Relative to CF is “Off”, entering a limit line segment with a
frequency coordinate of 300 MHz displays the limit line segment at 300 MHz, and the
limit line segment will not change frequency if the center frequency changes. If
Relative to CF is “On”, entering a limit line segment with a frequency coordinate of
300 MHz displays the limit line segment at CF + 300 MHz, or 1.3 GHz. Furthermore, if
the center frequency changes to 2 GHz, the limit line segment will be displayed at
CF + 300 MHz, or 2.3 GHz.
It is possible to change this setting after a limit line has been entered. When
changing from On to Off or vice-versa, the frequency values in the limit line table
change so that the limit line remains in the same position for the current frequency
settings of the analyzer.
Pressing this button makes Center Frequency the active function.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits, Properties, Fixed/Relative
Couplings
Pressing this button makes Center Frequency the active function.
Preset
Off, not affected by Mode Preset, preset by Restore Mode Defaults.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Relative to RL
Chooses whether the limit line amplitude points are coupled to the instrument
reference level, and whether the amplitude points are expressed as an offset from
the instrument reference level.
For example, assume you have a limit line, and the reference level at –10 dBm. If
Relative to RL is “Off”, entering a limit line segment with an amplitude coordinate of –
20 dB displays the limit line segment at –20 dBm, and the limit line segment will not
change amplitude if the reference level amplitude changes. If Relative to RL is “On”,
entering a limit line segment with an amplitude coordinate of –20 dB displays the
limit line segment at RL – 20 dB, or –30 dBm. Furthermore, if the reference level
amplitude changes to –30 dBm, the limit line segment will be displayed at RL – 20
dB, or –50 dBm.
It is possible to change this setting after a limit line has been entered. When
changing from On to Off or vice-versa, the amplitude values in the limit line table
change so that the limit line remains in the same position for the current reference
level settings of the analyzer.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits, Properties, Fixed/Relative
Couplings
Pressing this button makes Reference level the active function.
Preset
Off, not affected by Mode Preset, preset by Restore Mode Defaults.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
612
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Description
Provides a description of up to 60 characters by which the operator can easily
identify the limit. Will be stored in the exported file. Can be displayed in the active
function area by selecting as the active function, if desired to be in a screen dump.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits, Properties
Dependencies
60 characters max
Preset
“” (null String), not affected by Mode Preset, preset by Restore Mode Defaults.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Readback
As much of the description will fit on one line of the key, followed by “…” if some of the
description will not fit on one line of the key.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Comment
Sets an ASCII comment field,which will be stored in an exported file. Can be
displayed in the active function area by selecting as the active function, if desired to
be in a screen capture. The Limits .csv file supports this field.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits, Properties
Dependencies
60 characters max
Preset
“” (null String), not affected by Mode Preset, preset by Restore Mode Defaults.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Readback
As much of the description will fit on one line of the key, followed by “…” if some of the
description will not fit on one line of the key.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Margin
Selects a margin for this limit, which will cause a trace to Fail Margin when the trace
is between the limit line and the margin line. Portions of the traces which pass the
limit but fail the margin will be displayed in an amber color. A margin is always specified in dB relative to a limit – an upper limit will always have
a negative margin, and a lower limit will always have a positive margin. If a value is
entered with the incorrect sign, the system will automatically take the negative of
the entered value.
If the limit type is switched from lower to upper while margin is present, the margin
will reverse sign.
When the Margin is selected, it may be turned off by pressing the Margin key until Off
is underlined. This may also be done by performing a preset. Margin is the default
613
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
active function whenever the margin is on, and it is not the active function whenever
the margin is off.
The margin lines are displayed in the same color as limit lines, but paler. . If the
limited trace is blanked then the limit line and the margin line will be blanked as well.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits
Preset
Not affected by Mode Preset, set to 0 dB for all Limits by Restore Mode Defaults.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Min
–40 dB (Upper); 0 dB (Lower)
Max
0 dB (Upper); 40 dB (Lower);
Default Unit
dB
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Edit
Opens the Table Editor for the selected limit line.
When entering the menu, the editor window (with the limit table) turns on, the
selected Limit is turned On and the amplitude scale is set to Log. The display of the
trace to which the selected limit applies is turned on (thus, traces in Blank are set to
View and traces in Background are set to On). Turning on the Limit means it’s display
will be on, and it’s testing mode will be on as well. You should turn off any other
limits that are on if they interfere with the editing of the selected limit.
The table editor will only operate properly if the analyzer is sweeping, because its
updates are tied to the sweep system. Thus, you should not try to use the editor in
single sweep, and it will be sluggish during compute-intensive operations like
narrow-span FFT sweeps.
When exiting the edit menu (by using the Return key or by pressing an instrument
front panel key), the editor window turns off, however the Limit is still on and
displayed, and the amplitude scale remains Log.
Limits are turned off by a Preset, but the Limits arrays (data) are only reset (deleted)
by Restore Mode Defaults. They survive shutdown and restarting of the analyzer
application, which means they will survive a power cycle.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits
Couplings
A remote user can enter or access limit line data via :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DATA
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Navigate
Lets you move through the table to edit the desired point
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits, Edit
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
614
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
Notes
There is no value readback on the key
Min
1
Max
2000
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Frequency
Lets you edit the frequency of the current row.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits, Edit
Notes
There is no value readback on the key
Min
0
Max
1 THz
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Amplitude
Lets you edit the Amplitude of the current row.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits, Edit
Notes
There is no value readback on the key
Min
–1000 dBm
Max
1000 dBm
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Insert Point Below
Pressing this key inserts a point below the current point. The new point is a copy of
the current point. And becomes the current point The new point is not yet entered
into the underlying table, and the data in the row is displayed in light gray.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits, Edit
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Delete Point
This is an immediate action key. It will immediately delete the currently-selected
point, whether or not that point is being edited, and select Navigate. The point
following the currently-selected point (or the point preceding if there is none) will be
selected.
615
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits, Edit
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Copy from Limit
Copies an existing limit into the current limit, including all secondary parameters
(Description, Associated Trace, Type, Margin, Interpolation, Relative to CF/RL).
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits, Edit
Notes
Auto return to the Edit menu.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Build from Trace
Builds a limit using an existing trace. This command will overwrite all data in the
limit. Since a straight copy would typically have hundreds or thousands of segments,
the data will be approximated to better represent a limit line; small excursions
whose width is less than 10 trace buckets will sometimes not be captured.
Secondary parameters which are not associated with traces (Description,
Associated Trace, Type, Margin, Interpolation, Relative to CF/RL) will be unchanged.
When taking a trace in order to build a limit, it will often work well to take the trace
with a resolution bandwidth wider than the expected measurement, a video
bandwidth lower than the expected measurement, and with the detector set to Max
Hold or Min Hold.
Note that an upper limit will be built above the trace, while a lower limit will be built
below the trace. If the trace is constant, the limit should pass after being built.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits, Edit
Notes
Auto return to Edit menu.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Offset
Enters a menu which allows you to offset the limit trace by a specified frequency,
time, or amplitude. The offsets will be immediately applied to the limit trace for
display and failure calculation; the offset can also be applied to the points in the limit
line.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits, Edit
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
616
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
X Offset
Offsets the limit trace by some specified frequency (for Frequency-based limit lines)
or a time (for time-based limit lines).
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits, Edit, Offset
Preset
0 Hz if Limit X-Axis Unit is Frequency
0 S if Limit X-Axis Unit is Time
State Saved
Saved in instrument state, survives Preset
Min
–500 GHz
Max
500 GHz
Default Unit
Determined by X axis scale.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Y Offset
Offsets all segments in the limit line by some specified amplitude.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits, Edit, Offset
Preset
0 dB
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Min
-Infinity
Max
+Infinity
Default Unit
dB
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Apply Offsets to Limit Table
Adds the X and Y offsets to each point in the limit table, then resets the X and Y offset
values to zero. This has no effect on the position of the limit trace.
For example, if the X offset is –10 MHz and the Y offset is 1 dB, the values in the limit
table will be updated as follows: 10 MHz will be subtracted from each X value, 1 dB
will be added to each Y value. The offset values will then be reset to zero. The limit
trace will not be moved and the limit table will be updated to accurately reflect the
currently-displayed limit trace. Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits, Edit, Offset
State Saved
No state
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Scale X Axis
Matches the X Axis to the selected Limit, as well as possible. For frequency limits and a frequency-domain X-axis, sets the Start and Stop
Frequency to contain the minimum and maximum Frequency of the selected Limit. 617
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
The range between Start Frequency and Stop Frequency is 12.5% above the range
between the minimum and maximum Frequency so that span exceeds this range by
one graticule division on either side. For time limits and a time-domain X-axis, sets the sweep time to match the
maximum Time of the selected Limit.
If the domain of the selected limit does not match the domain of the X Axis, no action
is taken. Standard clipping rules apply, if the value in the table is outside the
allowable range for the X axis.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits, Edit
Dependencies
If either the first or last point in the array is outside the frequency range of the current input, an
error message is generated:
“–221. Settings conflict; Start or Stop Freq out of range for current input settings”
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Delete Limit
Deletes the currently selected limit line. Pressing Delete Limit purges the data from
the limit line tables.
Limit data (including secondary parameters such as description, margin value,
etc.) is cleared and returned to factory preset settings.
When this key is pressed, a prompt appears that says “Please press Enter or OK key
to delete limit. Press ESC or Cancel to close this dialog.” The deletion is only
performed if you press OK or Enter; if so, after the deletion, the informational
message “Limit deleted” appears in the MSG line.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Test Limits
Selects whether displayed traces are tested against displayed limits (i.e. those for
which Limit On/Off is set to On).
For each displayed trace for which a Limit is turned on, a message will be displayed
in the upper-left corner of the graticule to notify whether the trace passes or fails the
limits.
If the trace is at or within the bounds of all applicable limits and margins, the text
“Trace x Pass” will be displayed in green, where x is the trace number. A separate
line is used for each reported trace.
If the trace is at or within the bounds of all applicable limits, but outside the bounds
of some applicable margin, the text “Trace x Fail Margin” will be displayed in amber,
where x is the trace number. A separate line is used for each reported trace.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
618
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
If the trace is outside the bounds of some applicable limits, the text “Trace x Fail” will
be displayed in red, where x is the trace number. A separate line is used for each
reported trace.
If the trace has no enabled limits, or the trace itself is not displayed, no message is
displayed for that trace.
The PASS/FAIL box in the corner of the Meas Bar is only displayed if there is at least
one “Trace Pass/Fail” indication displayed in the graticule.
If two amplitude values are entered for the same frequency, a single vertical line is
the result. In this case, if an upper line is chosen, the lesser amplitude is tested. If a
lower line is chosen, the greater amplitude is tested.
This command only affects the display, and has no impact on remote behavior. Limit
queries over SCPI test the trace against the limit regardless of whether the trace or
the limit is turned on (exception: the query :CALCulate:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FAIL?
tests only the limits that are turned on for that trace).
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits
Preset
On, not affected by Mode Preset, preset by Restore Mode Defaults.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
X-Axis Unit
Selects how the limit-line segments are defined. Pressing X Axis Unit selects
whether the limit lines will be entered using frequency (Freq) or sweep time (Time) to
define the segments. They can be specified as a table of limit-line segments of
amplitude versus frequency, or of amplitude versus time.. When the X-Axis Unit is
set to Time, a time value of zero corresponds to the start of the sweep, which is at
the left edge of the graticule, and the column and softkey in the Limit Table Editor
will read Time instead of Frequency
Switching the limit-line definition between Freq and Time will erase all of the current
limit lines. When you do this from the front panel, a warning dialog will pop up letting
you know that you are about to erase all the limit lines, and prompting you to hit
“OK” if you are sure: Changing the X Axis Unit will erase all your limit lines. Are you sure you want to do
this? Press Enter or OK to proceed, or Cancel(Esc) to cancel.
619
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits
Couplings
This affects all limit lines simultaneously, and resets all limit line data except the .wav file and
email address stored in the Actions.
Preset
Freq, not affected by Mode Preset, preset by Restore Mode Defaults.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
Delete All Limits
Deletes all limit lines. Pressing Delete All Limits purges the data from all limit line
tables.
All limit data is cleared and returned to factory preset settings.
When this key is pressed a prompt appears that says “Please press Enter or OK key
to delete all limits. Press ESC or Cancel to close this dialog.” The deletion is only
performed if you press OK or Enter; if so, after the deletion, the informational
message “All Limits deleted” appears in the MSG line.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Limits
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
N dB Points
Turns N dB points on and off and allows you to set the N dB value. N dB uses the
selected marker. If the selected marker is not on when N dB is turned on, the
selected marker turns on, as a Normal marker, at center screen, and is used by N dB.
– See "More Information" on page 620.
Key Path
Meas Setup
Notes
If the selected marker is turned Off it turns off N dB Points.
N DB Points is unaffected by Auto Couple
Preset
Off, –3.01 dB
OFF
State Saved
The on/off status and the offset value are both saved in instrument state.
Min
–140 dB
Max
–0.01 dB
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
In ESA, N dB points paid attention to the peak excursion and peak threshold set in the Search
Criteria menu under Peak Search. This is not the case in the X-Series.
In ESA, an invalid N dB reading was indicated, both onscreen and remotely, with a value of –100.
In the X-Series it is indicated on screen by --- but remotely still by –100 Hz
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
More Information
A marker should be placed on the peak of interest before turning on N dB points. The
N dB points function looks for the two points on the marker’s trace closest to the
marker’s X Axis value that are N dB below the marker’s amplitude, one above and
the other below the marker’s X Axis value. (That is, one point is to the right and one is
to the left of the selected marker.) The selected N dB value is called the offset. The
function reports the frequency difference (for frequency domain traces) or time
difference (for time domain traces) between those two points.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
620
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
Each point is identified by a horizontal arrow pointing towards the marker, next to the
trace. The arrows used by the N dB Points function will be as shown in the figure
below (where each square represents one pixel). They point in, horizontally, at the
trace below a peak, on either side of its skirts. There is one pixel between the arrow
and the trace
.
N dB Points can be used to measure the bandwidth of a signal; it is commonly used in
conjunction with a tracking generator to measure filter bandwidths.
In one of the common use cases, the marker is placed on a peak, and the arrows are
displayed N dB down the skirt from the marker on either side of the peak. The N dB
value and the frequency difference between the two arrows is displayed around the
arrow as shown in the figure above. Normally this displays on the right arrow, but if
this would place any part of the text offscreen to the right then it displays on the left
arrow.
If the analyzer is unable to find data that is N dB below the marker on either side of
the marker, the arrows are displayed at the indicator point of the marker, no value (--) will be displayed as the result and –100 Hz returned remotely (see figure below):
Some sample N dB scenarios are shown below to illustrate how the function works
in various cases. In each case, the two-headed blue arrow represents N dB of
amplitude.
621
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
622
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
PhNoise Opt
Selects the LO (local oscillator) phase noise behavior for various desired operating
conditions.
– See "More Information" on page 625
Path
Meas Setup
Range
All but EP0:
Best Close-In|Best Wide-Offset|Fast Tuning
EP0:
Best Close-In|Best Wide-Offset|Fast Tuning|Balanced|Best Spurs
Range (Long Form)
No EPx option:
Best Close-In Φ Noise
[offset < 20 kHz] |
Best Wide-Offset Φ Noise
[offset > 30 kHz] |
Fast Tuning
[same as Close-in]
EP0:
Best Close-In Φ Noise
[offset < 600 kHz] |
Balance Noise & Spurs
[offset < 600 kHz] |
Best Spurs
[offset < 600 kHz] |
Best Wide-Offset Φ Noise
[offset > 800 kHz] |
Fast Tuning
EP1:
Best Close-In Φ Noise
[offset < 140 kHz] |
Best Wide-Offset Φ Noise
[offset > 160 kHz] |
Fast Tuning
[single loop]
EP2 & EP3:
Best Close-In Φ Noise
[offset < 70 kHz] |
Best Wide-Offset Φ Noise
[offset > 100 kHz] |
Fast Tuning
[medium loop bw]
623
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
EP4:
Best Close-In Φ Noise
[offset < 90 kHz] |
Best Wide-Offset Φ Noise
[offset > 130 kHz] |
Fast Tuning
[same as Close-in] Notes
Parameter:
1. In instruments with EP0, balances close-in phase noise with spur avoidance. In instruments
without EP0 optimizes phase noise for small frequency offsets from the carrier.
2. Optimizes phase noise for wide frequency offsets from the carrier.
3. Optimizes LO for tuning speed
4. In instruments with EP0, balances close-in phase noise with spur avoidance. In instruments
without EP0 this setting is accepted but no action taken.
5. In instruments with EP0, emphasizes spur avoidance with close-in phase noise performance. In instruments without EP0 this setting is accepted but no action taken.
The actual behavior varies somewhat depending on model number and option; you always get fast
tuning by choosing #3, but in some models, the “Fast Tuning” choice is identical to the “Best
Close-In” choice. Specifically:
– Models with option EP0 (for example UXA), have a two stage local oscillator, which switches
to a single loop for fast tuning
– Models with option EP1 have a two-loop local oscillator, which switches to a single loop for
fast tuning
– Models with option EP2 (available, for example, for MXA), use a different loop bandwidth for
the fast-tuning choice, which is a compromise between tuning speed and phase noise, giving
good tuning speed at all offsets, although not as good as for Close-In; this is useful when you
have to look across a wide range of spans
– In all other cases, Fast Tuning is the same as Best Close-In.
Dependencies
Does not appear in all models. The key is blank in those models, but the SCPI command is
accepted for compatibility (although no action is taken).
Preset
Because this function is in Auto after preset, and because Span after preset > 314.16 kHz (see
Auto rules, next section) the state of this function after Preset will be 2
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.15.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
624
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
More Information
The Phase Noise Optimization control lets you optimize the setup and behavior of
the Local Oscillator (LO) depending on your specific measurement conditions. You
may wish to trade off noise and speed, for example, to make a measurement faster
without regard to noise or with optimum noise characteristics without regard to
speed.
The following options are available:
– "Auto " on page 625
– "Best Close-in Φ Noise" on page 625
– "Best Wide-offset Φ Noise" on page 626
– "Fast Tuning" on page 626
– "Balance Noise and Spurs " on page 625
– "Best Spurs " on page 626
– "Phase Noise Optimization Auto Rules" on page 627
Auto
Selects the LO (local oscillator) phase noise behavior to optimize dynamic range and
speed for various instrument operating conditions. See "Phase Noise Optimization
Auto Rules" on page 627 for details on the Auto rules.
Best Close-in Φ Noise
The LO phase noise is optimized for smaller offsets from the carrier, at the expense of
phase noise farther out. The actual frequency offset within which noise is optimized is shown with in square
brackets, as this can vary depending on the hardware set in use. For example, in
some analyzers this annotation appears as [offset <20 kHz]
In instruments with Option EP0, the LO is configured for the best possible phase
noise at offsets up to 600 kHz from the carrier, regardless of spurious products that
occur with some center frequencies.
Balance Noise and Spurs
In instruments with EP0, the LO is configured for the best possible phase noise at
offsets up to 600 kHz from the carrier whenever there are no significant spurs within
the span observed with an on-screen carrier. When there will be such a spur, the LO
is reconfigured in a way that allows the phase noise to increase by 7 dB mostly within
±1 octave around 400 kHz offset. The spurs will always be below −70 dBc.
625
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
Best Spurs
In instruments with EP0, the LO is configured for better phase noise than the “WideOffset” case close to the carrier, but the configuration has 11 dB worse phase noise
than the “Best Close-In” case mostly within ±1 octave around 300 kHz offset. Spurs
are even lower than in the “Balance Noise and Spurs” case at better than −90 dBc,
whether or not the carrier is on-screen.
This setting is never selected when Phase Noise Optimization is in Auto, you must
select it manually.
Best Wide-offset Φ Noise
The LO phase noise is optimized for wider offsets from the carrier. Optimization is
especially improved for offsets from 70 kHz to 300 kHz. Closer offsets are
compromised and the throughput of measurements (especially remote
measurements where the center frequency is changing rapidly), is reduced.
The actual frequency offset beyond which noise is optimized is shown with in square
brackets, as this can vary depending on the hardware set in use. For example, in
some analyzers this annotation appears as [offset >30 kHz]
In instruments with Option EP0, the LO is configured for the best possible phase
noise at offsets up to 600 kHz from the carrier whenever there are no significant
spurs within the span observed with an on-screen carrier. When there will be such a
spur, the LO is reconfigured in a way that allows the phase noise to increase by 7 dB
mostly within ±1 octave around 400 kHz offset. The spurs will always be below −70
dBc.
Fast Tuning
In this mode, the LO behavior compromises phase noise at many offsets from the
carrier in order to allow rapid measurement throughput when changing the center
frequency or span. The term “fast tuning” refers to the time it takes to move the local
oscillator to the start frequency and begin a sweep; this setting does not impact the
actual sweep time in any way.
In instruments with EP1, the LO behavior compromises phase noise at offsets below
4 MHz in order to improve measurement throughput. The throughput is especially
affected when moving the LO more than 2.5 MHz and up to 10 MHz from the stop
frequency to the next start frequency.
In instruments with Option EP0, this is the same configuration as the Best Spurs
configuration. It is available with this “Fast Tuning” label to inform the user, and to
make the user interface more consistent with other X-Series analyzer family
members.
(In models whose hardware does not provide for a fast tuning option, the settings for
Best Close-in Φ Noise are used if Fast Tuning is selected. This gives the fastest
possible tuning for that hardware set.)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
626
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
Phase Noise Optimization Auto Rules
The X-Series has several grades of LO that offer different configurations when in the
Auto Mode.
– "Models with Option EP1" on page 627 (available in PXA)
– "Models with Option EP2" on page 627 (available, for example, in MXA for
excellent phase noise)
– "Models with Option EP4" on page 628 (available in CXA for improved phase
noise)
– "All other Models" on page 628
Models with Option EP1
Auto selects Fast Tuning whenever:
– Span > 44.44 MHz, or when
– RBW > 1.9 MHz, or if
– Source Mode is set to “Tracking”
Otherwise Auto selects Best Close in Phase Noise whenever:
– Center frequency is < 195 kHz, or when
– CF >= 1 MHz and Span <= 1.3 MHz and RBW <= 75 kHz
Otherwise, Auto selects Best Wide-offset Phase Noise
The RBW to be used in the calculations above is the equivalent –3 dB bandwidth of
the current RBW filter.
These rules apply whether in swept spans, zero span, or FFT spans.
Models with Option EP2
Auto selects Best Close-in Φ Noise whenever:
– CF < 130 kHz , or when
– CF > 12 MHz and Span < 495 kHz and RBW < 40 kHz
Otherwise, Auto selects Fast Tuning whenever:
– Span > 22 MHz, or when
– RBW > 400 kHz, or when – CF ≤ 12 MHz and Span < 495 kHz and RBW < 23 kHz
Otherwise, Auto selects Best Wide-offset Φ Noise.
627
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
The RBW to be used in the calculations above is the equivalent –3 dB bandwidth of
the current RBW filter.
These rules apply whether in swept spans, zero span, or FFT spans.
Models with Option EP4
Auto selects Fast Tuning whenever:
– Span > 101 MHz or when
– RBW > 1.15 MHz or if
– Source Mode is set to “Tracking”
Otherwise, Auto selects Best Close in Phase Noise whenever:
– CF is < 109 kHz or when
– CF >= 4.95 MHz and Span <= 666 kHz and RBW < 28 kHz
Otherwise, Auto selects Best Wide-offset Φ Noise.
The RBW to be used in the calculations above is the equivalent –3 dB bandwidth of
the current RBW filter.
These rules apply whether in swept spans, zero span, or FFT spans.
All other Models
Auto selects Fast Tuning whenever:
– Span > 12.34 MHz, or when
– RBW > 250 kHz, or if
– Source Mode is set to “Tracking”
Otherwise, Auto selects Best Close in Phase Noise whenever:
– Center frequency is < 25 kHz, or when
– CF >= 1 MHz and Span <= 141.4 kHz and RBW <= 5 kHz
Otherwise, Auto selects Best Wide-offset Phase Noise
Note that in these models, the hardware does not actually provide for an extra-fast
tuning option, so the settings for Fast Tuning are actually the same as Best Close-in,
but the rules are implemented this way so that the user who doesn't care about
phase noise but does care about tuning speed doesn't have to remember which of
the other two settings gives faster tuning.
The RBW to be used in the calculations above is the equivalent –3 dB bandwidth of
the current RBW filter.
These rules apply whether in swept spans, zero span, or FFT spans.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
628
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
ADC Dither
Accesses the menu to control the ADC Dither function. The dither function enhances
linearity for low level signals at the expense of reduced clipping-to-noise ratio. The
reduced clipping-to-noise ratio results in higher noise, because we work to ensure
that the clipping level of the ADC relative to the front terminals remains unchanged
with the introduction of dither, and this results in reduced ADC dynamic range. So
making measurements with ADC dither gives you better amplitude linearity, but
turning ADC dither off gives you a lower noise floor (better sensitivity).
With dither on, the third-order distortions are usually invisible for mixer levels below
–35 dBm. With dither off, these distortions can be visible, with typical power levels of
–110 dBm referred to the mixer. Detection nonlinearity can reach 1 dB for dither off at
mixer levels around –70 dBm and lower, while the specified nonlinearity is many
times smaller with dither on.
When ADC Dither is on, the linearity of low-level signals is improved. The enhanced
linearity is mostly improved scale fidelity. The linearity improvements of dither are
most significant for RBWs of 3.9 kHz and less in swept mode, and FFT widths of 4 kHz
and less in FFT mode.
The increased noise due to turning dither on is most significant in low band (0 to 3.6
GHz) with IF Gain set to Low, where it can be about 0.2 dB.
Key Path
Meas Setup
Dependencies
In some models, the “High” parameter is not available. In some instruments, the HIGH parameter
is honored and the HIGH state set, and returned to a query, but the Medium dither level is
actually used.
Preset
AUTO
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.02.00
Auto
Sets the ADC dither to automatic. The analyzer then chooses the dither level
according to which is most likely to be the best selection, based on other settings
within the digital IF.
When in Auto, the analyzer sets the dither to Medium whenever the effective IF Gain
is Low by this definition of IF Gain = Low:
– When Sweep Type = Swept, IF Gain = Low whenever Swept IF Gain is set to Low
Gain, whether by autocoupling or manual selection.
– When Sweep Type = FFT, IF Gain = Low whenever FFT IF Gain is set to "Low
Gain," which cannot happen by autocoupling.
Whenever the IF Gain is not low by this definition, Auto sets the dither to Off.
629
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
Key Path
Meas Setup, ADC Dither
Preset
ON
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback
The “Auto” is underlined, and the readback value is whatever setting is auto-selected
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
High (Best Log Accy)
When ADC dither is set to High, the scale fidelity is especially good, most notably
the relative scale fidelity. The tradeoff is that there is a modest loss of noise floor
performance, up to about a decibel.
Key Path
Meas setup, ADC Dither
Example
ADC:DITH:HIGH
Readback
If manually selected, the readback is High, with the “Man” underlined
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Medium (Log Accy)
The Medium setting of ADC Dither (known as “On” in earlier versions of the
instrument software) improves the linearity of low-level signals at the expense of
some noise degradation.
Key Path
Meas setup, ADC Dither
Example
ADC:DITH:ON
Readback
If manually selected, the readback is Medium, with the “Man” underlined
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.02.00
Off (Best Noise)
When ADC Dither is Off, the instrument noise floor is improved, because without the
need to make room for the dither, you get a lower noise floor and better sensitivity.
Key Path
Meas setup, ADC Dither
Example
ADC:DITH:OFF
Readback
If manually selected, the readback is Off, with the “Man” underlined.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
630
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
Swept IF Gain
To take full advantage of the RF dynamic range of the analyzer, there is an added
switched IF amplifier with approximately 10 dB of gain. When you can turn it on
without overloading the analyzer, the dynamic range is always better with it on than
off. The Swept IF Gain key can be used to set the IF Gain function to Auto, or to High
Gain (the extra 10 dB), or to Low Gain. These settings affect sensitivity and IF
overloads.
This function is only active when in Swept sweeps. In FFT sweeps, the FFT IF Gain
function is used instead.
Key Path
Meas Setup
Notes
where ON = high gain
OFF = low gain
Couplings
The ‘auto’ rules for Swept IF Gain depend on attenuation, preamp state, start and stop frequency
and the setting of FFT IF Gain. Set the Swept IF Gain to High (On) when the total input
attenuation is 0 dB, the preamp is off, the start frequency is 10 MHz or more, and the FFT IF Gain
is autocoupled, or manually set to Autorange, or manually set to High. Also set the Swept IF Gain
to High (On) when the total input attenuation is 2 dB or less, the preamp is on, the start frequency
is 10 MHz or more, and the stop frequency is 3.6 GHz or less and the FFT IF Gain is autocoupled,
or manually set to Autorange, or manually set to High. Under all other circumstances, set the
Swept IF Gain to Low (Off).
If the sweep type is Swept, the start frequency of the instrument is less than 10 MHz, and you put
Swept IF Gain in Manual On, a warning condition is generated and remains in effect as long as
this condition exists. The warning message is about a possible IF overload.
As with most parameters with an AUTO state, AUTO COUPLE sets it to Auto, and setting any
specific value (for example on or off) will set the AUTO state to false.
Preset
Auto after a Preset which yields Off unless the Preamp is on.
Auto and Off after Meas Preset.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Readback Line
High Gain or Low Gain
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Auto
Activates the auto rules for Swept IF Gain
Key Path
Meas setup
Preset
ON
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Low Gain (Best for Large Signals)
Forces Swept IF Gain to be off.
Key Path
631
Meas setup, ADC Ranging
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
Example
IF:GAIN:SWEP OFF
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Readback
Low Gain
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
High Gain (Best Noise Level)
Forces Swept IF Gain to be on.
Key Path
Meas setup, ADC Ranging
Dependencies
The High setting for Swept IF Gain is grayed out when FFT IF Gain is manually set to Low (not
when Low is chosen by the auto-rules).
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Readback
High Gain
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
FFT IF Gain
Accesses the keys to set the ranging in the digital IF when doing FFT sweeps. When
in Autorange mode, the IF checks its range once for every FFT chunk, to provide the
best signal to noise ratio. You can specify the range for the best FFT speed, and
optimize for noise or for large signals.
When the sweep type is FFT and this function is in Autorange, the IF Gain is set ON
initially for each chunk of data. The data is then acquired. If the IF overloads, then
the IF Gain is set OFF and the data is re-acquired. Because of this operation, the
Auto setting uses more measurement time as the instrument checks/resets its
range. You can get faster measurement speed by forcing the range to either the high
or low gain setting. But you must know that your measurement conditions will not
overload the IF (in the high gain range) and that your signals are well above the
noise floor (for the low gain range), and that the signals are not changing.
Key Path
Meas Setup
Couplings
As with most parameters with an AUTO state, AUTO COUPLE sets it to Auto, which then picks
AUTOrange, and setting any specific value (AUTOrange, LOW or HIGH) will set the AUTO state to
false.
Preset
AUTOrange
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Readback Line
Autorange, High Gain or Low Gain
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
632
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
Auto
Allows the instrument to pick the FFT IF Gain method as appropriate. This “Auto”
state is set by the Auto Couple key, and it puts it in Autorange.
Key Path
Meas Setup
Preset
ON
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Autorange (Slower – Follows Signals)
Turns the ADC ranging to automatic which provides the best signal to noise ratio.
Autorange is usually preferred over the manual range choices.
Key Path
Meas setup, FFT IF Gain
Example
IF:GAIN:FFT AUTOrange
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Readback
Autorange
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Low Gain (Best for Large Signals)
Forces FFT IF Gain to be off.
Key Path
Meas Setup, FFT IF Gain
Example
IF:GAIN:FFT LOW
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Readback
Low Gain
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
High Gain (Best Noise Level)
Forces FFT IF Gain to be on.
633
Key Path
Meas Setup, FFT IF Gain
Example
IF:GAIN:FFT HIGH
Dependencies
The High setting for FFT IF Gain is grayed out when Swept IF Gain is manually set to Low (not
when Low is chosen by the auto-rules).
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Readback
High Gain
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
Analog Demod Tune & Listen
The Analog Demod Tune & Listen key opens the Analog Demod menu which
contains keys to turn the demod function on and off and select modulation type. This
key only appears if the N9063A Analog Demod mode, the N6141A or W6141A
application, or Option EMC is installed and licensed.
When the function is on (set to AM, FM, or ΦM), the demodulated signal is fed to the
analyzer’s speaker. Muting and volume control functions are done through the
standard Windows speaker volume control interface.
Key Path
Meas Setup
Dependencies
When Tune & Listen is turned on, all active traces are forced to use the same detector.
CISPR detectors (QPD, EMI Avg, RMS Avg) and Tune & Listen are mutually exclusive. No sound
output will be heard if one of these detectors is selected.
Preset
OFF
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
In ESA, the command [:SENSe]:DEMod AM|FM would select the demodulation type but would
not activate it (turn it on). In X-Series this command will both select and activate demodulation.
The X-Series implementation of Demod Tune and Listen does not include Squelch Control as was
supported in ESA.
The speaker control for Tune and Listen for X-Series is done with the volume up/down and mute
hardkeys on the front panel and is handled by the Windows operating system. There is no
software speaker on/off control as was supported in ESA.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.02.00
AM
Pressing this key, when it is not selected, selects and activates the AM
demodulation function. Pressing it a second time branches to the AM Demod menu
where AM demodulation settings can be adjusted.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Analog Demod Tune&Listen
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Channel BW (AM Demod)
Sets the RBW setting used by the hardware during the demodulation period in
nonzero spans. Note that this is a separate parameter only for the demodulation
function and does not affect the RBW setting in the BW menu which is used during
the normal sweep. The flat top filter type must be used during the demodulation
period. A 5 kHz Video Bandwidth filter is used.
In Zero Span, the instrument’s RBW & VBW filters are used for the demodulation;
thus, the Channel BW (and RBW filter type) will match those of the instrument. This
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
634
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
allows gap-free listening. The Channel BW key is grayed out and the value displayed
on the key matches the current RBW of the instrument. Upon leaving zero span, the
non-zero-span setting of Channel BW is restored as well as the flattop filter type.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Analog Demod Tune&Listen, AM
Notes
This key/command is grayed out in zero span.
Dependencies
Unavailable in zero span.
Couplings
In zero span only, the value is set equal to the instrument’s current RBW value and it displays that
value on the softkey, but the softkey is grayed out.
Preset
30 kHz
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Min
390 Hz
Max
8 MHz
Default Unit
Hz
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
FM
Pressing this key, when it is not selected, selects and activates the FM demodulation
function. Pressing it a second time branches to the FM Demod menu where FM
demodulation settings can be adjusted.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Analog Demod Tune&Listen
Example
DEM FM
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Channel BW (FM Demod)
Sets the RBW setting used by the hardware during the demodulation period in
nonzero spans. Note that this is a separate parameter only for the demodulation
function and does not affect the RBW setting in the BW menu which is used during
the normal sweep. The flat top filter type must be used during the demodulation
period. A 5 kHz Video Bandwidth filter is used.
In Zero Span, the instrument’s RBW & VBW filters are used for the demodulation;
thus, the Channel BW (and RBW filter type) will match those of the instrument. This
allows gap-free listening. The Channel BW key is grayed out and the value displayed
on the key matches the current RBW of the instrument. Upon leaving zero span, the
previous setting of Channel BW and the flattop filter type are restored.
635
Key Path
Meas Setup, Analog Demod Tune&Listen, FM
Notes
This key / command is grayed out in zero span
Dependencies
Unavailable in zero span.
Couplings
In zero span only, the value is set equal to the instrument’s current RBW value and it displays
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
that value on the softkey, but the softkey is grayed out.
Preset
150 kHz
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Min
390 Hz
Max
8 MHz
Default Unit
Hz
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
De-emphasis (FM Demod only)
The De-emphasis setting controls a single-pole filter (6 dB/octave roll off), usually to
counter intentional pre-emphasis in the transmitter. When De-emphasis state is
OFF the hardware digital filter is bypassed, otherwise the setting is applied
The De-emphasis softkey is only available when FM is the demod selected. It is
grayed out for AM and PM.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Analog Demod Tune & Listen, FM
Dependencies
Only available in FM. Grayed out for AM and PM.
Preset
US75 (recommended for US commercial FM 75 µs pre-emphasis)
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Readback line
1-of-N selection
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
ΦM
Pressing this key, when it is not selected, selects and activates the ΦM
demodulation function. Pressing it a second time branches to the ΦM Demod menu
where ΦM demodulation settings can be adjusted.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Analog Demod Tune&Listen
Example
DEM PM
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Channel BW (ΦM Demod)
Sets the RBW setting used by the hardware during the demodulation period in
nonzero spans. Note that this is a separate parameter only for the demodulation
function and does not affect the RBW setting in the BW menu which is used during
the normal sweep. The flat top filter type must be used during the demodulation
period. A 5 kHz Video Bandwidth filter is used.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
636
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
In Zero Span, the instrument’s RBW & VBW filters are used for the demodulation;
thus, the Channel BW (and RBW filter type) will match those of the instrument. This
allows gap-free listening. The Channel BW key is grayed out and the value displayed
on the key matches the current RBW of the instrument. Upon leaving zero span, the
previous setting of Channel BW and the flattop filter type are restored.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Analog Demod Tune&Listen, ΦM
Notes
This key / command is grayed out in zero span
Dependencies
Unavailable in zero span.
Couplings
In zero span only, the value is set equal to the instrument’s current RBW value and it displays
that value on the softkey, but the softkey is grayed out.
Preset
100 kHz
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Min
390 Hz
Max
8 MHz
Default Unit
Hz
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Off
Pressing this key, turns the demodulation function off.
Key Path
Meas Setup, Analog Demod Tune&Listen
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Demod Time
Sets the amount of time the instrument demodulates the signal after each sweep.
The demodulated signal can be heard through the speaker during demodulation. In
zero span, demodulation can be performed continuously, making this parameter not
applicable, hence it is grayed out in zero span.
637
Key Path
Meas Setup, Analog Demod Tune&Listen
Notes
This key / command is grayed out in zero span
Dependencies
Unavailable in zero span.
Preset
500 ms
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Min
2 ms
Max
100 s
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
Noise Source
This menu allows you to turn the noise source power on or off when making manual
noise figure measurements. – See "More Information" on page 638.
Key Path
Meas Setup
Couplings
If no SNS is connected, this parameter will be set to “Normal”
When Type is set to “SNS” and the SNS is disconnected, this parameter gets bumped to
“Normal”
When an SNS is not connected, the SNS type will be grayed (disabled).
Preset
Normal
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Range
Normal | SNS
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
In previous Noise Figure analysis applications, this command could optionally be preceded with
the :SENSe keyword. The optional :SENSe keyword is no longer supported.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
More Information
There are 2 types of noise sources: a Smart Noise Source (SNS), and a "Normal"
noise source - e.g. 346 series. This menu allows the user to control both. The SNS
has its own connector on the rear of the analyzer and when it is connected the user
can then select it from the “Type” 1 of N, allowing the State parameter to then
control the SNS. The "Normal" source is controlled by a BNC connector that supplies
28V. If SNS is NOT connected then the “state” parameter controls the "Normal"
noise source 28V BNC port. If both are connected the “Type” parameter will
determine which source the “State” parameter will control. Two sources can never
be controlled together. The “SNS attached” SCPI query detailed below can be used
remotely to determine if an SNS is connected. SNS functionality is limited to turning
on and off only. The SNS ENR data and temperature cannot be queried, unless the
Noise Figure application is installed. The SNS ENR data is issued in printed form
when an SNS is purchased or can be read from the analyzer’s Noise Figure
application if installed, or other Keysight noise figure instruments that support the
SNS (NFA and ESA with option 219).
When first entering the Swept SA measurement the “State” will be set to OFF and
the 28v BNC drive and SNS turned off to ensure the two are in sync. When the Swept
SA measurement is exited, the “State” parameter will be set to OFF and the 28v
BNC and SNS drive turned off.
For making manual noise figure measurements the following setup is recommended:
– Set the SPAN to Zero
– Set attenuation to 0 dB
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
638
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
– Set the PRE-AMP ON
– Set the RBW to 4MHz
– Set the Detector to AVERAGE
– Set the sweep time to 16ms - sets the variance correctly for good results.
– Set a Band/Interval Power Marker function and set the interval over the full width
of trace i.e. Left to 0s and Right to 16ms
Noise Source
This menu allows you to turn the noise source power on or off when making manual
noise figure measurements. – See "More Information" on page 639.
Key Path
Meas Setup
Couplings
If no SNS is connected, this parameter will be set to “Normal”
When Type is set to “SNS” and the SNS is disconnected, this parameter gets bumped to
“Normal”
When an SNS is not connected, the SNS type will be grayed (disabled).
Preset
Normal
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Range
Normal | SNS
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
In previous Noise Figure analysis applications, this command could optionally be preceded with
the :SENSe keyword. The optional :SENSe keyword is no longer supported.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
More Information
There are 2 types of noise sources: a Smart Noise Source (SNS), and a "Normal"
noise source - e.g. 346 series. This menu allows the user to control both. The SNS
has its own connector on the rear of the analyzer and when it is connected the user
can then select it from the “Type” 1 of N, allowing the State parameter to then
control the SNS. The "Normal" source is controlled by a BNC connector that supplies
28V. If SNS is NOT connected then the “state” parameter controls the "Normal"
noise source 28V BNC port. If both are connected the “Type” parameter will
determine which source the “State” parameter will control. Two sources can never
be controlled together. The “SNS attached” SCPI query detailed below can be used
remotely to determine if an SNS is connected. SNS functionality is limited to turning
on and off only. The SNS ENR data and temperature cannot be queried, unless the
Noise Figure application is installed. The SNS ENR data is issued in printed form
when an SNS is purchased or can be read from the analyzer’s Noise Figure
application if installed, or other Keysight noise figure instruments that support the
SNS (NFA and ESA with option 219).
639
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Meas Setup
When first entering the Swept SA measurement the “State” will be set to OFF and
the 28v BNC drive and SNS turned off to ensure the two are in sync. When the Swept
SA measurement is exited, the “State” parameter will be set to OFF and the 28v
BNC and SNS drive turned off.
For making manual noise figure measurements the following setup is recommended:
– Set the SPAN to Zero
– Set attenuation to 0 dB
– Set the PRE-AMP ON
– Set the RBW to 4MHz
– Set the Detector to AVERAGE
– Set the sweep time to 16ms - sets the variance correctly for good results.
– Set a Band/Interval Power Marker function and set the interval over the full
width of trace i.e. Left to 0s and Right to 16ms
State
This key turns the Noise Source on and off.
Key Path
Meas Setup
Couplings
If an SNS is connected, and the Type is set to SNS, this parameter turns the SNS on and off.
When an SNS is not connected this parameter turns the BNC 28V output on and off.
When the SA mode is first entered this parameter is set to OFF and the 28v drive turned OFF.
When the SA mode is exited this parameter is set to OFF and the 28v drive turned OFF.
Preset
OFF
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Meas Preset
This key returns the Meas Local variables in the Swept SA measurement to their
preset values. This is the same as sending the SCPI command CONF:SAN.
The only exception is Limits On/Off, which is a persistent Meas Local variable. It will
be set to Off by a Mode Preset but not by Meas Preset.
Key Path
Meas Setup
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
640
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode
Mode
The Mode key allows you to select the available Measurement Applications or
“Modes”. Modes are a collection of measurement capabilities packaged together to
provide an instrument personality that is specific to your measurement needs. Each
application software product is ordered separately by Model Number, and must be
licensed to be available. Once an instrument mode is selected, only the commands
that are valid for that mode can be executed. Key operation can differ between modes. The information displayed in Help applies
to the current mode.
To access Help for a different Mode, you must first exit Help (by pressing the Cancel
(Esc) key). Then select the desired mode and re-access Help.
For more information on Modes, pre-loading Modes, and memory requirements for
Modes, see "More Information" on page 642 below.
Key Path
Front-panel key
Remote Command
:INSTrument[:SELect] SA | SEQAN | EMI | BASIC | WCDMA | EDGEGSM |
WIMAXOFDMA | VSA | PNOISE | NFIGure | ADEMOD | BTooth | TDSCDMA |
CDMA2K | CDMA1XEV | LTE | LTETDD | MSR | DVB | DTMB | DCATV | ISDBT
| CMMB | WLAN | CWLAN | CWIMAXOFDM | WIMAXFIXED | IDEN | RLC |
SCPILC | VSA89601
:INSTrument[:SELect]?
Example
:INST SA
Notes
The available parameters are dependent upon installed and licensed applications resident in the
instrument. Parameters given here are an example, specific parameters are in the individual
Application.
Use the INST:CAT? query to obtain a list of valid mode choices.
Preset
Not affected by Preset. Set to SA following Restore System Defaults, if SA is the default mode.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Backwards
Compatibility SCPI
:INSTrument[:SELect] GSM
Backwards
Compatibility SCPI
:INSTrument[:SELect] SANalyzer
Provided for backwards compatibility. GSM is mapped to EDGEGSM.
Provided for ESU compatibility. When this command is received, the analyzer aliases it to the
following:
INST:SEL SCPILC
This results in the analyzer being placed in SCPI Language Compatibility Mode, in order to
emulate the ESU Spectrum Analyzer Mode.
Backwards
Compatibility SCPI
:INSTrument[:SELect] RECeiver
provided for ESU compatibility. When this command is received, the instrument aliases it to the
following:
:INST:SEL EMI
:CONF FSC
This results in the instrument being placed in the EMI Receiver Mode, running the Frequency
Scan measurement, in order to emulate the ESU Receiver Mode.
641
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.10.01
Example
:INST ‘SA’
Notes
The query is not a quoted string. It is an enumeration as indicated in the Instrument Select table
above.
The command must be sequential: that is, continued parsing of commands cannot proceed until
the instrument select is complete and the resultant SCPI trees are available.
Backwards
Compatibility SCPI
:INSTrument[:SELect] ‘SA’|’PNOISE’|’EDGE’|’GSM’|’BASIC’
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
More Information
The Mode name appears on the banner after the word “Keysight” followed by the
Measurement Title. For example, for the Spectrum Analyzer mode with the Swept
SA measurement running displays:
It is possible to specify the order in which the Modes appear in the Mode menu, using
the Configure Applications utility (System, Power On, Configure Applications). It is
also possible, using the same utility, to specify a subset of the available applications
to load into memory at startup time, which can significantly decrease the startup
time of the analyzer. During runtime, if an application that is not loaded into memory
is selected (by either pressing that application's Mode key or sending that
application's :INST:SEL command over SCPI), there will be a pause while the
application is loaded. During this pause a message box appears stating “Loading
application, please wait…”.
Each application (Mode) that runs in an X-Series instrument consumes virtual
memory. The various applications consume varying amounts of virtual memory, and
as more applications run, the memory consumption increases. Once an application
has been loaded, some of its memory remains allocated even when it is not running,
and is not released until the analyzer program (xSA.exe) shuts down.
Keysight characterizes each Mode and assigns a memory usage quantity based on a
conservative estimate. There is a limited amount of virtual memory available to
applications (note that this is virtual memory and is independent of how much
physical RAM is in the instrument). The instrument keeps track of how much memory
is being used by all loaded applications – which includes those that preloaded at
startup, and all of those that have been run since startup. When you request a Mode that is not currently loaded, the instrument looks up the
memory estimate for that Mode, and adds it to the residual total for all currently
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
642
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode
loaded Modes. If there is not enough virtual memory to load the Mode, a dialog box
appears with four options:
1. Close and restart the analyzer program without changing your configured
preloads. This may free up enough memory to load the requested Mode,
depending on your configured preloads
2. Clear out all preloads and close and restart the analyzer program with only the
requested application preloaded, and with that application running. This choice
is guaranteed to allow you to run the requested application; but you will lose
your previously configured preloads. In addition, there may be little or no room
for other applications, depending on the size of the requested application. 3. Start the Configure Applications utility, in order to reconfigure the preloaded
applications to make room for the applications you want to run (this will then
require restarting the analyzer program with your new configuration). This is the
recommended choice because it gives you full flexibility to select exactly what
you want.
4. Exit the dialog box without doing anything, which means you will be unable to
load the application you requested.
Except for case 4, selecting any option from the dialog causes the analyzer software
to close, and you will lose all unsaved traces and results.
If you attempt to load a mode via SCPI that exceeds memory capacity, the Mode
does not load and an error message is returned: –225,"Out of memory;Insufficient resources to load Mode (mode name)"
where “mode name” is the SCPI parameter for the mode in question, for example, SA
for Spectrum Analyzer Mode.
Spectrum Analyzer
Selects the Spectrum Analyzer mode for general purpose measurements. There are
several measurements available in this mode. General spectrum analysis
measurements, in swept and zero span, can be done using the first key in the Meas
menu, labeled Swept SA. Other measurements in the Meas Menu are designed to
perform specialized measurement tasks, including power and demod
measurements.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL SA
INST:NSEL 1
Initial S/W Revision
643
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode
EMI Receiver
The EMI Receiver Mode makes EMC measurements. Several measurements are
provided to aid the user in characterizing EMC performance of their systems,
including looking at signals with CISPR–16 compliant detectors, performing scans
for interfering signals, and determining and charting interfering signals over time.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL EMI
INST:NSEL 141
Initial S/W Revision
A.07.01
IQ Analyzer (Basic)
The IQ Analyzer Mode makes general purpose frequency domain and time domain
measurements. These measurements often use alternate hardware signal paths
when compared with a similar measurement in the Signal Analysis Mode using the
Swept SA measurement. These frequency domain and time domain measurements
can be used to output I/Q data results when measuring complex modulated digital
signals.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL BASIC
INST:NSEL 8
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
W-CDMA with HSPA+
Selects the W-CDMA with HSPA+ mode for general purpose measurements of
signals following this standard. There are several measurements available in this
mode.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
644
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode
Example
INST:SEL WCDMA
INST:NSEL 9
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
GSM/EDGE/EDGE Evo
Selects the GSM with EDGE mode for general purpose measurements of signals
following this standard. There are several measurements available in this mode.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL EDGEGSM
INST:NSEL 13
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.02.00
802.16 OFDMA (WiMAX/WiBro)
Selects the OFDMA mode for general purpose measurements of WiMAX signals.
There are several measurements available in this mode.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL WIMAXOFDMA
INST:NSEL 75
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Vector Signal Analyzer (VXA)
The N9064A (formerly 89601X) VXA Vector signal and WLAN modulation analysis
application provides solutions for basic vector signal analysis, analog demodulation,
and digital demodulation. The digital demodulation portion of N9064A allows you to
perform measurements on standard-based formats such as cellular, wireless
networking and digital video as well as general purpose flexible modulation analysis
for wide range of digital formats, FSK to 1024QAM, with easy-to-use measurements
and display tools such as constellation and eye diagram, EVM traces and up to four
645
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode
simultaneous displays. Analog baseband analysis is available using the MXA with
option BBA. Option 3FP WLAN has been discontinued.
N9064A honors existing 89601X licenses with all features and functionalities found
on X-Series software versions prior to A.06.00. Specifically:
N9064A–1 is equivalent to 89601X–205
N9064A–2 is equivalent to 89601X-AYA
N9064A–3 is equivalent to 89601X-B7R
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL VSA
INST:NSEL 100
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Phase Noise
The Phase Noise mode provides pre-configured measurements for making general
purpose measurements of device phase noise.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL PNOISE
or
INST:NSEL 14
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Noise Figure
The Noise Figure mode provides pre-configured measurements for making general
purpose measurements of device noise figure.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL NFIGURE
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
646
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode
INST:NSEL 219
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Analog Demod
Selects the Analog Demod mode for making measurements of AM, FM and phase
modulated signals.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL ADEMOD
INST:NSEL 234
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
TD-SCDMA with HSPA/8PSK
Selects the TD-SCDMA mode for general purpose measurements of signals
following this standard. There are several measurements available in this mode.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL TDSCDMA
INST:NSEL 211
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
cdma2000
Selects the cdma2000 mode for general purpose measurements of signals following
this standard. There are several measurements available in this mode.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL CDMA2K
INST:NSEL 10
647
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
1xEV-DO
Selects the 1xEV-DO mode for general purpose measurements of signals following
this standard. There are several measurements available in this mode.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL CDMA1XEV
INST:NSEL 15
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
LTE
Selects the LTE mode for general purpose measurements of signals following the
LTE FDD standard. There are several measurements available in this mode.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL LTE
INST:NSEL 102
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
LTE TDD
Selects the LTE TDD mode for general purpose measurements of signals following
the LTE TDD standard. There are several measurements available in this mode.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL LTETDD
INST:NSEL 105
Initial S/W Revision
A.03.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
648
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode
DVB-T/H with T2
Selects the DVB-T/H mode for measurements of digital video signals using this
format. There are several power and demod measurements available in this mode.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL DVB
INST:NSEL 235
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.07.00
DTMB (CTTB)
Selects the DTMB (CTTB) mode for measurements of digital video signals using this
format. There are several power and demod measurements available in this mode.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL DTMB
INST:NSEL 236
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
ISDB-T
Selects the ISDB-T mode for measurements of digital video signals using this format.
There are several power and demod measurements available in this mode.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL ISDBT
INST:NSEL 239
Initial S/W Revision
649
A.03.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode
CMMB
Selects the CMMB mode for measurements of digital video signals using this format.
There are several power and demod measurements available in this mode.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL CMMB
INST:NSEL 240
Initial S/W Revision
A.03.00
Combined WLAN
Selects the CWLAN mode for general purpose measurements of signals following
this standard. There are several measurements available in this mode.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL CWLAN
INST:NSEL 19
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Combined Fixed WiMAX
Selects the Combined Fixed WiMAX mode for general purpose measurements of
signals following this standard. There are several measurements available in this
mode.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL CWIMAXOFDM
INST:NSEL 81
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
650
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode
802.16 OFDM (Fixed WiMAX)
Selects the 802.16 OFDM (Fixed WiMAX) mode. This mode allows modulation quality
measurements of signals that comply with IEEE 802.16a–2003 and IEEE 802.16–
2004 standards, with flexibility to measure nonstandard OFDM formats. Along with
the typical digital demodulation measurement results, several additional 802.16
OFDM unique trace data formats and numeric error data results provide enhanced
data analysis.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL WIMAXFIXED
INST:NSEL 104
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
iDEN/WiDEN/MOTOTalk
Selects the iDEN/WiDEN/MOTOTalk mode for general purpose measurements of
iDEN and iDEN-related signals. There are several measurements available in this
mode. If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL IDEN
INST:NSEL 103
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility
The Remote Language Compatibility (RLC) mode provides remote command
backwards compatibility for the 8560 series of spectrum analyzers, known as legacy
spectrum analyzers.
After changing into or out of this mode, allow a 1 second delay before sending any
subsequent commands.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
651
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL RLC
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode
Or
INST:NSEL 266
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
89601 VSA
Selecting the 89601 VSA mode will start the 89600-Series VSA software
application. The 89600 VSA software is powerful, PC-based software, offering the
industry's most sophisticated general purpose and standards specific signal
evaluation and troubleshooting tools for the R&D engineer. Reach deeper into
signals, gather more data on signal problems, and gain greater insight. – Over 30 general-purpose analog and digital demodulators ranging from 2FSK to
1024QAM
– Standards specific modulation analysis including: – Cell: GSM, cdma2000, WCDMA, TD-SCDMA and more
– Wireless networking: 802.11a/b/g, 802.11n, 802.16 WiMAX (fixed/mobile), UWB
– RFID
– Digital satellite video and other satellite signals, radar, LMDS
– Up to 400K bin FFT, for the highest resolution spectrum analysis
– A full suite of time domain analysis tools, including signal capture and playback,
time gating, and CCDF measurements
– Six simultaneous trace displays and the industry's most complete set of marker
functions
– Easy-to-use Microsoft ® Windows ® graphical user interface
For more information see the Keysight 89600 Series VSA web site at
www.keysight.com/find/89600
To learn more about how to use the 89600 VSA running in the X-Series, after the
89600 VSA application is running, open the 89600 VSA Help and open the "About
Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzers (MXA/EXA) with 89600-Series Software" help
topic.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL VSA89601
INST:NSEL 101
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
652
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode
Bluetooth
Selects the Bluetooth mode for Bluetooth specific measurements. There are several
measurements available in this mode.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL BT
INST:NSEL 228
Initial S/W Revision
A.06.01
SCPI Language Compatibility
The SCPI Language Compatibility mode provides remote language compatibility for
SCPI-based instruments, such as the Rohde and Schwartz FSP and related series of
spectrum analyzers.
After changing into or out of this mode, allow a 1 second delay before sending any
subsequent commands.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL SCPILC
Or
INST:NSEL 270
Initial S/W Revision
A.06.00
Digital Cable TV
Selects the Digital Cable TV mode for measurements of digital cable television
systems. There are several power and demod measurements available in this mode.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL DCATV
INST:NSEL 238
Initial S/W Revision
653
A.07.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode
MSR
Selects the MSR mode. The MSR mode makes several measurements for Cellular
Communication devices that can be configured with multiple radio formats
simultaneously following the 3GPP standard of Multi-Standard Radio, including
GSM/EDGE, WCDMA/HSPA+ and LTE.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL MSR
INST:NSEL 106
Initial S/W Revision
A.10.01
WLAN
Selects the WLAN mode for general purpose measurements of signals following this
standard. There are several measurements available in this mode.
If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its
detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the
mode, and re-access Help.
Key Path
Mode
Example
INST:SEL WLAN
INST:NSEL 217
Initial S/W Revision
A.10.01
Application Mode Number Selection (Remote Command Only)
Select the measurement mode by its mode number. The actual available choices
depend upon which applications are installed in your instrument. The modes appear
in this table in the same order they appear in the Mode menu (if the order is not
changed by the Configure Applications utility found in the System, Power On menu). See "Detailed List of Modes" on page 656 for Mode details.
The Mode Number is the parameter for use with the :INSTrument:NSELect
command. The Mode Parameter is the parameter for use with the :INSTrument
[:SELect] command.
Mode
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Mode
Number
Mode Parameter
654
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode
Remote Command
Spectrum Analyzer
1
SA
Sequence Analyzer
400
SEQAN
EMI Receiver
141
EMI
I/Q Analyzer (Basic)
8
BASIC
WCDMA with HSPA+
9
WCDMA
GSM/EDGE/EDGE Evo
13
EDGEGSM
802.16 OFDMA (WiMAX/WiBro)
75
WIMAXOFDMA
Vector Signal Analyzer (VXA)
100
VSA
Phase Noise
14
PNOISE
Noise Figure
219
NFIGure
Analog Demod
234
ADEMOD
Bluetooth
228
BTooth
TD-SCDMA with HSPA/8PSK
211
TDSCDMA
cdma2000
10
CDMA2K
1xEV-DO
15
CDMA1XEV
LTE
102
LTE
LTE TDD
105
LTETDD
MSR
106
MSR
DVB-T/H with T2
235
DVB
DTMB (CTTB)
236
DTMB
Digital Cable TV
238
DCATV
ISDB-T
239
ISDBT
CMMB
240
CMMB
WLAN 217
WLAN
Combined WLAN 19
CWLAN
Combined Fixed WiMAX 81
CWIMAXOFDM
802.16 OFDM (Fixed WiMAX)
104
WIMAXFIXED
iDEN/WiDEN/MotoTalk
103
IDEN
Remote Language Compatibility
266
RLC
SCPI Language Compatibility
270
SCPILC
89601 VSA
101
VSA89601
:INSTrument:NSELect <integer>
:INSTrument:NSELect?
655
Example
:INST:NSEL 1
Notes
SA mode is 1
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode
The command must be sequential: i.e. continued parsing of commands cannot proceed until the
instrument select is complete and the resultant SCPI trees are available.
Preset
Not affected by Preset. Set to default mode (1 for SA mode) following Restore System Defaults.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Detailed List of Modes
This topic contains an alphabetical list of measurement applications (modes)
currently available in the X-Series, with links to the detailed description of each
mode.
With the exception of 89601 VSA mode, only licensed applications appear in the
Mode menu. The 89601 VSA mode always appears, because its licensing is handled
differently.
– "1xEV-DO" on page 648
– "802.16 OFDM (Fixed WiMAX)" on page 651
– "802.16 OFDMA (WiMAX/WiBro)" on page 645
– "89601 VSA" on page 652
– "Analog Demod" on page 647
– "Bluetooth" on page 653
– "cdma2000" on page 647
– "CMMB" on page 650
– "Combined Fixed WiMAX" on page 650
– "Combined WLAN" on page 650
– "Digital Cable TV" on page 653
– "DTMB (CTTB)" on page 649
– "DVB-T/H with T2" on page 649
– "EMI Receiver" on page 644
– "GSM/EDGE/EDGE Evo" on page 645
– "iDEN/WiDEN/MOTOTalk" on page 651
– "IQ Analyzer (Basic)" on page 644
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
656
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode
– "ISDB-T" on page 649
– "LTE TDD" on page 648
– "LTE" on page 648
– "MSR" on page 654
– "Noise Figure" on page 646
– "Phase Noise" on page 646
– "Remote Language Compatibility" on page 651
– "SCPI Language Compatibility " on page 653
– "Spectrum Analyzer" on page 643
– "TD-SCDMA with HSPA/8PSK" on page 647
– "Vector Signal Analyzer (VXA)" on page 645
– "W-CDMA with HSPA+" on page 644
– "WLAN" on page 654
657
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode Preset
Mode Preset
Returns the active mode to a known state.
Mode Preset does the following for the currently active mode:
– Aborts the currently running measurement.
– Brings up the default menu for the mode, with no active function.
– Sets measurement Global settings to their preset values for the active mode
only.
– Activates the default measurement.
– Brings up the default menu for the mode.
– Clears the input and output buffers.
– Sets Status Byte to 0.
Mode Preset does not:
– Cause a mode switch
– Affect mode persistent settings
– Affect system settings
See "How-To Preset" on page 659 for more information.
Key Path
Front-panel key
Notes
Clears all pending OPC bits. The Status Byte is set to 0.
Couplings
A Mode Preset aborts the currently running measurement, activates the default measurement,
and. gets the mode to a consistent state with all of the default couplings set.
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
In the X-Series, the legacy “Factory Preset” has been replaced with Mode Preset, which only
presets the currently active mode, not the entire instrument. In the X-Series, the way in to preset
the entire instrument is by using System, Restore System Defaults All, which behaves essentially
the same way as restore System Defaults does on ESA and PSA.
There is also no “Preset Type” as there is on the PSA. There is a green Mode Preset front-panel
key that does a Mode Preset and a white-with-green-letters User Preset front-panel key that
does a User Preset. The old PRESet:TYPE command is ignored (without generating an error), and
SYST:PRES without a parameter does a Mode Preset, which should cover most backward code
compatibility issues.
The settings and correction data under the Input/Output front-panel key (examples: Input Z Corr,
Ext Amp Gain, etc.) are no longer part of any Mode, so they will not be preset by a Mode Preset.
They are preset using Restore Input/Output Defaults, Restore System Defaults All. Note that
because User Preset does a Recall State, and all of these settings are saved in State, they ARE
recalled when using User Preset.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
658
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode Preset
How-To Preset
The table below shows all possible presets, their corresponding SCPI commands
and front-panel access (key paths). Instrument settings depend on the current
measurement context. Some settings are local to the current measurement, some
are global (common) across all the measurements in the current mode, and some
are global to all the available modes. In a similar way, restoring the settings to their
preset state can be done within the different contexts.
– Auto Couple - is a measurement local key. It sets all Auto/Man parameter
couplings in the measurement to Auto. Any Auto/Man selection that is local to
other measurements in the mode will not be affected.
– Meas Preset - is a measurement local key. Meas Preset resets all the variables
local to the current measurement except the persistent ones.
– Mode Preset - resets all the current mode's measurement local and measurement global variables except the persistent ones.
– Restore Mode Defaults - resets ALL the Mode variables (and all the Meas global
and Meas local variables), including the persistent ones.
659
Type Of Preset
SCPI Command
(N/A in N9061A)
Front Panel Access
Auto Couple
:COUPle ALL
Auto Couple front-panel key
Meas Preset
:CONFigure:<Measurement>
Meas Setup Menu
Mode Preset
:SYSTem:PRESet
Mode Preset (green key)
Restore Mode Defaults
:INSTrument:DEFault
Mode Setup Menu
Restore All Mode Defaults
:SYSTem:DEFault MODes
System Menu; Restore System
Default Menu
*RST
*RST
not possible (Mode Preset with
Single)
Restore Input/Output
Defaults
:SYSTem:DEFault INPut
System Menu; Restore System
Default Menu
Restore Power On Defaults
:SYSTem:DEFault PON
System Menu; Restore System
Default Menu
Restore Alignment Defaults
:SYSTem:DEFault ALIGn
System Menu; Restore System
Default Menu
Restore Miscellaneous
Defaults
:SYSTem:DEFault MISC
System Menu; Restore System
Default Menu
Restore All System Defaults
:SYSTem:DEFault [ALL]
:SYSTem:PRESet:PERSistent
System Menu; Restore System
Default Menu
User Preset
:SYSTem:PRESet:USER
User Preset Menu
User Preset All Modes
:SYSTem:PRESet:USER:ALL
User Preset Menu
Power On Mode Preset
:SYSTem:PON:TYPE MODE
System Menu
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode Preset
Type Of Preset
SCPI Command
(N/A in N9061A)
Front Panel Access
Power On User Preset
:SYSTem:PON:TYPE USER
System Menu
Power On Last State
:SYSTem:PON:TYPE LAST
System Menu
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
660
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode Setup
Mode Setup
This menu allows you to select 8560 series analyzer emulation, or 8566A/B,
8568A/B emulation, and hence the remote control command set that will be
recognized by the X-Series instrument.
Key Path
Front-panel Key
Remote Command
:SYSTem:LANGuage HP8560E | HP8561E |
HP8562E | HP8563E | HP8564E | HP8565E |
HP8566A | HP8566B | HP8568A | HP8568B
:SYSTem:LANGuage?
Default
HP8563E
HP8560 series, HP8566/68
These keys have submenus that allow you to select which legacy analyzer to
emulate. The selected analyzer type determines the response to the ID? command,
and affects the behavior of commands such as IP. You can use any command offered
by any of the legacy analyzers, regardless of the language setting. However, if the
command is not correct for the selected legacy analyzer, the command may not
work as expected.
The legacy analyzer emulation selection in this menu does not affect the response to
the SCPI query *IDN?. This query still returns the model number and firmware
version number of the X-Series instrument.
The legacy instrument selections are as follows:
Key
Response to Command ID?
Notes
8560E/EC
HP8560E
Selects 8560E/EC remote programming language
8561E/EC
HP8561E
Selects 8561E/EC remote programming language
8562E/EC
HP8562E
Selects 8562E/EC remote programming language
8563E/EC
HP8563E
Selects 8563E/EC remote programming language
This is the default selection for the N9061A
application.
8564E/EC
HP8564E
Selects 8564E/EC remote programming language
8565E/EC
HP8565E
Selects 8565E/EC remote programming language
HP8566A
HP8566A
Selects HP8566A remote programming language
HP8566B
HP8566B
Selects HP8566B remote programming language
HP8568A
HP8568A
Selects HP8568A remote programming language
HP8568B
HP8568B
Selects HP8568B remote programming language
Selecting any legacy analyzer from this menu performs an instrument preset and
sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio
appropriately, as shown in the table below.
661
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode Setup
Span, Trace Points, Couplings, VBW/RBW Ratio, and Span/RBW Ratio Settings
Remote
Language
Start
Freq.
Stop
Freq.
Number of
Trace
Points
RF
Coupling
VBW/RBW
Ratio
Span/RBW
Ratio
8560E/EC
30 Hz
2.9
GHz
601
AC
1
91
8561E/EC
30 Hz
6.5
GHz
601
AC
1
91
8562E/EC
30 Hz
13.2
GHz
601
AC
1
91
8563E/EC
30 Hz
26.5
GHz
601
DC
1
91
8564E/EC
30 Hz
40
GHz
601
DC
1
91
8565E/EC
30 Hz
50
GHz
601
DC
1
91
HP8566A
2 GHz
22
GHz
1001
DC
3
106
22
GHz
1001
1.5
GHz
1001
1.5
GHz
1001
HP8566B
HP8568A
HP8568B
Key Path
2 GHz
0 Hz
0 Hz
(VBW one step
wider than
RBW)
DC
3
106
(VBW one step
wider than
RBW)
DC
3
106
(VBW one step
wider than
RBW)
DC
3
106
(VBW one step
wider than
RBW)
Mode Setup
Cmd Error
Turning Cmd Error On or Off enables or disables the display of the "CMD ERR" error
messages. The default setting is On. The error message appears in the Message bar
and also can be queried using ERR?. The error message occurs if either the
command syntax or any of its parameters are incorrectly formed. The selected value
is preserved after presetting or power cycling the instrument. Disabling the display
of command errors disables the display of all error types.
The format of the errors are as follows:
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
662
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode Setup
1. CMD ERR, <string>
This string is limited to the first 20 characters of the input string (message unit).
Further details of these errors, after they have occurred, can be reviewed in the Cmd
Error Log, provided that Cmd Error Logging is enabled.
Key Path
Mode Setup
Preset
Previously-selected value
Default
On
Logging
N9061A supports logging of errors. These errors comprise details of command errors
and legacy commands that have been received but are not supported by the N9061A
application.
To enable and view the error log, press the Mode Setup hardkey on the front panel,
then press the Logging softkey.
Key Path
Mode Setup
Previous Page/Next Page
When you are in the Logging menu, the main Signal Analysis display is obscured by
the logging page. The most recent log starts from the bottom of the window.
Previous Page and Next Page allow you to scroll through the log file. To include
commands sent to the instrument since the log window display was opened, press
Refresh.
Key Path
Mode Setup, Logging
Cmd Error Log
Allows you to turn the command error logging on or off.
Logging should not be used in a secure environment.
– When set to On, all error messages are stored in a log file, regardless of whether
they have been displayed on the screen.
– When set to Off, no further command error messages are written to the log file.
Switching Cmd Error Log to Off does not clear the log file. The default is Off.
The log file is also stored as a text file, called Logfile.txt, on the instrument. It is
stored in the D:\ drive, in the folder: \User_My_Documents\[USERNAME]\My
Documents\RLC\data.
The maximum size of the log is 10 MB. When the file reaches its maximum size, the
first ten percent of the file is automatically discarded, to clear space for subsequent
error messages.
663
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode Setup
Key Path
Mode Setup, Logging
Refresh
To update the log page with new entries, select Refresh.
Key Path
Mode Setup, Logging
Clear Log
Clears the error log.
The log can only be cleared by using the Clear Log function. It is not cleared on
power-up, remote language switch or mode switch.
Key Path
Mode Setup, Logging
Preferences
The Preferences menu allows you to configure some instrument settings.
Preferences are not affected by a power cycle, a remote language change, a mode
switching or a mode preset. They are only preset to their default state by using the
Restore Mode Defaults key in the "Mode Setup" on page 661 menu , or by sending
the :INSTrument:DEFault (see "Restore Mode Defaults" on page 667) or
:SYSTem:PRESet (see "Mode Preset" on page 658) commands.
This section documents the following items in the Preferences menu and its
submenus:
– "Limit RBW/VBW" on page 664
– "Swp Type Rule" on page 666
– "Atten Offset" on page 666
– "AC/DC Preset Default" on page 666
– "Limit Swp Time" on page 667
– "KSK Tolerance" on page 667
Key Path
Mode Setup
Limit RBW/VBW
Setting Limit RBW/VBW to ON limits the valid resolution bandwidth (RBW) and video
bandwidth (VBW) values to those appropriate for the currently selected remote
language. While this limitation reduces measurement flexibility, it helps to ensure
that the measurement time in emulation mode is the same as the legacy
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
664
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode Setup
measurement time, and ensures that the responses to RB? and VB? match the
legacy instrument.
Setting this key to OFF causes the RBW and VBW filters to use the X-Series
instrument range of values for all remote languages.
Key Path
Mode Setup, Preferences
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:RLC:BANDwidth:LIMit
ON|OFF|1|0
[:SENSe]:RLC:BANDwidth:LIMit?
Preset
ON
Notes
If the selected RLC Language is HP8566A/B or
HP8568A/B, setting this parameter to ON causes
the Resolution and Video Bandwidths to be limited
to the following range of values:
– Resolution Bandwidth Range: 10 Hz, 30 Hz, 100
Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, 10 kHz, 30 kHz, 100
kHz, 300kHz, 1 MHz, 3 MHz
– Video Bandwidth Range: 1 Hz, 3 Hz, 10 Hz, 30
Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, 10 kHz, 30
kHz, 100 kHz, 300kHz, 1 MHz, 3 MHz
If the selected RLC Language is HP856x, setting this
parameter to ON causes the Resolution and Video
Bandwidths to be limited to the following range of
values:
– Resolution Bandwidth Range: 1 Hz, 3 Hz, 10 Hz,
30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, 10 kHz, 30
kHz, 100 kHz, 300kHz, 1 MHz, 2 MHz
– Video Bandwidth Range: 1 Hz, 3 Hz, 10 Hz, 30
Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, 10 kHz, 30
kHz, 100 kHz, 300kHz, 1 MHz, 3 MHz
If the detector type is set to Quasi Peak, EMI Peak,
MIL Peak, EMI Average or Average, these
restrictions on Resolution and Video Bandwidth
range switch to the base X-Series range of
bandwidths.
Setting this parameter to OFF causes the Resolution
& Video bandwidth filters to use the base X-Series
range of values.
Unaffected by power cycle or mode preset, but may
be preset using "Restore Mode Defaults" on page
667.
665
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode Setup
Swp Type Rule
Changes the Auto rules for determining whether the instrument uses FFT or Swept
mode (this can be manually overridden). FFT mode offers substantially faster
measurements in some cases.
The HP8566A/B, 8568A/B series did not have FFT mode capability, so most accurate
emulation requires that the instrument preserves Swept mode, unless you manually
override that setting.
The 8560-series analyzers use both FFT and Swept mode, in which case “Legacy” is
equivalent to “Dynamic range”.
Key Path
Mode Setup, Preferences
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:RLC:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes
AUTO|SPEed|DRANge|LEGACY
[:SENSe]:RLC:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes?
Preset
AUTO
Notes
Unaffected by power cycle or mode preset, but may
be preset using "Restore Mode Defaults" on page
667.
Atten Offset
Setting Atten Offset to ON allows greater input power to be applied to the
instrument, while significantly increasing the noise floor. Since many of the older
spectrum analyzers had noise floor 10 dB higher than the X-Series instruments, this
gives the most accurate emulation.
Key Path
Mode Setup, Preferences
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:RLC:ATTenuation:STATe
ON|OFF|1|0
[:SENSe]:RLC:ATTenuation:STATe?
Preset
OFF
Notes
Unaffected by power cycle or mode preset, but may
be preset using "Restore Mode Defaults" on page
667.
AC/DC Preset Default
Allows you to define the behavior for AC and DC coupling mode when presetting the
instrument. This command is required because legacy instruments had an AC cutoff
frequency of 100 kHz, whereas X-Series has an AC cutoff frequency of 10 MHz.
Key Path
Mode Setup, Preferences
Preset
Dependent on selected RLC language
Notes
Unaffected by power cycle or mode preset, but may
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
666
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode Setup
be preset using "Restore Mode Defaults" on page
667.
Limit Swp Time
Allows you to constrain the sweep time to no less than the minimum sweep time of
the legacy instrument.
– If set to ON, the sweep time is constrained to no less than the value listed below.
– If set to OFF, no constraint is applied.
Minimum Sweep Time for the Legacy Instruments
Instrument
Sweep Time (Non-Zero Span)
Sweep Time (Zero Span)
HP8566A/B, HP8568A/B
20 ms
1 μs
HP8560 series
50 ms
50 μs
Key Path
Mode Setup, Preferences
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:RLC:SWEep:TIME:LIMit
ON|OFF|1|0
[:SENSe]:RLC:SWEep:TIME:LIMit?
Preset
OFF
Notes
Unaffected by power cycle or mode preset, but may
be preset using "Restore Mode Defaults" on page
667
KSK Tolerance
Allows you to define the tolerance for “KSK” when searching for the next peak.
Key Path
Mode Setup, Preferences, Command Configuration
Preset
OFF
Restore Mode Defaults
Resets the state for the currently active mode by resetting the mode persistent
setting to their default values and by performing a mode preset. This function never
causes a mode switch. This function performs a full preset on the active mode.
667
Remote Command
:INSTrument:DEFault
Key Path
Mode Setup
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Mode Setup
Global Settings
Opens a menu that allows you to switch certain Meas Global parameters to a Mode
Global state. These switches apply to all Modes that support global settings. No
matter what Mode you are in when you set the “Global Center Frequency” switch to
on, it applies to all Modes that support Global Settings.
Key Path
Mode Setup
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Global Center Freq
The software maintains a Mode Global value called “Global Center Freq”. When the Global Center Freq key is switched to On in any mode, the current mode’s
center frequency is copied into the Global Center Frequency, and from then on all
modes that support global settings use the Global Center Frequency. So you can
switch between any of these modes and the Center Freq will remain unchanged.
Adjusting the Center Freq of any mode which supports Global Settings, while Global
Center Freq is On, will modify the Global Center Frequency.
When Global Center Freq is turned Off, the Center Freq of the current mode is
unchanged, but now the Center Freq of each mode is once again independent.
When Mode Preset is pressed while Global Center Freq is On, the Global Center
Freq is preset to the preset Center Freq of the current mode.
This function is reset to Off when the Restore Defaults key is pressed in the Global
Settings menu, or when System, Restore Defaults, All Modes is pressed.
Key Path
Mode Setup, Global Settings
Scope
Mode Global
Preset
Set to Off on Global Settings, Restore Defaults
and System, Restore Defaults, All Modes
Range
On|Off
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Restore Defaults
This key resets all of the functions in the Global Settings menu to Off. This also
occurs when System, Restore Defaults, All Modes is pressed.
Key Path
Mode Setup, Global Settings
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
668
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Peak Search
Peak Search
Pressing the Peak Search key displays the Peak Search menu and places the
selected marker on the trace point with the maximum y-axis value for that marker’s
trace. The Peak Search features allow you to define specific search criteria to
determine which signals can be considered peaks, excluding unwanted signals from
the search.
For all Peak Search functions, if you are in the Trace Zoom View of the Swept SA
measurement, and the bottom window is selected, the search function will operate
only within that window. This allows you to perform a Peak Search over a specified,
limited frequency range, while still viewing the larger frequency range in the top
window.
– See "More Information" on page 669.
Key Path
Front-panel key
Notes
Sending this command selects the sub-opcoded marker.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
More Information
The behavior of a Peak Search is dependent on settings under the Peak Criteria
softkey on the second page of the menu. If Same as “Next Peak” Criteria is selected,
and either Pk Excursion or Pk Threshold are on, a signal must meet those criteria to
be considered a peak. If no valid peak is found, a “No peak found” message is
generated and the marker is not moved.. When Highest Peak is on, or both Pk
Excursion and Pk Threshold are off, the marker is always placed at the point on the
trace with the maximum y-axis value, even if that point is on the very edge of the
trace (exception: negative frequencies and signals close to the LO are not searched
at all.
Pressing Peak Search with the selected marker off causes the selected marker to be
set to Normal at the center of the screen, then a peak search is immediately
performed.
Pressing the front panel Peak Search key always does a peak search. Occasionally,
you may need to get to the Peak Search menu key functions without doing a peak
search. You can do this by first accessing the Peak Search menu. Then go to the
other menus that you need to access. Finally, you can get back to the Peak Search
key menu by using the front panel Return key and pressing it as many times as
required to navigate back through the previously accessed menus until you get back
to the Peak Search menu.
Next Peak
Pressing Next Peak moves the selected marker to the peak that has the next highest
amplitude less than the marker’s current value. Only peaks which meet all enabled
peak criteria are considered. If there is no valid peak lower than the current marker
position, a “No peak found” message is generated and the marker is not moved. 669
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Peak Search
If the selected marker was off, then it is turned on as a normal marker and a peak
search is performed.
Key Path
Peak Search
State Saved
Not part of saved state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Next Pk Right
Pressing Next Pk Right moves the selected marker to the nearest peak right of the
current marker that meets all enabled peak criteria. If there is no valid peak to the
right of the current marker position, a “No peak found” message is generated and
the marker is not moved.
If the selected marker was off, then it is turned on as a normal marker and a peak
search is performed.
Key Path
Peak Search
State Saved
Not part of saved state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Next Pk Left
Pressing Next Pk Left moves the selected marker to the nearest peak left of the
current marker that meets all enabled peak criteria. If there is no valid peak to the
left of the current marker position, a “No peak found” message is generated and the
marker is not moved.
If the selected marker was off, then it is turned on as a normal marker and a peak
search is performed.
Key Path
Peak Search
State Saved
Not part of saved state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Marker Delta
Performs the same function as the Delta 1-of-N selection key in the Marker menu.
Basically this sets the control mode for the selected marker to Delta mode. See the
Section “"Marker" on page 562” for the complete description of this function. The key
is duplicated here in the Peak Search Menu to allow you to conveniently perform a
peak search and change the marker’s control mode to Delta without having to
access two separate menus.
Key Path
Peak Search or Marker
Notes
Whenever the selected marker is in Delta mode and you are in the Peak Search menu, the
Marker Delta key should be highlighted and the active function for setting its delta value turned
on.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
670
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Peak Search
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Mkr->CF
Assigns the selected marker’s frequency to the Center Frequency setting. See
“"Marker To" on page 598” for the description of this function. The key is duplicated
here in the Peak Search Menu to allow you to conveniently perform a peak search
and marker to CF without having to access two separate menus.
Key Path
Peak Search or Marker ->
Dependencies
Same as specified under Marker To
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Mkr->Ref Lvl
Assigns the selected marker’s level to the Reference Level setting. See “"Marker To"
on page 598” for the description of this function. The key is duplicated here in the
Peak Search Menu to allow you to conveniently perform a peak search and marker
to RL without having to access two separate menus.
Key Path
Peak Search or Marker ->
Dependencies
Same as specified under Marker To
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Peak Criteria
Pressing this key opens the Peak Criteria menu and allows you to adjust the Pk
Threshold and Pk Excursion parameters used for peak search functions.
For a signal to be identified as a peak it must meet certain criteria. Signals in the
negative frequency range and signals very close to 0 Hz are ignored. If either the
peak excursion or peak threshold functions are on, then the signal must satisfy those
criteria before being identified as a peak.
When peak excursion and peak threshold are both off:
– Peak Search, Continuous Peak Search, and maximum part of Pk-Pk Search will
search the trace for the point with the highest y-axis value which does not violate
the LO feedthrough rules. A rising and falling slope are not required for these
three peak search functions.
671
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Peak Search
– The remaining search functions Next Peak, Next Pk Right, etc. will only consider
trace points which have a rising and falling slope on the left and right
respectively.
Key Path
Peak Search
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
In the ESA, this menu was called Search Criteria; in the PSA, it was called Search Param. Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
The menu structure in X-Series is different (for clarity) but the functionality is essentially the
same. Basically, the Peak Excursion and Peak Threshold keys appeared at the top level of this
menu in the PSA/ESA, whereas in the X-Series they are one level down under “Next Peak”
Criteria
“Peak Search” Criteria
This menu lets you decide what kind of search you want to do when the Peak Search
key is pressed (or the equivalent SCPI command sent).
Note that there are two “types” of peak search functions. One type is the “Peak
Search” type, the other type is the “Next Peak” type. “Next Peak” searches (for
example, Next Peak, Next Pk Left, Next Pk Right) are always checked using the
Excursion and Threshold criteria as long as these criteria are On.The “Peak Search”
type of search, simply finds the highest point on the trace. However you can change
the “Peak Search” type of search so that it also uses the Excursion and Threshold
criteria. This allows you to find the Maximum point on the trace that also obeys the
Excursion and/or Threshold criteria.
When Highest Peak is selected, pressing Peak Search simply finds the highest peak
on the marker’s trace. If Same as “Next Peak” Criteria is selected, then the search is
also forced to consider the Excursion and Threshold found under the “Next Peak”
Criteria menu.
Key Path
Peak Search, Peak Criteria
Preset
MAXimum
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Readback line
Current state
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
The submenu called “Peak Search” Criteria in the X-Series was called Peak Seach Type in the
ESA, and in the PSA was not a submenu but a single called Peak Search with a toggle between
Param and Max.
Nonetheless, the functionality and SCPI commands are identical in all three,only the structure of
the user interface is different
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Highest Peak
When this key is selected, pressing the Peak Search key or issuing the equivalent
SCPI command finds the maximum point on the trace, subject to the peak-search
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
672
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Peak Search
qualifications. This also affects the Peak Search half of Pk-Pk search and the
Continuous Peak Search.
Key Path
Peak Search, Peak Criteria, “Peak Search” Criteria
Example
CALC:MARK:PEAK:SEAR:MODE MAX
Readback
Highest Peak
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Same as “Next Peak” Criteria
When this key is selected, pressing the Peak Search key or issuing the equivalent
SCPI command finds the maximum point on the trace, but subject to the Excursion
and Threshold set under the Next Peak Criteria menu. The search is, of course, also
subject to the peak-search qualifications. This also affects the Peak Search half of
Pk-Pk search and the Continuous Peak Search.
Key Path
Peak Search, Peak Criteria, “Peak Search” Criteria
Example
CALC:MARK:PEAK:SEAR:MODE PAR
Readback
Use Excurs & Thr
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
“Next Peak” Criteria
This key opens up a menu which allows you to independently set the Peak Excursion
and Peak Threshold and turn them on and off.
Key Path
Peak Search, Peak Criteria
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
In the X-Series, you can enable Pk Excursion and Pk Threshold independently, but they default to
“both on”. Since “both on” is always the case in ESA and PSA, this difference should not cause
code compatibility problems.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Pk Excursion
Turns the peak excursion requirement on/off and sets the excursion value. The value
defines the minimum amplitude variation (rise and fall) required for a signal to be
identified as peak. For example, if a value of
6 dB is selected, peak search functions like the marker Next Pk Right function move
only to peaks that rise and fall 6 dB or more.
When both Pk Excursion and Pk Threshold are on, a signal must rise above the Pk
Threshold value by at least the Peak Excursion value and then fall back from its local
maximum by at least the Peak Excursion value to be considered a peak.
673
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Peak Search
In the event that a sequence of trace points with precisely the same values
represents the maximum, the leftmost point is found.
– See "More Information" on page 674.
Key Path
Peak Search, Peak Criteria, “Next Peak” Criteria
Dependencies
Available only when Y axis unit is amplitude units, otherwise grayed out.
Couplings
Whenever you adjust the value of Pk Excursion (with the knob, step keys, or by completing a
numeric entry), and Peak Threshold is turned ON, the Peak Threshold Line and the Peak
Excursion Region are displayed.
Preset
6.0 dB
ON
Preset
6.0 dB
ON
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
0.0 dB
Max
100.0 dB
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
More Information
If two signals are very close together and the peak excursion and threshold criteria
are met at the outside edges of the combined signals, this function finds the highest
of these two signals as a peak (or next peak). However, if a signal appears near the
edge of the screen such that the full extent of either the rising or falling edge cannot
be determined, and the portion that is on screen does not meet the excursion
criteria, then the signal cannot be identified as a peak.
When measuring signals near the noise floor, you can reduce the excursion value
even further to make these signals recognizable. To prevent the marker from
identifying noise as signals, reduce the noise floor variations to a value less than the
peak-excursion value by reducing the video bandwidth or by using trace averaging.
Pk Threshold
Turns the peak threshold requirement on/off and sets the threshold value. The peak
threshold value defines the minimum signal level (or min threshold) that the peak
identification algorithm uses to recognize a peak.
When both Pk Excursion and Pk Threshold are on, a signal must rise above the Pk
Threshold value by at least the Peak Excursion value and then fall back from its local
maximum by at least the Peak Excursion value to be considered a peak.
For example, if a threshold value of –90 dBm is selected, the peak search algorithm
will only consider signals with amplitude greater than the –90 dBm threshold. If a
threshold value of –90 dBm is selected, and Peak Excursion is On and set to 6 dB,
the peak search algorithm will only consider signals with amplitude greater than the
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
674
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Peak Search
–90 dBm threshold which rise 6 dB above the threshold and then fall back to the
threshold.
Key Path
Peak Search, Peak Criteria, “Next Peak Criteria”
Dependencies
When Ref Level Offset changes, Peak Threshold must change by the same amount.
Preset
–90.0 dBm
ON
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Min
The current displayed Ref Level – 200 dB. The current displayed Ref Level is the current Ref
Level, offset by the Ref Level Offset.
Max
The current displayed Ref Level. This means the current Ref Level, offset by the Ref Level Offset.
Default Unit
depends on the current selected Y axis unit
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Pk Threshold Line
Turns the peak threshold line on or off. Preset state is off. No equivalent SCPI
command.
– See "More Information" on page 675.
Key Path
Peak Search, Peak Criteria, “Next Peak” Criteria
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
More Information
The Peak Threshold line is green and has the value of the peak threshold (for
example, “–20.3 dBm”) written above its right side, above the line itself. If Peak
Excursion is ON it shows on the left side as a region above the Peak Threshold line.
As with all such lines (Display Line, Trigger Level line, etc) it is drawn on top of all
traces.
675
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Peak Search
This function is automatically set to ON (thus turning on the Peak Threshold line)
whenever the value of Peak Threshold or Peak Excursion becomes the active
function, unless Peak Threshold is OFF. It is automatically set to OFF whenever Peak
Threshold is set to OFF. Manually turning it ON automatically turns on Pk Threshold.
The Peak Excursion part is on whenever the Pk Threshold part is on, unless Peak
Excursion is OFF.
Peak Table
Opens the Peak Table menu.
The Peak Table provides a displayed list of up to 20 signal peaks from the selected
trace. If more than one trace window is displayed, the selected trace in the selected
window is used. If there are more than 20 signals which meet the peak search
criteria, only the 20 highest peaks are listed.
The Peak Table is updated after each sweep. The list of peaks in the Peak Table can
be ordered either by ascending frequency or by descending amplitude. In either
case, the entire trace is first evaluated and the 20 highest peaks are selected for
inclusion in the list. After the peaks are selected, they are then sorted and displayed
according to the Peak Sort setting.
Key Path
Peak Search
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
676
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Peak Search
Peak Table On/Off
Turns Peak Table on/off. When turned on, the display is split into a measurement
window and a peak table display window.
Turning the Peak Table on turns the Marker Table off and vice versa.
Key Path
Peak Search, Peak Table
Dependencies
When the Peak Table turns on, if Peak Threshold is On then it becomes the active function.
Preset
OFF
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Peak Sort
Sets the peak table sorting routine to list the peaks in order of descending amplitude
or ascending frequency. The remote command can also be used to sort the peaks
found using the :CALCulate:DATA:PEAKs command.
Key Path
Peak Search, Peak Table
Preset
AMPLitude
Preset
AMPLitude
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
In the ESA, when Peak Sort was set to ascending frequency, the Peak Table search algorithm
would search left to right, including every peak which met the search criteria until the table was
full, even if that meant only part of the trace was searched. In the X-Series, the sort is done
correctly, sorting the top 20 peaks by ascending frequency.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Peak Readout
Shows up to twenty signal peaks as defined by the setting:
– All (ALL) - lists all the peaks defined by the peak criteria, in the current sort
setting.
– Above Display Line (GTDLine) - lists the peaks that are greater than the defined
display line, and that meet the peak criteria. They are listed in the current sort
order.
– Below Display Line (LTDLine) - lists the peaks that are less than the defined
display line, and that meet the peak criteria. They are listed in the current sort
order.
If the peak threshold is defined and turned on, then the peaks must meet this peak
criteria in addition to the display line requirements.
– See "More Information" on page 678.
677
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Peak Search
Key Path
Peak Search, Peak Table
Dependencies
Turning Display Line off forces Readout to ALL
Preset
All
Preset
All
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Readback line
1-of-N selection
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
In ESA the display line does not have to be on for a peak to be qualified “above display line” or
“below display line.” In X-Series the display line has to be on to be used to exclude peaks.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
More Information
If the "Display Line" on page 928 is turned on, the Peak Table can be selected to
include all peaks, only those above the Display Line, or only those below the Display
Line. See the diagrams below to understand what happens if both Display Line and
Pk Threshold are turned on.
Above Display Line Peak Identification
Below Display Line Peak Identification
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
678
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Peak Search
All
Sets the peak table to display the 20 highest peaks in the order specified by the
current Peak Sort setting. If the Peak Criteria are turned on, then only peaks that
meet the defined Pk Excursion and Pk Threshold values will be found.
Key Path
Peak Search, Peak Table, Peak Readout
Example
CALC:MARK:PEAK:TABL:READ ALL
Notes
Auto return after pressed
Readback
All
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Above Display Line
Sets the peak table to display only the 20 highest peaks above the display line in the
order specified by the current Sort setting. If the Peak Criteria are turned on, then
only peaks that meet the defined criteria will be found. If the display line is not
already on, it is turned on (it has to be on or it cannot be used to exclude peaks).
Key Path
Peak Search, Peak Table, Peak Readout
Example
CALC:MARK:PEAK:TABL:READ GTDL
Notes
Auto return after pressed
Dependencies
When Above Display Line is selected, Display Line is turned on and becomes the active function.
Readback
Above DL
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Below Display Line
Sets the peak table to display only the 20 highest peaks below the display line as
defined by the peak in the order specified by the current Sort setting. If the Peak
Criteria are turned on, then only peaks that meet the defined criteria will be found. If
the display line is not already on, it is turned on (it has to be on or it cannot be used to
exclude peaks).
679
Key Path
Peak Search, Peak Table, Peak Readout
Example
CALC:MARK:PEAK:TABL:READ LTDL
Notes
Auto return after pressed
Dependencies
When Below Display Line is selected, Display Line is turned on and becomes the active function.
Readback
Below DL
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Peak Search
Continuous Peak Search
Turns Continuous Peak Search on or off. When Continuous Peak Search is on, a
peak search is automatically performed for the selected marker after each sweep.
The rules for finding the peak are exactly the same as for Peak Search, including the
use of the peak criteria rules. If no valid peak is found, a “No peak found” message is
generated after each sweep.
– See "More Information" on page 680.
Key Path
Peak Search
Notes
Sending this command selects the subopcoded marker
Couplings
The Continuous Peak Search key is grayed out when the selected marker is a Fixed marker. Also,
if Continuous Peak Search is on and the selected marker becomes a fixed marker, then
Continuous Peak Search is turned off and the key grayed out.
Signal Track and Continuous Peak Search are mutually exclusive so if Signal Track is on,
Continuous Peak Search will be grayed out and vice versa.
Preset
Mode Preset
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
The Measuring bit should remain set while this command is operating and should not go false
until the marker position has been updated.
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
In ESA and PSA, the Continuous Pk function would only consider a peak within a small window
relative to the marker’s previous position, and thus was designed to track a signal drifting in
frequency but with similar amplitude. The new Continuous Peak Search function simply performs
a Peak Search operation after each sweep with no regard for the marker’s previous position.
Because of this difference, the SCPI commands for the old command (CPEak) is not accepted by
the X-Series.
Also in ESA and PSA, Continuous Pk was grayed out when span equaled zero. The new
Continuous Peak Search function will be available within zero span.
Also in ESA and PSA, turning Continuous Pk on would not automatically execute a peak search. A
peak search would not be performed until the end of the next sweep. The new Continuous Peak
Search function will perform a peak search when it is turned on, without waiting for the next
sweep to complete.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
More Information
When Continuous Peak Search is turned on a peak search is immediately performed
and then is repeated after each sweep. If Continuous Peak Search is turned on with
the selected marker off, the selected marker is set to Normal at the center of the
screen, and then a peak search is immediately performed and subsequently
repeated after each sweep.
When in Continuous Peak Search, *OPC will not return true, nor will READ or
MEASure return any data, until the sweep is complete and the marker has been repeaked. Note further that if the analyzer is in a measurement such as averaging, and
Continuous Peak Search is on, the entire measurement will be allowed to complete
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
680
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Peak Search
(i.e., all the averages taken up to the average number) before the repeak takes
place, and only THEN will *OPC go true and READ or MEASure return data.
Note that this function is not the “Continuous Peak” function found in some other
instruments. That function was designed to track the signal; this function simply
does a Peak Search after each sweep.
When Continuous Peak Search is turned on for a marker, a little “hat” is placed
above the marker.
Pk-Pk Search
Finds and displays the amplitude and frequency (or time, if in zero span) differences
between the highest and lowest y-axis value. It places the selected marker on the
minimum value on its selected trace. And it places that marker’s reference marker on
the peak of its selected trace. This function turns on the reference marker and sets
its mode to Fixed if it is not already on. (These markers may be on two different
traces.)
The rules for finding the maximum peak are exactly the same as for Peak Search,
including the use of the peak criteria rules. However, the minimum trace value is not
required to meet any criteria other than being the minimum y-axis value in the trace.
If the selected marker is off, a delta type marker is turned on and the peak-to-peak
search is done. If the selected marker is on, but it is not a delta marker, then it is
changed to delta which turns on the reference marker if needed, and then it performs
the peak-to-peak function.
681
Key Path
Peak Search
Notes
Turns on the Marker Δ active function.
Dependencies
Pk-Pk Search is grayed out when Coupled Markers is on.
Couplings
The selected marker becomes a delta marker if not already in delta mode.
State Saved
Not part of saved state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Peak Search
Min Search
Moves the selected marker to the minimum y-axis value on the current trace.
Minimum (negative) peak searches do not have to meet the peak search criteria. It
just looks for the lowest y-axis value. If the selected marker is Off, it is turned on
before the minimum search is performed.
Key Path
Peak Search
State Saved
Not part of saved state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Peak Search All Traces
In the Spectrogram View, when the Peak Search All Traces key is pressed, a Peak
Search is executed that finds the highest point on ALL of the drawn traces in the
Spectrogram window. The marker moves there and the Display Trace changes to
the trace on which the peak was found.
This function obeys the Peak Criteria in the same way as the normal Peak Search
function does.
Dependencies
Only appears in the Spectrogram View. If sent outside of Spectrogram, generates an error
Initial S/W Revision
A.10.01
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
682
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Quick Save
Quick Save
The Quick Save front-panel key repeats the most recent save that was performed
from the Save menu, with the following exceptions:
– Register saves are not remembered as Saves for the purpose of the Quick Save
function
– If the current measurement does not support the last non-register save that was
performed, an informational message is generated, “File type not supported for
this measurement”
Quick Save repeats the last type of qualified save (that is, a save qualified by the
above criteria) in the last save directory by creating a unique filename using the Auto
File Naming algorithm described below.
If Quick Save is pressed after startup and before any qualified Save has been
performed, the Quick Save function performs a Screen Image save using the current
settings for Screen Image saves (current theme, current directory), which then
becomes the “last save” for the purpose of subsequent Quick Saves.
The Auto File Naming feature automatically generates a file name for use when
saving a file. The filename consists of a prefix and suffix separated by a dot, as is
standard for the Windows® file system. A default prefix exists for each of the
available file types:
Type
Default Prefix
Menu
State
State_
(Save/Recall)
Trace + State
State_
(Save/Recall)
Screen
Screen_
(Save/Recall)
Amplitude Corrections
Ampcor_
(Import/Export)
Traces
Trace_
(Import/Export)
Limit Lines
LLine_
(Import/Export)
Measurement Result
MeasR_
(Import/Export)
Capture Buffer
CapBuf_
(Import/Export)
A four digit number is appended to the prefix to create a unique file name. The
numbering sequence starts at 0000 within each Mode for each file type and updates
incrementally to 9999, then wraps to 0000 again. It remembers where it was through
a Mode Preset and when leaving and returning to the Mode. It is reset by Restore
Misc Defaults and Restore System Defaults and subsequent running of the
instrument application. So, for example, the first auto file name generated for State
files is State_0000.state. The next is State_0001, and so forth.
One of the key features of Auto File Name is that we guarantee that the Auto File
Name will never conflict with an existing file. The algorithm looks for the next
available number. If it reaches 9999, then it looks for gaps in the sequence. If it find
no gaps, that is no more numbers are available, it gives an error.
683
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Quick Save
For example, if when we get to State_0010.state, but there is already a State_
0010.state file in the current directory, it advances the counter to State_0011.state
to ensure that no conflict will exist (and then it verifies that State_0011.state also
does not exist in the current directory and advances again if it does, and so forth).
If you enter a file name for a given file type, then the prefix becomes the filename you
entered instead of the default prefix, followed by an underscore. The last four letters
(the suffix) are the 4-digit number.
For example, if you save a measurement results file as “fred.csv”, then the next auto
file name chosen for a measurement results save will be fred_0000.csv.
Although 0000 is used in the example above, the number that is used is actually the
current number in the Meas Results sequence, that is, the number that would have
been used if you had not entered your own file name.
If the file name you entered ends with _dddd, where d=any number, making it look
just like an auto file name, then the next auto file name will have the suffix dddd + 1.
Key Path
Front-panel key
Notes
No remote command for this key specifically.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
684
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Recall
Recall
The Recall menu lets you choose what you want to recall, and where you want to
recall it from. Among the types of files you can recall are States andTraces. In
addition, an Import (Data) option lets you recall a number of data types stored in
CSV files (as used by Excel and other spreadsheet programs).
The default paths for Recall are data type dependent and are the same as for the
Save key.
Key Path
Front-panel key
Notes
No remote command for this key specifically, but the :MMEM:LOAD command is available for
specific file types. An example is :MMEM:LOAD:STATe <filename>.
If you try to recall a State file for a mode that is not licensed or not available in the instrument, an
error message will occur and the state will not change.
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
In legacy analyzers, it was possible to load a state without affecting the trace data, limit lines or
correction data. Similarly (since User Preset is actually loading a state), it was possible to do a
User Preset without affecting the trace data, limit lines or correction data.
In the X-Series, “state” always includes all of this data; so whenever state is loaded, all of the
traces, limit lines and corrections are affected. Although this differs from previous behavior, it is
desirable behavior, and should not cause adverse issues for users.
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
Recall for the X-Series supports backward compatibility in the sense that you can recall a state
file from any X-Series model number and any version of X-Series software. If you try to recall a
state file onto an instrument with less capability than what was available on the instrument during
the save, the recall will ignore the state it doesn’t support and it will limit the recalled setting to
what it allows.
Example: if the saved state includes preamp ON, but the recalling instrument does not have a
preamp; the preamp is limited to OFF. Conversely, if you save a state without a preamp, the
preamp is OFF in the state file. When this saved file is recalled on an instrument with a licensed
preamp, the preamp is changed to OFF. Another example is if the saved state has center
frequency set to 20 GHz, but the instrument recalling the saved state is a different model and only
supports 13.5 GHz. In this case, the center frequency is limited along with any other frequency
based settings. Since the center frequency can’t be preserved in this case, the recall limiting tries
to at least preserve span to keep the measurement setup as intact as possible.
Note that there is no state file compatibility outside of the X-Series. For example, you cannot
recall a state file from ESA or PSA.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
State
The Recall State menu lets you choose a register or file from which to recall the
state. The content of a state file includes all of the settings and data required to return the
analyzer as closely as possible to the Mode it was in, with the exact settings that
were in place, when the save occurred. The Mode settings in each state file include
the settings that are affected by Mode Preset, as well as the additional settings
affected by Restore Mode Defaults; all of the Mode’s settings. In addition, all of the
685
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Recall
settings of the Input/Output system are included, even though they are outside of
the Mode’s state, because they are needed to restore the complete setup. Persistent System settings (for example, GPIB address) are not affected by either a
Mode Preset or Restore Mode Defaults, nor are they included in a saved State file.
Since each state file is only for one Mode, the settings for other Modes are
unaffected when it is loaded. Recall State will cause a mode switch if the state
being recalled is not from the current active mode.
After the recall completes, the message "File <filename> recalled" or “Recalled
State Register <register number>” is displayed.
For rapid recalls, the State menu lists 16 registers that you can choose from to
recall. Pressing a Register key initiates the recall. You can also select a file from
which to recall.
The default path for all State Files is:
My Documents\<mode name>\state
where <mode name> is the parameter used to select the mode with the INST:SEL
command (for example, SA for Spectrum Analyzer).
See "More Information" on page 687
Key Path
Recall
Mode
All
Notes
When you pick a file to recall, the analyzer first verifies that the file is recallable in the current
instrument by checking the software version and model number of the instrument. If everything
matches, a full recall proceeds by aborting the currently running measurement, clearing any
pending operations, and then loading the State from the saved state file. You can open state files
from any mode, so recalling a State file switches to the mode that was active when the save
occurred. After switching to the mode of the saved state file, mode settings and data (if any for
the mode) are loaded with values from the saved file. The saved measurement of the mode
becomes the newly active measurement and the data relevant to the measurement (if there is
any) is recalled.
If there is a mismatch between file version or model number or instrument version or model
number, the recall functiontries to recall as much as possible and returns a warning message.
It may limit settings that differ based on model number, licensing or version number.
After recalling the state, the Recall State function does the following:
– Makes the saved measurement for the mode the active measurement.
– Clears the input and output buffers.
– Status Byte is set to 0.
– Executes a *CLS
If the file specified is empty an error is generated. If the specified file does not exist, another error
is generated. If there is a mismatch between the file and the proper file type, an error is
generated. If there is a mismatch between file version or model number or instrument version or
model number, a warning is displayed. Then it returns to the State menu and File Open dialog
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
686
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Recall
goes away.
After the Recall, the analyzer exits the Recall menu and returns to the previous menu.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
More Information
In measurements that support saving Traces, for example, Swept SA, the Trace data
is saved along with the State in the State file. When recalling the State, the Trace
data is recalled as well. Traces are recalled exactly as they were stored, including
the writing mode and update and display modes. If a Trace was updating and visible
when the State was saved, it will come back updating and visible,and its data will be
rewritten right away. When you use State to save and recall traces, any trace whose
data must be preserved should be placed in View or Blank mode before saving.
The following table describes the Trace Save and Recall possibilities:
You want to
recall state
and one
trace’s data,
leaving other
traces
unaffected.
Save Trace+State from 1 trace. Make sure that no other traces
are updating (they should all be
in View or Blank mode) when
the save is performed.
On Recall, specify the trace you want to load the
one trace’s data into. This trace will load in
View. All other traces’ data will be unaffected,
although their trace mode will be as it was when
the state save was performed.
You want to
recall all
traces
Save Trace+State from ALL
traces.
On Recall, all traces will come back in View (or
Blank if they were in Blank or Background when
saved)
You want all
traces to load
exactly as they
were when
saved.
Save State
On recall, all traces’ mode and data will be
exactly as they were when saved. Any traces
that were updating willhave their data
immediately overwritten.
From File…
When you press “From File”, the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu
entitled “File Open.” This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the
Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse. The Tab and Arrow keys can
also be used for dialog navigation.
687
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Recall
Listed below are the functions of the various fields in the dialog, and the
corresponding softkeys:
Open
Performs the recall of the specified file. While the recall is being performed, the
floppy icon appears briefly in the Meas bar.
File/Folder List
Enables you to navigate to the center of the dialog that contains the list of files and
folders. Once here you can get information about the file and use the tab keys to
navigate to the other fields in the dialog, such as Look In.
Look In
The Look In field shows the path from which the file will be recalled and allows you
to change the path using the up and down arrow keys to navigate to other paths; the
Enter key to open a directory; and the Backspace key to go back one directory. The
Look In field first uses the last path from the Save As dialog Save In: path for that
same file type. There is no softkey for directly navigating to the Look In field, but you
can use the left tab to get here from the File/Folder List.
User specified paths are remembered when you leave and return to a Mode and are
reset back to the default using Restore Mode Defaults.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
688
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Recall
Sort
Accesses a menu that enables you to sort the files within the File Open dialog. Only
one sorting type can be selected at a time and the sorting happens immediately. The sorting types are By Date, By Name, By extension, and By Size.
Files of Type
This field shows the file suffix for the type of file you have selected to recall. For
example, if you navigated here while recalling State, "Mode state (*.state)" is in the
field. If you navigated here while recalling Trace, ""Mode state (*.trace)" is in the
field. If you navigated here while importing a trace data file, "Trace Data (*.csv)" is in
the field. For some file types, there is more than one choice in the dropdown menu,
which you can select by using the up and down arrow keys and Enter.
Up One Level
This key corresponds to the icon of a folder with the up arrow that is in the tool bar of
the dialog. When pressed, it causes the file and folder list to navigate up one level in
the directory structure. The Backspace key does the same thing.
Cancel
This key corresponds to the Cancel selection in the dialog. It causes the current
Open request to be cancelled. The Cancel (Esc) key does the same thing.
Key Path
Recall, State
Notes
Brings up the Open dialog for recalling a State Save Type
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Register 1 thru Register 16
Selecting any one of these register keys causes the State of the mode from the
specified Register to be recalled. Each of the register keys annotates whether it is
empty or at what date and time it was last modified. In addition, you can use the Edit
Register Names key under Save, State to enter custom names for each register.
Registers are shared by all modes, so recalling from any one of the registers will
cause a mode switch to the mode that was active when the save to the register
occurred.
Although these 16 registers are the only registers available from the front panel,
there are 128 state registers available in the instrument. Registers 17–128 are only
available from the SCPI interface, using the *RCL command.
After the recall completes, the message "Register <register number> recalled"
appears in the message bar. If you are in the Spectrum Analyzer Mode, and you are
recalling a register that was saved in the Spectrum Analyzer Mode, then after the
recall, you will still be in the Recall Register menu. If the Recall causes you to switch
modes, then after the Recall, you will be in the Frequency menu.
If a requested register is empty an error is generated.
689
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Recall
Key Path
Recall, State
Example
*RCL 1
Range
1–16 from front panel, 1–128 from SCPI
Readback
Date and time with seconds resolution are displayed on the key
OR
A custom name of up to 30 characters entered using the Save, State,Edit Register Names key
OR
“(empty)" if no prior save operation has been performed to this register.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
Prior to A.11.00
Trace (+State)
The Recall Trace (+State) menu lets you choose a register or file from which to recall
the Trace+State state file. A saved state contains all of the settings and data required to return the analyzer as
closely as possible to the exact setup it had when the save occurred. This includes
the Input/Output settings, even though they are outside of the Mode’s state,
because they are needed to restore the complete setup. A Trace+State file also
includes trace data from one trace or all traces, which will load in View mode when
the Trace+State file is recalled. Recall Trace (+State) will also cause a mode switch
if the state being recalled is not for the current active mode.
After the recall completes, the message "File <filename> recalled" or “Recalled
Trace Register <register number>” is displayed.
For rapid recalls, the Trace (+State) menu lists 5 registers to choose from to recall. Pressing a Register key initiates the recall. You can also select a file from which to
recall.
The default path for all State Files including .trace files is:
My Documents\<mode name>\state
where <mode name> is the parameter used to select the mode with the INST:SEL
command (for example, SA for Spectrum Analyzer).
Key Path
Recall
Mode
SA
Notes
When you perform the recall, the recalling Trace function must first verify the file is recallable in
this instrument by checking instrument software version and model number, since it includes
State. If everything matches, a full recall proceeds by aborting the currently running
measurement, and loading the state from the saved state file to as close as possible to the
context in which the save occurred. You can open .trace files from any mode that supports them,
so recalling a Trace file switches to the mode that was active when the save occurred. After
switching to the mode of the saved state file, mode settings and data (if any for the mode) are
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
690
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Recall
loaded with values from the saved file and the saved measurement of the mode becomes the
newly active measurement, and the data relevant to the measurement (if there is any) is recalled.
Once the state is loaded, the trace data must be loaded. The internal flags are consulted to see
which trace to load and the "To Trace" setting to see where to load it. Trace data is always loaded
with the specified trace set to View, so that the data is visible and not updating(so as not to erase
the recalled data). If the file is an "all trace" file, all traces are loaded with the saved data(to the
original trace the data was saved from) and set to View. Traces whose data is not loaded are
restored to the update state that existed when they were saved.
After the Recall the analyzer exits the Recall menu and returns to the previous menu.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
To Trace
These menu selections let you choose the Trace where the recalled saved trace will
go. Not all modes have the full 6 traces available. The default is the currently
selected trace, selected in this menu or in the Trace/Detector, Export Data, Import
Data, or Save Trace menus, except if you have chosen All, then it remains chosen
until you specifically change it to a single trace.
If the .trace file is an "all trace" file, "To Trace" is ignored and the traces each go back
to the trace from which they were saved.
Once selected, the key returns back to the Recall Trace menu and the selected
Trace number is annotated on the key. Now you have selected exactly where the
trace needs to be recalled.To trigger a recall of the selected Trace, you must select
the Open key in the Recall Trace menu.
When you select a trace, it makes that trace the current trace, so it displays on top of
all of the other traces.
Key Path
Save, Data, Trace
Mode
SA
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Register 1 thru Register 16
Selecting any one of these register keys causes the State of the mode from the
specified Register to be recalled. Each of the register keys annotates whether it is
empty or at what date and time it was last modified. In addition, you can use the Edit
Register Names key under Save, State to enter custom names for each register.
Registers are shared by all modes, so recalling from any one of the registers will
cause a mode switch to the mode that was active when the save to the register
occurred.
Although these 16 registers are the only registers available from the front panel,
there are 128 state registers available in the instrument. Registers 17–128 are only
available from the SCPI interface, using the *RCL command.
After the recall completes, the message "Register <register number> recalled"
appears in the message bar. If you are in the Spectrum Analyzer Mode, and you are
691
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Recall
recalling a register that was saved in the Spectrum Analyzer Mode, then after the
recall, you will still be in the Recall Register menu. If the Recall causes you to switch
modes, then after the Recall, you will be in the Frequency menu.
If a requested register is empty an error is generated.
Key Path
Recall, State
Example
*RCL 1
Range
1–16 from front panel, 1–128 from SCPI
Readback
Date and time with seconds resolution are displayed on the key
OR
A custom name of up to 30 characters entered using the Save, State,Edit Register Names key
OR
“(empty)" if no prior save operation has been performed to this register.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
Prior to A.11.00
From File…
When you press “From File”, the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu
entitled “File Open.” This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the
Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse. The Tab and Arrow keys can
also be used for dialog navigation.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
692
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Recall
Listed below are the functions of the various fields in the dialog, and the
corresponding softkeys:
Open
Performs the recall of the specified file. While the recall is being performed, the
floppy icon appears briefly in the Meas bar.
File/Folder List
Enables you to navigate to the center of the dialog that contains the list of files and
folders. Once here you can get information about the file and use the tab keys to
navigate to the other fields in the dialog, such as Look In.
Look In
The Look In field shows the path from which the file will be recalled and allows you
to change the path using the up and down arrow keys to navigate to other paths; the
Enter key to open a directory; and the Backspace key to go back one directory. The
Look In field first uses the last path from the Save As dialog Save In: path for that
same file type. There is no softkey for directly navigating to the Look In field, but you
can use the left tab to get here from the File/Folder List.
User specified paths are remembered when you leave and return to a Mode and are
reset back to the default using Restore Mode Defaults.
693
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Recall
Sort
Accesses a menu that enables you to sort the files within the File Open dialog. Only
one sorting type can be selected at a time and the sorting happens immediately. The sorting types are By Date, By Name, By extension, and By Size.
Files of Type
This field shows the file suffix for the type of file you have selected to recall. For
example, if you navigated here while recalling State, "Mode state (*.state)" is in the
field. If you navigated here while recalling Trace, ""Mode state (*.trace)" is in the
field. If you navigated here while importing a trace data file, "Trace Data (*.csv)" is in
the field. For some file types, there is more than one choice in the dropdown menu,
which you can select by using the up and down arrow keys and Enter.
Up One Level
This key corresponds to the icon of a folder with the up arrow that is in the tool bar of
the dialog. When pressed, it causes the file and folder list to navigate up one level in
the directory structure. The Backspace key does the same thing.
Cancel
This key corresponds to the Cancel selection in the dialog. It causes the current
Open request to be cancelled. The Cancel (Esc) key does the same thing.
Key Path
Recall, State
Notes
Brings up the Open dialog for recalling a State Save Type
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Data (Import)
Importing a data file loads data that was previously saved from the current
measurement or from other measurements and/or modes that produce compatible
data files. The Import Menu only contains Data Types that are supported by the
current measurement.
Since the commonly exported data files are in .csv format, the data can be edited by
the user prior to importing. This allows you to export a data file, manipulate the data
in Excel (the most common PC Application for manipulating .csv files) and then
import it.
Importing Data loads measurement data from the specified file into the specified or
default destination, depending on the data type selected. Selecting an Import Data
menu key will not actually cause the importing to occur, since the analyzer still
needs to know from where to get the data. Pressing the Open key in this menu brings
up the Open dialog and Open menu that provides you with the options from where to
recall the data. Once a file name has been selected or entered in the Open menu,
the recall occurs as soon as the Open button is pressed.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
694
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Recall
Key Path
Recall
Mode
All
Notes
The menu is built from whatever data types are available for the mode. Some keys will be missing
completely, so the key locations in the sub-menu will vary.
No SCPI command directly controls the Data Type that this key controls. The Data Type is
included in the MMEM:LOAD commands.
Dependencies
If a file type is not used by a certain measurement, it is grayed out for that measurement. The key
for a file type will not show at all if there are no measurements in the Mode that support it.
Preset
Is not affected by Preset or shutdown, but is reset during Restore Mode Defaults
Readback
The data type that is currently selected
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Amplitude Correction
This key selects the Amplitude Corrections as the data type to be imported. When
pressed a second time, it brings up the Select Menu, which lets you select the
Correction into which the data will be imported.
Amplitude Corrections are fully discussed in the documentation of the Input/Output
key, under the Corrections key.
A set of preloaded Corrections files can be found in the directory
/My Documents/ EMC Limits and Ampcor
Under this directory, the directory called Ampcor (Legacy Naming) contains a set of
legacy corrections files, generally the same files that were supplied with older
Agilent EMI analyzers, that use the legacy suffixes .ant, .oth, .usr, and .cbl, and the
old 8-character file names. In the directory called Ampcor, the same files can be
found, with the same suffixes, but with longer, more descriptive filenames.
When the Amplitude Correction is an Antenna correction and the Antenna Unit in the
file is not None, the Y Axis Unit setting will change to match the Antenna Unit in the
file.
Key Path
Recall
Mode
SA|EDGEGSM|PN
Dependencies
Only the first correction array (Correction 1) supports antenna units. This means that a correction
file with an Antenna Unit can only be loaded into the Corrections 1 register. Consequently only
for Correction 1 does the dropdown in the Recall dialog include.ant, and if an attempt is made to
load a correction file into any other Correction register which DOES contain an antenna unit, a
Mass Storage error is generated. Corrections are not supported by all Measurements. If in a Mode in which some Measurements
support it, this key will be grayed out in measurements that do not. The key will not show at all if
no measurements in the Mode support it.
Errors are reported if the file is empty or missing, or if the file type does not match, or if there is a
mismatch between the file type and the destination data type. If any of these occur during manual
operation, the analyzer returns to the Import Data menu and the File Open dialog goes away.
695
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Recall
This key does not appear unless you have the proper option installed in your instrument.
This command will generate an “Option not available” error unless you have the proper option
installed in your instrument. Couplings
When a correction file is loaded from mass storage, it is automatically turned on (Correction ON)
and ApplyCorrections is set to On. This allows you to see its effect, thus confirming the load.
Readback
selected Correction
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Amplitude Correction
These keys let you select which Correction to import the data into. Once selected,
the key returns back to the Import Data menu and the selected Correction number is
annotated on the key. The next step is to select the Open key in the Import Data
menu.
Antenna corrections are a particular kind of Amplitude Corrections – they are
distinguished in the corrections file by having the Antenna Unit set to a value other
than None. Only Correction 1 supports Antenna Units.
Key Path
Recall, Data, Amplitude Correction
Notes
auto return
Dependencies
Only Correction 1 may be used to load a Correction that contains an Antenna Unit other than
None
Preset
Not part of Preset, but is reset to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults; survives
shutdown.
State Saved
The current Correction number is saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Trace
This key selects Trace as the data type to be imported. When pressed a second
time, it brings up the Trace Menu, which lets you select the Trace into which the data
will be imported.
The trace file contains “meta” data which describes the state of the analyzer when
the trace was exported (see "Trace File Contents" on page 712). If the meta data in
the file does not match the current SA state, the “invalid data indicator” (*) is
displayed.
Key Path
Recall, Data
Dependencies
For SA measurements, a trace cannot be recalled from a trace file that was exported with ALL
traces selected.
A trace cannot be imported if the number of trace points in the file do not match the number of
sweep points currently set for the measurement. If this happens, an error message is generated. Errors are reported if the file is empty or missing, or if the file type does not match, or if there is a
mismatch between the file type and the destination data type. If any error occurs while trying to load a file manually (as opposed to during remote operation),
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
696
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Recall
the analyzer returns to the Import Data menu and the File Open dialog goes away. Couplings
When a trace is imported, Trace Update is always turned OFF for that trace and Trace Display is
always turned ON.
Readback
Selected Trace
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential - aborts the current measurement.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Trace
These keys let you pick the Trace into which to import the data; either 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or
6. The default is the currently selected trace, selected in this menu or in the
Trace/Det, Export Data, Recall Trace, or Save Trace menus; except if you have
chosen All then All remains chosen until you specifically change it to a single trace.
Once selected, the key returns back to the Import Data menu and the selected Trace
number is annotated on the key. The next step is to select the Open key in the
Import Data menu.
Key Path
Recall, Data, Trace
Notes
Auto return
Couplings
When you select the trace into which to import the data, it makes that trace the current trace,
so it displays on top of all of the other traces.
Preset
Not part of Preset, but is reset to TRACE1 by Restore Mode Defaults; survives shutdown
State Saved
The current trace number is saved in State
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Limit
This key selects Limit Lines as the data type to be imported. When pressed a second
time, it brings up the Limits Menu, which lets you select into which Limit the data will
be imported.
A set of preloaded Limits files can be found in the directory
/My Documents/ EMC Limits and Ampcor Under this directory, the directory called Limits (Legacy Naming) contains a set of
legacy limits, generally the same files that were supplied with older Agilent EMC
analyzers, that use the legacy suffix .lim, and the old 8-character file names. In the
directory called Limits, the same files can be found, with the same suffix, but with
longer, more descriptive filenames.
697
Key Path
Recall, Data
Dependencies
Errors are reported if the file is empty or missing, or if the file type does not match, or if there is a
mismatch between the file type and the destination data type. If any of these occur during
manual operation, the analyzer returns to the Import Data menu and the File Open dialog goes
away.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Recall
This key will only appear if you have the proper option installed in your instrument.
Couplings
When a limit line is loaded from mass storage, it is automatically turned on. This allows the user
to see it, thus confirming the load. The Margin settings will match those when the limit was saved
The instrument cannot mix Limits domains (X Axis Unit must be Frequency or Time for both
Limits). So when a Limits file is loaded, the analyzer will set the Limits domain (X Axis Unit) to
match that of the file. If this changes the Limits domain from what it was before the file was
loaded, all Limits data in all Limits sets will be erased before the data loads. If this operation is
over the remote interface there will be no warning if this occurs, so care should be taken to know
the domain of the file you are loading.
Readback
Selected Limit Line
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential - aborts the current measurement
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Limit Selection
These keys let you pick which Limit Line to import the data into; either 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or
6. The default is the currently selected limit. Once selected, the key returns back to
the Import Data menu and the selected Limit Line number is annotated on the key.
Now you have selected exactly what needs to be imported. In order to trigger an
import of the selected Limit Line, you must select the Open key in the Import Data
menu.
An example of using this menu is: If you select 2 and continue to the File Open menu,
Limit Line 2 will be imported from the file selected or entered in File Name option in
the File Open dialog.
Key Path
Recall, Data, Limit Line
Notes
Auto return
Preset
Not part of Preset, but is reset to LLINE1 by Restore Mode Defaults; survives a shutdown.
State Saved
The selected limit number is saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Open…
When you press “Open”, the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu
entitled “File Open.” This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the
Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse. The Tab and Arrow keys can
also be used for dialog navigation.
See "From File…" on page 692in Recall, State, for a full description of this dialog and
menu.
Key Path
Recall, Data
Notes
The key location is mode-dependent and will vary.
Brings up Open dialog for recalling a <mode specific> Save Type
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
698
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Restart
Restart
The Restart function restarts the current sweep, or measurement, or set of
averaged/held sweeps or measurements. If you are Paused, pressing Restart does a
Resume.
See "More Information" on page 699
Key Path
Front-panel key
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
For Spectrum Analysis mode in ESA and PSA, the Restart hardkey restart trace averages
(displayed average count reset to 1) for a trace in Clear Write, but did not restart Max Hold and
Min Hold.
In the X-Series, the Restart hardkey and the INITiate:RESTart command restart not only Trace
Average, but MaxHold and MinHold traces as well.
For wireless comms modes in ESA and PSA, the Restart hardkeyrestart every measurement,
which includes all traces and numeric results. There is no change to this operation.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
More Information
The Restart function first aborts the current sweep/measurement as quickly as
possible. It then resets the sweep and trigger systems, sets up the measurement
and initiates a new data measurement sequence with a new data acquisition
(sweep) taken once the trigger condition is met.
If the analyzer is in the process of aligning when Restart is executed, the alignment
finishes before the restart function is performed.
Even when set for Single operation, multiple sweeps may be taken when Restart is
pressed (for example, when averaging/holding is on). Thus when we say that Restart
"restarts a measurement," we may mean:
– It restarts the current sweep
– It restarts the current measurement
– It restarts the current set of sweeps if any trace is in Trace Average, Max Hold or
Min Hold
– It restarts the current set of measurements if Averaging, or Max Hold, or Min Hold
is on for the measurement
– depending on the current settings.
With Average/Hold Number (in Meas Setup menu) set to 1, or Averaging off, or no
trace in Trace Average or Hold, a single sweep is equivalent to a single
measurement. A single sweep is taken after the trigger condition is met; and the
analyzer stops sweeping once that sweep has completed. However, with
Average/Hold Number >1 and at least one trace set to Trace Average, Max Hold, or
Min Hold (SA Measurement) or Averaging on (most other measurements), multiple
sweeps/data acquisitions are taken for a single measurement. The trigger condition
699
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Restart
must be met prior to each sweep. The sweep is stopped when the average count k
equals the number N set for Average/Hold Number. A measurement average
usually applies to all traces, marker results, and numeric results; but sometimes it
only applies to the numeric results.
Once the full set of sweeps has been taken, the analyzer will go to idle state. To take
one more sweep without resetting the average count, increment the average count
by 1, by pressing the step up key while Average/Hold Number is the active function.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
700
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
Save
The Save menu lets you choose what you want to save and where you want to save
it. Among the types of files you can save are States, Traces, and Screen Images. In
addition, an Export (Data) option lets you save a number of data types as CSV files
for easy import into Excel and other spreadsheet programs.
Key Path
Front-panel key
Mode
All
Notes
No remote command for this key specifically.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
State
The Save State menu lets you choose a register or file for saving the state. The content of a state file includes all of the settings and data required to return the
analyzer as closely as possible to the Mode it was in, with the exact settings which
were in place, when the save occurred. The Mode settings in each state file include
the settings that are affected by Mode Preset, as well as the additional settings
affected by Restore Mode Defaults; all of the Mode’s settings. In addition, all of the
settings of the Input/Output system are included, even though they are outside of
the Mode’s state, because they are needed to restore the complete setup. Persistent System settings (for example, GPIB address) are not affected by either
Mode Preset or Restore Mode Defaults, nor are they included in a saved State file.
After the save completes, the message "File <filename> saved" or "State Register
<register number> saved" is displayed.
For rapid saving, the State menu lists 16 registers to save to. Pressing a Register
key initiates the save. You can also select a file to save to.
The default path for all State Files is:
My Documents\<mode name>\state
where <mode name> is the parameter used to select the mode with the INST:SEL
command (for example, SA for the Spectrum Analyzer).
Key Path
Save
Mode
All
Notes
Both single and double quotes are supported for any filename parameter over remote.
After saving to a register, that register’s menu key is updated with the date the time, unless a
custom label has been entered for that key.
After saving to a register, you remain in the Save State menu, so that you can see the Register
key update. After saving to a file, the analyzer automatically returns to the previous menu and
any Save As dialog goes away.
Initial S/W Revision
701
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
To File . . .
When you press “To File”, the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu
entitled “Save As.” This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the
Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse. The Tab and Arrow keys can
also be used for dialog navigation.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
702
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
The Listed below are the functions of the various fields in the dialog, and the
corresponding softkeys:
Save
Performs the save to the specified file of the selected type. If the file already exists, a
dialog will appear that allows you to replace the existing file by selecting OK, or you
can Cancel the request. If you select OK, the file will be overwritten. Using the C:
drive is strongly discouraged, since it runs the risk of being overwritten during an
instrument software upgrade.
While the save is being performed, the floppy icon appears briefly in the Meas bar.
File/Folder List
Enables you to navigate to the center of the dialog that contains the list of files and
folders. Once here you can get information about the file and use the tab keys to
navigate to the other fields in the dialog, such as Save In.
Save In
The Save In field shows the path to which the file will be saved and allows you to
change the path using the up and down arrow keys to navigate to other paths; the
Enter key to open a directory; and the Bk Sp (backspace) key to go back one
directory. The Save In field defaults to the default path for this type of file and
remembers the last path you used to save this type of file. There is no softkey for
703
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
directly navigating to the Save In field but you can use left tab to get here from the
File/Folder List.
User specified paths are remembered when you leave and return to a Mode and are
reset back to the default using Restore Mode Defaults.
File Name
The File Name field is initially loaded with an automatically generated filename
specific to the appropriate Save Type. The automatically generated filename is
guaranteed not to conflict with any filename currently in the directory. You may
replace or modify this filename using the File Name key. See the "Quick Save " on
page 683 documentation for more on the automatic file naming algorithm.
When you press the File Name key the analyzer displays the Alpha Editor. Use the
knob to choose the letter to add and the front-panel Enter key to add the letter to
the file name. The BK character moves you back and the FW character moves you
forward in the filename. The Select key on the front panel generates a space
character. When you are done entering the filename press the Done softkey. This
returns back to the File Open dialog and menu, but does not cause the save to occur.
Save As Type
This field shows the file suffix for the type of file you have selected to save. For
example, if you navigated here while saving State, "Mode state (*.state)" is in the
field. If you navigated here from saving Trace, ""Mode state (*.trace)" is in the field. If
you navigated here while exporting a trace data file, "Trace Data (*.csv)" is in the
field. For some file types, there is more than one choice in the dropdown, which you
can select by using the up and down arrow keys and Enter.
Up One Level
This key corresponds to the icon of a folder with the up arrow that is in the tool bar of
the dialog. When pressed, it causes the file and folder list to navigate up one level in
the directory structure. The Bk Sp (backspace) key does the same thing.
Create New Folder
This key corresponds to the icon of a folder with the "*" that is in the tool bar of the
dialog. When pressed, a new folder is created in the current directory with the name
New Folder and you can enter a new folder name using the Alpha Editor.
Cancel
This key corresponds to the Cancel selection in the dialog. It causes the current
Save As request to be cancelled. The Cancel (Esc) key does the same thing.
Key Path
Save, State
Mode
All
Notes
Brings up Save As dialog for saving a State Save Type
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
704
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
Register 1 thru Register 16
Selecting any one of these register menu keys causes the State of the currently
active mode to be saved to the specified Register. The registers are provided for
rapid saving and recalling, since you do not need to specify a filename or navigate to
a file. Each of the register menu keys annotates whether it is empty or at what date
and time it was last modified. In addition, you can use the Edit Register Names key to
enter custom names for each register.
Although these 16 registers are the only registers available from the front panel,
there are 128 state registers available in the instrument. Registers 17–128 are only
available from the SCPI interface, using the *SAV command.
There is one set of 128 state registers in the instrument, not one set for each Mode. When a state is saved, the Mode it was saved from is saved with it; then when it is
recalled, the instrument switches to that Mode.
After the save completes, the corresponding register menu key annotation is
updated with the date and time and the message "Register <register number>
saved" is displayed.
Key Path
Save, State
Mode
All
Example
*SAV 1
Range
1–16 from front panel, 1–128 from SCPI
Readback
Date and time with seconds resolution are displayed on the key
OR
A custom name of up to 30 characters entered using the Edit Register Names key
OR
“(empty)" if no prior save operation has been performed to this register.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.11.00
Edit Register Names
You may enter a custom name on any of the Register keys, to help you remember
what you are using that state to save. To do this, press the Edit Register Names key,
choose the register whose name you wish to edit, and then enter the desired label
using the Alpha Editor or an external PC keyboard.
The maximum number of characters that can be added is 30. In most cases, 30
characters will fit on two lines of the key. – See "More Information" on page 706
Key Path
705
Save, State
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
Mode
All
Dependencies
N9060A–7FP or N9060B–2FP license required to edit the register names. When the feature is
not licensed, sending this command generates an error, –221,"Settings conflict;Option not
available"
Preset
The names are unaffected by Preset or power cycle but are set to the default label (time and
date) on a “Restore System Defaults->Misc”
Initial S/W Revision
A.11.00
More Information
When you edit one of the register names, the time and date field will be replaced by
the custom name.
If you delete all the characters in the custom name, it restores the default (time and
date). The register names are stored within the state files, but they are not part of the
instrument state; that is, once you have edited a register name, loading a new state
will not change that register name. Another consequence of this is that the names
will be persistent through a power cycle. Also, if a named state file is transferred to
another analyzer, it will bring its custom name along with it. If you try to edit the name of an empty register, the analyzer will first save the state
to have a file to put the name in. If you load a named state file into an analyzer with
older firmware it will ignore the metadata.
Trace (+State)
The Save Trace (+State) menu lets you choose a register or file specifying where to
save the Trace+State state file. A saved state contains all of the settings and data required to return the analyzer as
closely as possible to the exact setup it had when the save occurred. This includes
the Input/Output settings, even though they are outside of the Mode’s state,
because they are needed to restore the complete setup. A Trace+State file also
includes trace data from one trace or all traces, which will load in View mode when
the Trace+State file is recalled. After the save completes, the message "File <filename> saved" or "Trace Register
<register number> saved" is displayed.
For rapid saves, the Trace (+State) menu lists 5 registers to save to. Pressing a
Register key initiates the save. You can also select a file to save to.
The default path for all State Files including .trace files is:
My Documents\<mode name>\state
where <mode name> is the parameter used to select the mode with the INST:SEL
command (for example, SA for the Spectrum Analyzer).
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
706
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
This key is grayed out for measurements that do not support trace saves. It is
blanked for modes that do not support trace saves. Saving Trace is identical to
saving State except a .trace extension is used on the file instead of .state, and
internal flags are set in the file indicating which trace was saved. You may select to
save one trace or ALL traces.
Key Path
Save
Mode
SA
Notes
This command actually performs a save state, which in the Swept SA measurement includes the
trace data. However it flags it (in the file) as a “save trace” file of the specified trace (or all
traces).
The range for the register parameter is 1–5
When you initiate a save, if the file already exists, a dialog will appear that allows you to replace
the existing file by selecting OK or you can Cancel the request. If you select OK, the file will be
overwritten. Using the C: drive is strongly discouraged, since it runs the risk of being overwritten
during an instrument software upgrade.
After saving to a register, that register’s menu key is updated with the date and time of the save.
After saving to a register, you remain in the Save Trace menu, so that you can see the Register
key update. After saving to a file, the analyzer automatically returns to the previous menu and
any Save As dialog goes away.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Data (Export)
Exporting a data file stores data from the current measurement to mass storage
files. The Export Menu only contains data types that are supported by the current
measurement.
Since the commonly exported data files are in .csv format, the data can be edited by
you prior to importing. This allows youto export a data file, manipulate the data in
Excel (the most common PC Application for manipulating .csv files) and then import
it.
Selecting an Export Data menu key will not actually cause the exporting to occur,
since the analyzer still needs to know where you wish to save the data. Pressing the
Save As key in this menu brings up the Save As dialog and Save As menu that allows
you to specify the destination file and directory. Once a filename has been selected
or entered in the Open menu, the export will occur as soon as the Save key is
pressed.
Key Path
Save
Mode
All
Notes
The menu is built from whatever data types are available for the mode. So the key locations in the
sub menu will vary.
No SCPI command directly controls the Data Type that this key controls. The Data Type is
included in the MMEM:STORe commands.
Dependencies
707
If a file type is not used by a certain measurement, that type is grayed out for that measurement. The key for a file type will not show at all if there are no measurements in the Mode that support
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
it.
Preset
Is not affected by a Preset or shutdown, but is reset during Restore Mode Defaults
Readback
The data type that is currently selected
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Amplitude Correction
Pressing this key selects Amplitude Corrections as the data type to be exported.
Pressing this key again brings up the Select Menu, which allows the user to select
which Amplitude Correction to save.
Amplitude Corrections are fully discussed in the documentation of the Input/Output
key, under the Corrections softkey.
– See "Correction Data File " on page 708
Key Path
Save
Notes
Using the C: drive is strongly discouraged, since it runs the risk of being overwritten during an
instrument software upgrade.
Dependencies
Corrections are not supported by all Measurements. If in a Mode in which some Measurements
support it, this key will be grayed out in measurements that do not. The key will not show at all if
no measurements in the Mode support it.
This key will not appear unless you have the proper option installed in your instrument.
Readback
Selected Correction
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Correction Data File
A Corrections Data File contains a copy of one of the analyzer correction tables.
Corrections provide a way to adjust the trace display for predetermined gain curves
(such as for cable loss).
Corrections files are text files in .csv (comma separated values) form, to make them
importable into Excel or other spreadsheet programs. The format for Corrections
files is as follows. Line
#
Type of field
Example
Notes
1
File type, must be
“Amplitude
Correction”
Amplitude Correction
May not be omitted
2
File Description (in
quotes)
“Correction Factors for
11966E”
60 characters max; may be
empty but may not be omitted.
If exceeds 60 characters, error
–233 Too much data reported
3
Comment (in quotes)
“Class B Radiated”
60 characters max; may be
empty but may not be omitted.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
708
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
Line
#
Type of field
Example
Notes
. If exceeds 60 characters, error –233 Too much data
reported
4
Instrument Version,
Model #
A.02.06,N9020A
May be empty but may not be
omitted
5
Option List, File
Format Version
K03 LFE EXM ,01
May be empty but may not be
omitted
6
Freq Unit to be used
for all frequency
values in the file
Frequency Unit,MHz
assumed to be Hz if omitted
7
Antenna Unit
Antenna Unit,None
If omitted leaves the Antenna
unit unchanged. The amplitude
unit in the Antenna Unit field is
a conversion factor that is
used to adjust the Y Axis Units
of the current mode, if the
mode supports Antenna Units.
For more details on antenna
correction data, refer to the
Input/Output,Corrections key
description. Allowable values: dBuv/m, dBuA/m, dBG, dBpT,
None
8
Freq Interpolation
Frequency
Interpolation,Linear
if omitted leaves the Freq
Interpolation unchanged. Allowable values: Linear,
Logarithmic
9
Bias value in mA
Bias,0.00
If omitted leaves the Bias value
unchanged (added as of
A.08.50)
10
Bias State
Bias State,On
If omitted leaves the Bias
State unchanged. Allowable
values: On, Off (added as of
A.08.50)
11
Overlap, two values,
Freq1 and Freq2,
separated by commas. Overlap,33500,40000
Uses Freq Unit from line 6. Thus, in this example
Freq1=33.5 GHz, Freq2= 40.0
GHz (see note below). If
omitted leaves the overlap
unchanged (added as of
A.08.50)
12
DATA marker DATA
Corrections data begins in the
next line
Lines 2 through 5 can be empty but must appear in the file. Lines 6 through 11 are
optional, the lines can be left out of the file altogether.
709
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
The Overlap row and the two Bias rows apply only to external mixing. Both are readonly, they are never written by the analyzer. The only way to insert or modify these
rows is to edit the file with a text editor or a spreadsheet editor. These rows are
intended for use by mixer manufacturers, as they allow the manufacturer to insert
data about how the mixer corrections were generated and how they should be
applied. The Bias rows allow you to specify whether to turn Bias on or off when the
Correction is turned on and to specify a Bias value (turning off the Correction does
not change the Bias, but turning it back on again sets it to the value specified in the
file). The Overlap row allows you to specify an overlap region in which two different
corrections may be applied. It is expected that in the corrections data itself, there
will be TWO corrections values exactly at Max Freq, otherwise Overlap is ignored. The way the overlap is processed is as follows: if at any given time the current
analyzer Start Freq is greater than Freq 1 and lower than Freq 2, and the current
Stop Freq is greater than Freq 2, extend the first correction point at or above Freq 2
down to Freq 1, rather than using the correction data between Freq1 and Freq2. The Antenna Unit row can only be used in Correction register 1, because there can
only be one setting for Antenna Unit at any given time. If a Correction whose
Antenna Unit is set to anything but None is loaded into any Correction register but 1,
an error is generated (Mass storage error; Can only load an Antenna Unit into
Correction 1). When a correction file is saved from any Correction register but 1,
Antenna Unit is always written as None. Similarly, the Bias rows can only be used in Correction register 1, because there can
only be one setting for Bias at any given time. If a Correction file with a Biasor Bias
State row is loaded into any Correction register but 1, an error is generated: Mass
storage error; Can only load Bias Settings into Correction 1
The data follows the DATA row, as comma separated X, Y pairs; one pair per line. For example, suppose you have an Antenna to correct for on an N9020A version
A.02.06 and the correction data is:
– 0 dB at 200 MHz
– 17 dB at 210 MHz
– 14.8 dB at 225 MHz
Then the file will look like:
Amplitude Correction
"Correction Factors for 11966E"
"Class B Radiated"
A.02.06,N9020A
P13 EA3 UK6,01
Frequency Unit,MHz
Antenna Unit,dBuV/m
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
710
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
Frequency Interpolation,Linear
DATA
200.000000,0.00
210.000000,17.00
225.000000,14.80
The choices for the 1 of N fields in the metadata are as follows:
– Frequency Unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz
– Antenna Unit: dBuv/m, dBuA/m, dBG, dBpT, None
– Frequency Interpolation: Logarithmic, Linear
Amplitude Correction
These keys let you choose which Correction to save. Once selected, the key returns
back to the Export Data menu and the selected Correction number is annotated on
the key. The next step in the Save process is to select the Save As key in the Export Data
menu.
Key Path
Save, Data, Amplitude Correction
Preset
Not part of a Preset, but is reset to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults. Survives a
shutdown.
Readback
1
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Trace
Pressing this key selects Traces as the data type to be exported. Pressing this key
when it is already selected brings up the Trace Menu, which allows you to select
which Trace to save.
The trace file contains “meta” data which describes the current state of the analyzer. The metadata is detailed in "Trace File Contents" on page 712 below.
711
Key Path
Save, Data
Notes
Using the C: drive is strongly discouraged, since it runs the risk of being overwritten during an
instrument software upgrade.
Dependencies
For SA measurements, traces cannot be recalled from a trace file that was saved with ALL traces
selected.
Couplings
When you select which trace to save, it makes that trace the current trace, so it displays on top
of all of the other traces.
Readback
selected Trace
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential - waits for previous measurement to complete
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Trace File Contents
A Trace Data File contains the data for one trace.
Metadata: Trace Specific
Besides the trace data, there is metadata describing the context by which the trace
was produced. Some of the metadata is trace specific:
– Trace Type
– Detector
– Trace math (function, operand1, operand2, offset, reference)
– Trace name/number
When importing a trace, the detector and/or trace math function specified in the
metadata is imported with the trace, so that the annotation correctly shows the
detector and/or math type that was used to generate the data
Metadata: Display Specific
There is also some display-related metadata:
– Ref Level Offset
– External Gain
– X-Axis Unit
– Y-Axis Unit
Metadata: Measurement Related
The rest of the metadata is measurement specific and reflects the state of the
measurement the last time the trace was updated. These are the “measurementrelated instrument settings” which, if changed, cause a measurement restart. – Number of Points
– Sweep Time
– Start Frequency
– Stop Frequency
– Average Count (actual; not the limit for the instrument)
– Average Type
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
712
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
– RBW
– RBW Filter Type
– RBW Filter BW Type
– VBW
– Sweep Type (FFT vs. Swept)
– Log/Lin X Scale (sometimes called Log Sweep)
– Preamp (on/off, band)
– Trigger (source, level, slope, delay)
– Phase Noise optimization setting
– Swept IF Gain
– FFT IF Gain
– AC/DC setting (RF Coupling)
– FFT Width
– External Reference setting
– Input (which input is in use)
– RF calibrator on/off
– Attenuation
Because any inactive trace can have a value that does not match the rest of the
measurement, when performing a Save the metadata for each trace is pulled from
the individual trace, not from the measurement.
A revision number is also included in the trace database, to allow for future changes.
The choices for the various 1 of N and binary fields are as follows:
– Average Type: Power(RMS), Voltage, LogPower(Video)
– RBW Filter Type: Flattop, EMI, Gaussian
– RBW Filter BW: 3dB, 6dB, Noise, Impulse
– Sweep Type: Swept, FFT
– PreAmp State: On, Off
– PreAmp Band: Low, Full
713
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
– Trigger Source: Free, RFBurst, Video, Line, Periodic, Ext1, Ext2, TV
– Trigger Slope: Positive, Negative
– Phase Noise Optimization: Fast, Narrow, Wide
– Swept IF Gain: Low, High
– FFT If Gain: Autorange, Low, High
– Input: RF, BBIQ
– RF Calibrator: 50M, 400G, Comb, Off
– Trace Type: ClearWrite, TraceAverage, MaxHold, MinHold
– Detector: Normal, Average, Peak, NegPeak, Sample
– Trace Math: Off, PowerDifference, PowerSum, LogOffset, LogDifference
– Y Axis Unit: dBm, dBmV, dBmA, W, V, A, dBuV, dBuA, dBuV/m, dBuA/m, dBuV,
dBpT, dBG, dB
After the header, just before the trace data, a line with just the word DATA on it is
inserted to flag the start of the trace data.
The following file example shows the first lines of a Trace 1 file with X Axis Unit = Hz
and Y Axis Unit = dBuV, after importing into Excel (the second row contains the Title):
Trace
“AS/NZS 1044; Conducted >1000 W, Motors, Average”
A.01.00
E4410A
526 EA3 B25 P26 PFR
1
Segment
0
Number of Points
1001
Sweep Time
0.066266667
Start Frequency
18827440
Stop Frequency
24463718
Average Count
0
Average Type
Power(RMS)
RBW
51000
RBW Filter
Gaussian
RBW Filter BW
3dB
VBW
51000
Sweep Type
Swept
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
714
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
X Axis Scale
Lin
PreAmp State
Off
PreAmp Band
Low
Trigger Source
Video
Trigger Level
1.2
Trigger Slope
Positive
Trigger Delay
1.00E–06
Phase Noise Optimization
Fast
Swept IF Gain
Low
FFT IF Gain
Autorange
RF Coupling
AC
FFT Width
411900
Ext Ref
10000000
Input
RF
RF Calibrator
Off
Attenuation
10
Ref Level Offset
0
External Gain
0
Trace Type
ClearWrite
Detector
Normal
Trace Math
Off
Trace Math Oper1
Trace5
Trace Math Oper2
Trace6
Trace Math Offset
0
Trace Name
Trace1
X Axis Unit
Hz
Y Axis Unit
dBm
DATA
715
1.6009301E+07
4.82047E+01
1.6018694E+07
4.69737E+01
1.6028087E+07
4.81207E+01
1.6037480E+07
4.72487E+01
1.6046873E+07
4.66437E+01
1.6056266E+07
4.66237E+01
1.6065659E+07
4.66967E+01
1.6075052E+07
4.77117E+01
1.6084445E+07
4.75787E+01
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
1.6093838E+07
4.83297E+01
1.6103231E+07
4.71327E+01
1.6112624E+07
4.78957E+01
1.6122017E+07
4.67507E+01
1.6131410E+07
4.81137E+01
Select Trace
These softkeys let you pick which Trace to save. Once selected, the key returns back
to the Export Data menu and the selected trace name/number is annotated on the
key. The default is the currently selected trace, selected in this menu or in the
Trace/Det, Import Data, Recall Trace or Save Trace menus, except if you have
chosen All then All remains chosen until you specifically change it to a single trace.
The All selection saves all six traces in one .csv file with the x-axis data in the first
column and the individual trace data in succeeding columns. The header data and xaxis data in this file reflect the current settings of the measurement. Note that any
traces which are in View or Blank may have different x-axis data than the current
measurement settings; but this different x-axis data will not be output to the file.
This menu is the same as the Select Trace menu under Trace. The trace selected on
that menu appears selected here, and selecting a trace here causes the same trace
to be selected on the Select Trace menu. (That is, there is only one "selected trace".)
The next step in the Save process is to select the Save As key in the Export Data
menu.
Key Path
Save, Data, Trace
Notes
auto return
Couplings
When you select which trace to save, it makes that trace the current trace, so it displays on top
of all of the other traces.
Preset
Not part of Preset, but is reset to TRACE1 by Restore Mode Defaults; survives shutdown
State Saved
The current trace number is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Limit
Pressing this key selects Limit Lines as the data type to be exported. Pressing the
key a second time brings up the Limit Menu that allows you to select which Limit Line
to save.
– See "Limits File Contents" on page 717.
– See ".csv file format" on page 717
– See ".lim file format" on page 718
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
716
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
Key Path
Save, Data
Notes
Using the C: drive is strongly discouraged, since it runs the risk of being overwritten during an
instrument software upgrade.
Dependencies
This key will only appear if you have the proper option installed in your instrument.
Preset
1; not part of Preset, but is reset by Restore Mode Defaults and survives power cycles
State Saved
The selected Limit number is saved in instrument state.
Readback
selected Limit Line
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential - waits for previous measurement to complete
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Limits File Contents
Limits may be exported into a data file with a .csv extension. They may be imported
from that data file; they may also be imported from a legacy limit file with a .lim
extension. The .lim files meet the specification for limit files contained in the EMI
measurement guide, HP E7415A.
.csv file format
Except for information in quotes, limit line files are not case sensitive. Information in
bold is required verbatim; other text is example text, and italic text is commentary
which should not be present in the file.
The first five lines are system-required header lines, and must be in the correct
order.
LimitData file type name
“FCC Part 15”File Description
“Class B Radiated”Comment
A.01.00.R0001,N9020AInstrument Version, Model Number
P13 EA3 UK6 ,01Option List, File Format Version
The next few lines describe the parameters; on export they will be in the order
shown, on import they can be in any order. If some parameters are missing, they will
revert to the default.
Type, UpperUpper|Lower
X Axis Unit, MHzMHz|S; other units should be converted; this also specifies the
domain
Amplitude Unit, dBmdBm|V; all other units should be converted appropriately
Frequency Interpolation, LinearLogarithmic|Linear
Amplitude Interpolation, Logarithmic Logarithmic|Linear
X Control, FixedFixed|Relative; on input we consider only the first three characters
Y Control, FixedFixed|Relative; on input we consider only the first three characters
Margin, 0Always in dB. A 0 margin is equivalent to margin off
X Offset, 10Expressed in the X axis units
Y Offset, 5Expressed in the Amplitude units
717
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
The Amplitude Unit line in the limits file may contain an antenna factor unit, for
example:
Amplitude Unit=dBuV/m
Antenna factor units are dBuV/m, dBuA/m, dBpT, and dBG. In this case, the unit is
treated exactly as though it were dBuV, meaning that all of the limits are interpreted
to have units of dBuV. The box does NOT change Y Axis Units when such a limit is
loaded in.
The X axis unit also specifies the domain (time or frequency). It is not possible to have
both time-domain lines and frequency-domain lines at the same time; if a timedomain line is imported while the other lines are in the frequency domain (or viceversa), all limit lines will be deleted prior to import.
If the sign of the margin is inappropriate for the limit type (for example a positive
margin for an upper limit), the sign of the margin will be changed internally so that it
is appropriate.
The remaining lines describe the data. Each line in the file represents an X-Y pair.
The X values should be monotonically non-decreasing, although adjacent lines in
the file can have the same X value as an aid to building a stair-stepped limit line. To
specify a region over which there is no limit, use +1000 dBm for upper limits or –1000
dBm for lower limits. The data region begins with the keyword DATA:
DATA
200.000000,–10.00
300.000000,–10.00
300.000000,–20.00
500.000000,–20.00
.lim file format
This is a legacy format which allows files saved from older analyzers to be loaded
into the X-Series. Design of files in this format is not recommended.
Limit Selection
These keys let you pick which Limit Line to save. Once selected, the key returns back
to the Export Data menu and the selected Limit Line number is annotated on the key.
The next step in the Save process is to select the Save As key in the Export Data
menu.
Key Path
Save, Data, Limit Line
Notes
auto return
Preset
Not part of Preset, but is reset to LLINE1 by Restore Mode Defaults; survives shutdown
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
718
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
Measurement Results
Pressing this key selects Meas Results as the data type to be exported. Pressing the
key a second time brings up the Meas Results menu, which allows you to select
which Meas Result to save. In the Swept SA measurement, there are three types of
Measurement Results files: Peak Table, Marker Table and Spectrogram. – See "Meas Results File Contents" on page 719.
– See "Marker Table" on page 719.
– See "Peak Table" on page 723.
– See Spectrogram
Notes
Using the C: drive is strongly discouraged, since it runs the risk of being overwritten during an
instrument software upgrade.
Dependencies
If a save of Marker Table results is requested and the Marker Table is not on, no file is saved and
a message is generated
If a save of Peak Table results is requested and the Peak Table is not on, no file is saved and a
message is generated If a save of Spectrogram results is requested and the Spectrogram is not on, no file is saved and a
message is generated.
The Spectrogram choice only appears if option EDP is licensed.
Preset
Not part of Preset, but is reset to Peak Table by Restore Mode Defaults. Survives a shutdown.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Meas Results File Contents
All files are .csv files. The following section details the data in each file type.
Marker Table
This section discusses the Marker Table Meas Results file format.
Imagine that, at the point where a Marker Table Meas Result is requested, the
following screen is showing:
719
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
Then the Meas Results file, when opened, would show the following data:
Measureme
ntResult
Swept SA
A.01.40_
R0017
N9020A
526 B25
PFR P26
EA3
1
Result Type
Marker
Table
Ref Level
0
Number of
Points
1001
Sweep Time
0.06626
6667
Start
Frequency
100000
00
Stop
Frequency
265000
00000
Average
Count
0
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
720
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
721
Average
Type
LogPow
er
(Video)
RBW
300000
0
RBW Filter
Gaussia
n
RBW Filter
BW
3dB
VBW
300000
0
Sweep Type
Swept
X Axis Scale
Lin
PreAmp
State
Off
PreAmp
Band
Low
Trigger
Source
Free
Trigger
Level
1.2
Trigger
Slope
Positive
Trigger
Delay
1.00E–
06
Phase Noise
Optimizatio
n
Fast
Swept If
Gain
Low
FFT If Gain
Autoran
ge
RF Coupling
AC
FFT Width
411900
Ext Ref
100000
00
Input
RF
RF
Calibrator
Off
Attenuation
10
Ref Level
Offset
0
External
0
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
Gain
X Axis Units
Hz
Y Axis Units
dBm
DATA
MKR
MODE
T
R
C
SCL
X
Y
FUNC
TION
FUNC
TION
WIDT
H
FUNC
TION
VALU
E
FUNC
TION
UNIT
1
Normal
1
Frequ
ency
2.235
0E+09
–
67.
48
1
Off
0.000
0E+00
0
None
2
Delta3
1
Frequ
ency
0.000
0E+00
–
0.7
61
Off
0.000
0E+00
0
None
3
Fixed
1
Frequ
ency
1.325
5E+10
–
64.
71
Off
0.000
0E+00
0
None
4
Normal
2
Frequ
ency
1.590
4E+10
–
73.
10
8
Off
0.000
0E+00
0
None
5
Delta7
2
Frequ
ency
–
2.728
0E+09
–
30.
25
8
Band
Power
1.325
0E+06
–
3.969
dB
6
Normal
2
Time
5.262
0E–02
–
70.
17
7
Band
Power
2.384
0E+06
–
43.15
dBm
7
Normal
3
Perio
d
1.068
0E–10
–
75.
45
8
Off
0.000
0E+00
0
None
8
Normal
3
Frequ
ency
6.712
0E+09
–
77.
33
Noise
3.391
0E+06
–
139.7
14
dBm/
Hz
9
Fixed
3
Inver
se
Time
4.000
0E+01
–
30.
05
Off
0.000
0E+00
0
None
10
Normal
3
Frequ
ency
1.145
4E+10
–
75.
16
1
Band
Densi
ty
1.325
0E+06
–
138.9
73
dBm/
Hz
11
Off
1
Frequ
0.000
0
Off
0.000
0
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
722
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
12
Off
1
ency
0E+00
Frequ
ency
0.000
0E+00
0E+00
0
Off
0.000
0E+00
0
None
The numbers appear in the file exactly as they appear onscreen. If it says 11.454
GHz onscreen, then in the file it is 11.454E+09.
The metadata header is very similar to the metadata used in the trace data .csv files. See "Trace File Contents" on page 712. The only new information concerns the 1-ofN fields in the marker table itself. Peak Table
This section discusses the Peak Table Meas Results file format.
Imagine that, at the point where a Marker Table Meas Result is requested, the
following screen is showing:
Then the Meas Results file, when opened, would show the header data (the same as
for the Marker Table except that the Result Type is Peak Table) ending with a few
fields of specific interest to Peak Table users:
– Peak Threshold
– Peak Threshold State (On|Off)
723
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
– Peak Excursion
– Peak Excursion State (On|Off)
– Display Line
– Peak Readout (All|AboveDL|BelowDL)
– Peak Sort (Freq|Amptd)
These fields are then followed by the data for the Peak Table itself.
Note that the label for the Frequency column changes to Time in 0 span.
Here is what the table for the above display looks like:
MeasurementResult
Swept SA
A.01.40_R0017
N9020A
526 B25 PFR P26 EA3
1
Result Type
Peak Table
Ref Level
0
Number of Points
1001
Sweep Time
0.066266667
Start Frequency
10000000
Stop Frequency
26500000000
Average Count
0
Average Type
LogPower(Video)
RBW
3000000
RBW Filter
Gaussian
RBW Filter BW
3dB
VBW
3000000
Sweep Type
Swept
X Axis Scale
Lin
PreAmp State
Off
PreAmp Band
Low
Trigger Source
Free
Trigger Level
1.2
Trigger Slope
Positive
Trigger Delay
1.00E–06
Phase Noise Optimization
Fast
Swept If Gain
Low
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
724
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
FFT If Gain
Autorange
RF Coupling
AC
FFT Width
411900
Ext Ref
10000000
Input
RF
RF Calibrator
Off
Attenuation
10
Ref Level Offset
0
External Gain
0
X Axis Units
Hz
Y Axis Units
dBm
Peak Threshold
–85
Peak Threshold State
On
Peak Excursion
6
Peak Excursion State
On
Display Line
–61
Peak Readout
AboveDL
Peak Sort
Amptd
DATA
Peak
Frequency
Amplitude
1
1.0000E+06
1.86
2
1.0020E+06
–57.27
3
1.0048E+06
–58.97
4
9.8320E+05
–58.99
5
9.5120E+05
–59.58
6
9.9360E+05
–59.71
7
1.0390E+06
–59.71
8
1.0054E+06
–59.78
9
1.1086E+06
–60.05
10
9.9740E+05
–60.25
11
9.6680E+05
–60.25
12
1.0286E+06
–60.69
13
9.5500E+05
–60.74
14
9.5240E+05
–60.88
15
9.5140E+05
–60.89
16
9.5920E+05
–60.90
17
725
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
18
19
20
Spectrogram
This section discusses the Spectrogram Results file format. The Spectrogram
choice only appears if option EDP is licensed.
The Spectrogram results are the same as a Trace data export, except that instead of
having just one trace’s data, all 300 traces appear one after the other.
Each trace has its own data mark; the data for Spectrogram Trace 0 follows the row
marked DATA, the data for Spectrogram Trace 1 follows the row marked DATA1, for
Spectrogram Trace 2 follows the row marked DATA2, and so on.
Each DATA row has a timestamp in the second column (as of firmware revision
A.11.01). So, for example, if Trace 0 had a relative start time of 1729.523 sec, then
the first DATA row would look like this:
DATA,1729.523
And if Trace 13 had a relative start time of 100.45 sec, then the fourteenth data row
would look like:
DATA13,100.453
To find the absolute time for the relative timestamps of each trace, the last row
before the first DATA row gives the absolute start time of the Spectrogram, in the
form YYYYMMDDHHMMSS
So, for example, if the absolute start time is 13:23:45:678 on January 30, 2012, this
row would look like:
Start Time,20120130132345678
The resolution of the absolute time stored is 1 ms, which matches up with the fact
that the fastest sweep time is also 1 ms. However, there is no specification for the
absolute accuracy of the clock in the analyzer, nor is there any facility provided to
allow the user to set this time to any particular degree of accuracy.
Traces that have not yet been filled in the Spectrogram display are empty; there is
no DATA header for them. The file ends after the last non-empty trace.
Imagine that, at the point where a Spectrogram Meas Result is requested, the
following screen is showing:
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
726
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
For the purpose of this example, we have set the Average/Hold Number to 10, thus
we have only traces 0 thru 10. The Spectrogram was started at 02:28:08:700 pm on
April 25, 2012 (that is, 700 ms after 2:28:08 pm), although the screen dump itself
shows a duifferent time, as it was taken ten minutes after the Spectrogram data. Trace 0 is showing a start time of 5.30 seconds, meaning 5.3 secodns after the
Spectrogram started (trace 10 has a strat time of 0, as it was the first trace taken but
has now rolled up into the tenth trace slot).
The Meas Results file, when opened, shows the header data and ten traces of trace
data. Below is an extract from the result file for the above display. Note the start
time of 20120425142808700 showing in the last row before the first DATA row, and
the relative time of 5.299231048 showing in the first DATA row:
Result Type
Spectrogram
MeasResult
Swept SA
727
A.11.00.01
N9020A
503 508 513 526 ALL ALV B1C B1X B25 B2X B40 BAB BBA CR3 CRP DP2 DRD
EA3 EDP EMC EP1 ERC ESC ESP EXM FSA HBA K03 LFE MPB P03 P08 P13
P26 PFR RTL RTS S40 SB1 SEC SM1 UK6 YAS YAV
1
Segment
0
Number of Points
1001
Sweep Time
0.523333333
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
Result Type
Spectrogram
Start Frequency
5999984415
Stop Frequency
6000009415
Average Count
0
Average Type
LogPower(Video)
RBW
240
RBW Filter
Gaussian
RBW Filter BW
3dB
VBW
240
Sweep Type
Swept
X Axis Scale
Lin
PreAmp State
Off
PreAmp Band
Low
Trigger Source
Free
Trigger Level
1.2
Trigger Slope
Positive
Trigger Delay
0
Phase Noise Optimization
Wide
Swept If Gain
Low
FFT If Gain
Autorange
RF Coupling
AC
FFT Width
411900
Ext Ref
10000000
Input
RF
RF Calibrator
Off
Attenuation
14
Ref Level Offset
0
External Gain
0
Trace Type
Clearwrite
Detector
Normal
Trace Math
Off
Trace Math Oper1
Trace5
Trace Math Oper2
Trace6
Trace Math Offset
0
Trace Name
Trace1
X Axis Units
Hz
Y Axis Units
dBm
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
728
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
Result Type
Spectrogram
Start Time
20120425142808700
DATA
5.299231048
5999984415
–76.34749519
5999984440
–77.28097006
5999984465
–75.32317869
5999984490
–73.64417681
5999984515
–72.67154604
o
o
o
6000009315
–77.94423277
6000009340
–79.51829697
6000009365
–78.46108961
6000009390
–78.46108957
6000009415
–76.59570596
DATA2
4.708697055
5999984415
–80.98197882
5999984440
–80.98197879
5999984465
–75.83142132
5999984490
–74.02712079
5999984515
–73.57213005
o
o
o
729
6000009315
–75.9183103
6000009340
–79.53787488
6000009365
–78.82602191
6000009390
–78.82602188
6000009415
–76.37486709
DATA10
0
5999984415
–75.56751112
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
5999984440
–75.76485645
5999984465
–76.67718717
5999984490
–78.79238489
5999984515
–83.72680212
o
o
o
6000009315
–71.3942461
6000009340
–72.28308332
6000009365
–73.92684489
6000009390
–75.45548832
6000009415
–75.17904815
Save As . . .
When you press “Save As”, the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu
entitled “Save As.” This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the
Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse. The Tab and Arrow keys can
also be used for dialog navigation.
See "To File . . ." on page 702in Save, State for a full description of this dialog and
menu.
The default paths for saving files are:
For all of the Trace Data Files:
My Documents\<mode name>\data\traces
For all of the Limit Data Files:
My Documents\<mode name>\data\limits
For all of the Measurement Results Data Files:
My Documents\<mode name>\data\<measurement name>\results
For all of the Capture Buffer Data Files:
My Documents\<mode name>\data\captureBuffer
Key Path
Save, Data
Mode
All
Notes
The key location is mode-dependent and will vary.
Brings up the Save As dialog for saving a <mode specific> Save Type. The save is performed
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
730
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
immediately and does not wait until the measurement is complete.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Screen Image
Pressing Screen Image accesses a menu of functions that enable you to specify a
format and location for the saved screen image. It brings up a menu that allows you
to specify the color scheme of the Screen Image (Themes) or navigate to the Save As
dialog to perform the actual save.
Screen Image files contain an exact representation of the analyzer display. They
cannot be loaded back onto the analyzer, but they can be loaded into your PC for
use in many popular applications.
The image to be saved is actually captured when the Save front panel key is
pressed, and kept in temporary storage to be used if you ask for a Screen Image
save. When the Screen Image key is pressed, a "thumbnail" of the captured image is
displayed, as shown below:
When you continue on into the Save As menu and complete the Screen Image save,
the image depicted in the thumbnail is the one that gets saved, showing the menus
that were on the screen before going into the Save menus. The save is performed
immediately and does not wait until the measurement is complete.
After you have completed the save, the Quick Save front-panel key lets you quickly
repeat the last save performed, using an auto-named file, with the current screen
data.
731
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
For versions previous to A.01.55, if you initiate a screen image save by navigating
through the Save menus, the image that is saved will contain the Save menu
softkeys, not the menus and the active function that were on the screen when you
first pressed the Save front panel key.
Key Path
Save
Mode
All
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Themes
Accesses a menu of functions that enable you to choose the theme to be used when
saving the screen image.
The Themes option is the same as the Themes option under the Display and Page
Setup dialogs. It allows you to choose between themes to be used when saving the
screen image.
Key Path
Save, Screen Image
Preset
3D Color; Is not part of Preset, but is reset by Restore Misc Defaults or Restore System Defaults
All and survives subsequent running of the modes.
Readback
3D Color | 3D Mono | Flat Color | Flat Mono
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
In ESA and PSA we offer the choice of "Reverse Bitmap" or "Reverse Metafile" when saving
screen images. This is much like the "Flat Color" theme available in X-Series. Also, if the user
selected Reverse Bitmap AND a black&white screen image, that would be much like "Flat
Monochrome". In other words, each of the X-Series themes has a similar screen image type in
ESA/PSA. But they are not identical.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
3D Color
Selects a standard color theme with each object filled, shaded and colored as
designed.
Key Path
Save, Screen Image, Themes
Example
MMEM:STOR:SCR:THEM TDC
Readback
3D Color
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
3D Monochrome
Selects a format that is like 3D color but shades of gray are used instead of colors.
Key Path
Save, Screen Image, Themes
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
732
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Save
Example
MMEM:STOR:SCR:THEM TDM
Readback
3D Mono
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Flat Color
Selects a format that is best when the screen is to be printed on an ink printer.
Key Path
Save, Screen Image, Themes
Example
MMEM:STOR:SCR:THEM FCOL
Readback
Flat Color
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Flat Monochrome
Selects a format that is like Flat Color. But only black is used (no colors, not even
gray), and no fill.
Key Path
Save, Screen Image, Themes
Example
MMEM:STOR:SCR:THEM FMON
Readback
Flat Mono
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Save As…
When you press “Save As”, the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu
entitled “Save As.” This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the
Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse. The Tab and Arrow keys can
also be used for dialog navigation.
See "To File . . ." on page 702 in Save, State for a full description of this dialog and
menu.
The default path for Screen Images is
My Documents\<mode name>\screen
where <mode name> is the parameter used to select the mode with the INST:SEL
command (for example, SA for the Spectrum Analyzer).
733
Key Path
Save, Screen Image
Notes
Brings up Save As dialog for saving a Screen Image Save Type
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Single (Single Measurement/Sweep)
Single (Single Measurement/Sweep)
Sets the analyzer for Single measurement operation. The single/continuous state is
Meas Global, so the setting will affect all the measurements. If you are Paused,
pressing Single does a Resume.
– See "More Information" on page 734
Key Path
Front-panel key
Example
:INIT:CONT OFF
Notes
See Cont key description.
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
For Spectrum Analysis mode in ESA and PSA, the Single hardkey and the INITiate:IMM switched
from continuous measurement to single measurement and restarted sweeps and averages
(displayed average count reset to 1), but did not restart Max Hold and Min Hold. In the X-Series,
the Single hardkey and the INITiate:IMM command initiate a sweep/ measurement/ average
sequence/hold sequence including MaxHold and MinHold.
For Spectrum Analysis mode in ESA and PSA, the Single hardkey restarted the sweep regardless
of whether or not you were in an active sweep or sweep sequence. In the X-Series, Restart does
this but Single only restarts the sweep or sweep sequence if you are in the idle state.
INIT[:IMM] in ESA & PSA Spectrum Analysis Mode does an implied ABORt. In some other PSA
Modes, INIT[:IMM] is ignored if not in the idle state. . The X-Series follows the ESA/PSA SA
Mode model, which may cause some Modes to have compatibility problems.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
More Information
See "Restart" on page 699 for details on the INIT:IMMediate (Restart) function.
If you are already in single sweep, the INIT:CONT OFF command has no effect.
If you are already in Single Sweep, then pressing the Single key in the middle of a
sweep does not restart the sweep or sequence. Similarly, pressing the Single key
does not restart the sweep or sequence if the sweep is not in the idle state (for
example, if you are taking a very slow sweep, or the analyzer is waiting for a trigger).
Instead, it results in a message. "Already in Single, press Restart to initiate a new
sweep or sequence". Even though pressing the Single key in the middle of a sweep
does not restart the sweep, sending INIT:IMMediate does reset it.
To take one more sweep without resetting the average count, increment the
average count by 1, by pressing the step up key while Average/Hold Number is the
active function, or sending the remote command CALC:AVER:TCON UP.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
734
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Source
Source
There is no Source control functionality for this measurement. When this key is
pressed, the screen either displays a blank menu, or the previously-selected menu
remains unchanged.
Key Path
Front-panel key
RF Output
Allows you to turn the source RF Power on or off.
As stated below, when the RF Output is turned on, the Source Mode is set to
Tracking. See the "Source Mode" on page 741 key description for special
considerations concerning how to configure your N5172B or N5182B source for use
with External Source Control.
Key Path
Source
Scope
Meas Global
Dependencies
Grayed out in measurements that do not support a source. If you go to such a measurement the
output will be forced to Off. Grayed out if there is no valid source selection, in this case go to the Select Source menu to
choose, configure and/or verify your source
When there is no available Source Mode (other than Off), due to other couplings, then the RF
Ouput key is grayed out.
Couplings
When RF Output is turned On, Source Mode is set to Tracking
When Source Mode is turned Off, RF Output is turned Off.
When Source Mode is turned Off (or forced to Off by another coupling), RF Output is turned Off.
Turning RF Output Off does not affect Source Mode or other settings.
Preset
State Saved
OFF (on either a Mode Preset, a Source Preset, or Restore Input/Output Defaults)
Part of the Input/Output system, which means it is Loaded and Saved with state.
Range
On | Off
Initial S/W Revision
A.06.01
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.10.01
Amplitude
Allows you to access the Amplitude sub-menu to control various amplitude
parameters of the Source. The resolution of the Source amplitude parameters is
coupled to match the minimum resolution of the source when the source is acquired.
When the source is released, the amplitude parameter resolution reverts to default
values.
Key Path
735
Source
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Source
Readback
In square brackets, the amplitude value from Amplitude key in the next menu level down
Initial S/W Revision
A.06.01
Amplitude
Allows you to adjust the power level of the selected source. Note that the actual
amplitude is also affected by the Amplitude Offset and Power Sweep parameters.
Key Path
Source, Amplitude
Scope
Mode Global
Dependencies
If the requested setting of Source Amplitude causes the calculated external source start or stop
Amplitude to exceed the external source capability, a warning status message is generated,
“Data out of Range; clipped to source max/min” The “Show Source Capabilities and Settings”
menu can then be examined to check the source capabilities.
This parameter test and clip is also performed at source acquisition.
Preset
–10.00 dBm (On Source Preset and Restore Input/Output Defaults)
Not affected by Mode Preset
State Saved
Part of the Input/Output system, which means it is Loaded and Saved with state.
Min
The range of the amplitude parameter is dependent on the amplitude range of the source that is
selected, and the settings of Amplitude Offset and Power Sweep. Max
The range of the amplitude parameter is dependent on the amplitude range of the source that is
selected, and the settings of Amplitude Offset and Power Sweep. Initial S/W Revision
A.06.01
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.10.01
Power Sweep
Allows you to set up a Power Sweep. Power Sweep is useful for measuring
saturation behavior in a test device, such as a power amplifier.
Pressing the key sets the power-sweep function to On or Off. The value of the
power-sweep range is displayed in the active function block, and can be adjusted,
when set to On.
The source will sweep the power between the start power defined by the Amplitude
function and the stop power = start power + power sweep value:
– Source (start) amplitude = Amplitude – Amplitude Offset
– Source (stop) amplitude = Amplitude – Amplitude Offset + Power Sweep
If an external source is used, the analyzer controls the source with step sweep
mode, which provides a linear progression from one selected frequency, amplitude,
or both, to another, pausing at linearly spaced points (steps) along the sweep. The
analyzer continues to sweep the specified frequency range when power sweep is on,
although generally Power Sweep is performed in Zero Span.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
736
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Source
With options T03, T06 and SCT, the hardware is capable of continuous power
sweeps. This makes it possible to use the swept sweep time rules and should be
employed for faster sweeps. Care should be taken to limit the sweep time you use
as there are no sweep time couplings to Power Sweep settings. The recommended
minimum sweep time depends on the RBW and power-sweep range. Start by
computing (1.28/RBW)* (abs(startPower – stopPower)/(5 dB)). The recommended
minimum sweep time is the larger of this value and 50 ms.
Some external Sources have mechanical attenuators, which are not used in Power
Sweep in order to save wear on the attenuators. To allow an acceptable range of
Power Sweep without changing the mechanical attenuation, the Sources are put in a
mode that allows the Source to handle a wide amplitude range without switching
the attenuators. When the Power Sweep settings put the Source in an amplitude
range that requires the mechanical attenuators, the analyzer displays a condition
warning message:
Settings Alert;Src pwr ramp>ALC range
Key Path
Source, Amplitude
Mode
SA
Scope
Mode Global
Example
:SOUR:POW:SWE:STAT ON
Dependencies
If the requested setting of Power Sweep causes the calculated external source start or stop
Amplitude to exceed the external source capability, a warning status message is generated,
“Data out of Range; clipped to source max/min”. The Show Source Capabilities and Settings
menu can then be examined to check the source capabilities.
This parameter test and clip is also performed at source acquisition.
Preset
State Saved
This is unaffected by “Mode Preset” but is set to 0dB on a “Source Preset” or "Restore
Input/Output Defaults".
Part of the Input/Output system, which means it is Loaded and Saved with state.
Min
–500 dB
Max
+500 dB
Initial S/W Revision
A.06.01
Amptd Offset
Offsets the displayed power of the source in the Amplitude parameter. Using the
amplitude offset allows you to take into account any system losses or gains (for
example, due to cable loss), thereby displaying the actual power delivered to the
device under test. See the equations under the Source, Amplitude, Power Sweep
key.
737
Key Path
Source, Amplitude
Mode
SA
Scope
Mode Global
Dependencies
If the requested setting of Amptd Offset causes the calculated external source start or stop
Amplitude to exceed the external source capability, a warning status message is generated,
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Source
“Data out of Range; clipped to source max/min”. The Show Source Capabilities and Settings
menu can then be examined to check the source capabilities.
This parameter test and clip is also performed at source acquisition.
Preset
This is unaffected by Mode Preset but is set to 0.00dBm on a Source Preset or Restore
Input/Output Defaults.
State Saved
Part of the Input/Output system, which means it is Loaded and Saved with state.
Min
–1000 dB
Max
+1000 dB
Initial S/W Revision
A.06.01
Amptd Step Auto/Man
Allows you to set the step size associated with the Source > Amplitude key. When
auto-coupled, the step size is the current Scale/Div setting under the Amplitude
hardkey (note that this is true even if the analyzer is currently in Linear amplitude
scale).
Once a step size has been selected and the Source Amplitude function is active, the
step keys (and the UP|DOWN parameters for Source Amplitude from remote
commands) change the Source Amplitude by the step-size value.
You may change the step size manually by pressing Amptd Step and entering a
value. The function (and the step size) will return to Auto when a Mode Preset or
Auto Couple is performed.
Key Path
Source, Amplitude
Scope
Mode Global
Couplings
In Auto, coupled to the size of one logarithmic vertical graticule division
Preset
Auto
State Saved
Part of the Input/Output system, which means it is Loaded and Saved with state.
Min
0.1 dB
Max
20 dB
Initial S/W
Revision
A.06.01
Frequency
Allows a you to access the Frequency submenu. This menu lets you use a stepped
tracking source for stimulus/response measurements for some added flexibility. With such a source, the source frequency does not need to track 1:1 with the
analyzer LO frequency, it is possible to measure scalar harmonic and subharmonic
responses of devices. For example, the second harmonic response is measured by
stepping the analyzer and source so that the analyzer is always at twice the source
frequency. In addition, the frequency offset capability allows the measurement of
frequency conversion devices (like mixers).
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
738
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Source
In tracking mode, the source frequency tracks the analyzer frequency according to
the source frequency equation:
Source Frequency = (Analyzer Frequency *Multiplier Numerator / Multiplier
Denominator) + Source Frequency Offset
Analyzer Frequency is the frequency to which the analyzer is set, which is the
analyzer’s displayed frequency, offset by any Freq Offset set under the Frequency
hardkey. Source Frequency Offset is the value set under Source, Frequency, Freq
Offset.
Key Path
Source
Readback
none in Tracking Source mode
Initial S/W Revision
A.06.01
Multiplier Numerator
The multiplier numerator parameter offsets the source frequency from the analyzer
frequency. The source frequency tracks the SA frequency according to the source
frequency equation shown under the Source, Frequency key description.
The multiplier numerator must be restricted to operate within the range of the
source minimum and maximum frequencies.
Key Path
Source, Frequency
Mode
SA
Scope
Mode Global
Dependencies
If the currently selected source does not support this capability (for example, an internal Tracking
Generator which must track the LO), this key is forced to its Preset value and grayed out
Preset
This is unaffected by Mode Preset but is set to 1 on a Source Preset or Restore Input/Output
Defaults.
State Saved
Part of the Input/Output system, which means it is Loaded and Saved with state.
Min
1
Max
1000
Initial S/W Revision
A.06.01
Multiplier Denominator
The multiplier denominator parameter offsets the source frequency from the
analyzer frequency. The source frequency tracks the SA frequency according to the
source frequency equation shown under the Source, Frequency key description.
The multiplier denominator must be restricted to operate within the range of the
source minimum and maximum frequencies.
Key Path
739
Source, Frequency
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Source
Mode
SA
Scope
Mode Global
Dependencies
If the currently selected source does not support this capability (for example, an internal Tracking
Generator which must track the LO), this key is forced to its Preset value and grayed out
Preset
This is unaffected by Mode Preset but is set to 1 on a Source Preset or Restore Input/Output
Defaults.
State Saved
Part of the Input/Output system, which means it is Loaded and Saved with state
Min
1
Max
1000
Initial S/W Revision
A.06.01
Source Sweep Reverse
Allows you to reverse the source sweep direction
Normally, the source will sweep from a lower frequency to a higher frequency. However, there are test scenarios in which the source sweep needs to be
“reversed”. In this case, it sweeps from a higher frequency to a lower frequency. For
example, when the DUT is a frequency converter and a measurement of the Lower
Side Band characteristics is desired, a reverse sweep is employed. Reverse sweeps
are supported for such scenarios, but two cautions are in order:
1. Reverse Sweep only reverses the direction of the source’s sweep, not the
analyzer’s sweep. Unless you are actually using a device like a frequency
converter and looking at the lower sideband, thus effectively reversing the
direction of the source’s sweep, the source will be sweeping in the opposite
direction from the analyzer, and it will not be possible track the desired device
output frequency.
2. Any time you are using a frequency converter, care must be taken in setting up all
of the sweep parameters, including analyzer start/stop frequency and source
multiplier, to make sure that the analyzer’s sweep tracks the output of the
converter device.
Key Path
Source, Frequency
Mode
SA
Scope
Mode Global
Dependencies
If the currently selected source does not support this capability (for example, an internal Tracking
Generator which must track the LO), this key is forced to its Preset value and grayed out
Preset
This is unaffected by Mode Preset but is set to OFF on a Source Preset or Restore Input/Output
Defaults.
State Saved
Part of the Input/Output system, which means it is Loaded and Saved with state
Range
On|Off
Initial S/W Revision
A.06.01
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
740
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Source
Freq Offset
The frequency offset parameter offsets the source frequency from the analyzer
frequency. The source frequency tracks the SA frequency according to the equations
under the Source, Frequency key.
Pressing the key sets the Freq Offset function to On or Off. The value of Freq Offset is
displayed in the active function block, and can be adjusted, when set to On.
The frequency offset must be restricted to operate within the range of the source
minimum and maximum frequencies.
Key Path
Source, Frequency
Mode
SA
Scope
Mode Global
Dependencies
If the currently selected source does not support this capability (for example, an internal Tracking
Generator which must track the LO), this key is forced to its Preset value and grayed out
Preset
This is unaffected by Mode Preset but is set to 0.00Hz on a Source Preset or Restore
Input/Output Defaults.
State Saved
Part of the Input/Output system, which means it is Loaded and Saved with state
Min
–10 GHz
Max
10 GHz
Initial S/W Revision
A.06.01
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.10.01
Source Mode
Accesses the Source Mode softkey menu. This menu lets you select Tracking mode for the Source, and also allows you to set the Source Mode to OFF. The Source Mode can be set to Tracking without the user setting it directly. There
are several couplings that cause Source Mode to be automatically set to Tracking
(detailed in the table below). One important coupling is that Source Mode is forced
to Tracking when the RF Output is turned on if the measurement supports Tracking. Since Source Mode is set to Off on a Mode Preset, this means that you will rarely
need to change the Source Mode setting directly. As stated above, when the Source Mode is set to Tracking, the analyzer acquires
control of the source. When this happens the source is told to save its state and
then perform a preset. Usually both of these operations take very little time;
however, on an N5172B or an N5182B, if many Source real-time apps are in use,
both save and preset can take several seconds. If it takes longer than the analyzer
expects to acquire control, you will see an error: “Source connection lost, check
interface connection”. If you see this error, and you are using an N5172B or an
N5182B, you can shorten the acquire time by presetting your MXG before attempting
to use External Source Control.
741
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Source
Key Path
Source
Scope
Meas Global
Dependencies
Grayed out if no Source is selected, in this case go to the Select Source menu to choose,
configure and/or verify your source
Grayed out and forced to Off if either BBIQ or External Mixing are selected
Blanked in Modes that do not support a source
Grayed out in Measurements that do not support a source
Tracking is grayed out when Manual FFT is selected Tracking is grayed out when the RF Preselector is on (in models which support the RF
Preselector). Couplings
When RF Output is turned On, Source Mode is set to Tracking. When Source Mode is turned Off,
RF Output is turned Off.
Whenever you switch to an application (Mode) in which the Source Mode was previously set to
Tracking, it is again set to Tracking. That is, the last setting of the Source Mode is remembered
when you leave an application (Mode) and restored when you return
Source Mode is forced to Tracking when the RF Output is turned on if the measurement supports
Tracking
If Source Mode is set to Tracking, then it is forced to Off when you select a measurement that
does not support Tracking.
If Source Mode is set to Tracking, then it is forced to Off when you turn on the RF Preselector (in models which support the RF Preselector). Whenever the Source Mode is set to Tracking, the analyzer acquires the Source. Similarly, the
Source is released whenever the Source Mode is set to Off. This is true whether the Source
Mode was set directly by you, was set indirectly through a coupling, if you switched to an
application (Mode) that had previously been set to Tracking, or if you switched to an application
(Mode) in which the Source Mode is not set to Tracking.
For an external source, “acquiring the source” involves contacting the external instrument over
the remote interface (which puts it into Remote) and taking control of it. When you set the Source Mode to OFF, it releases the Source (and puts it into Local). For an
external source, this means you are now free to operate the source for other purposes. When the Source is acquired, its previous state is saved, and when it is released, that state is
restored, so that you can acquire and then release the source and it will return to the state it was
in before you acquired it.
Preset
OFF
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
A.06.01
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.10.01
Select Source
The Select Source menu allows you to maintain a list of available external Sources,
and choose the Source that you want to use from the list. It shows the currently
selected source at the bottom of the screen.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
742
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Source
While in the Select Source menu, you can see, and select from, a list of the currently
available sources. The sources listed in this table are as follows:
– Any internal sources which are installed and licensed
Only one internal source can be installed, displayed at address
“INTERNAL”
– Any external sources which you have previously configured, whether or not they
are currently connected, displayed with their VISA address
Note that only external sources that are supported by the Tracking Source Mode are
displayed in the Available Source List. Here are the Sources currently supported:
Source PXA
MXA
EXA
CXA
MXE
(Presel off)
Keysight MXG N5181A
X
X
X
X
X
Keysight MXG N5182A
X
X
X
X
X
Keysight MXG N5183A
X
X
X
Keysight EXG N5171B
X
X
X
X
X
Keysight MXG N5181B
X
X
X
X
X
Keysight EXG N5172B
X
X
X
X
X
Keysight MXG N5182B
X
X
X
X
X
Keysight PSG E8257D
X
X
X
Keysight PSG E8267D
X
X
X
X
For X-Series software versions earlier than A.10.01, option UNZ (Fast switching)
was required on the MXG for some use cases. This is no longer the case, option ESC
now works without MXG option UNZ for all use cases. (Note that you will get better
performance if your MXG has option UNZ, because without option UNZ your sweep
speeds will be noticeably slower.)
While in the Select Source menu and its submenus, detailed instructions are
presented that tell you how to operate the Select Source functions. Basically they
tell you to first use the up and down arrow keys to move the selection highlighted in
the “Available Source List” to the source that you want to use. The list of available
sources includes any sources that you have previously used (unless you have
deleted them) and any found while in the “Add Source to List” menu.
When the source you want to use is highlighted, press “Select Highlighted Source”
or “Enter”. The source you have selected shows up at the bottom of the screen as
the “Current Source”. Press “Verify Current Source Connection” to make sure that
the interface connection to the Source is still functional.
At any time you may use the “Add Source to List” or “Delete Highlighted Source”
keys to find new sources or remove a source from the list of available sources.
743
Key Path
Source
Readback Text
Two lines of readback give the type information and serial number of the current source, in
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Source
square brackets
Initial S/W Revision
A.06.01
Point Trigger
Shows point trigger type selected and navigates to the Point Trigger menu.
The Point Trigger menu lists all analyzer point trigger types. The analyzer and
source point trigger synchronization can be done using SCPI bus commands or by
using external trigger output and input lines.
For X-Series software versions earlier than A.10.01, hardware triggering was
unavailable in stepped tracking at frequencies above 3.6 GHz, so above 3.6 GHz,
software triggering was always used. This is no longer the case.
Key Path
Source, Source Setup
Mode
SA
Scope
Mode Global
Dependencies
If an internal Tracking Generator is selected, then this menu is unavailable, Additionally, the
External 1 and External 2 Trigger keys on the Spectrum Analyzer are released from any grayout
that may have been forced on them by the external source Point Trigger selection. In some models, there is no second External input. In these models, the External 2 key is blanked
and the EXTernal2 parameter will generate a “Hardware missing; Not available for this model
number” message.
Couplings
The source control point trigger selection can select external trigger 1 or 2 in for synchronized
point triggering. This can conflict with the selection under the Trigger hardkey, if it has External 1
or 2 selected. If there is a conflict when the selection is made under the Point Trigger menu, the
Trigger selection under the Trigger hardkey will be changed to Free Run.
Preset
This is unaffected by “Mode Preset” but is set to EXTernal1 on a “Source Preset” or "Restore
Input/Output Defaults".
State Saved
Part of the Input/Output system, which means it is Loaded and Saved with state
Readback
1-of-N selection
Initial S/W Revision
A.06.01
Select Highlighted Source
You can navigate up and down in the list with the up and down arrow keys, and can
select any entry by pressing the Select Highlighted Source key (or by double-clicking
on the entry in the table with a mouse). The highlighted source becomes the Current
Source and is prominently displayed at the bottom of the screen. At any given time there is only one selected Source for the entire system; once a
Source is selected, it becomes the Current Source and will be used by all
applications that support Source Control. For example, if no Source has yet been selected, the statement at the bottom of the
screen would say
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
744
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Source
– Current Source
– None
If an N5182A connected via USB were the Current Source, the statement at the
bottom of the screen might say:
– Current Source
– Keysight N5182A US00000258 at USB0::2931::7937::US00000258::0::INSTR
The SCPI command defined below allows the programmatic user to directly define
the VISA address via a string parameter. The parameter is checked for proper syntax,
the connection to the instrument is verified, and the source is added to the Available
Source List if it verifies. If it does not verify or no source is found at that address, an
error message is generated. Normally the source selection activities should be performed only when the user
changes the hardware connection configuration or activates/deactivates a source
option license; shutdown and startup of the application will not cause source reselection.
The Keysight IO Libraries Suite provides a “Keysight VISA Help” document that has a
section that shows the proper syntax for valid VISA address strings, in the ViOpen
function definition.
Key Path
Source, Select Source
Mode
SA
Dependencies
Operation with a source requires a license. If the proper license is not installed, the SCPI
command generates an error message, “Settings conflict;option not installed” If no supported source, or no source at all, is found at the specified address, the SCPI command
generates an error message
Preset
The current source selection is unaffected by a Mode Preset and Source Preset but reverts to
[None] on a Restore Input/Output Defaults.
If an internal Tracking Generator is installed, then instead of None, the default selection will be
INTERNAL.
State Saved
Selected Source is
– Power On Persistent (survives power cycle)
– Part of the Input/Output system, which means it is Loaded and Saved with state.
Readback
Two lines of readback give the type information and serial number of the current source on the
Select Source key in the form
[<source type>]
[<serial number>]
[None] shows in the type area and blank in the serial number area if a source has not been
configured.
[Internal TG] shows in type area and serial number in the serial number area if an internal
Tracking Generator has been selected. 745
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Source
For example: [MXG]/n, [US01020022]. This indicates an MXG of serial number US01020022.
Initial S/W Revision
A.06.01
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.10.01
Source Preset
The Source Preset key forces all the settings in the analyzer’s Source State to their
preset condition. The Source State is the set of Source settings that is maintained and remembered
by the analyzer for use in the Tracking Source Mode. The Source State variables are
controlled and set in the menus under the Source front panel key. These settings
include:
– RF Output Off
– Amplitude = – 10 dBm
– Amplitude Step = Auto
– Power Sweep = 0 dB
– Amplitude Offset = 0 dB
– Source Sweep Reverse = Off
– Multiplier Numerator = 1
– Multiplier Denominator = 1
– Freq Offset = 0 Hz
– Point trigger is set to "Ext1"
The Source State is saved along with the state of the current Mode when you save a
State, and is recalled when that Mode State is recalled. When the analyzer first starts up, a Source Preset is performed. In the Input/Output
menu, Restore Input/Output Defaults will also perform a Source Preset. A Mode Preset, from modes that support the External Source, turns off the RF but
does not perform a Source Preset. Similarly, Source Preset does not perform a
Mode Preset.
Source Preset does not change the Source Mode nor the selection of which physical
source is being used, nor does it release the current source (the source remains
under the control of the analyzer) nor exit the Source menu.
"Source Mode" on page 741
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
746
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Source
747
Key Path
Source
Mode
SA
Preset
Initiates a Source Preset
State Saved
No
Initial S/W Revision
A.06.01
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
SPAN X Scale
SPAN X Scale
Activates the Span function and displays a menu of span functions.
Key Path
Front-panel key
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Span
Changes the displayed frequency range symmetrically about the center frequency.
While adjusting the Span the Center Frequency is held constant, which means that
both Start Frequency and Stop Frequency will change.
Span also sets the frequency entry mode to Center/Span. In Center/Span mode, the
center frequency and span values are displayed below the graticule, and the default
active function in the Frequency menu is Center Freq.
While discussing the Span function we make the distinction between “swept spans”
and “zero span”. We use the term “swept spans” to mean spans other than zero;
recognizing that, because of this terminology, the user can be in what we call a
“swept span” even while performing an FFT “sweep”.
While in swept spans, setting the span to 0 Hz through SCPI or the front panel
numeric key pad puts the analyzer into zero span. However, using the Step keys and
the RPG in swept spans, the Span can only go as far down as 10 Hz and cannot be
set to zero.
While in zero span, setting the Span to a non-zero value through SCPI or Front
Panel puts the analyzer in swept spans.
If the Span is set to a value greater than the maximum allowable span of the
instrument, an error message is generated indicating the data is out of range and
was clipped to upper limit.
– See SpanPresets
Key Path
SPAN X Scale
Dependencies
If the electrical attenuator is enabled, any attempt to set Span such that the Stop Frequency
would be >3.6 GHz results in an error.
If Source Mode is set to Tracking, and the Span is therefore limited by the limits of the source, a
warning message is generated, “Data out of range;clipped to source max/min” if these limits are
exceeded. Note that for an external source, these limits can be affected by the settings of
Source Numerator, Source Denominator and Power Sweep.
In analyzers with an RF Preselector, such as MXE, you cannot sweep across the band break at 3.6
GHz while the RF Preselector is on in Continuous sweep, as there is a mechanical switch which
bypasses the RF Preselector above 3.6 GHz. See the Stop Frequency key description for details
of this limitation.
Couplings
Span affects RBW, sweeptime, FFT & Sweep choice (including FFT Width, Phase Noise
Optimization and ADC Dither auto couplings.)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
748
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
SPAN X Scale
When operating in “swept span”:
– Any value of the Center Frequency or Span that is within the frequency range of the analyzer
is allowed when the value is being set through the front panel numeric key pad or the SCPI
command. The other parameter is forced to a different value if needed, to keep the Start and
the Stop Frequencies within the analyzer’s frequency range
– When using the knob or the step up/down keys or the UP |DOWN keywords in SCPI, the
value that is being changed i.e. the Center Frequency or Span, is limited so that the other
parameter is not forced to a new value
– The Span cannot be set to Zero by setting Start Frequency = Stop Frequency. The value of
the last setting will be changed to maintain a minimum value of 10 Hz for the difference
between start and stop frequencies.
Preset
Depends on instrument maximum frequency, mode, measurement, and selected input.
See SpanPresets
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
10 Hz unless entered directly, then 0 Hz is allowed, but nothing between 0 and 10 is ever allowed.
In the Swept SA measurement, in Trace Zoom, Zero Span is not allowed, so the Span may not go
below 10 Hz.
In the Swept SA measurement, in Zone Span, Zero Span is not allowed in the top window, so the
Span may not go below 10 Hz in the top window.
Max
Depends on instrument maximum frequency, mode, measurement, and selected input. See
SpanPresets
If the knob or step keys are being used, depends on the value of the other three interdependent
parameters Center Frequency, Start Frequency, Stop Frequency
Note that, if the Source Mode is set to Tracking, the effective instrument maximum Span may be
limited by the source maximum frequency.
Default Unit
Hz
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Overlapped if Signal Track is on (OPC shouldn’t return or clear until the zooming has completed
for the new span)
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Span Presets
The following table provides the Span Presets for the Spectrum Analyzer mode, and
the Max Span, for the various frequency options: 749
Freq Option
Span after Mode Preset
Max Span
(can't set higher than this)
503
(all but N9000A)
3.59 GHz
3.7 GHz
503
(N9000A)
2.99 GHz
3.08 GHz
507
(all but N9000A)
6.99 GHz
7.1 GHz
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
SPAN X Scale
Freq Option
Span after Mode Preset
Max Span
(can't set higher than this)
507
(N9000A)
7.49 GHz
7.58 GHz
508
8.39 GHz
8.5 GHz
3.59 GHz
8.5 GHz
513
13.59 GHz
13.8 GHz
526
26.49 GHz
27.0 GHz
3.59 GHz
27.0 GHz
26.49 GHz
26.55 GHz
543
42.99 GHz
TBD
544
43.99 GHz
44.5 GHz
550
49.99 GHz
51 GHz
(all but N9038A)
508
(N9038A)
(all but N9000A and N9038A)
526
(N9038A)
526
(N9000A)
Input 2:
Model
Span after Mode Preset
Max Span
(can't set higher than this)
N9000A opt C75
1.499 GHz
1.58 GHz
N9038A
1 GHz
1.000025 GHz
Note that if you are in External Mixing, the maximum Span will be equal to the
Maximum Stop Frequency – Minimum Start Frequency for the currently selected
mixer.
Zone Span
Allows the span of the zone markers to be changed without changing the center
frequency. The zone markers are vertical lines marking the zone in the upper
window. They determine the frequency range displayed in the lower window. As the
zone markers are moved, the span of the lower window is changed but the lower
window will not be updated to reflect the change unless it is selected as the active
window.
The span limit of the lower window is the same as the span limit of the analyzer. The
span for the lower window is not limited to the selected span of the upper window.
However, if the frequency span of the lower window is at all outside of the span for
the upper window, an orange arrow pointing left or right will be displayed at the left
or right edge of the top window.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
750
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
SPAN X Scale
Key Path
SPAN X Scale, Zone
Notes
Min and Max values depend on the Hardware Options (5xx)
Dependencies
Only appears in the Zone Span View of the Swept SA measurement. If the SCPI command is sent
in other Views, gives an error
Couplings
Span of lower window changes so that it is always the same as Zone Span, and vice-versa
Preset
On entry to the Zone Span View, the Zone Span is 10% of the span of the upper window. So if you
do a Mode Preset and then immediately go into Zone Span, the Zone Span is 10% of the Span
Preset value listed in the table under the Span key description.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
0 Hz
Max
Zone Span cannot go so high as to force the zone region outside the top window.
Default Unit
Hz
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Non-overlapped
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Zoom Span
Allows the span of the zoom region to be changed without changing the zoom
center.
The center frequency for the lower window is limited by the start and stop
frequencies in the upper window. You cannot move the zoom region out of the
upper window. Consequently, if the zoom region hits either the left or right edge of
the upper window, the Zoom Span starts to shrink to keep the zoom region from
going outside the upper window.
The Zoom Span value is displayed in the lower right corner of the zoom window
(below the graticule) when the frequency entry mode is Center/Span (pressing
Center Freq or Span sets the frequency entry mode to Center/Span). When the
frequency entry mode is Start/Stop, Zoom Stop is displayed in this lower right
annotation position (pressing Start Freq or Stop Freq sets the frequency entry mode
to Start/Stop).
751
Key Path
SPAN X Scale, Zone
Notes
As the Zoom Span increases, if the edge of the zoom region hits either edge of the graticule, then
as the Zoom Span continues to increase, the Zoom Center will change to keep the zoom region
from leaving the upper window.
Dependencies
Only appears in the Trace Zoom View of the Swept SA measurement. If the SCPI command is
sent in other Views, gives an error.
Preset
On entry to Trace Zoom, Zoom Span is 10% of the span of the upper window. So if you do a Mode
Preset and then immediately go into Trace Zoom, Zoom Span is 10% of the Span Preset value
listed in the table under the Span key description.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
10 Hz
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
SPAN X Scale
Max
The Zoom Span is constrained by the top window (analyzer) span. It cannot get so large that
Zoom Start goes below the analyzer Start Freq, or so that Zoom Stop goes above the analyzer
Stop Freq. Thus, the limit is 2*(Zoom Center – Start Freq) or 2*(Stop Freq-Zoom Center),
whichever is smaller.
Default Unit
Hz
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
non-overlapped
Initial S/W Revision
A.07.01
Full Span
Changes the frequency span of the analyzer to the Preset frequency span of the
analyzer and sets the Frequency entry mode to Center/Span.
The span is dependent on the currently selected Input (see the Section
“Input/Output”). For example, when using external mixing, it changes the frequency
to the Preset frequency range specified for the selected external mixing band.
Pressing this key while in zero span puts the analyzer back in swept span.
Key Path
SPAN X Scale
Notes
n /a
Couplings
Turns off signal tracking (span zoom). It does NOT turn off the markers, nor the current active
function.
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
In the past, the Full Span function turned off all markers. In the X-Series this is not the case.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Zero Span
Changes the displayed frequency span to 0 Hz. The horizontal axis changes to time
rather than frequency. The amplitude displayed is the input signal level at the
current center frequency. This is a time-domain mode that changes several
measurement functions and couplings. The instrument behavior is similar to an
oscilloscope with a frequency selective detector installed in front of the
oscilloscope. See Application Note 150: Spectrum Analysis Basics for more
information on how to use zero span.
You can enter Zero Span in several ways:
– Press the Zero Span key in Span
– Set Span=0 Hz
– Press last Span if the last span was 0
You cannot go to Zero Span by setting start freq = stop freq, or rolling span down
with the RPG, that will limit you to 10 Hz
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
752
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
SPAN X Scale
You can go back to Swept Span by setting Span to a nonzero value or pressing Last
Span, assuming the last span was not also zero span.
Pressing Zero Span places the analyzer in Center/Span frequency entry mode.
The following table summarizes the differences between Zero Span and Swept
Spans:
Zero Span
Swept Spans
X axis is time
X axis is frequency
There is no auto-RBW selectionunless the EMC Standard
is CISPR or MIL
RBW coupled to Span when RBW in auto
There is no auto sweep time
Sweep time coupled to RBW when sweep
time in auto
Interval Power calculated in Mkr Function
Band Power calculated in Mkr Function
Can only define time limits when in zero span
Can only define frequency limits when in
swept SA
Marker Count counts at the center frequency
Marker Count counts at the marker
frequency
CF Step Size set to RBW value
CF Step autocouples to 10% of Span
Some “Marker ->” commands not available.
Other “Marker ->” commands not
available
Freq entry mode always Center/Span
Freq entry mode can be Center/Span or
Start/Stop
N dB points reports a time difference.
N dB points reports a frequency
difference.
Key Path
SPAN X Scale
Example
FREQ:SPAN 0 Hz Sets the span to zero, switches to Zero Span
Sending FREQ:SPAN 1 MHz while in Zero Span, switches to Swept span
Notes
Setting the Span to 0 Hz will change to Zero Span and setting the span to a non-zero value will
select a swept span
Notes
n /a
Dependencies
Zero Span key is unavailable (grayed out) if any of the following is true:
In the Swept SA measurement, in Trace Zoom
In the Swept SA measurement, in Zone Span, in the top window
Couplings
Pressing Zero Span key (switching to Zero Span):
– Turns off signal track function (span zoom).
– Turns off the auto-coupling of RBW and sweep time.
Initial S/W Revision
753
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
SPAN X Scale
Last Span
Changes the displayed frequency span to the previous span setting. If it is pressed
immediately after Signal Track is turned off, then the span setting returns to the
span that was in effect before Signal Track was turned on.
If this key is pressed while in a nonzero span, and the previous value of span was 0, it
will put the analyzer back in Zero Span. And if it is pressed while in zero span, it will
set the analyzer back to its last nonzero span.
Pressing Last Span places the analyzer in Center/Span frequency entry mode.
Key Path
SPAN X Scale
Notes
n /a
Dependencies
If the electrical attenuator is enabled, any attempt to set Span such that the Stop Frequency
would be >3.6 GHz results in an error.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Signal Track (Span Zoom)
When Marker 1 is placed on a signal and Signal Track is pressed, the marker remains
on the signal while the analyzer retunes the center frequency to the marker
frequency. The analyzer keeps the signal at the center of the display, as long as the
amplitude of the signal does not change by more than +/–3 dB from one sweep to
another. If Marker 1 is not in Normal or Delta, turning on Signal Track sets it to
Normal, perform a peak search, and center the marker on the display.
– See "More Information" on page 755.
Key Path
SPAN X Scale
Dependencies
Signal Track is associated with Marker 1. When marker 1 is turned off or set to Fixed, signal
track is turned off as well.
Signal Track is not available (grayed out) when Source Mode=Tracking. Signal Track is not available (grayed out) when Signal ID = on. Signal Track and Continuous Pk cannot be used with each other. If one is on, the other is grayed
out. .
Signal Track is grayed out if in Zero Span. But if Zero Span is entered while in Signal Track, Signal Track is turned off.
Signal Track can only function properly if the trace Marker 1 is on is updating. Therefore if Signal
Track is on and the trace Marker 1 is on is put into View, Signal Track is turned off and the Signal
Track key grayed out. Whenever the trace Marker 1 is on is not updating, the Signal Track key is
grayed out.
Signal Track is only available in SA measurement . It should be grayed out in other
Measurements in the Spectrum Analyzer mode.
Couplings
Signal Track can only function properly if the trace Marker 1 is on, is in Trace Update = Active.
Therefore if the trace Marker 1 is on is in Update Off when Signal Track is turned on, it is
changed to Update On. If the trace Marker 1 is on is set to Update Off while Signal Track is on, it
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
754
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
SPAN X Scale
turns off Signal Track.
Preset
OFF
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
1. Signal Track is now in the Span menu. It was located in the Frequency menu in ESA and PSA,
under its own hardkey in 859xA, under Marker Function (and called Marker Track) in
859xB/C/D/E. It was placed in Span in the X-Series because of the value that one of Signal
Track’s features, Auto Zoom, provides when changing span (see below).
2. In ESA and PSA the Span Zoom key (in the Span menu) turned on Signal Track in order to let
the user enter a new span with Auto Zoom on; by putting Signal Track into the Span menu we
achieve the same functionality more clearly. Hence Span Zoom is eliminated as a separate
function. There never was a remote command for Span Zoom so there are no SCPI issues with
this.
3. Signal Track now obeys the Excursion and Threshold criteria, allowing the user to control the
search better; but this may cause low level signals that could previously be tracked to need
the Excursion and Threshold adjusted.
4. Signal Track is now bound to only Marker 1, and cannot be enabled for any other marker.
ESA/PSA allowed a subopcode to specify the marker to use. In X-Series, no subopcode is
allowed and the marker is always assumed to be marker 1.
5. Signal Track now turns off when it finds an unstable signal. In the past it kept searching
which caused inpredictable results.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
More Information
If marker 1 is off when Signal Track is turned on, marker 1 is turned on in the center of
the screen and a peak search is performed. If marker 1 is already on, it stays on and
is used where it is. If it is Fixed, it is set to Normal.
If you move the marker during Signal Track, a Mkr-> CF is performed and the signal
track function starts over.
If the signal is lost, an attempt will be made to find it again and continue tracking. If
there are other signals on screen that are near the same amplitude, one of them
may be found instead since the algorithm is seeking a signal with amplitude similar
to the amplitude of the original signal.
Signals near 0 Hz cannot be tracked effectively as they cannot be distinguished from
the LO feed-through, which is excluded by intent from the search algorithm.
As a speed optimization, the center frequency is only changed if it differs from the
marker position by 1% or more of the span.
If the analyzer is in Single Sweep and Signal Track is turned on, then nothing
happens until a sweep is actually initiated (i.e. by an INIT:IMM or Single key press,
and a trigger). Once the sweep is initiated, the entire set of sweeps necessary to
complete a pass through the signal track algorithm ensues before the analyzer
returns *OPC true, returns results to a READ or MEASure, or returns to the idle state.
755
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
SPAN X Scale
If the span is changed while in Signal Track, either by you or because moving the
instrument to the signal’s frequency results in Span Limiting (as described under the
Frequency key), an “auto-zoom” algorithm is executed to get to the new span
without losing the signal. In “auto zoom”, the span is reduced in stages, with a
sweep between each stage. You will see this zooming occur as each sweep is
performed, and the new span is set.
When auto-zooming, the set of steps necessary to achieve the target span is to be
considered a “measurement,” thus the entire process executes even if the analyzer
is in single sweep. *OPC will not return true until the process is complete nor will
results be returned to a READ or MEASure command. Note further that if the
analyzer is in a measurement such as averaging when this happens, the act of
changing the span restarts averaging but the first average trace is the last trace of
the auto zoom.
When you increase the span, we go directly to the new span. No zooming is
required.
This function is intended to track signals with a frequency that is changing (drifting),
and an amplitude that is not changing. It keeps tracking if you are in continuoussweep mode. If in single-sweep mode, as described above, the analyzer only does
one center frequency adjustment as necessary.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
756
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Sweep/Control
Sweep/Control
Accesses a menu that enables you to configure the Sweep and Control functions of
the analyzer, such as Sweep Time and Gating.
Key Path
Front-panel key
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Sweep Time
Controls the time the analyzer takes to sweep the current frequency span when the
Sweep Type is Swept, and displays the equivalent Sweep Time when the Sweep
Type is FFT.
When Sweep Time is in Auto, the analyzer computes a sweep time which will give
accurate measurements based on other settings of the analyzer, such as RBW and
VBW. Significantly faster sweep times are available for the Swept SA measurement with
Option FS1. The Meas Uncal (measurement uncalibrated) warning is given in the Status Bar in
the lower right corner of the screen when the manual sweep time entered is faster
than the sweep time computed by the analyzer’s sweep time equations, that is, the
Auto Sweep Time. The analyzer’s computed sweep time will give accurate
measurements; if you sweep faster than this your measurements may be inaccurate. A Meas Uncal condition may be corrected by returning the Sweep Time to Auto; by
entering a longer Sweep Time; or by choosing a wider RBW and/or VBW
On occasion other factors such as the Tracking Generator’s maximum sweep rate,
the YTF sweep rate (in high band) or the LO’s capability (in low band) can cause a
Meas Uncal condition. The most reliable way to correct it is to return the Sweep
Time to Auto.
If the analyzer calculates that the Auto Sweep Time would be greater than 4000s
(which is beyond its range), the warning message “Settings Alert;Sweep Rate
Unavailable” is displayed. In this case increase the RBW or reduce the span.
If the anzlyzer’s estimated sweep time in an FFT sweep is greater than 4000s, the
warning message “Settings Alert;Span:RBW Ratio too big” is displayed. In this case
reduce the span or increase the RBW and/or FFT Width.
When Sweep Type is FFT, you cannot control the sweep time, it is simply reported by
the analyzer to give you an idea of how long the measurement is taking.
Note that although some overhead time is required by the analyzer to complete a
sweep cycle, the sweep time reported when Sweep Type is Swept does not include
the overhead time, just the time to sweep the LO over the current Span. When
Sweep Type is FFT, however, the reported Sweep Time takes into account both the
data acquisition time and the processing time, in order to report an equivalent
Sweep Time for a meaningful comparison to the Swept case. 757
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Sweep/Control
Because there is no “Auto Sweep Time” when in zero span, the Auto/Man line on
this key disappears when in Zero Span. The Auto/Man line also disappears when in
an FFT sweep. In this case the key is grayed out as shown below.
When using a Tracking Source (Source, Source Mode set to “Tracking”), the sweep
time shown includes an estimate of the source’s settling time. This estimate may
contain inaccuracies, particularly when software triggering is used for the source. This can result in the reported sweep time being shorter than the actual sweep time.
Key Path
Sweep/Control
Notes
The values shown in this table reflect the “swept spans” conditions which are the default settings
after a preset. See “Couplings” for values in the zero span domain.
Dependencies
The third line of the softkey (Auto/Man) disappears in Zero Span. The SCPI command
SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON if sent in Zero Span generates an error message.
Softkey grayed out and third line of the softkey (Auto/Man) disappears in FFT sweeps. Pressing
the key or sending the SCPI for sweep time while the instrument is in FFT sweep generates a –
221, “Settings Conflict;” error. F
Grayed out while in Gate View, to avoid confusing those who want to set GATE VIEW Sweep
Time.
Key is grayed out in Measurements that do not support swept mode.
Key is blanked in Modes that do not support swept mode.
Set to Auto when Auto Couple is pressed or sent remotely
Couplings
Sweep Time is coupled primarily to Span and RBW. Center Frequency, VBW, and the number of
sweep points also can have an effect. So changing these parameters may change the sweep time.
The Sweep Time used upon entry to Zero Span is the same as the Sweep Time that was in effect
before entering Zero Span. The Sweep Time can be changed while in Zero Span. Upon leaving
Zero Span, the Auto/Man state of Sweep Time that existed before entering Zero Span is restored.
If Sweep Time was in Auto before entering Zero Span, or if it is set to Auto while in zero span
(which can happen via remote command or if Auto Couple is pressed) it returns to Auto and
recouples when returning to non-zero spans.
If Sweep Time was in Man before entering Zero Span, it returns to Man when returning to nonzero spans, and any changes to Sweep Time that were made while in Zero Span are retained in
the non-zero span (except where constrained by minimum limits, which are different in and out of
zero span).
Preset
The preset Sweep Time value is hardware dependent since Sweep Time presets to “Auto”.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
in zero span: 1 µs
in swept spans: 1 ms
in Stepped Tracking (as with option ESC): same as auto sweep time
(in Swept Tracking, with Tracking Generator option T03 or T06, the minimum sweep time is 1 ms,
but the Meas Uncal indicator is turned on for sweep times faster than 50 ms)
Max
in zero span: 6000 s
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
758
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Sweep/Control
in swept spans: 4000 s
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Meas Uncal is Bit 0 in the STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated register
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Sweep Setup
Lets you set the sweep functions that control features such as sweep type and time.
Key Path
Sweep/Control
Dependencies
The whole Sweep Setup menu is grayed out in Zero Span, however, the settings in the menus
under Sweep Setup can be changed remotely with no error indication.
Grayed out in measurements that do not support swept mode.
Blanked in modes that do not support swept mode
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Sweep Time Rules
Allows the choice of three distinct sets of sweep time rules. These are the rules that
are used to set the sweep time when Sweep Time is in Auto mode. Note that these
rules only apply when in the Swept Sweep Type (either manually or automatically
chosen) and not when in FFT sweeps.
– See "More Information" on page 759.
Key Path
Sweep/Control, Sweep Setup
Dependencies
In Zero Span, this key is irrelevant and cannot be accessed (because the whole Sweep Setup
menu is grayed out in Zero Span), however its settings can be changed remotely with no error
indication.
Grayed out in FFT sweeps. Pressing the key while the instrument is in FFT sweep generates an
advisory message. The SCPI is acted upon if sent, but has no effect other than to change the
readout on the key, as long as the analyzer is in an FFT sweep.
Couplings
Set to Auto on Auto Couple
Preset
AUTO
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
More Information
The first set of rules is called SA – Normal. Sweep Time Rules is set to SA-Normal on
a Preset or Auto Couple. These rules give optimal sweep times at a loss of accuracy.
Note that this means that in the Preset or Auto Coupled state, instrument amplitude
accuracy specifications do not apply.
Setting Sweep Time Rules to SA-Accuracy will result in slower sweep times than
SA-Normal, usually about three times as long, but with better amplitude accuracy
759
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Sweep/Control
for CW signals. The instrument absolute amplitude accuracy specifications only
apply when Sweep Time is set to Auto, and Sweep Time Rules are set to SAAccuracy. Additional amplitude errors which occur when Sweep Time Rules are set
to SA-Normal are usually well under 0.1 dB, though this is not guaranteed. Because
of the faster sweep times and still low errors, SA-Normal is the preferred setting of
Sweep Time Rules.
The third set of sweep time rules is called Stimulus/Response and is automatically
selected when an integrated source is turned on, such as a Tracking Generator or a
synchronized external source. The sweep times for this set of rules are usually much
faster for swept-response measurements. Stimulus-response auto-coupled sweep
times are typically valid in stimulus-response measurements when the system’s
frequency span is less than 20 times the bandwidth of the device under test. You can
select these rules manually (even if not making Stimulus-Response measurements)
which will allow you to sweep faster before the “Meas Uncal” warning comes on, but
you are then not protected from the over-sweep condition and may end up with
uncalibrated results. However, it is commonplace in measuring non-CW signals
such as noise to be able to get excellent measurement accuracy at sweep rates
higher than those required for CW signal accuracy, so this is a valid measurement
technique.
Auto
Sets the analyzer to automatically choose the Sweep Time Rules for the
measurement.
Key Path
Sweep/Control, Sweep Setup, Sweep Time Rules
Couplings
Set on Preset or Auto Couple
Preset
ON
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
SA - Normal
Chooses Sweep Time Auto Rules for optimal speed and generally sufficient
accuracy.
Key Path
Sweep/Control, Sweep Setup, Sweep Time Rules
Example
:SWE:TIME:AUTO:RUL NORM
Dependencies
Not available (grayed out) when Source Mode=Tracking. Couplings
Automatically selected unless Source is on
If directly selected, sets AUTO to Off
Readback
SA - Normal
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
SA - Accuracy
Chooses Sweep Time Auto Rules for specified absolute amplitude accuracy.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
760
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Sweep/Control
For specified accuracy, do not allow sweep time to fall below 20 ms when in SA Accuracy
Key Path
Sweep/Control, Sweep Setup, Sweep Time Rules
Example
:SWE:TIME:AUTO:RUL ACC
Dependencies
Not available (grayed out) when Source Mode=Tracking. Couplings
If directly selected, sets AUTO to Off
Readback
SA - Accuracy
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Stimulus/Response
The Stimulus-Response setting for sweep time rules provides different sweep time
settings, for the case where the analyzer is sweeping in concert with a source. These modified rules take two forms:
1. Sweeping along with a swept source, which allows faster sweeps than the
normal case because the RBW and VBW filters do not directly interact with the
Span. We call this “Swept Tracking”
2. Sweeping along with a stepped source, which usually slows the sweep down
because it is necessary to wait for the stepped source and the analyzer to settle
at each point. We call this “Stepped Tracking”
The analyzer chooses one of these methods based on what kind of a source is
connected or installed; it picks Swept Tracking if there is no source in use.
As always, when the X-series analyzer is in Auto Sweep Time, the sweep time is
estimated and displayed in the Sweep/Control menu as well as in the annotation at
the bottom of the displayed measurement; of course, since this can be dependent on
variables outside the analyzer’s control, the actual sweep time may vary slightly
from this estimate. You can always choose a shorter sweep time to improve the measurement
throughput, (with some potential unspecified accuracy reduction), but the Meas
Uncal indicator will come on if the sweep time you set is less than the calculated
Auto Sweep time. You can also select a longer sweep time, which can be useful (for
example) for obtaining accurate insertion loss measurements on very narrowband
filters. The number of measurement points can also be reduced to speed the
measurement (at the expense of frequency resolution).
Key Path
Sweep/Control, Sweep Setup, Sweep Time Rules
Example
:SWE:TIME:AUTO:RUL SRES
Couplings
Automatically selected when the Source is on (Source Mode not set to OFF).
If directly selected sets AUTO to Off
761
Readback
SR
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Sweep/Control
Sweep Type
Chooses between the FFT and Sweep types of sweep.
Sweep Type refers to whether or not the instrument is in Swept or FFT analysis.
When in Auto, the selection of sweep type is governed by two different sets of rules,
depending on whether you want to optimize for dynamic range or for speed.
FFT “sweeps” should not be used when making EMI measurements; therefore, when
a CISPR detector (Quasi Peak, EMI Average, RMS Average) is selected for any active
trace (one for which Update is on), the FFT key in the Sweep Type menu is grayed
out, and the Auto Rules only choose Swept. If Sweep Type is manually selected to
be FFT, the CISPR detectors are all grayed out.
FFT sweeps will never be auto-selected when Screen Video, Log Video or Linear
Video are the selected Analog Output.
Key Path
Sweep/Control, Sweep Setup
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE FFT|SWEep
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE?
Dependencies
In Zero Span, this key is irrelevant and cannot be accessed (because the whole Sweep Setup
menu is grayed out in Zero Span), however its settings can be changed remotely with no error
indication.
When Gate is on, Gate Method selection affects Sweep Type:
Method FFT&Sweep menu
FFT - Swept grayed out and rules choose FFT
Video - FFT grayed out and rules choose Swept
LO - FFT grayed out and rules choose Swept
Preset
AUTO
Backwards
Compatibility SCPI
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE AUTO
sets sweep type Auto to On but the query will return either FFT or SWE depending on the auto
setting.
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE SWP
selects sweep type Swept but will return SWE on a query
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Auto
When in Auto, the selection of sweep type is governed by two different sets of rules,
depending on whether you want to optimize for dynamic range or for speed. These
rules are chosen under the Sweep Type Rules key.
Key Path
Sweep/Control, Sweep Setup, Sweep Type
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
762
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Sweep/Control
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO?
Example
:SWE:TYPE:AUTO ON
Couplings
Pressing Auto Couple always sets Sweep Type to Auto.
Swept is always chosen whenever any form of Signal ID is on, or the Source Mode is set to
Tracking, or any EMI detector is selected, or the RF Preselector is ON.
Preset
ON
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Swept
Manually selects swept analysis, so it cannot change automatically to FFT.
Key Path
Sweep/Control, Sweep Setup, Sweep Type
Example
SWE:TYPE SWE
Dependencies
Grayed out while in Gated FFT (meaning Gate is ON and Gate Method is FFT).
If this key is selected, the gate method Gated FFT is grayed out.
Couplings
This selection is chosen automatically if any of the CISPR detectors is chosen for any active
trace, in which case the FFT Sweep Type selection is also grayed out.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback
Swept
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.02.00
FFT
Manually selects FFT analysis, so it cannot change automatically to Swept.
Key Path
Sweep/Control, Sweep Setup, Sweep Type
Example
SWE:TYPE FFT
Dependencies
When a CISPR detector (Quasi Peak, EMI Average, RMS Average) is selected for any active
trace, the FFT key is grayed out.
When the RF Preselector is on, the FFT key is grayed out.
When Source Mode is set to Tracking, Manual FFT is grayed out. When Signal ID is on, Manual FFT is grayed out. Grayed out while in Gated LO (meaning Gate is ON and Gate Method is LO).
Grayed out while in Gated Video (meaning Gate is ON and Gate Method is Video).
763
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback
FFT
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Sweep/Control
Sweep Type Rules
Selects which set of rules will be used for automatically choosing the Sweep Type
when Sweep Type is in Auto.
Key Path
Sweep/Control, Sweep Setup
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes SPEed|DRANge
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes?
Dependencies
In Zero Span, this key is irrelevant and cannot be accessed (because the whole Sweep Setup
menu is grayed out in Zero Span), however its settings can be changed remotely with no error
indication.
Preset
DRANge
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
The legacy parameter DYNamicrange is unsupported
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Auto
This selection is automatically chosen when Auto Couple is pressed. When in Auto,
the Sweep Type Rules are set to Best Dynamic Range. It seems like a very simple
Auto function but the use of this construct allows a consistent statement about what
the Auto Couple key does.
Key Path
Sweep/Control, Sweep Setup, Sweep Type Rules
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes:AUTO[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes:AUTO[:STATe]?
Example
:SWE:TYPE:AUTO:RUL:AUTO ON
Couplings
Pressing Auto Couple always sets Sweep Type Rules to Auto.
Preset
ON
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Best Dynamic Range
This selection tells the analyzer to choose between swept and FFT analysis with the
primary goal of optimizing dynamic range. If the dynamic range is very close between
swept and FFT, then it chooses the faster one. This auto selection also depends on
RBW Type.
In determining the Swept or FFT setting, the auto rules use the following approach:
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
764
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Sweep/Control
– If the RBW Filter Type is Gaussian use the RBW for the Normal Filter BW and if
that RBW > 210 Hz, use swept; for RBW <= 210 Hz, use FFT
– If the RBW Filter Type is Flat Top, use the same algorithm but use 420 Hz instead
of 210 Hz for the transition point between Swept and FFT
– If any of the CISPR detectors is chosen for any active trace, always use Swept.
Key Path
Sweep/Control, Sweep Setup, Sweep Type Rules
Example
SWE:TYPE:AUTO:RUL DRAN sets the auto rules to dynamic range.
Couplings
Directly selecting this setting sets AUTO to OFF.
Readback
Dynamic Range
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Best Speed
This selection tells the analyzer to choose between FFT or swept analysis based on
the fastest analyzer speed.
Key Path
Sweep/Control, Sweep Setup, Sweep Type Rules
Example
SWE:TYPE:AUTO:RUL SPE sets the rules for the auto mode to speed
Couplings
Directly selecting this setting sets AUTO to OFF.
Readback
Speed.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
FFT Width
This menu displays and controls the width of the FFT’s performed while in FFT
mode. The “FFT width” is the range of frequencies being looked at by the FFT,
sometimes referred to as the “chunk width” — it is not the resolution bandwidth used
when performing the FFT.
It is important to understand that this function does not directly set the FFT width, it
sets the limit on the FFT Width. The actual FFT width used is determined by several
other factors including the Span you have set. Usually the instrument picks the
optimal FFT Width based on the current setup; but on occasion you may wish to limit
the FFT Width to be narrower than that which the instrument would have set. This function does not allow you to widen the FFT Width beyond that which the
instrument might have set; it only allows you to narrow it. You might do this to
improve the dynamic range of the measurement or eliminate nearby spurs from your
measurement.
Note that the FFT Width setting will have no effect unless in an FFT sweep.
– See "More Information" on page 766
765
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Sweep/Control
Key Path
Sweep/Control, Sweep Setup
Notes
The parameter is in units of frequency.
Dependencies
In some models, the analog prefilters are not provided. In these models the FFT Width function is
always in Auto. The FFT Width key is blanked in these models, and the SCPI commands are
accepted without error but have no effect.
In Zero Span, this key is irrelevant and cannot be accessed (because the whole Sweep Setup
menu is grayed out in Zero Span). However, its settings can be changed remotely with no error
indication.
Couplings
The FFT Width affects the ADC Dither function (see Meas Setup key) and the point at which the
instrument switches from Swept to FFT acquisition.
Preset
The Preset is Auto, but Preset will also pick Best Dynamic Range and hence this function will be
set to ~Maximum
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
4.01 kHz
Max
The maximum available FFT width is dependent on the IF Bandwidth option. The maxim mum
available width is:
Option B10, 10 MHz;
Option B25, 25 MHz, Option B40, 40 MHz.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W
Revision
A.04.00
More Information
An FFT measurement can only be performed over a limited span known as the “FFT
segment”. Several segments may need to be combined to measure the entire span.
For advanced FFT control in the X-Series, you have direct control over the segment
width using the FFT Width control. Generally, in automatic operation, the X-Series
sets the segment width to be as wide as possible, as this results in the fastest
measurements.
However, in order to increase dynamic range, most X-series models provide a set of
analog prefilters that precede the ADC. Unlike swept measurements, which pass
the signal through a bandpass before the ADC, FFT measurements present the full
signal bandwidth to the ADC, making them more susceptible to overload, and
requiring a lower signal level. The prefilters act to alleviate this phenomenon - they
allow the signal level at the ADC to be higher while still avoiding an ADC overload,
by eliminating signal power outside the bandwidth of interest, which in turn improves
dynamic range. Although narrowing the segment width can allow higher dynamic ranges some
cases, this comes at the expense of losing some of the speed advantages of the FFT,
because narrower segments require more acquisitions and proportionately more
processing overhead.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
766
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Sweep/Control
However, the advantages of narrow segments can be significant. For example, in
pulsed-RF measurements such as radar, it is often possible to make high dynamic
range measurements with signal levels approaching the compression threshold of
the analyzer in swept spans (well over 0 dBm), while resolving the spectral
components to levels below the maximum IF drive level (about –8 dBm at the input
mixer). But FFT processing experiences overloads at the maximum IF drive level even
if the RBW is small enough that no single spectral component exceeds the maximum
IF drive level. If you reduce the width of an FFT, an analog filter is placed before the
ADC that is about 1.3 times as wide as the FFT segment width. This spreads out the
pulsed RF in time and reduces the maximum signal level seen by the ADC. Therefore,
the input attenuation can be reduced and the dynamic range increased without
overloading the ADC.
Further improvement in dynamic range is possible by changing the FFT IF Gain (in the
Meas Setup menu of many measurements). If the segments are reduced in width,
FFT IF Gain can be set to High, improving dynamic range.
Depending on what IF Bandwidth option you have ordered, there can be up to three
different IF paths available in FFT sweeps, as seen in the diagram below:
The 10 MHz path is always used for Swept sweeps. It is always used for FFT sweeps
as well, unless the user specifies ~25 MHz in which case the 25 MHz path will be
used for FFT sweeps, or ~40 MHz, in which case the 40 MHz path will be used for FFT
sweeps. Note that, although each of these keys picks the specified path, the
analyzer may choose an FFT width less than the full IF width, in order to optimize
speed, trading off acquisition time versus processing time.
Gate
Accesses a menu that enables you to control the gating function. The Gate
functionality is used to view signals best viewed by qualifying them with other
events.
767
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Sweep/Control
Gate setup parameters are the same for all measurements – they do not change as
you change measurements. Settings like these are called “Meas Global” and are
unaffected by Meas Preset. Note that Sweep Time autocoupling rules and annotation are changed by Gate
being on.
Key Path
Sweep/Control
Scope
Meas Global
Readback
The state and method of Gate, as [Off, LO] or [On, Video]. Note that for measurements that only
support gated LO, the method is nonetheless read back, but always as LO.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Gate On/Off
Turns the gate function on and off.
When the Gate Function is on, the selected Gate Method is used along with the gate
settings and the signal at the gate source to control the sweep and video system
with the gate signal. Not all measurements allow every type of Gate Methods.
When Gate is on, the annunciation in the measurement bar reflects that it is on and
what method is used, as seen in the following "Gate: LO" annunciator graphic.
Key Path
Sweep/Control, Gate
Dependencies
The function is unavailable (grayed out) and Off when:
– Gate Method is LO or Video and FFT Sweep Type is manually selected.
– Gate Method is FFT and Swept Sweep Type is manually selected.
– Marker Count is ON.
The following are unavailable whenever Gate is on:
– FFT under Sweep Type when Method=LO or Video or Swept under Sweep Type when
Method=FFT
– Marker Count
While Gate is on, the Auto Rules for Sweep Type are modified so that the choice agrees with the
Gate Method: i.e., FFT for Method = FFT and Swept for Method = LO or Video.
The Gate softkey and all SCPI under the [:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe SCPI node are grayed out when
Source Mode is Tracking with an external source. This is because the Gate circuitry is used to
sync the external source. If the Tracking Source is turned on, the Gate is turned off.
When in the ACP measurement:
– When Meas Method is RBW or FAST, this function is unavailable and the key is grayed out.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
768
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Sweep/Control
– Whenever Gate is on, Meas Method, RBW or FAST is unavailable and keys for those are
grayed out.
– When Gate is on, Offset Res BW and Offset Video BW are ignored (if you set these values)
and the measurement works as if all Offset Res BW and all Offset Video BW are coupled with
the Res BW and the Video BW under the BW menu. When Gate is on, the Offset BW key in
the Offset/Limit menu is grayed out.
Preset
Off
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Range
On|Off
Backwards
Compatibility Notes
In ESA, Trig Delay (On) and Gate (On) could not be active at the same time. This dependency does
not exist in PSA or in X-Series.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Gate View On/Off
Turning on Gate View in the Swept SA measurement provides a single-window gate
view display..
Turning on Gate View in other measurements shows the split-screen Gate View. In
these measurements, when the Gate View is on, the regular view of the current
measurement traces and results are reduced vertically to about 70% of the regular
height. The Zero Span window, showing the positions of the Gate, is shown between
the Measurement Bar and the reduced measurement window. By reducing the
height of the measurement window, some of the annotation on the Data Display may
not fit and is not shown.
Key Path
Sweep/Control, Gate
Dependencies
In the Swept SA measurement:
In Gate View, the regular Sweep Time key is grayed out . When pressed, the grayed out key puts
up the informational message "Use Gate View Sweep Time in the Gate menu."
In the other measurements:
When you turn Gate View on, the lower window takes on the current state of the instrument.
Upon leaving Gate View, the instrument takes on the state of the lower window.
When you turn Gate View on, the upper window Sweep Time is set to the gate view sweep time.
Couplings
These couplings apply to the Swept SA measurement:
– When Gate View is turned on, the instrument is set to Zero Span.
– Gate View automatically turns off whenever a Span other than Zero is selected.
– Gate View automatically turns off if you press the Last Span key while in Gate View, and the
instrument returns to the Span it was in before entering Gate View (even if that is Zero Span).
– When Gate View is turned on, the sweep time used is the gate view sweep time. This is set
according to the rules in section "Gate View Setup " on page 772
– When Gate View is turned off, Sweep Time is set to the normal Swept SA measurement
769
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Sweep/Control
sweep time.
– If Gate View is on and Gate is off, then turning on Gate turns off Gate View.
Preset
OFF
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Range
On|Off
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
A sample of the Gate View screen in the Swept SA measurement is shown in the
following graphic :
A sample of the Gate View screen in other measurements is shown in the following
graphic . This example is for the ACP measurement:
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
770
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Sweep/Control
Turning Gate View off returns the analyzer to the Normal measurement view.
In the Swept SA, the normal measurement view is the single-window Swept SA
view. When returning to this view, the Swept SA measurement returns to the Span it
was in before entering Gate View (even if that is Zero Span).
The Gate View window is triggered from the Gate Source, with zero trigger delay.
Also, when updating the Gate View window, the Gate itself must not operate. So it is
internally shut off while the gate view window is being updated. For the Swept SA
measurement, this means that the Gate is internally shut off whenever the gate view
window is displayed. The measurement bar and softkeys continue to show the
Trigger source for the main sweep window and give no indication that the Gate is
shut off or that the Gate View window is triggered from the Gate Source.
When in Gate View, vertical lines are displayed in the Gate View window as follows:
– Green lines are displayed at the gate edges as follows: in Edge Gate, a line is
shown for Delay and one for the end of the Gate period (defined by Length, even
in FFT. In Level Gate a line is shown only for Delay. You can adjust the position of
the green lines by adjusting the gate length and the gate delay. These lines
update in the Gate View window as the active function changes, even if the
window is not being updated. In Gated LO and Gated Video, these lines are
positioned relative to the delay reference line (not relative to 0 time). In Gated
FFT, their location is relative to the left edge of the screen.
771
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Sweep/Control
– A blue line is displayed showing the delay reference, that is, the reference point
for the Gate Delay within the Zero Span window. The blue line represents where
(in time) the effective location of the gate start would be if the gate were
programmed to zero delay.
– The second blue line is labeled "MIN FAST" as shown in the figure above because
it represents the minimum Gate Delay for fast Gated LO operation. This line is
only displayed in Gated LO. You cannot scroll (knob) or decrement (down key) the
Gate Delay to less than that represented by the position of this line, it can only be
set below this position manually, although once there it can be moved freely with
the knob while below the line.
– A yellow line in the Gated Video case only, is displayed at Blength, where
Blength is the display point (bucket) length for the swept trace, which is given by
the sweep time for that trace divided by number of Points – 1. So it is referenced
to 0 time, not to the delay reference. This line is labeled NEXT PT (it is not shown
in the figure above because the figure above is for Gated LO). The yellow line
represents the edge of a display point (bucket). Normally in Gated Video, the
bucket length must be selected so that it exceeds the off time of the burst. There
is another way to use the analyzer in Gated Video measurements, and that is to
set the bucket width much shorter than the off time of the burst. Then use the
Max Hold trace function to fill in "missing" buckets more slowly. This allows you
to see some of the patterns of the Gated Video results earlier, though seeing a
completely filled-in spectrum later.
Gate View Setup
Accesses a menu that enables you to setup parameters relevant to the Gate View
Key Path
Sweep/Control, Gate
Scope
Meas Global
Initial S/W Revision
A.10.00
Gate View Sweep Time
Controls the sweep time in the Gate View window. To provide an optimal view of the
gate signal, the analyzer initializes Gate View Sweep Time based on the current
settings of Gate Delay and Gate Length.
Key Path
Sweep/Control, Gate, Gate View Setup
Dependencies
Gate View Sweep Tim